JP7314483B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition is a win . Among such gaming machines, there are some which are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means include at least a plurality of specific privilege games. a determining means for determining one of the privilege games, a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player as a state after at least the state of the game relating to the specific privilege game is completed, a second state setting means for setting a second state having a lower degree of advantage than the first state based on a determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined first number of determinations by the determination means after the first state is set, and a determination of the first number of times. The number of determinations by the determination means after the first state that can be continued until is set is greater than the second number of times less than the first number of times, and the number of times is equal to or less than the first number of times.As a predetermined effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination meansincluding at least a predetermined production modeactingAfter setting the first effect execution means capable of executing the exit and the first state that can be continued until the determination of the first number of times is set, the number of determinations of the determination means is the second number or less. Based on the determination by the determination means being performed,As the predetermined effectDoes not include the predetermined presentation modeactingsecond effect executing means capable of executing a win, wherein the number of determinations by the determination means after the first state that can be continued until the determination of the first number of times is set is different from the second number of times or less than the second number of times and the number of times greater than the second number of times and not more than the first number of times; The privilege game is executed based on the discrimination of 1 by the discrimination means in the range of the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means after the first state that can be continued until the discrimination of the first number of times is set is set, and the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means is the number of times greater than the second number and is equal to or less than the first number of times. the probabilities are the same.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is provided with discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of benefits including at least a specific privilege game. determining means for determining a game; first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player as a state after at least the state of the game relating to the specific privilege game is completed; second state setting means for setting a second state having a lower degree of advantage than the first state based on a determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined first number of determinations by the determination means after the first state is set; and continuing until the first determination is performed. The number of determinations by the determination means after the first state is set is greater than the second number of times less than the first number of times, and the number of times is equal to or less than the first number of times.As a predetermined effect for indicating the determination result of the determination meansincluding at least a predetermined production modeactingAfter setting the first effect execution means capable of executing the exit and the first state that can be continued until the determination of the first number of times is set, the number of determinations of the determination means is the second number or less. Based on the determination by the determination means being performed,As the predetermined effectDoes not include the predetermined presentation modeactingsecond effect executing means capable of executing a win, wherein the number of determinations by the determination means after the first state that can be continued until the determination of the first number of times is set is different from the second number of times or less than the second number of times and the number of times greater than the second number of times and not more than the first number of times; The privilege game is executed based on the discrimination of 1 by the discrimination means in the range of the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means after the first state that can be continued until the discrimination of the first number of times is set is set, and the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means is the number of times greater than the second number and is equal to or less than the first number of times. the probabilities are the same.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an operation diagram of the operation unit as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic top view of the closed state of the operation unit, and (b) is a schematic top view of the open state of the operation unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of time saving state rush displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when winning a small hit A during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when winning a small hit B during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content of the situation display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing hitting to the right among small winning A game screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a ball wins after (a) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen emphasizing hitting to the right among the screens during a small winning B game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a ball wins after (a) is displayed. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per type selection table in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time reduction grant table in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time reduction in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment; FIG. 3A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a state display selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final state display selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment; (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when winning a small winning A in the first embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when winning a small winning B in the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the short-time update process for small hits performed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a jackpot end time process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit relation update processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4(a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a small winning start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flow chart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3(a) is a flow chart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 3(b) is a flow chart showing instruction command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4A is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when entering the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode regarding the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time saving game content in the time saving state in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main controller in a second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main controller in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number 2 table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per type selection table in the second embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small per type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a hold display selection table set in a ROM within the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction frequency|count update process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows prefetching processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing game state setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing game content determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing various counter update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the time saving state displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example which shows the frequency|count of time saving in the time saving state displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of ROM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 3 table in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving grant 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an open scenario 3 table set in a ROM within a main controller in the third embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to a third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction remaining period discrimination|determination table set to ROM in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction remaining period discrimination|determination process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing definite fluctuation determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when time saving A is set as a time saving state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device when time saving B is set as a time saving state in the fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the number-of-time-savings correction|amendment production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main controller in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main controller in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern 4 table in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving B in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times correction processing for a display performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the first embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification of each embodiment. (a) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification of each embodiment. (b) is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects in a modification of effects. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of an upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric role product provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric role product provided in the game board in the fifth embodiment is in a closed state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by a third symbol display device when a jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device that can be displayed during a jackpot game in the fifth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time saving game content in the time saving state in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the simultaneous variation pattern table for time reduction in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in an audio ramp control device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing signal input processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a timing chart schematically showing an opening pattern of an electric accessory according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is the transition diagram which showed the transition destination of the game state in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within a main controller in a sixth embodiment; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 1 selection table set in the ROM in the main controller in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 selection table set in the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 6 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is a top view of the V winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the opening pattern of the small hit in 7th Embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the time saving state of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when a small win is won during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when a small win is won after the time saving state ends in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main controller in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a main controller in a seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the V win table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving provision table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a mode transition method in the seventh embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 7 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the time saving state of 8th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device at the end of the time saving state of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a small hit is won with the second special symbol reserved ball after the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode when the starting winning corresponding to the small win is detected within 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the last variation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode when the starting winning corresponding to the small win is detected after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the last fluctuation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the special 1 direct hit table in the eighth embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the special 2 direct hit table in the eighth embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the V win table in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction giving table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the normal figure per type selection table in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction frequency|count update process 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing 8 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 8 executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 8 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the switching pattern of the switching valve provided in the distribution apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 9 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 9 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the expectation that the variable probability state is set is high in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the expectation that the variable probability state is set is low in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of ROM in the main controller in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special 1 winning table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the special 2 winning table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the defined contents of the table for reaching the limit in the tenth embodiment. (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction provision table in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the tenth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device according to a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a back mode lottery table in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 10 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 10 performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 10 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the modified example of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the limit reaching table in the modified example of the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table in the modification of 10th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table in a modified example of the tenth embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 7th time of time saving among the time saving states of 11th Embodiment. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the eighth time of time saving among the time saving states of 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the 10th time of time saving among the time saving states of 11th Embodiment. (a) and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the special figure 2 pending number is acquired more than a specific number in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. In the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a small hit is won in a state where there is no special figure 2 reservation. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time reduction giving table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal variation pattern table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. (a) ~ (e) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of acquisition expectation change of the number of special-figure 2 holding balls in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 prize-winning process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pre-end period setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command process 11 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 11 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd production setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an 11th embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 81. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in front view, FIGS. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 is provided with a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) for shooting a ball to the front area of the game board 13, a shooting rail (not shown) for guiding the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening and closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or a ready-to-win performance is performed, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit or blinked by the lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs to notify that the big win is in progress or the reach just before the big win is in progress. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a certificate stamp or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) in front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation part 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. A ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through a card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball rental operation section 40, but in this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball rental operation section 40 so that the parts configuration may be shared. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

A lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 for storing balls that cannot be fully stored in the upper tray 17 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, the ball is shot with the strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is hit in front of the game board 13 with the distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

Specifically, a ball shot with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the right area of the variable display unit 80, a ball shot with a shooting intensity of 40% to 50% always passes through the left area of the variable display unit 80, and a ball shot with a shooting intensity of 50% to 60% mostly passes through the left area of the variable display unit 80 and partly passes through the right area of the variable display unit 80. In addition, most of the spheres fired with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% pass through the right side area of the variable display unit 80, and some pass through the left side area of the variable display unit 80.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extraction lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened, and the ball is naturally dropped and discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general prize winning port 63, a first ball entering port 64, a second ball entering port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the second ball receiving port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front surface of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 62.例文帳に追加The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that a game area is formed in front of the game board 13 where the game is played by the behavior of the balls. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (an area in which prize winning openings are arranged and shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball, and the ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the central part side while the momentum is attenuated.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b operates.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving or normal state by the lighting state, indicate by the lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating, and whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished) or a pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished) or a missing pattern. is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combinations of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. The types of jackpots determined here include a 15R short-time jackpot (15R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds and a short-time state is given after the jackpot, a 5R short-time jackpot (5R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and a short-time state is given after the jackpot ends, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R short-time jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and the short-time state is not given after the jackpot. No jackpot) is available.

In addition, in a part of the case where it is determined that the game is not a big win but a loss as the lottery result of the big win lottery, a small win is prepared which gives less privilege to the player than the above-mentioned big win (for example, a privilege to open the V winning device 650 only for one round). The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether the result of the lottery is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop pattern after the variation is finished, but also show a pattern corresponding to the big win classification when the lottery is a big win.

Here, the “15R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R time saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide any jackpot game out of ``15R short-time jackpot'' capable of giving the player the largest number of prizes, ``5R short-time jackpot'' capable of giving the next highest number of prizes, and ``5R normal jackpot'' giving the player the least number of prizes among the jackpot games, as the jackpot game provided when the jackpot of the special pattern is won. As a result, even when a big win is won in the lottery of special symbols, the player can play the game while expecting that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given.

In the present embodiment, the size of the privilege given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the end of the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a win is set so that the period during which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. In order to set a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-described setting contents may be used, and in addition to the above-described contents, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", when the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (total number of times of fluctuation) reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times) (first end condition), or when the number of times of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery reaches the second predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time) (second end condition) When either end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state. It is configured to migrate with In this way, by preparing a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state, and shifting from the time saving state to the normal state when one of the plurality of end conditions is met, it is possible to set a plurality of timings for ending the time saving state, and the player can play the game while being excited about how long the time saving state more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of small winning types (for example, small winning A to small winning C) are prepared as small winnings that can be won in the lottery of special symbols, and the number of times that the second end condition is satisfied is set differently for each small winning type. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time saving state will be ended only by the number of small wins won during the time saving state, so that the player can always have a sense of tension and play the time saving game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball), a big win (so-called two-type winning) is achieved (see FIG. 6). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times (number of times of small win) that the second end condition set for each small win type is satisfied is set to be smaller for the small win type in which the small win game with high expectation of V winning is executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation for winning a V prize for obtaining two types of prizes when a small prize is won during a time saving game and the feeling of anxiety that the time saving state may end, and the player can be motivated to play the game more ambitiously.

In this embodiment, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) for the number of times of variation of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) as described above, but other end conditions may be set for the number of times of variation of the special symbols. It may be configured such that the end condition of the time saving state is established when it becomes. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 (start winning); A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for display is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), so that, for example, three pattern rows of left, middle and right are displayed (see FIG. 10). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) by the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is displayed in accordance with the lottery result of the special pattern in the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the timing of the stop display of the first pattern in the display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in the display mode.

That is, the determination by the determination means is executed (the lottery for the special pattern is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and after the identification information (the third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until a predetermined dynamic display period elapses, the identification information (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the display mode (combination of symbols) showing the determination result of the determination means (the lottery result of the special symbol). As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, and a loss) as the lottery results of the special symbols, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery results of the special symbols are any of the above-described three types of lottery results (for example, the big win or the small win).

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a dynamic display (variable display) in which a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (protrudes) for a predetermined period of time when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment). Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbols is set to be shorter in the time-saving state than in the normal state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short time during the time-saving state, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, the time-saving state can be made into a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time saving state, the period for operating the electric accessory 640a (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the normal state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-described content, and for example, a configuration such as increasing the probability of winning the second symbol or increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit may be used. In addition, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed to make the time-saving state easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal period, the probability of winning may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one winning may be made constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric role object 640a are varied, the variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time when the variable display of the second symbol is started, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the second symbol winning game, that is, the timing at which the electric role object 640a is activated) ), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessary 640a may be determined according to the game state set in ). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating winning during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a can be operated in the corresponding operation pattern during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

In addition, the relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second design, and the operation pattern of the electricity 640A may be specified other than the above contents, for example, if it is determined that the time -saving status is set as a gaming at one of the timing of the fluctuation start timing of the second pattern and the operation start timing of the electricity 640A. , As an operation pattern of an electric object 640A, it may be configured to configure an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during a time -saving state).

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80 as shown in FIG. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed by a second pattern display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a pattern of 'O' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a pattern of 'X' is displayed as a stop pattern of the variable display.

In the present embodiment, the ball does not have a function of suspending passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, but if it has a function of suspending the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, for example, it is possible to provide a second symbol suspending display means for indicating the number of suspended balls that are suspended up to four times in total at a location (for example, a part of the third symbol display device 81) that is visible to the player.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment, or may be performed using part of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, when it has a function of suspending the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turn-on of the first ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first pattern display device 37a displays the result of the lottery.

As shown in FIG. 2, a nail is planted in the first ball entrance 64 on the game board 13 so that a ball can enter more easily in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 .

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first pattern display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting the balls that will trigger the special symbol lottery (the lottery moment for the big win) is provided in the ball entrance, so that the special symbol lottery opportunity and the prize ball can be obtained, but other configurations may be used. In the case, it may be configured so as to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least a part of the balls passing through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special pattern can be entered, and a ball entry hole is preferably provided for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls when the balls enter. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is variable between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a retracted state (restricted state) retracted to the game board 13 side, and normally (when the winning of the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passing of the ball through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, when the winning is won in the lottery of the second symbol, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissible state), and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is divided into the left side (left hitting area) and the right side (right hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 so that the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery for whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a are arranged in the right-handed area, and when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed.

A nail is planted in the lower part of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball shot in the left-handed game does not enter the second ball-entered hole 640, and the ball is not entered into the second ball-entered hole 640 during the left-handed game. By constructing in this manner, a game of entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64 to vary the first special symbol is performed in the left-handed game, and a game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is performed in order to vary the second special symbol in the right-handed game, and different game properties can be appropriately provided according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the right-handed area, a V winning device 650 whose upper surface slopes down toward the lower left direction (lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2) is arranged.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). The ball reaching the right end of the electric role object 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric role object 640a changes to the retreat state before reaching the right end of the electric role object 640a, it is configured to enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric role object 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing the cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 655 by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, in a state in which no game is played (a state in which the power supply of the game machine is turned off), incident light to the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized, and maintenance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily performed. In addition, in the case of using a configuration that changes the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means that emits light for decoration as described above, and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric accessory 640a operates. For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a will be performed (that is, when a prize is won in the normal symbol lottery), the light emitting means is controlled so that a character (e.g., "open") indicating that the electric accessory 640a operates is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655. The inside of 5 may be configured to be difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Now, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls shot in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. More specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward the lower right direction (the lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 3). After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 3) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning opening 63 provided below the electric accessory 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates in the game state is configured to be different, and when the electric accessory 640a operates in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the standby state before the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 3), and the time saving state is achieved. In the set state, the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position for a period of time sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 3 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in this embodiment, 0.8 seconds). By constructing in this way, even when a right-handed game is played in a normal state, a normal symbol win is won, and a ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric role object 640a, the operation of the electric role object 640a is completed before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric role object 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be reliably prevented from being executed in the normal state.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric accessory 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the area b. As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the right-handed game is played during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entrance (second ball-entrance 640 or the general prize-winning opening 63) depending on the operation timing of the electric role object 640a and the arrival timing of the ball to the electric role object 640a, so that the player can continuously play the right-handed game during the time-saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) with the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, but since it does not have means for holding and storing the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (means for holding and storing the right to execute the special figure 2 lottery), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol variation is being executed. Even if the ball is thrown, only the privilege of paying out the prize balls (five pieces) corresponding to the entering ball is given to the player.

As described above, the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning opening 63 is ten, and the number of winning balls corresponding to entering the second ball opening 640 is five. (2nd prize ball) can be given, and if the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) cannot be executed (during special pattern fluctuation), the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give a privilege (that is, 10 prize balls) that is more advantageous to the player.

As a result, the ball-entrance that the player desires to enter (the ball-entrance where many benefits can be obtained) can be varied according to the game situation (whether or not the special symbols are changed), so that the player can enjoy the right-handed game during the time-saving state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball is reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640. In addition, for example, the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state may be configured to be slightly longer (for example, 0.9 seconds) than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the action of stopping the hitting of the ball and starting hitting the ball again after confirming the operation of the electric accessory 640a (so-called stop hitting) can be suppressed, so that the operation of the game can be improved by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", an open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates to change the opening state to a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a to an open state in which a ball can win a prize.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, even in some of the "jackpots" of the special symbols (jackpot type is jackpot D), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the above-described "small win". As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, a ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state. , and flows out toward the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is set to 0.1 seconds×12 times (see FIG. 25), and the ball flowing down the opening/closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens wins the V winning device 650. Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down along the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A). By constructing in this way, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position of the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can flow down smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 second, but other periods may be set as long as the balls flowing down the opening/closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650 during the open period of the opening/closing door 650f1. Also, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period from opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 to the next opening in the small winning game (interval period between opening) is set to 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game, and 0.5 seconds at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the ball is not detected by the V switch 650e3 at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, a game guide display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed to emphasize the right-handed game to the player.

The interval period between opening is set longer than usual so that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650 even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which opening motions are executed a plurality of times, the interval period between opening of a part is set longer than the others, and when it is determined that the proper game is not played, the game guide display for prompting the proper game content can be displayed, so that the player who is playing the wrong game can play the game without anxiety.

In this embodiment, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. In other words, the details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, it is composed so that at least one ball can be entered in one open operation of 650 f1 of the V -winning device 650, by continuing the right -handed game during the small hit game, so perform normal gaming (continuous right -handed game). If so, during the 10th opening operation, the number (10 pieces) will be reached, which will be the terminated condition of the small hit gaming, and the small hit gaming will be terminated.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guide display using this timing, the execution of an unnecessarily long interval period between special openings for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is eliminated, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

As in the present embodiment, when the first inter-special opening interval period is set to the timing reached even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed (after the end of the fifth opening operation), the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special opening interval period (the timing at which the period required for the ball hit during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650). ), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has detected a ball, a notification effect is displayed during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b for screwing the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, and an LED placed on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d with a base member 650c; an opening/closing unit 650f that has an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b; A switching member 650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by 0e and a flow path cover 650g to switch the flow path of a game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear cover 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the rear of the rear cover 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a rear cover that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the rear. It is composed of a fixing cover body 650m for fixing to 650j with screws.

FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface inclined to the lower left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5(a).

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter (difficult to enter a ball) by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, so that the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and is rotatably supported from the rear side of the channel cover 650g. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably arranged in the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 650g.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. A game ball passing through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during a small winning game, so that a big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is for communicating either a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3 or a flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass through the V switch 650e3. The flow paths are switched as follows (see FIG. 6(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g, which will be described later with reference to FIG. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state that is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6A) so that the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the small winning game. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. By constructing in this way, even if the flow-down route of the ball is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 is opened in spite of not winning the small prize, the situation that the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 can be surely suppressed.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, at the end timing of the small winning game (the timing after the small winning ending period executed after the conditions for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number of prizes (10) or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is satisfied), if all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and the abnormality is notified to the outside. It is preferable to configure such that the game is stopped so as not to start the jackpot game or the normal game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, a game ball that has won a specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 prize balls for one winning ball) can be paid out to the player as a privilege. Further, it is possible to sort whether or not the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 by using the game ball after being detected, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, according to the small win type (small win A to small win C) set when winning a small win, a small win game with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k on is configured to be executed. By constructing in this manner, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game can be varied depending on the contents of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the spherical lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment is configured such that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows down the left upper surface 650y2 from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2), and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

When the small winning game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7(a) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 7(b) is entered. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 can win the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

Also, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 (see FIG. 2) for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. 1. After aligning in a line via the second restricting member 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first restriction member, it is possible to prevent a ball that has won a prize from the open/close door 650f1 from directly colliding with the detection opening 650a1. In addition, since it is possible to secure a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball clogging occurs in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1) operated in the privilege game (small winning game) that is provided when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (lottery result of special symbols) is a predetermined discrimination result (small winning game) than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between openings of the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1) Since it is configured so that the ball flows down on the variable member (opening and closing door 650f1) (0.6 seconds) is longer, the small winning game The ball flowing down on the variable member during the middle opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is closed) can be surely won by the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, since the number of opening operations (12) in one small winning game is set to be larger than the number of prize winnings (10) required for ending the small winning game so that only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, a sufficient number of winning prizes can be secured even if the opening period (0.1 second) of one time is set short. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port for communication with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover that are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is cut into the box base side and the box cover side when the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102 or when the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing payout of balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). . The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device.

Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The RAM 203 has a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and the like, and a work area (work area) for storing various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, a solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a toward the front side around the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like. Send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotating position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 by the command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22 when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are shown), and when the player operates the frame button 22, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), a voice output command is set for causing the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22, or a lamp output command is set for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226. Also, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in correspondence with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 can be matched.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 8). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 consists of 10 types of main patterns imitating numbers "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, a variable display of the same main symbols (for example, "777") is performed, and a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variability display area of the third symbol may be made smaller, or the variability display area may be moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (including differences to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish), but the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the varying special symbol.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10(b). As shown in FIG. 10B, a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). That is, in this embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot toward, only by visually recognizing the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that the game machine which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to perform voice guidance using the voice output device 226 and light-emitting guidance using the lamp display device 227 when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2, such as a voice indicating "Right shot", is output.

Further, as light emission guidance using the lamp display device 227, for example, when guiding "right-handed", light emission is controlled so that a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as light emission means are sequentially lit from left to right. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13 . In addition, since the player can be informed that the direction of shooting the ball (game direction) to the player has been switched not only by the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 but also by voice guidance and light emission guidance, the player can immediately notice that the game direction has been switched.

A small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1 is, for example, the case where a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to encourage pressing of the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Also, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm1 during execution of the display performance, the player can easily understand that the variable display of the third pattern is continued.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes a special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a in which a third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed, and a special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b in which the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, even when the display effect is executed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily grasp which special symbol the third symbol corresponding to is changing. In the pachinko machine 10, the special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a and the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b are respectively formed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one variation display area may be provided in the small display area Dm1, and only the special symbol that is being variably displayed out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Although the details will be described later, this small display area Dm3 is an area in which, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific game state (time saving state), a situation (state) display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11(a)) for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state will end by the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3.

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 10(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 4, and the second special pattern is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, so that a maximum of 4 reserved patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, it is also possible to visually inform the player of the number of held balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease of the number of held balls.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, an effect explanation mode for explaining the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are configured to be displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the contents to be displayed in the sub display area Ds. Therefore, the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to be different.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the loss and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second (after the pattern fixing period elapses). In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. In this way, after the lottery result corresponding to one special pattern is stopped and displayed, the stop display state is continued for a predetermined period, and then the next special pattern variation is started, so that the player can easily understand that the new special pattern variation is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the above-described design determination period is always provided after the lapse of the design fluctuation time, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 although the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and most of the cases where the third pattern continues to be stopped and displayed for the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are caused by the player quitting the game and the pachinko machine 10 not playing the game at all.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, when a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entrance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is formed as a holding display area for displaying a holding symbol, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64. In this first display area Ds1, a first reserved pattern Dsb, a second reserved pattern Dsc, a third reserved pattern Dsd and a fourth reserved pattern Dse are displayed in the order in which prize winning information acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is stored (in order of the oldest reserved and stored timing). Then, the suspended symbol corresponding to the currently executed variation is displayed at the center position of the sub-display area Ds as the active symbol Dsa.

With respect to the reserved symbols displayed in the first display area Ds1, when the variation display being executed is completed and the next variation is started, the suspended symbols corresponding to the next variation (the first reserved symbol Dsb displayed on the far right in the front view of FIG. 10(b)) are erased, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted rightward and displayed. Then, the erased first reserved pattern Dsb is displayed as the running pattern Dsa. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved pattern the variable display under execution corresponds to, so that, for example, in the case where the display mode of the reserved pattern is varied and a performance (so-called prefetch performance) is executed to increase the expectation that the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved pattern will be a big win, the player can easily recognize that the variable display corresponding to the reserved pattern whose display mode is changed by the preread performance is being executed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each reserved pattern (first reserved pattern Dsb to second reserved pattern Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special pattern variation is started (right direction in FIG. 10(b)), so that the running pattern Dsa is displayed. , the player can easily grasp which reserved symbol the variable display in execution corresponds to.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 can be held up to four times, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the entry at the 2nd entrance 640 can be configured to be able to hold the prescribed number to the upper limit, or the upper limit of the holding ball for the entry 64 and the upper limit of the number of holding balls for the 2nd entry 640, and the upper limit of the number of pending balls for the entry at the 1st Entrance Exit 64 is the second ball. It may be larger than the upper limit of the number of holding balls for entering 640, or decrease. Further, instead of displaying the reserved patterns in the sub display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) corresponding to the number of reserved balls. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, and an explanation of the effect is displayed for supplementing the content of the effect (display effect) executed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 11(b)). In this way, a plurality of pieces of information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, variable display information of the third pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, display effect information for indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols currently being executed will be a specific lottery result (big win), effect explanation information supplementing the content of the display effect information, reserved pattern information indicating the reserved memory number of special patterns, executing pattern information indicating the pattern being executed, etc. are prescribed in advance. By displaying in a section (area), it is possible to inform the player of various information displayed at the same time in an easy-to-understand manner.

11 to 17, description will be given of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol). Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the second special pattern, which tends to give a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern, is configured to be variably displayed with priority over the first special pattern, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern are not variably displayed at the same time.

However, in the present first embodiment, the second special symbol is set so as not to be able to secure the reserved ball, so in practice, the special symbol variation is executed so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is digested in order. When the timing at which the ball enters 40 (start winning) coincides, the variation of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the player from losing the opportunity to receive the lottery advantageous to the player (opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special pattern) due to the execution of the more disadvantageous lottery (lottery of the first special pattern).

As the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect suggesting whether or not various contents that can be established based on the special symbol lottery are established is executed. Specifically, a jackpot winning suggestion production that suggests whether or not a special pattern lottery wins a big win, and a part of the case where a special pattern lottery does not win a big win (e.g., a prize ball payout) is given to the player. When the game state transition suggesting performance and the time saving state are set as the game state, the time saving state end suggesting performance for suggesting the end of the time saving state according to the lottery result of the special pattern and the variable display of the special pattern are executed.

In addition, the effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbols (such as a jackpot win suggesting effect, a small win suggesting effect, etc.) is performed using a period (dynamic display period) from when the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the lottery result is notified by the combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed. The displayed ready-to-win display mode (for example, a display mode in which only two third patterns out of the three third patterns are stopped and displayed at '77' and the remaining third patterns remain varied) is displayed, and then, in a state in which the third patterns showing the ready-to-win display mode are displayed in the small display area Dm1, a performance with a story is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the story is correctly completed, a performance to stop and display the third pattern at '777' is executed.

In the above-described example, the ready-to-win display mode is a state in which a part of the combination of the third symbols is stopped and displayed in a manner consistent with the combination indicating that the lottery result is a hit (big hit). However, other display modes may be used as the ready-to-win display mode. may be displayed in a dedicated display mode. By structuring such that the player can grasp that the ready-to-win state is established by confirming the partial stop display mode of the third pattern, the player's expectation for winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous performance executed across a plurality of special symbol variations as a performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbols. In this continuous effect, when a winning information command indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command is sent to the player using the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (the period during which the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation is executed). It is a performance.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special pattern by using the fluctuation period of the special pattern executed before the target special pattern, a longer-term performance can be provided to the player and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, continuous performance can be executed without highlighting the special pattern lottery result (for example, loss) every time fluctuation, so that the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in addition to the performance for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of special symbols is a big hit, the performance suggesting that the game state is shifted according to the number of times of lottery of special symbols (the number of times of fluctuation) is also executed (time-reduction state end suggestion performance). This time-reduction state end suggesting performance is a performance continuously executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time-reduction state, and is a performance for suggesting the possibility of ending the time-reduction state according to the number of special pattern lottery times (the number of times the special pattern variation is executed) or the number of times the special pattern lottery result becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning a small prize).

Here, the production contents of the time saving state end suggestion production described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and according to the operating state (variable state) of the electric accessory 640a, a state (first state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 and a state (second state) in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 are set. Further, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a small winning game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed when winning a small winning. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge channel 650e2 as a specific area through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 can pass, and is configured to set a big win (2 types of wins) when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has passed (flowed down) through the special discharge channel 650e2. The time saving state set as the game state is a game state advantageous to the player in which the electric accessory 640a is easily operated (variable) to the second state (the state in which the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640).

As described above, the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when the end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to end the time saving state (the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state) when any one of the following conditions is met: when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, when special symbol variation based on the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when a small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) by the special symbol lottery.

Thus, by enabling a plurality of time saving end conditions to be set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state advantageous to the player continues. On the other hand, if the player is not informed of whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and time-saving information (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time-saving state) to be updated toward the establishment of the time-saving end condition, there is a problem that the time-saving state advantageous to the player is abruptly ended and the player is dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this embodiment, during the time saving state, the presence or absence of the time saving end condition, and the time saving information updated toward the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time saving state) are suggested (notified) to the player as a time saving state end suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the sudden termination of the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, since the above-mentioned time saving end conditions are set with a time saving end condition advantageous to the player (time saving end condition established by winning a jackpot) and other unfavorable time saving end conditions are set, in the time saving state end suggestion production executed during the time saving state, simply Whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and time saving information updated for the establishment of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time saving state) Rather than executing the production based on, It is configured to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition to be met or the time-saving end condition to be easily met is advantageous to the player, and to execute the performance based on the determination result as well.

By constructing in this manner, the player can not only predict whether or not the timing of ending the time saving state is approaching, but also can predict whether or not a time saving end condition advantageous to the player is satisfied, so that the player can be interested in the executed performance (time saving state end suggesting performance), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute a plurality of types of small winning games when a small winning is won in a special pattern lottery, and the degree of expectation for setting two types of winning during the small winning game is varied according to the small winning game to be executed (according to the set small winning type). Then, among the above-described time-saving end conditions, as the time-saving end condition established based on the fact that the small win is won a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery, the number of times (the number of wins for which the time-saving end condition is satisfied) is set for each small win type set when the small win is won.

By configuring this way, when the time -saving term ending conditions are established due to a small hit of a special pattern, the time -saving terms that have been established this time are advantageous time and terminating conditions for players (a time -saving end condition formed by setting a small hit type). It is possible to suggest (report) to the player by the suggestion of the time -saving state of the time -saving state of the time -saving state, which is established due to the difficult small hitting type is set. Therefore, even when the time-saving end condition is established by winning a small prize, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance executed in the time-saving state end-suggesting performance.

In addition, the number of times set for each small hit type described above (the number of times that the time saving end condition is satisfied set for each small hit type) is configured to be set to a different number of times according to the two types of expectations for each small hit type. Specifically, the small winning type with high expectation for 2 types (for example, small winning A) is configured to satisfy the time-saving end condition with fewer winning times than the small winning type with low expecting for 2 types (eg, small winning C).

By constructing in this way, for example, immediately after setting the time saving state, when the time saving state ends based on the winning of the small win of the special pattern in the time saving state end suggesting performance, or when the performance indicating that the time saving information is updated until just before the time saving state ends, the player can predict that the small win won this time is a small win with a high expectation for two types. In other words, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the performance content of the time-reduction state end suggesting performance and the period during which the time-reduction state continues, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In this embodiment, as the time-saving end conditions advantageous to the player, as described above, the time-saving end condition that is established when the big win is won and the small winning type that is easy to hit two types among the small winning games are set. For example, in a game machine having a function of setting a special state in which a special symbol lottery to be executed thereafter is advantageous to the player when the number of times of variation of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition that is advantageous to the player may be set as the time saving end condition that is established when the number of times of the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, either a special symbol high probability state where it is easy to win a special symbol jackpot or a special symbol low probability state where it is difficult to win a big hit is set, and by setting either a normal symbol high probability state where it is easy to win a normal symbol or a normal symbol low probability state where it is more difficult to win a win than that, a normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) and a variable state (special symbol) Four game states of a high probability state, normal pattern high probability state), a time saving state (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state), and a latent probability state (special pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state) are provided, and as the degree of advantage for the player in each game state, the latent certainty state is at least more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state.

Then, in the state in which the variable probability state is set, the latent probability state is set by shifting from the normal pattern high probability state to the normal pattern low probability state only when the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a game state more advantageous to the player by not winning the jackpot in the state where the variable probability state is set and setting the latent probability state by establishing a time-saving end condition by reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the jackpot in the state where the variable probability state is set and setting the game state other than the latent probability state after the completion of the big win.

In the above-described example, the conditions for setting the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player as the game state are set only when the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number in the state where the probability variable state is set is satisfied. A configuration may be added in which the probability state is set in a small part (for example, 1%) of winning the jackpot of the pattern.

Thus, in the state where the variable probability state is set, even when a special pattern is won in a jackpot or when the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number, the latent probability state which is advantageous to the player can be set, but in this case, the time saving end condition which facilitates the setting of the latent probability state becomes the time saving end condition which is more advantageous to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state termination suggesting effect in this embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a time saving state is set after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11( a ), when the time saving state is set, the characters “Pounding rush rush” indicating that the time saving state has been set are displayed in the main display area Dm. This "pounding rush" is an effect executed corresponding to the period in which the time saving state is set, and serves as a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current game state is the time saving state.

Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, characters "Right-handed" are displayed to guide the game to be executed during the time-saving state, and it is notified that the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. Also, during the heart-pounding rush, the third pattern is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, a character 801 imitating a boy (see FIG. 12(a)) searches for a treasure chest 802 (see FIG. 12(a)). Returning to FIG. 11, the description is continued. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a situation (state) display mode Dm3a for suggesting whether or not the time saving state will end is displayed. This situation (state) display mode Dm3a is configured to be changed to various display modes (see FIG. 15) according to the determination results as to whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed has won a jackpot, whether or not the time saving state is terminated based on the special symbol variation currently being performed, or whether or not the information on the conditions for ending the time shortening state is updated based on the special symbol variation currently being performed.

In FIG. 11(a), a display mode "display mode 1" (see FIG. 15) indicating that the currently executed special symbol variation has not won the big win or the small win is displayed. In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 11 (a) is a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, and the variation of the first special symbol that has already been reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot is being performed. Therefore, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 variation display area Dm1a of the small display areas Dm2, and the display mode "circle" of the suspended symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the running symbol Dsa. are

Here, a display screen when there is a reserved pattern for winning a big win in the first special patterns (reserved patterns) already reserved and stored at the time of winning the big win will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when there is a reserved symbol that has won a jackpot when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot. In FIG. 11(b), the winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes the winning information of winning the jackpot, and the display mode "display mode 3" (see FIG. 15) indicating that the player wins the special symbol (symbol win) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b in the small display area Dm3.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "Look forward to it" indicating the content of the situation display mode Dm3b are displayed. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 11 (b) is set to win the jackpot immediately after the time saving state is set (after the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed three times after the time saving state is set). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the pounding rush from being executed for only a short period of time.

In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (production start screen during the time saving state) of a mode different from the normal (see FIG. 11(a)) of "Pounding Rush?" is displayed. It should be noted that the display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) may be configured to be displayed even when, for example, the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Thus, when the display mode of ``Pounding rush rush!!'' shown in FIG. 11(a) is displayed after the end of the jackpot game, the player can be surely notified that the time saving state is set, and the player can play the game without anxiety. In addition, when the display mode of ``Rush into excitement?'' shown in FIG. 11(b) is displayed after the end of the jackpot game, the player can be notified that either the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game or that the jackpot will be won while the game is on hold, and the player can be given a sense of expectation.

In addition to the above-described configuration, determination means for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a big win in the reserved symbols existing after the end of the big win game is provided, and when it is determined by the determination means that there is winning information for winning a big win, the same display mode (for example, characters of "big chance") may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) set after the end of the big win game. Furthermore, the big win information discriminated by the above discriminating means may be analyzed, the game state to be set after the big win game corresponding to the analyzed big win information (read-ahead big win information) is discriminated, and the display mode after the big win game is set based on the discrimination result.

In this case, for example, when it is determined that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the prediction jackpot information, the characters "Pounding rush rush!" That is, it is preferable to configure to display a display mode that does not notify that the time saving state has been entered.

By constructing in this way, when winning prize information for winning a big win is included in the reserved patterns present after the end of the current big win game, the display mode to be displayed after the end of the current big win game can be set based on the game state set after the end of the big win game corresponding to the big win (next big win) included in the reserved patterns, not the game state set after the end of the current big win game. Therefore, for example, when a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the current jackpot game, a jackpot included in the reserved symbols is won during the time saving state, and a normal state more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state is set after the big win game is finished, a display mode not informing the player of the setting of the time saving state is displayed, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player is terminated in a short period of time and the player's willingness to play is suppressed.

Here, the display mode of the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining types of situation (state) display modes Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, 9 types of status display modes are configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the situation display mode is set and displayed in the small display area Dm3 according to the lottery results of the changing special symbols (big hit winning, small winning) and the contents updated by the special symbols changing with respect to the time saving end condition that the time saving state ends by being established (the number of times of winning the small winnings, the number of times of special design fluctuations).

Thus, by grasping the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, the player can predict how the time saving state progresses due to the special symbol variation during execution, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

Specifically, the status display modes displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described. "Display mode 1 (first display mode)" is a display mode in which a "white circle" is displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). This 'display mode 1' is a display mode set when no big hit is won and the conditions for ending the time saving state and the contents related to the conditions for ending the time saving state (for example, the number of times of special symbol variation and the number of winning times of small winnings) are not updated to a predetermined stage. When the 'display mode 1' is displayed, the player can confirm that the time-saving game (time-saving state) will not end due to the special pattern variation of this time, and the player can expect the next and subsequent special pattern variations with confidence.

Next, "display mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode displayed with a "black circle". This 'display mode 2' is a display mode which indicates that a small win has been won and is set when the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state are not updated to a predetermined stage. Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured to set a big win (two types of winning) triggered by a small winning game, and the expectation degree (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects the ball during the small winning game) for setting the two types of winning according to the contents of the small winning game to be executed (small winning type of the won small winning) is configured to be different.

This 'display mode 2' informs the player that he or she has won the small prize, but does not inform the player of the type of the small prize won, so the player plays the game while expecting that the type of the small prize won this time is the type of small prize (for example, small prize A) that makes it easy to set two kinds of prizes. In addition, since the game is played while feeling the possibility that the completion condition of the time saving state is updated (updated within the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage) by winning the small prize, the game can be played with a sense of tension.

In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of small winning types are set as a small winning type (small winning A) in which two types of winning are easily set, and a small winning type (small winning B, small winning C) in which two types are less likely to be set than the small winning A, and as a termination condition (time saving end condition) of the time saving state that can be established based on the small winning winning, it is configured so that the number of times of winning is set smaller for the small winning type in which two types are likely to be set. In other words, for each of a plurality of types of small wins, the time-saving end condition is set differently according to the degree of advantage to the player, and the time-saving end condition is more likely to be established as the lottery results are more advantageous to the player.

Therefore, for example, if the "display form 2" is displayed immediately after the time -saving status is set, it is predicted that it has been elected to any of the small hits, and the time saving period has passed (after the specified period has already been elected during the time -saving state), the "display format 2" is displayed after the time of time reduces. It can be predicted that the number of elections is set as a small hit, that is, a small hit type that is difficult to set two types, that is, a small hit type. In this way, the lottery result of the current special pattern can be predicted in detail based on the type of display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed period of the time saving state, so that the enjoyment of prediction can be provided to the player.

The "display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode in which a "sun mark using a white circle" is displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). This "display mode 3" is a display mode indicating that a special symbol jackpot (symbol win) has been won. As a result, when the big win (jackpot game) is set at a plurality of occasions as in the present embodiment, the player can be notified of the moment when the big win (jackpot game) is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

"Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of chance are displayed in white circles" (see FIG. 14A). This 'display mode 4' is a display mode set when a small win B or a small win C (that is, a small win with a low expectation for two types) is won as a small win type, and the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state are updated to a predetermined stage.

"Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of last chance are displayed in a white circle" (see FIG. 13(a)). This "display mode 5" is a display mode that is set when a small win is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. By displaying this "display mode 5", the player is notified that the time saving condition has ended.

By structuring in this way, the player can be notified at a stage before the execution of the small prize game (before the stop display of a special pattern indicating the winning of the small prize) that the time-saving state will end unless two prizes are obtained in the small prize game corresponding to the small prize won this time, so that the player can be made to play the small prize game more eagerly than usual.

"Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters in a large pinch in a white circle" are displayed (see FIG. 14(b)). This "display mode 6" is a display mode that is set when the conditions for winning the small win C with the lowest expectation for two types of small win types and ending the time saving state are established. The “display mode 6” is for suggesting to the player that the time saving state will end by winning the small win (small win C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that the current special pattern variation is the second time-saving variation in the time-saving state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is abruptly ended and the player is puzzled.

“Display mode 7 (seventh display mode)” is a display mode in which “characters of super hotness in a white circle” are displayed. This "display mode 7" is a display mode that is set when the conditions for winning the small win A with the highest expectation for two types of the small win types and ending the time saving state are satisfied.

In the first embodiment, as a time-saving end condition (winning number of times end condition) that can be established when a small win is won, "once" may be set for the small win A with the highest expectation for two types. Therefore, as an explanation of "display mode 7", it is explained that it is set when the condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied. You can use it.

"Display mode 8 (eighth display mode)" is a display mode in which "the end character is displayed in a white circle". This 'display mode 8' is a display mode set when a time-saving termination condition (fluctuation frequency termination condition) established when the number of variations of special symbols reaches a predetermined number without winning a big win or a small win. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably inform the player of the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the condition for ending the number of times of winning and the condition for ending the number of fluctuations are established by the same special pattern fluctuation (lottery) as the condition for ending the time saving state, it is configured to determine that the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the condition for ending the number of variations is established, when the small win A is won, the "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player that he/she has won a small prize after making the player think that the time saving state has ended, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

"Display mode 9 (ninth display mode)" is a display mode in which "characters of question mark in a white circle" are displayed. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols and the update information of the time saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery or the progress of the time saving state. Thus, by enabling the setting of a display mode in which the game state and the game situation cannot be notified to the player at all, it becomes unnecessary to provide the player with information (update information) on the current special symbol variation every time the special symbol variation is executed.

In the first embodiment, by displaying "display mode 9", it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand (make it difficult to comprehend) the content of the game during the time saving state, but in addition to this, it is also possible to provide a determination means for determining whether or not to display the display modes 1 to 9 in the small display area Dm3, and to determine the display content based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the heart-pounding rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time-saving state will be described. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the production content of a heart-pounding rush executed during a period in which the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, and is a schematic diagram showing an example of the production content displayed while the second special symbol that is winning the small win in which the small win A is set as the small win type is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b, and the "triangle mark" indicating the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed as the running symbol Dsa. In this state, after all the first special symbols (special symbols 1) reserved and stored in the time-saving state shown in FIG.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the time-saving end condition (winning number of times end condition) is established when the small win set with the small win A is won once, "display mode 5" is displayed as the situation (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small win is won and the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

Then, when the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a small win, the display contents shown in FIG. 12(b) are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 12(a) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1, the third symbol is stop-displayed with the combination "341" for indicating the lottery result (small hit) of the second special symbol.

This treasure box 802 is used to indicate the game result of the small winning game to be executed immediately after, and the effect of opening the treasure box 802 successfully or unsuccessfully is executed according to the result of the small winning game. The contents of the effect executed according to the result of the small winning game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when winning two kinds of wins during the small win game in which the small win A is set. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning two types of winning (V winning) in a small winning game set with a small winning A executed during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when a V prize is won during the small winning game (when the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), the effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and a V display 803 indicating that the big winning game is set is displayed. Then, characters of "jackpot" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to indicate that a jackpot (two types of wins) has been won.

On the other hand, when the second prize is not obtained during the small prize game in which the prize A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when two types of hits are not won (V prize is not won) in the small win game in which the small win A is set executed during the time saving state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied by winning once in the small win A set, so that when the V prize cannot be won in the small win game of the small win A, the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when V is not won in the small winning game of small winning A, a failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 explodes is displayed, and characters of "unfortunately, rush end" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to indicate that the time saving state is terminated. After this screen is displayed, the characters "left-handed" are displayed as game guidance corresponding to the normal state in the small display area Dm2, and a screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, an effect in the case where a small win B is set during the time saving state is won will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning for the first time a small win in which a small win B is set in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, ``winning three times in a small win with a small win B set'' is configured to be settable. Here, when the small winning B set in the time saving state is won for the first time, the display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the treasure box 804 is displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG.

The display mode of this treasure box 804 is different from that of the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12(b), and it is constructed so as to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning two types of small wins won this time. Concretely, it is configured so that the treasure box (treasure box 802) with a gorgeous display mode is more likely to be displayed when winning a small win (small win A) with a high expectation of winning two types. As a result, the player can predict the degree of expectation for winning 2 types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm.

In the small winning game (small winning game corresponding to the small winning B) that is executed after the display screen of FIG. 14(a) is displayed, if V wins, the same effect display screen as that of FIG. 13(a) is displayed (the only difference is that the display mode of the treasure box to be opened is changed to treasure box 804). A new display screen is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the boy 801 searches for the treasure box again.

Next, an effect in the case of winning a small win C set during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small win C is set is won five times during the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, as one of the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is configured to be able to set "winning 5 times for a small win with a small win C set". Here, when the small win C set in the time saving state is won five times, the display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the treasure box 805 is displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 14(b).

This treasure box 805 has a display mode different from that of the treasure boxes 802 and 804b described above, and is constructed so as to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning two kinds of small wins this time. Specifically, it is configured such that a poorly displayed treasure box (treasure box 805) is more likely to be displayed when winning a small win (small win C) with the lowest degree of expectation for winning two kinds of prizes. As a result, the player can predict the degree of expectation for winning 2 types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm.

That is, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed, there is a high possibility that the time-saving end condition is met by winning the small win (small win C) with the lowest expectation for two kinds of wins, so the player plays the game while praying for V winning in the small win game to be executed after this.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on the lottery (variation) of special symbols executed during the time saving end condition, and the presence or absence of the establishment of the set multiple time saving end conditions and the update status until the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state ends immediately and the player is puzzled.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a small winning game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right for two types is not acquired at the time when a predetermined period of time has passed since the small winning game in which the small winning A is set as the small winning type is executed, and FIG. Also, FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right for two types is not acquired at the time when a predetermined period of time has passed since the small winning game in which the small winning B or C is set as the small winning type is executed, and FIG.

In the first embodiment, a small winning game is executed by opening the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small winning game, and an instruction command is output when the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth or tenth opening timing (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command is received, an instruction command for display is set in the third pattern display device 81 to display an emphasized guide display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) for emphasizing and guiding that the V winning device 650 wins the ball.

Then, when the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in the state in which the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the right-handed game is played so that the ball wins the V winning device 650 without fail, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. In spite of such a configuration, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth opening timing of the open/close door 650f1, when the small winning game is started, the left-handed game is executed without noticing the display guiding the right-handed hit in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the game has been stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make the player more likely to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed hit displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, the timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) is the timing when the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the V winning device 650 during the small win game when the right-handed game is played after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasized guide display mode Dy1 cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small winning game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the degree of expectation for two types of wins is different depending on the type of the winning small win, and the contents of the performance display executed at the fifth or tenth opening timing are different between when a small win game (small win A) with a high expectation for winning two types is executed and when a small win game (small wins B, C) with a low expectation for two types is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller to operate.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37, the display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting on the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery, a first winning type counter C2 used to select the special symbol jackpot type, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the special symbol, a small winning type counter C5 used to select the special symbol small winning type, and a first winning random number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 51), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four holding areas (reservation first to fourth areas).In this area, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, and the special symbol fluctuation based on the stored various values is started. In the present embodiment, there is no configuration for holding and storing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and no configuration for holding and storing that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. However, even for those configurations, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area or a normal symbol holding ball storage area may be provided as a predetermined number (for example, four) of holding areas (reservation first to fourth areas).

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The value of the random number that becomes the big win for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big winning set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win.

The first random number table 202a is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be small wins, it is possible to make the player's degree of expectation for giving a privilege (big win or small win) different between the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern. The special symbol 1 random number table 202 a 1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202 a 2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

Here, referring to FIG. 20, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first per random number table 202a, FIG. 20(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, and FIG. 20(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. This first hit random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (decision values) determined as big wins and random numbers (decision values) determined as small wins are set in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as big hit determination values, and other values are defined as determination values other than big wins (that is, out). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, among the values of the random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as the big hit determination values, "5 to 989" are defined as the small hit determination values, and "990 to 999" are defined as the other (that is, out) determination values. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the value is any one of '0 to 4', it is discriminated as a big win, and when it is any one of '5 to 989', it is discriminated as a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state in which the lottery (variation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during variation of special symbols, a big winning game, and a small winning game), the ball is stored in a special symbol reserved ball execution area of a RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number discriminated as a special symbol jackpot or a small win, that is, if it is a random number discriminated as a special symbol omission, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol omission.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for the special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become a jackpot for special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first winning random number table 202a as described above. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 5 among the total number of random numbers for 1000, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2, the first winning type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is selected, a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 is used to determine the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2. As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 can be differentiated, or the ratio of selection of each of a plurality of kinds of jackpot types can be made different, so that the game using the first special pattern (special figure 1) and the game using the second special pattern (special figure 2) can be provided to the player with different game characteristics and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 21(b). FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first win type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot A" when the random number is any one of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" when the random value is any one of "10 to 49", and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" when the random value is any one of "50 to 99".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving number of times is once). Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Among 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first win type counter C2, 10 random numbers select ``jackpot A'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selection of ``jackpot A'' is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state (time-saving once). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Out of 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select the ``jackpot B'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selecting the ``jackpot B'' is 40%.

“Jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Out of 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first win type counter C2, 50 random numbers select the ``jackpot C'', so when the lottery of the first special pattern (special figure 1) results in a jackpot, the ratio of selecting the ``jackpot C'' is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% and the jackpot game of 5 rounds is selected at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In addition, a big win in which the game state after the end of the big win game shifts to a time-saving state at a rate of 50% is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG.21(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to special-figure 2 jackpot classification selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big win D" for the player is always selected as the big win type.

Next, with reference to FIG.21(d), the time reduction provision content for every jackpot classification is demonstrated.

In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to four. One type or five or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By constructing in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special pattern, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the player can expect a win with the second special pattern more. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type may be made the same, and only the range of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be made different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of reach, two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" (for example, range of 90 to 99) in which a symbol different from the symbol on which reach is applied as the final stop pattern stops, and "complete loss" in which reach does not occur (range of, for example, 0 to 89). The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into the normal state and the time saving state, and the range of the random value set for each stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state or whether it is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

For example, in a time-saving state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of ``complete failure'' is selected so that the ready-to-reach performance is not selected unnecessarily because the jackpot is likely to occur. In addition, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, a table for the low-probability time is selected, in which the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of ``complete failure'' is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and the ``complete failure'' is difficult to be selected, and the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of ``reach failure'' is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in a low-probability state, the ready-to-win display with a long performance time can be frequently performed, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be ensured, and the variable display by the third pattern display device 81 can be easily continued.

In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to the game state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for the normal state and the time saving state, but a dedicated table may be provided to correspond to other game states. A stop type selection table for status may be provided.

The small win type counter C5 determines the small win type and the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special symbol win is achieved, and is configured to be incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the state other than during special symbol fluctuation, big win game, and small win game). It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of the ball.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. A small winning type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of small winning to be executed when the result of the big winning lottery for the second special symbol is a small winning is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small hit type selection table 202f defines that three types of small hit A to small hit C are selected as the small hit type of the second special symbol by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0", the small hit type is "small hit A (jackpot A when passing V)", and when it is any of "1 to 10", the small hit type becomes "small hit B (jackpot B when passing V)", and when the value is any of "11 to 99", the small hit type becomes "small hit C (jackpot A when passing V)".

Here, in each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after the small winning game is completed is set. In the case of a small win A, a big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to a 15R open state to execute a big win, and thereafter, one time-saving game (a period from the execution of 100 variations of the special symbol or the one-time variation of the second special symbol to stop display) is set as the time-saving state. In addition, in the case of the small win B, a big win B (5R time-saving big win) 5R time-saving one-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. In the case of the small winning C, a big winning A (15R time saving big winning) is set as in the case of the small winning A, and after the execution of the small winning C, the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state to execute the big winning, but after the big winning game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win game. The small win C is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big win game.

In this embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 time (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set to 100 times in total (second end condition). By constructing in this way, when a jackpot is won in a state in which the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is one or more, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the time saving state is not ended even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is changed after the jackpot is finished. In addition, when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is executed, the above-described second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be terminated, so that any special pattern (second special pattern) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times during the time saving state.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving variation pattern table 202d2 used when the time saving state is set. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is changed according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state can be varied.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 provided in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 139" with a short deviation with a variation time of 7 seconds. A super reach a with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is ``jackpot'', the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in correspondence with the range of ``0 to 29'' with various types of normal reach with a variation time of 40 seconds, the range of ``30 - 189'' with correspondence with super ready-to-win with a variation time of 80 seconds, and the range of ``190 - 198'' with association with various types of special reach with a variation time of 140 seconds.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the long deviation of 180 seconds is defined in the entire range, and when the lottery result is "big win or small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the long deviation of 180 seconds is defined in the entire range.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special pattern, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and by transmitting a command indicating this variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation performance corresponding to the variation time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is not entered into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed is performed. A case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state constituted in this way is a case in which the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. When it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the result of the lottery is displayed may be used to inform the outside that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is fraudulently executed. Further, when the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern is fraudulently executed, the result of the lottery (fluctuation) of the fraudulently executed second special pattern may be forcibly created and displayed as the result of the lottery (fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 23B, the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (selection rate is about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%). In addition, when the lottery result is a jackpot, it is stipulated that selection is likely to occur in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of the variation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big win and the ratio of the variation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a loss are configured to suggest the degree of expectation for the big win when the specific variation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and different variation pattern tables may be used depending on whether the type of the jackpot indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates another jackpot (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is preferably configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected in a variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed is, the more advantageous the game result can be expected for the player, so that the player can be interested in the variation time of the special symbol.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a probability variable jackpot may be configured so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than a variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating a probability variable jackpot, thereby making it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for time reduction provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "missing", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, when a short loss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined in the entire range, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, a short hit with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds in the entire range. is stipulated. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "loss", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation of 20 seconds is defined in the entire range. In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the entire range. In the range, medium and small wins with a variable time of 30 seconds are defined, and when the lottery result is a "big win", a medium and big win with a variable time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in this embodiment, acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67, and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number to be the winning of the normal pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, the winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) is determined. In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second winning random number table 202c, two types may be provided, one for when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which normal symbols are in a normal state) and one for when the probability of winning in normal symbols is higher than that in the low probability (a period when the normal symbols are in a time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and whether the current game state is the time-saving state is discriminated, and if the game state is the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 3 seconds on the second pattern display device 83.例文帳に追加On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of ``5 to 204'', it is determined that the game is won, and after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is finished, the pattern of ``○'' is lighted and displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state is the time saving state at the time when the second pattern is stop-displayed (fixed display), and when the time when the second pattern is stop-displayed (fixed display) is the time-saving state and when the second pattern starts to fluctuate is also the time-saving state, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds×2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the electric accessory 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (the opening period of the second ball entrance 640, the number of times of opening) are configured to be variable according to the set game state, and when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to the normal state. When the lottery result of two symbols is a win and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as ``0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times'' as compared with the other cases, so that the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 .

In this embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol and the operation contents of the electric role product 640a are set differently according to the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric role product 640a which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. A discrimination means for discriminating that the time saving state is continuously set is provided until the operation start timing, and the variation time of the second pattern and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set using the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to set the time saving state at both the timing of the start of the normal symbol fluctuation and the start of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating winning at the timing when the time saving state is set, or when the second pattern that starts changing at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating winning at the timing when the time saving state is set. When straddling the game state, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the big win lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results on the second symbol display device 83, according to the values of the counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 19(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d, a time reduction granting table 202e, a small winning type selection table 202f, and an open scenario table 202g as part of the fixed value data.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number table 202, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202f have already been described in detail, so the description is omitted.

The time-saving provision table 202e is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and when the jackpot game ends (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG.21(d), the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e is demonstrated. FIG.21(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e. In this embodiment, there are jackpot types (jackets A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set), and as shown in FIG.

This embodiment has a first time-shortening end condition established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, a second time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win A is won in a special symbol lottery, a third time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win B is won in a special symbol lottery, and a fourth time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win C is won in a special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 21 (d), the value to be set to each counter corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions is defined in the time saving grant table 202e, the value set as the first time saving end condition is set to the counter 203k in the time saving end condition, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set to the small hit A counter 203m, the value set as the third time saving end condition is set to the small win B counter 203n, and set as the fourth time saving end condition. The value to be won is set in the small winning C counter 203p.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A and B, the time-saving end conditions are set to "100" for the time-saving medium counter 203k (first time-saving end condition), "1" for the small win A counter 203m, "3" for the small win B counter 203n, and "5" for the small win C counter 203p. ), "2" to the small winning A counter 203m, "10" to the small winning B counter 203n, and "50" to the small winning C counter 203p.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant table 202e does not define the values to be set for the various counters described above. In this way, by making the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game different for each type of jackpot won, even if the fact that the time saving state is set after the end of the big win game is notified in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific contents of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game in a state of heightening the desire to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving end state is configured to end even when a special symbol jackpot is won in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving grant table 202e, but the time saving end condition established based on this jackpot winning does not differ according to the set jackpot type, so it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202e. 2e may be defined as a value.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a plurality of time-saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time-saving end condition to fourth time-saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time-saving end conditions. For example, the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), and the V winning device is activated by winning a small prize. A time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times (the sum of the values of the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, and the small winning C counter 203p) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the lottery result. may be configured.

As described above, by setting a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and composing such that the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it is possible to suppress monotonous games because it is difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time-saving state will continue.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of a plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions may be configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, two) is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a satisfaction number determining means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition attainment determining means for determining whether the number of fulfillment determined by the satisfaction number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), and to terminate the time saving state (set a normal state) when the condition attainment determining means determines that the number of satisfactions has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition established first may be provided, and discrimination reference number variable means for varying a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition established first, so that the player can be motivated to play the game even after the time-saving state is set.

In addition to the contents described above, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times), and a result determining means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means are provided. An end condition invalidation means may be provided for invalidating the time saving end condition that is established when it is determined that the time is within the predetermined period. Further, while the result discriminating means discriminates that the present time is within a predetermined period, it is possible not to perform the processing of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is established and updating (decrementing) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time saving end condition.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, when using the process of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of a plurality of time saving end conditions as described above, the plurality of time saving end conditions are a priority time saving end condition (for example, a time saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches 100 times) and a non-prioritized time saving end condition (e.g., a time saving end condition that is established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times). , It is preferable to configure so as to end the time saving state when only a plurality of non-priority time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

The opening scenario table 202g is a data table for storing an opening scenario in which opening patterns (patterns for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 are scenarioized in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when a big winning or a small winning is won by lottery of special symbols, and corresponds to the big winning classification set for the winning big winning or the small winning winning classification set for the winning small winning. The contents of the release scenario are specified.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. In the open scenario table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 25, the periods in which the same scenario is set are collectively described, but in reality, a measurement counter is provided to measure the elapsed time from the time when each open scenario is set, and among the currently set open scenarios, the operations defined in correspondence with the measurement value of the measurement counter are executed, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. The opening scenario table 202g defines operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that allows a ball to enter in a privilege game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win or a small win, according to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type).

Thus, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the content of the opening operation (opening scenario) according to the winning result (big win or small win) and the winning type (big winning type, small winning type), the degree of advantage of the privilege game can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning the big win or the small win, the player can be entertained as to which type of win was won.

The opening scenario table 202g contains, corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small winning type), the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game until the first prize winning device is opened), the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of the winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the inter-round interval period (the period during which the winning device set between round games is closed), and the end interval period. (Period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (period until the start of a new special symbol variation is allowed)) and the ON/OFF switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are defined respectively.

Concretely, corresponding to the jackpot type won A, ``2 seconds'' as the start interval period, ``15 rounds'' for the ``variable prize winning device 65'' as the opening operation mode of the prize winning device, ``29 seconds continuously'' as the opening operation mode for one round game, ``1 second'' as the inter-round interval period, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period are defined. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game pays out many prize balls to the player. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, so the jackpot A is a jackpot to which a privilege most advantageous to the player is given.

Next, corresponding to the jackpots B and C of the winning types, ``2 seconds'' is defined as the start interval period, ``5 rounds'' for the ``variable prize winning device 65'' as the opening operation mode of the winning device, ``29 seconds continuously'' as the opening operation mode for one round game, ``1 second'' as the inter-round interval period, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot types are the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and about 1/3 of the prize balls of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A are put out to the player. When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, a time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished is set, and in the case of the jackpot C, since the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot given a benefit disadvantageous to the jackpot A but more advantageous than the jackpot C.例文帳に追加

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the start interval period is "1 second", the "V prize winning device 650" is opened in the "1st round" as the opening operation mode of the prize winning device, the "variable prize winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "continuously open for 29 seconds". The release operation mode is defined as an inter-round interval period of "10 seconds" after the end of the first round and "1 second" otherwise, and an end interval period of "4 seconds".

In other words, although the details will be described later, the contents stipulated in the period between the start interval period of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (round game content (opening/closing operation mode) of the first round, and the inter-round interval period after the end of the first round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated in the small winning game to be described later. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the winning game being executed this time is the big winning game or the small winning game until the timing when the first round ends (until the timing when the small winning game ends in the case of the small winning game). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set so that a small win is won (see FIG. 20(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether a big win or a small win is won, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which win (big win or minor win) he has won.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special pattern, the probability of winning a big win is set to be lower than that of winning a small win, and a time saving state is provided after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, a game with unexpectedness (a big win game corresponding to the big win D) can be made a game advantageous to the player, so that the player can be more excited.

In order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery results of the special symbols, the stop display timing of the special symbols and the stop display timing of the third symbols displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are made different between when the big win D is won and when the various small wins are won. Also, the stop display timing of the special pattern and the stop display timing of the third pattern are synchronized, but at the stop display timing or the period before and after that, in order to make the display of the third pattern more difficult for the player to distinguish than during other periods, the display mode and the display area are varied, or at the stop display timing of the special pattern, the pattern for production displayed in the main display region Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is switched from the third pattern to the normal pattern for production corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern. good to do

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing of the stop display of special symbols (timing to notify the player that one of the winning prizes has been won), or the first symbol display devices 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the third pattern. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of the current special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the player can expect to win the big win continuously even during the winning game.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description continues. In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the content of the winning types defined corresponding to the small winnings A to C also defines an opening scenario of the big winning game (2 to 15 round games) which is continuously executed after the small winning game is finished by detecting the ball with the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win A, the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device is opened for "1 round", and the opening interval period is "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 1), 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 2)". are

A ``variable prize winning device 65'' as a big prize game that can be executed after the end of the small prize game is opened in ``2nd to 15th rounds'', and one round game ``continuous opening for 29 seconds'' is defined as an interval period between rounds, ``10 seconds'' after the 1st round is finished, otherwise ``1 second'', a start interval ``2 seconds'', and an end interval period ``8 seconds''.

In addition, for small wins B and C, the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device is opened for "1 round", and the opening interval period is "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 1), 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th opening ends (opening interval 2)". are

A ``variable winning device 65'' is opened in ``2nd to 5th rounds'' as a big prize game that can be executed after the end of the small prize game, and one round game ``continuously open for 29 seconds'' is defined as an interval period between rounds, ``10 seconds'' after the 1st round is finished, otherwise ``1 second'', a start interval ``2 seconds'', and an end interval period ``8 seconds''.

That is, the big winning game that can be executed after finishing the small winning games corresponding to the small winnings B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. When the small win type is a small win B, a time-saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player after the corresponding big win game is completed is set, and in the case of the small win C, since the time-saving state is not set after the corresponding big win game is completed, the small win B becomes a small win in which a privilege more disadvantageous than the small win A and more advantageous than the small win C is given.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a big hit start flag 203c, a medium jack flag 203d, a small hit type storage area 203e, a small hit start flag 203f, a medium small hit flag 203g, a V passage big hit type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, a V passage flag 203j, and a counter during time reduction. 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the empty areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the first special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the special symbol lottery and the like are determined based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (the second reservation area to the fourth reservation area) to the reservation areas (the first reservation area to the third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of reserving the second special symbol, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) in a state where a new special symbol variation can be executed, each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5, CS1 is acquired at that timing, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol reserving ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of reserving the normal pattern (second pattern), when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 in a state in which a new normal pattern variation can be executed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained at that timing, and the obtained data is directly stored in the normal symbol reserving ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (see S208 in FIG. 38 and S705 in FIG. 43). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed, by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the variable display reserved ball number itself which is reserved by the main controller 110 can be acquired. As a result, even if the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of holding balls of variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the deviation can be corrected by the next received holding ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 receives the pending number of balls command for display for notifying the number of pending balls. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is time to start a jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big win and the variation of the special symbol stops, the big win start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF (S1603 in FIG. 52). Note that the jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power interruption when the power is interrupted.

The jackpot middle flag 203d is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot flag 203d is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before occurrence of power failure or the like when power failure or the like occurs.

The small winning type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small winning type set for the winning small winning, and when it is determined that the small winning has been won (S307 in FIG. 39: Yes), the acquired small winning type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, during the small winning game, the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number (S1707 in FIG. 53: Yes), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708 in FIG. 53; No), the stored small winning type is referred to (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referred small winning type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small winning start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203f is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small winning start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before occurrence of power failure or the like when power failure or the like occurs.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small winning middle flag 203g is a flag which is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before occurrence of power failure or the like when power failure or the like occurs.

The V passage big win type storage area 203h is a storage area for storing data for discriminating the big win type set when a winning ball of the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when a small winning game is executed. The V passage big win type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the judged small win type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that gives the small win as the judgment result stops (S402 in FIG. 40). When a ball flows down a special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203i corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing big win type storage area 203h is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203h is cleared. This V passage jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs.

In the V flag 203i, when a ball flows down a special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the flag corresponding to the big winning type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is ON (S1715 in FIG. 53), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is ON (S1715 in FIG. 53: Yes), the big winning type to be executed is determined from the flag set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big winning game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs.

The V passage flag 203j is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203i is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. In this embodiment, most of the balls that win the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and are set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 48) corresponding to the ball that first wins the special discharge channel 650e2 (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48: Yes), the processing of S1202 to S1208 in the V passage processing (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small win game, and to prevent V passage management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 from becoming complicated by transmitting the V passage command to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times.

The time-saving medium counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is satisfied. S1614).

Then, the value of the counter is referenced in the time saving number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) (S601 in FIG. 42), and when it is determined that the value of the counter is greater than 0 (S601 in FIG. 42: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604 in FIG. 42: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S605 in FIG. 42). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times a small win is won), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S505 in FIG. 41). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than a time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) referring to the value of the time saving counter 203k is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set (reset) to 0, so that the process of subtracting the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The small hit A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. It is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the small hit type won this time in the small hit time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) is a small hit A (S502 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is established (S507 in FIG. 41). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that the process of subtracting the value of the small win A counter 203m is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The small hit B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of times the small win is won, in which the small win B is set as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. It is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the small winning type won this time in the small winning time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small winning start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) is a small winning B (S510 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n after subtraction is 0 (S512 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is established (S507 in FIG. 41). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than a time saving end condition (third time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small win B counter 203n is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to 0 (reset), so that the process of subtracting the value of the small win B counter 203n is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of a plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The small hit C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit C is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. It is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, when it is determined that the small winning type won this time in the small winning time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small winning start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) is a small winning C (S510 in FIG. 41: No), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p after the subtraction is 0 (S514 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is established (S515 in FIG. 41). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even when a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (fourth time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small win C counter 203p is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the small win C counter 203p is set to 0 (reset), so that the process of subtracting the value of the small win C counter 203p is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The normal symbol short variation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short variation (3-second variation), and is set to ON to indicate that the short variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 45) is during the short working hours state (short working hours) (S909 in FIG. 45: Yes), is set to ON when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S911 in FIG. 45), and determines that the normal pattern (second pattern) fluctuation time has passed (S91 in FIG. 45) 3) When it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S915 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is referred to (S916 in FIG. 45).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short variation flag 203q is set to ON (S916 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in the time saving state (time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (Fig. 45 S919). In addition, the normal short pattern fluctuation flag 203q is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal pattern fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 45) (S917 in FIG. 45).

In this way, only when both the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when setting the variation time) and the game state at the time of setting the opening operation of the electric role object 640a after the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has passed are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric role object 640a. It is possible to surely prevent the long opening of the electric accessory 640a by the variation (lottery) of the pattern, and to suppress the excessive provision of a benefit advantageous to the player (long opening of the electric accessory 640a) to the player.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a forward about the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning apparatus 650, and a switching member 65 provided in the V winning apparatus 650. A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving 0h and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated), the shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio in the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable production (variable display) and advance notice production. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and change the performance contents at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the error type to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c, and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The counter for selecting the variation pattern is a counter configured by a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299) each time it is updated (every time various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 are executed). In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, the counter value for selecting the variation pattern may be configured to be updated by processing other than the various counter updating processing (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 described above. may be added to update the counter value. By configuring in this way, in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 55), depending on the period spent for executing some processing (processing of S2102 to S2112 in FIG. 55), the number of times the processing of updating the value of the counter for selecting the variation pattern is executed in 1 millisecond can be made indefinite (random). Therefore, based on the content of the display effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the sound ramp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the law of the control of the sound ramp control device 113.

The state display selection table 222b is a data table used when selecting the state display display mode (see situation (state) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. This state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a change display other than the change at which the time saving state ends (final change of the time saving state) from among the states in which the time saving state is set.

This state display selection table 222b has a jackpot expectation degree in the variation (expectation degree of winning a special symbol jackpot lottery, expectation degree of winning a small lottery in a special symbol lottery and setting two types of winning during the small winning (during a small winning game)), and the update condition of the time saving state (whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or the update state of various elements set as the time saving end condition (number of fluctuations of special symbols, number of small wins, etc.)) Different state display modes based on. is configured to select Therefore, by grasping the content of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the player can grasp the situation of the time saving state currently set.

Here, the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the state display selection table 222b defines various state display modes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result), the setting state of the time reduction lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether it is set to ON), the setting state of the semi-end condition flag 223m (determination result of whether it is set to ON), and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

Here, briefly describing various flags and counters referred to in the state display selection table 222b, the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are flags for indicating that the time saving state has passed for a predetermined period, and are set to ON when the time saving state has passed for a predetermined period. The state display mode can be changed according to the setting state of each flag, that is, according to the progress state of the time saving state.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the ending condition that can be satisfied by the execution of the variation of the special symbols is approaching, and to make the player play the game in the time-saving state with a sense of urgency. In addition, since various effects can be executed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a is made different. A state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from the eyes may be displayed, or a state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from other periods may be set only for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special symbol changes 10 times) after the time saving state is set.

The semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON based on the number of times a small win is won (the number of times a small win is won and operation control is executed for the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small win is approaching, and to make the player play the game in the time-saving state with a sense of urgency. Moreover, since various effects can be executed in the continuously set time-saving state, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The state effect counter 223o is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated from "0 to 99", and is configured so that the value is updated by 1 each time various counter updating processes (S2111 in FIG. 55) are executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(a), the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically described. FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the state display selection table 222b defines the state display mode (see FIG. 15 for the details of the specific display mode) of the effect executed corresponding to the success/failure determination result, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is a jackpot and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69''. Further, when the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined in the range of "0 to 49" with the state display mode "3", in the range of "50 to 69" with the state display mode "1", in the range of "70 to 79" with the state display mode "4", and in the range of "80 to 99" with the state display mode "9".

Furthermore, when the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined as "1" in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition are defined. When the flag 223m is off, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is specified in the range of ``0 to 69'' as the state display mode ``3'', in the range of ``70 to 79'' as the state display mode ``1'', and in the range of ``80 to 99'' as the state display mode ``9''.

In other words, when the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is a big hit, the state display mode selected according to the progress of the set time saving state (the setting state of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) can be varied. Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time-saving state, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the period in which both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are both set to OFF (the first half period of the time saving state) and the period in which either the time saving lower limit flag 223k or the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set to ON (the middle period of the time saving state). By having the technician grasp the information, it is possible to predict the progress of the time saving state.

Furthermore, when the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF, and the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state display mode "4" is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this state display mode "4" is a state display mode for suggesting to the player that a small win has been won, but in this embodiment, it is configured to be selected even when the win/loss determination result is a big win, that is, when the win/fail determination is not a small win (when the win/fail determination result is more advantageous to the player than winning a small win). As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and to quickly provide a performance that the player does not get tired of.

Next, when the success/failure determination result is a small win A (a small win game in which two types of small wins are most likely to be won among a plurality of small win types) is executed, and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the state display mode “5” is defined in the range of “0 to 79”, and the state display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is ON and the semi-end condition flag 223m is OFF, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Next, when the success/failure determination result is a small hit A, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69''. When both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is specified in the range of ``0 to 79'' in the state display mode ``7'', and in the range of ``80 to 99'' the state display mode ``9'' is specified.

Then, when the success/failure determination result is a small win B or C (a small win game in which two of the small win types are difficult to win is executed), and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 99". A state display mode of "9" is defined in the range. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is ON and the semi-end condition flag 223m is OFF, the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, when the success/failure determination result is a small hit B or C, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is defined in the range of "0 to 49" to state display mode "6", the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". , the state display mode "9" is defined. Further, when both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", the state display mode "4" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, a different state display mode is displayed according to the small win type set for the winning small win (according to the degree of expectation for two types during the small win game to be executed). Therefore, by grasping the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, the player can predict the timing when the time saving state ends, and also the result of the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbols currently being executed (lottery result of the special symbols). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state display mode displayed during the time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a small win A is won, the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is turned off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to be turned on, the contents of the state display selection table 222b are defined so that the state display mode '6' is selected when the value of the obtained state presentation counter 223o is '70 to 79'. This state display mode "6" is, as shown in FIG. 15, a state display mode in which characters of "big pinch" are displayed for suggesting that the time saving state ends based on the winning of the small prize. By displaying this state display mode '6' even when the small win A is exceptionally won, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player and increase the possibility of winning two types of wins in the small win game executed after the state display mode '6' is displayed. It is possible to continue to have expectations for per seed.

If the result of the case is out of the case and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi -terminal condition flag 223m are on, the status display form "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and the state display form "4" is specified in the range of "50 to 69". "3" is prescribed in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display form "9" is prescribed in the range of "80 to 99". Further, when the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, when the result of the right/wrong determination is out, and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69''. Further, when both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 79" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is out of line, that is, when the special pattern variation is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not established based on the winning of the small win or the big win, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, the state display mode is selected to make the player think that the condition of time-saving end has been established as if a small win is won. Thus, in a state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in a state where a predetermined number of small winning games are executed after the time-saving state is set, the player can play the game while having a sense of danger.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, the state display mode (state display mode "2, 4 to 7") that makes the player think that the player has won a small prize is more likely to be selected than when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to be OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that falsely suggests that a small win has been unnecessarily won when the result of the win/loss determination is a failure. Specifically, in a state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, it is easy to select a performance mode (state display mode) that makes it appear that the time-saving end condition is established when the small win is won, and in a state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF, it is configured to make it difficult to select a performance mode (state display mode) that makes it appear that the time-saving end condition is established when the small win is won.

Since it is constituted in this manner, the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed during the period when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON can be set in a series of flows, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity in the game executed during the time saving state and lowering the performance effect.

In addition, the state display mode "9" is selected according to the value of the state effect counter 223o without being based on the result of the success/failure determination or the setting status of various flags. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the progress of the current time saving state. Furthermore, in a part of the case where the result of the judgment is "no", the state display mode "3" is selected. As a result, when the display mode of the state display mode '3' is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed suggesting that the lottery result of the special pattern during the dynamic display is either a big hit or a loss.

Here, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost (other than the big win and the small win) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20(c)), and furthermore, the value of the state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", that is, in the range of 1/10 of the counter value updated in the range of "0 to 99", the state display mode "3" is displayed (when the second special symbol is drawn, 1/10 The state display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 00 when the lottery result is "missed").

Therefore, the state display mode "3" is displayed when most of the winnings are big wins, but there is a possibility that it is also displayed when winning a miss, so that the player can play the game with excitement until the end (until the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed). In this embodiment, the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of special symbols are configured so that a plurality of state display modes can be selected so that the player can predict.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the progress of the time saving state (the setting state of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state effect counter 223o, the state display mode is configured to be different for each success determination result. However, it may be configured to select the state display mode using other conditions. It is also possible to provide an operation determining means for determining whether or not the state display mode is changed and selected based on the determination result of the operation determining means. Furthermore, in this case, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determining means, it is preferable to make it easy to select a state display mode that clearly shows the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of special symbols. As a result, the player will actively operate the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b every time the effect setting process is executed (every time the variable display of the third symbol is set) in the state where the time saving state is set. By configuring in this way, the state display modes can be uniformly displayed during the time saving state, or when the state display modes set at random (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) are biased to one side, the state display modes set during the remaining time saving state can be intentionally biased to one side.

In addition, the number of times the time saving state is repeatedly set (the number of times the time saving state is set again after winning a jackpot (two kinds of wins are set) during the time saving state) and the state display mode selected according to the number of prize balls obtained during the period may be varied.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. This final state display selection table 222c is a data table referred to in order to select the state display mode displayed on 3rd display area Ds3 during a time saving state like the state display selection table 222b mentioned above. This final state display selection table 222c is different from the above-described state display selection table 222b, and is referred to when setting the variation display (effect display) for the variation of the special symbol that will end the time saving state (variation of the special symbol when the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes the number of times of variation meeting the time saving end condition, or variation of the special symbol when the number of times the special symbol wins becomes the winning number of times meeting the time saving end condition).

This final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined that the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is ON (S2905 in FIG. 63: Yes) in the later-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) (S2907 in FIG. 63). The details defined in the final state display selection table 222c will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 27(b). When the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is defined in the range of "0 to 69" with the state display mode "7", in the range of "70-89" with the state display mode "3", and in the range of "90-99" with the state display mode "8". When the winning/failure determination result is a small win A, the state display mode "7" is specified in the range of the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o from "0 to 69", the state display mode "5" is specified in the range from "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is specified in the range from "90 to 99".

In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a small win B or C, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", and the state display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". In the case where the result of the right/wrong determination is "out", the state display mode "8" is defined so that the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o ranges from "0 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state display mode displayed during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the state display mode displayed when the time saving state ends (when the final variation display of the special symbol that ends the time saving state is performed) are selected by referring to different data tables. Therefore, when the time saving state ends, it is possible to reliably prevent the state display mode from being displayed as if the time saving state will continue.

In addition, as described above, the state display mode "8" is displayed in some cases when a jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of winning the jackpot by the stop display of the third pattern after making the player think that the time-saving state has ended, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected presentation.

In addition, as described above, it is configured so that the status display mode "8" is always displayed when the winning lottery is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and feeling dissatisfied with the subsequent game results.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). As shown in FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a production counter 223e, a game state storage area 223f, a time saving information update area 223g, a temporary hit determination flag 223h, a temporary time saving information update area 223i, a temporary time saving end flag 223j, At least a time saving lower limit flag 223k, a semi-end condition flag 223m, a time saving pre-end fluctuation flag 223n, a state effect counter 223o, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. In the winning information storage area 223a, when the winning information related processing (see S2301 in FIG. 57) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in order from the first area. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1501 in FIG. 51) executed in the main processing of the device 110 (see FIG. 51).

Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (the winning information stored in the second area is shifted to the first area) (see S2806 in FIG. 62) each time the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed, the sound lamp control device 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (prefetch information of the special symbol) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, based on receiving the winning information command, when performing the effect (so-called look-ahead continuous effect) using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command, corresponding to the winning information command. Winning information can be held until the above-described look-ahead continuous effect ends.

In the present embodiment, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored. Therefore, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area. In addition to the execution area, the prize information storage area 223a may be provided with four areas for the first special symbol (reserved information area) and four areas for the second special symbol (reserved information area).

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of variable effect pending balls (waiting times) suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main control unit 110 performs variable display in special symbols and the number of pending balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the drawing of the image is controlled so that the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 is transmitted as the reserved ball number command, a calculation means for calculating and managing the current reserved ball number based on the information contained in the received reserved ball number command may be provided in the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S2802 in FIG. 62). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control of the variation presentation is started so that the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a display stop type is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown, it is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 99), and the values of each counter are configured to be updated without synchronism.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Further, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases the data when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in the present embodiment, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), so immediately after the power is restored, the information indicating the game state that was set before the power was turned off is stored in the game state storage area 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.).

The time saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the event targeted by the end condition (for example, the variation of the special symbol, the winning of the small win, and the big win) is executed). A state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end condition and progress of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. This time saving information update area 223g receives a time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main controller 110, that is, the end timing of the ending production in the jackpot control processing (S1504 in FIG. 52) of the main controller 110 (S1612 in FIG. 52). is set.

Then, in the time -saving update process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), it is determined that the update information for updating the time -saving information (fluctuation information to indicate that a special pattern fluctuation has been executed or a small hit information to indicate that it has been elected in a small hit) (Fig. 60 S2604: S2604: The current time saving situation is updated by corresponding to the YES, S2615: YES of Fig. 60, and the received update information.

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g, the time saving information update area 223g includes each item that can be the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the number of winnings for each small winning type (small winnings A to C) (the number of times the operation of the V winning device 600 is started), the small winning. It is formed so as to temporarily store information corresponding to the number of winnings (total number of winnings obtained by summing up the number of winnings of each small prize type), etc.), and for each item, time saving setting information (number of times the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied) and update information of each item during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times actually executed) are stored.

In the present embodiment, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is used to determine the termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other termination conditions from among a plurality of termination conditions, or to determine the number of remaining executions until each termination condition is satisfied. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information may be calculated, and the degree of time saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, percent).

In the present embodiment, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has already been executed (the number of fluctuations, the number of wins)). However, it is not limited to this, and the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be stored (stored) separately, but without being limited to this, for example, the information stored as the time saving setting information may be configured to be directly updated. By comprising in this way, the capacity|capacitance of 223 g of time saving information update areas can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the prize information (reserved and stored prize information) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed includes the prize information for winning the big prize, and is set to ON to indicate that the prize information for winning the big prize is included in the prize information for the reserved and stored prize. This tentative win determination flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 (S2305 in FIG. 57: Yes) in the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) executed when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command acquired in the prefetching process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (FIG. 57). 57 S2306).

Then, it is referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2303 in FIG. 57: Yes), various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped. It is also referred to in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) (S2903 in FIG. 63), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2903 in FIG. 63: Yes), the process for setting the state display command for display indicating the state display mode is skipped.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 59) (S2504 in FIG. 59: Yes), the temporary winning determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As described above, when the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the big win includes the winning information for winning the big win, it is configured not to determine whether the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes the winning information for winning the big win or whether the termination condition of the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, when it is determined that the time saving state is terminated by winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state is terminated based on the winning information obtained after that, so that unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when a new winning information command is received and when the jackpot game ends, the processing for determining the contents of the winning information is executed. As other timing, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, in the start-up process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 50), a winning information command at the time of return is issued to indicate each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. It may be configured to set and transmit all to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the above-described prize winning information command at the time of return, the process of determining the content of the above winning information may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new winning information command is received or when a big win game is finished, processing for determining the contents of the winning information is always executed. In this case, the predetermined prohibition conditions include, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition established when the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes and one of them is set, a addictive prohibition condition established when a special symbol lottery result other than a big hit (loss) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and a continuous performance executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the big win lottery result (whether determination result) included in the winning information. It is preferable to set a prohibition condition during continuous performance that is established during the continuous performance, and a frequent prohibition condition that is established during a predetermined period (for example, a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed twice) after the continuous performance is completed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set a period during which a performance (so-called look-ahead performance) corresponding to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period in which the performance cannot be executed, so that even when the look-ahead performance is not executed for the player, the player can maintain the expectation for the big win. It should be noted that the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be reduced when the prohibition condition described above is satisfied, and the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be increased instead of always determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition condition is not satisfied. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the prohibition condition described above is satisfied.

The provisional working hours information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing working hours information (temporary working hours information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In this embodiment, with reference to the provisional working hours information stored in this provisional working hours information update area 223i, the timing at which the working hours saving state ends is determined in advance.

This provisional working hours information update area 223i, similarly to the working hours information update area 223g described above, is a time saving related command including working hours setting information from the main controller 110, that is, the jackpot control processing of the main controller 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52) determines the end timing of the ending effect (S1612 in FIG. 52), and when the ending condition of the working hours state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52), the working hours setting information command set is received. In the case (S2602 of FIG. 60: Yes), an end condition (time saving information) for ending the current time saving state is set (S2603 of FIG. 60). Then, in the prize winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the sound lamp control device 113, update information corresponding to the received prize winning information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The provisional time saving end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the provisional time saving information stored in the provisional working time saving information update area 223i, and indicates that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the provisional time saving information when set to ON. This provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to ON when it is determined that the information (temporary working time saving information) in the updated provisional working time information update area 223i satisfies the time saving end condition (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, it is referred to in the winning information related process (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304 in FIG. 57: Yes), various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped.

As described above, when the winning information included in the received winning information command satisfies the time-saving end condition, it is configured not to judge whether the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes winning information for winning a big hit or whether the ending condition of the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, when it is determined that the time saving state is terminated by winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the currently set time saving state is terminated based on the winning information obtained after that, so that unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times of variation of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to a termination condition established based on the number of times of variation of special symbols, and is set to ON to indicate that the number of times of variation of special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times. This time saving lower limit flag 223k is, in the time saving update process (S2216 in FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, among the end conditions (time saving end conditions) for ending the time saving state, the number of special symbol fluctuations (total number of fluctuations obtained by summing the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). exceeds a predetermined number of times (70 times) (the number of remaining time saving times until the time saving state ends is less than 30 times) (S2608 in FIG. 60: Yes), it is set to ON. Then, it is referred to when selecting the state display mode using the state display selection table 222b in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60), the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes).

In this way, by providing a flag which is set to ON according to the state of progress until the time-saving end condition is established, and changing the presentation mode according to the setting state of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.

In addition, in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, although it comprises so that the progress condition until a time saving end condition is satisfied may be discriminate|determined in two steps, you may provide more steps. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) capable of identifying the state is provided every time the variation of the special pattern is executed 10 times in a state in which the time saving state is set, and the performance mode may be varied according to the flag (counter).

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of special patterns has reached a prescribed number of times with respect to an end condition established based on the fact that a small prize is won by lottery of special patterns, and is for showing that the number of fluctuations of special patterns in the time saving state has reached the prescribed number of times by being set to ON. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referred to in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703 in FIG. 61: No), and when it is determined that the quasi-end condition is satisfied (S2704 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). Then, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the change before the end of the time saving state is executed. Specifically, it is set to ON when the remaining period (number of fluctuations) until the establishment of the time saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the plurality of setting end conditions of the time saving state is one. By executing the change display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the state where the fluctuation flag 223n before the end of time saving is set to ON, it is possible to determine that the change is the final change in the time saving state, and the performance corresponding to the final change in the time saving state can be executed.

This time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611 in FIG. 60) when it is determined that the number of remaining time saving times is one in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2610 in FIG. 60: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time reduction update process (see FIG. 60), the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes). In addition, it is referred to in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2905 in FIG. 63: Yes), the process using the final state display selection table 222c for setting the state display command for display indicating the state display mode (processing for the final variation of the time saving state) is executed, and it is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S2905 in FIG. 63: No), the processing using the state display selection table 222b (processing for changes other than the final change in the time saving state) is configured to be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time saving is completed (executed), the change flag 223n before the end of the time saving is set, but in addition to that, for example, a configuration that can hold and store the winning prize information of the second special symbol is provided. Then, the winning information of the second special symbol for winning a small hit is determined in advance. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the variation before the special symbol variation in which the small prize winning satisfying the termination condition of the time saving state is performed is performed, a configuration may be added such that the variation flag 223n before the end of the time saving is turned on. Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time saving end condition is established.

The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and although not shown, is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. A detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above. The value of the state effect counter 223o is referred to when selecting the state display mode using the state display selection table 222b and final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, in the case of selecting a specific display mode according to a specific regularity (result of determination of success or failure, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on the randomly updated value (the value of the state effect counter 223o) is configured to be further classified in detail, thereby diversifying the display mode and allowing the player to easily grasp the current game state (updating state of the time saving state) by the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It can be suppressed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 56) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variation effect) and notice effect of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 8). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a 24 volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, and generates 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage to the control devices 110 to 114 etc. as required voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the stable 24 volts of direct current becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. A main control device 110 clears backup data when a RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and transmits a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 to the payout control device 111.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal game state (during the normal state), a left-handed game is performed and a special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is performed. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, it shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, after the jackpot ends, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state (normal game), the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 (it is difficult to do so). As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery (game) for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol in the time-saving state. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second special design winning information (the winning information obtained when the ball is entered at the 2nd entrance 640) is not holding and memory, so, for example, in a time -saving state (in a state where electricity 640a is easily operated in the protruding position), the second special pattern of the prize memories are retained and the holding memory is retained. There is no lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern in the normal state based on the winning information. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (protruding operation) of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, so that a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special pattern, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area) to start the big winning game. In this embodiment, when a big winning game is set (executed) via a small winning game, after the big winning game ends, a time saving state is set as the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, a small winning game with different possibilities (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting the ball) of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is executed according to the small winning classification (small winning A to C) set when winning the small winning by lottery of the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player (game state more advantageous than the normal state), the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times). A condition for ending the number of times of operation (second time-saving end condition) established when the number of times (the number of times of operation of the V winning device 650 operated based on the winning of a small prize) reaches a specified number of operations is set.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is established, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (elected per type), or the small win is won in the special symbol lottery, and the ball is passed through the specific area during the small win game according to the small win (small win game according to the small win type). set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, when either the first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second time saving end condition (end condition according to the small winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is established before winning one or two types, the game state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time saving state (possibility of fulfilling the second time saving end condition) and the possibility of obtaining two kinds of wins when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern executed when the time saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By constructing in this way, in a state where a normal state is set as a game state, that is, a state where a left-handed game is played, a big win is won when the number of retained balls (retained memory number) of the first special symbols is the upper limit number (4 pieces), and even if the player wins the jackpot, even if the player wins the big win in the ``first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time-reduction state'' that can be executed when the time-reduction state is set after the big win game is finished, the player is not allowed to win. can be suppressed from being provided to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the flow during the small winning game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 29(a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (f), when the small winning game is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the small winning game effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). In addition, the channel solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 for 17 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. be released.

In this way, in this embodiment, the ball can be won by the V winning device 650 during the small winning game only by normally executing the right-handed game, and the ball can be detected by the V switch 650e3. By constructing in this manner, the game can be played without inconvenience even if the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player is terminated when the lottery of the second special pattern is performed once. In addition, since the time-saving state is terminated when the lottery of the second special pattern is performed once, for example, the type of the small win won in the lottery of the second special pattern is identified, and when a small win disadvantageous to the player (for example, the small win of the small win type C) is won, the game aiming at the next lottery of the second special pattern can be prevented without winning the ball to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 , and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 via a bus line 240 . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different lottery probability of special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls put out for one special symbol jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including recovery from a power failure; hereinafter the same). Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, rather than being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but reading of the data of the first page requires a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take time to read the instructions constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (such as characters) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the relevant data is read from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when data is written, and generates defective data blocks in which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

Since the ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without considering the address position of the defective data block which is different in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether or not one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the designated address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while data is set in one bank, transfers one page of data including data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to the one bank, and sets the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading out from and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND-type flash memory 234a. This NOR-type ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

The MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and designate the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240 when the system reset is released. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and designates the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. While the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem unique to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order for the MPU 231 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. i. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, by storing in the NOR type ROM 234d a predetermined number of instructions from those to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released. A program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data (eg, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program. It is programmed to transfer to area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is canceled while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the designation of the internal bus address as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed to set the command pointer 231a to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the rest of the boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) to be executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) by the boot program is set as the second predetermined address.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM composed of the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) transmitted from the MPU 231, develops the image drawn in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the third pattern display device 81.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231 at intervals (20 milliseconds) between image drawing processing and display processing. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, the display control device 114 is configured such that the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. - 特許庁Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

The display control device 114 is configured such that, when drawing an image using image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading the data can be saved.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

For the transfer instructions of the image data that MPU231 and the transfer data of the drawing list are transferred to the image controller 237, the first address (the top address of storage), the final address (the final address of the storage), and the transfer destination (normal storage) Includes the first address of the local video RAM235 and the normal video RAM236) and the first address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM235 or regular video RAM236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time can be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a and then transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of the image data so that the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the display on the third pattern display device 81 are not in time for the required time.

Further, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character pattern area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored. Further, the power-on varying image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on varying image for displaying the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 by a variation effect when the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected.

When the power supply unit 251 starts to supply power, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG.

At this time, when a variation pattern command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. and are alternately displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. .

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at power-on. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped while the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the image controller 23 controls the MPU 231 so that the images shown in FIGS. 7. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation performance image when the power is turned on is already resident in the variation image area 235b when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 33A and 33B are diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 33(a) shows the back A corresponding to the "sand beach stage", and FIG. 33(b) shows the back B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 33, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. After the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81.

When the change of the back surface type is determined and the stage is changed to the ``sand beach stage'' or the ``deep sea stage'', the MPU 231 first sets the position between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the image for scrolling, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 with all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the ``sand beach stage'', which is the initial stage, is displayed, so that the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced by keeping all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the frequently displayed ``sand beach stage'' permanently in the back face image area 235c. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", as shown in FIG.

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but if this is done, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a' (or the range of FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b)), and the image data corresponding to the images between position a and position b including the initial position (or the images between FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b)) are stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if it is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a stage change is decided by lottery at the start of fluctuation, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

On the back side B, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by scrolling the range from position b' to position d using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. I can.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 31). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from the position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a smooth manner.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 31, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. Thus, when the third pattern display device 81 performs the variable performance, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234a, the third pattern display device 81 can quickly start the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the variable performance is started in the first pattern display device 37 after the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e, so that when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the image previously resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 reads the image data preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command, so that the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the corresponding error message can be immediately displayed after receiving the error command.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the type of the image data. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes a one-frame image drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby developing the one-frame image in that frame buffer. A process for displaying the one-frame image on the pattern display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and at the same time, read out the one-frame image previously drawn from the other frame buffer, and display the read-out one-frame image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 to be either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are alternately designated every 20 milliseconds by alternately switching either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, so that the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing object buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is an area for storing a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a transfer data table defining transfer data information and transfer timing of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is cancelled. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each performance mode of each performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to the variable performance, the round performance, the ending performance, and the demonstration performance are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop pattern indicating the failure is finally stop-displayed, and if the stop type of the variable performance is any one of the jackpots A to D, the stop patterns indicating the big win are finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the short period of time of the normal design by informing the short period of time of the normal design in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more opportunities the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. As a result, there are more chances for the electric accessory to be released as a jackpot of normal symbols, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbols can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the period of time of the displayed normal patterns is, the stronger the player's expectation of winning the special pattern is, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Also, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are put out as prize balls when the balls enter, the number of prize balls increases when the normal pattern becomes a jackpot and the electric accessories are released and the balls easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is put into a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or in which the number of balls in hand is not decreased even after the game is played, so that the player can get an expectation that a special pattern jackpot can be obtained in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand is not decreased. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending presentation, by notifying that any one of the reserved lottery results of the special pattern will be a special pattern jackpot, the player can recognize that the special pattern jackpot will be won in the reserved special pattern lottery, so that the player can have a sense of expectation of the special pattern jackpot. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

As described above, the demonstration performance is a performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance was stopped, and only the rear image changes while the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with no numbers '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time, in correspondence with the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and also defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement rate is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and when the enlargement rate is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a smaller size than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, drawing information for each sprite, such as one back image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . . . ), an effect expressing the insertion of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. Information specifying whether to display either one of the back faces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the ``sand beach stage'' and the ``deep sea stage'') or to display a back image different from the back faces A and B is described in the back face type. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player out of the back faces A and B as a drawing object and specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame according to the lapse of time when it is specified by the back face type that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image displayed when the image drawing (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the start of drawing of the image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on the display data table, depending on the back type and position information. (Information indicating whether the display of the pattern display device 81 is information indicating the elapsed time since the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. The reason why the offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third pattern is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before and the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed this time, and the offset information from the stopped pattern of the variable performance performed one before is described in the pattern offset information until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is described. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

Since each third pattern is attached with a specific number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number attached to the third pattern, and the offset information is represented by the difference in the number attached to each third pattern, so that the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the pattern offset information, a predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time is set so as to be the time during which the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed. While the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time during that time, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not allowed to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the image content to be drawn next is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) to be described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110.

Here, when a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, a large load is imposed on the activation and execution of the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous with the diversification of the effect images. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

The reason why the display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table is that the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, since the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, the display contents cannot be predicted, and therefore the display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above cannot be provided. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each performance mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 among the image data of the sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table describes transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer object image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the prescribed sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the prescribed sprite is started according to the display data table, and the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the transfer object image data corresponding to the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, null data is defined corresponding to that address, which means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described at the end address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 35). For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a variation pattern command for display) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, and if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring, and the generated drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table defines the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred to the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and which is necessary for light drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 in the display control device 114. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It can be transferred from ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 .

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is defined in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Therefore, the transfer start timing can be instructed so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the D-type flash memory 234a, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, the third pattern display device 81 is set to OFF in order to display an image other than the power-on image (see S4305 in FIG. 66(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66(b)). (b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110.

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79A). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 79B) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, selects the display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared.

Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and if the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f (i.e., if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) containing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting processing (see S4303 in FIG. 66B) of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer update processing (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, and acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start transferring at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and stores the transfer data information in the created drawing list. Add.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can be surely stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 36, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a background image used in one frame image, a third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), an effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and a character (character 1, character 2, . It is what I did. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the address thereof, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The image controller 237 performs scaling processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, translucency processing according to the translucency value, and synthesis with other sprites according to the α blending information on a standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from various video RAMs. After applying processing, color tone correction processing according to color information, filtering processing according to filter designation information by a method designated by the information, and performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, an image obtained by drawing is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU231 shows the drawing data tables stored in the displayed data table buffer 233D, and the contents of the drawing specified by the pointer 233F, the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold image that displays the holding ball number, and a warning image that notify the occurrence of an error). Based on, a detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame is generated, and a drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), and the character (character 1, character 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the storage source start address and storage source end address in the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads the image data from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66B) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the performance displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is completed, and executes various processes to be performed in accordance with the completion of the performance.

The storage image data determination flag 233j is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are inevitably unstored by storing the image data of one sprite, so the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

When transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a flag for specifying, from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c), a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237. When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with the driving signal, thereby executing the display processing for displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing of V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and image drawing processing and display processing are executed. Then, 20 milliseconds after the one frame of image rendering processing is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. 6b is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are specified by alternately replacing either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being drawn.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 53. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing that is started when power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the start-up processing, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is executed (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, 99, respectively, in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the ball passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. The shooting control process is a process of determining whether to shoot the ball on or off on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). The period during the special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during the jackpot game (round game period), and the grace period from the end of the round game period to the start of the next lottery (fluctuation) of the new special symbol. (ending period) and are included.

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203d of the middle of the jackpot is set to ON) (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203d is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is fluctuating (S202). It is determined whether or not the ball has been hit (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is neither a big hit nor during special symbol fluctuation, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, that is, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) start condition is satisfied, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 are set. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S204).

Next, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S210), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), since the reserved balls of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) are not secured at the present time, this process for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted (S207), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by calculation ) is set (S208). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed (S211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (S211: No), that is, if the current period is during the special symbol variation period, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S211, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S212). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S210), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Thus, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed for a moment, the player can surely recognize the contents of the stopped and displayed first pattern.

In the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case where blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state is performed to indicate that the first symbol is changing, a period longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when performing the blinking display may be set as the above-described determination period. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the processing of S212 is finished, when the variable display of the special symbols being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current determination result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39) is a special symbol jackpot (S213). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific prize winning port (variable prize winning device) 65 is set based on the jackpot type (jackpot type set when the jackpot is won) (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and the process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, as explained in the processing of S217, when a special pattern jackpot is won, the time saving state is finished at the timing from the end of the variation of the special pattern (the end of the confirmation display of the first pattern) to the start of the jackpot game. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described embodiment, in addition to the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol). In addition, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the timing when the jackpot game is finished.

Furthermore, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) may be set in advance from among the above-mentioned plurality of timings, or the time saving state may be ended at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is ended (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state is set, or whether the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-reduction end condition is established (the timing at which the time-reduction state is ended when the big win is won) for each of a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result) of the special pattern based on the end timing of the time-reduction state. In part of the timing at which the time-saving end condition set for each of a plurality of jackpot types is established, when the player identifies the timing at which the time-saving state is ended, the player can be notified that the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special pattern is a big win, that is, the time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win at which the time-saving end condition is completed only when the time-saving end condition is established by winning the big win may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to exhibit such an effect more, it is preferable to set the above-described time-saving end timing dedicated to the big win in the first half of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big win (S213: No), a time saving number update process for updating the number of times of time saving is executed (S219), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small win (S220). A detailed description of the above-described time saving number update process (S219) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S220, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), the small win start setting process is executed (S221), the above-described process of S218 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S220, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), the small win start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 38) of the present embodiment, priority is given to whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol is established (first), and it is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol is established (processing of S203 in FIG. 38). This is because the second special pattern, which is a special pattern advantageous to the player, does not have a holding storage means for holding and storing winning information, and is variable (easily variable) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and non-variable (difficult to change) when the normal state is set, and is structured to be a special pattern which is more difficult to execute the variation (lottery) than the first special pattern.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, if the lottery (fluctuation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) condition for the second special symbol are established at the same time (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) of the main controller 110), if the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol in which the fluctuation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the player will feel uncomfortable. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol. In addition, there is a problem that if the variation of the first special symbol is started with priority over the second special symbol in which variation (lottery) is difficult to be executed, the player feels more uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when executing the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the present embodiment), which has a high added value for the player (the winning probability of the small hit is higher than the first special symbol, and the actual lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed) is preferentially determined (first), so the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as a process for updating the number of times of time saving, after executing a process (time saving number update process (S219)) related to the end condition of the number of times of variation established according to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, the process related to the end condition of the number of times of winning (small winning start setting process (S221)) that is established according to the small winning is configured to be executed. By constructing in this way, in one variation (lottery) of special patterns, when a lottery result is obtained in which the conditions for ending the number of times of variation and the conditions for ending the number of winnings are satisfied, the condition for ending the number of times of variation is satisfied first, and the time saving state is terminated based on the condition for ending the number of times of variation being satisfied.

In this way, by determining whether or not each time-saving end condition is satisfied in a predetermined order for a plurality of set time-saving end conditions, the time-saving state can be regularly ended even when a plurality of time-saving end conditions can be reached in the same special pattern variation (lottery).

By using the above-described configuration in a pachinko machine 10 configured to terminate the time-saving state after a special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed when the condition for ending the number of times of fluctuation is satisfied, and to terminate the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game when the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, the end timing of the time-saving state can be varied according to the time-saving end condition to be satisfied.

Specifically, for example, when a small win B is won and the condition for ending the number of wins is satisfied alone, the time saving state ends after the small win game corresponding to the small win B ends. On the other hand, when a small win B is won in a special pattern lottery (fluctuation) in which the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is preferentially established, and the time saving state is ended before the small prize game corresponding to the small prize B is started, that is, after the special pattern (first pattern) indicating the lottery result (small prize B) of the special pattern is fixed and displayed.

In the above-described example, in a state where the time saving state is set as the game state, even if the time saving state ends based on the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol that won the small win B, the timing of ending the time saving state (whether or not there is time saving during the small winning game) can be variably set according to the time saving end condition to be established, so that the length of the period advantageous to the player can be varied according to the time saving end condition to be established. Thereby, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property in which the player expects the establishment of the time-saving condition, which is as advantageous as possible, in addition to the game in which the time-saving end condition is not established.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, a second ball entrance 640 is provided above a specific winning opening (V winning device 650) opened in a small winning game so that a ball can be entered into the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) that allows (easy) entry when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation (long opening) even during a small winning game, and a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the small winning game. It is preferable to configure so that a game can be played.

Furthermore, the period of the small winning game (the period in which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8 seconds) and the period in which the V winning device 650 is closed) is long (for example, 60 seconds). By configuring, it is possible to greatly vary the game result (the number of balls acquired by the game) depending on the presence or absence of the time saving state during the small winning game. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by providing the technique of varying the time-saving end timing as described above, it is possible to provide the player with more interesting games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, "special symbol big win", "special symbol small win" or "special symbol loss" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and second This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable effect performed by the 3-symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301). Next, based on the first winning random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the lottery result is acquired (S302). Specifically, in the case of the first special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22(b)) are compared to determine whether or not it is a big win. 2 (see FIG. 22(c)) is compared with the random number stored to determine whether it is a big win or a small win.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big win (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first win type selection table 202b corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, and it is determined what the jackpot type is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D) (see FIG. 23 (b) or (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same discrimination value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a win in the second special symbol, so even if a fraudulent game aiming at the same random number is performed, it is possible to suppress the execution of a biased big win.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers determined to be a big hit is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and when the lottery is executed with the special pattern with the higher probability of big win, the player can expect the big win.

Then, the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the big win type is set (S305). In the processing of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to D). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (jackpots A to D) are set as the stop types.

Thereafter, a big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

In the processing of S314, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S306 (S314). Next, a stop type command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 (S315). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S315 ends, this processing ends and returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the lottery result is not a big win (S303: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S307). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and the small hit type of the three types of special symbols (small hits A to C) is determined (see FIG. 22).

Next, a display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at a small winning symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

Next, the small hit type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (S311), then the above-described processes of S314 and S315 are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, so there is no need to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, if it is configured to win a small hit even in the first special symbol lottery, in the processing of S308 and S309, the special symbol type is also referenced to obtain the small hit type, and the display mode at the time of the small win is set. Good.

In addition, in the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, commands corresponding to the variation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit are set.

When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of loss corresponding to the type of special symbol is set (S312). After that, based on the number of held balls, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the variation time of the symbol variation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24). Next, the processing of S314 and S315 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the small winning start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S221). This small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and based on the small win type (small wins A to C), a process for setting the start of the small win game and updating the time saving information according to the won small win (update process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the small winning game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), so that the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game ends.

That is, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which balls can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained) and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing the big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, different small winning games are executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A to C) set when winning the small winning, and the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning playing is different according to each small winning type.

By constructing in this way, the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (2 types of winning) by the small winning game to be executed can be varied, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the small winning is won but also in the type of the winning small winning, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the small winning start setting process (S221) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V passage big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a big win A (15 rounds with a short time), and if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a big win B (5 rounds with a short time). In other words, in the present embodiment, when a ball passes through a specific area, the jackpot type (jackpot A or B) set for each type is executed when two types of hits are obtained (when the ball passes through the specific area) so that the same jackpot game is executed between the content of the jackpot game (per two types) that is set (performed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small prize game and the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot (per type) is won by special symbol lottery. is configured to be set according to

In this way, when two types of wins are won, the jackpot types are set, and the process of starting the jackpot game based on the set jackpot types is executed, so that the processing related to the jackpot games can be shared between the case of winning one type and the case of obtaining two types of wins, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, the jackpot game that can be executed may be set only when one type is won or only when two types are won, or different jackpot game processing may be executed for one type and two types.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description is continued. When the processing of S402 is finished, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, a small winning time saving update process is executed (S405), and the process ends. This small winning time saving update process (S405) is for executing the process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the win times end condition which is the end condition of the time saving state that can be established when winning the small win, and the process for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the winning times end condition is established by updating the time saving information, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small winning time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process (S405). This small winning time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and updates the time saving information based on the winning small win, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state is updated from the time saving state to the normal state.

In the small winning time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time saving state. In the process of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), since it is a state in which a small win is won in a game state other than the time saving state, this process is entirely skipped in order to update the time saving information, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small prize except in the state where the time saving state is set (so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed), when it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the processing of S501, it may be configured to set an error command for executing error notification (abnormal notification).

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, the time saving state is set (S501: Yes), next, it is determined whether the small win type of the small win won this time is "small win A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, in the process of S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read out and the determination is performed.

In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the small hit type is "small hit A" (S502: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit A counter 203m (S503), and the value of the small hit A counter 203m after subtraction is 0 (S504). condition) is met, the value of a short-time counter 203k that measures the period until the condition for ending the number of times of variation is met is set to 0 (S505), the values of the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p that measure various winning times end conditions are set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the game state (S507).

By executing the above-described processing of S505 to S507, when one time saving end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the counter for measuring the period until the other time saving end condition is satisfied can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied. Processing for updating the value of the small winning B counter 203n, the small winning C counter 203p, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions are set to 0 (a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended the previous time saving state, but for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end condition. It may be configured to be able to determine the types of time saving end conditions that have been established in the past and the number of times that they have been established.

By constructing in this way, for example, the easy-to-establish time-saving end condition is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishment times, and based on the determined contents, the easy-to-establish time-saving end condition can be suggested (notified) to the player. Furthermore, when one time-saving end condition is satisfied, the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions (for example, each value of the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p at the time when the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is the most difficult to meet, that is, at the time when the one time-saving end condition is met among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving information with the largest value is provided. You may comprise so that a time saving end condition may be discriminate|determined.

When the processing of S507 is finished, next, a remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each small hit counter is set (S508), a state command indicating the current game state is set (S509), and this processing is finished. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later. The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving command, and sets the state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Also, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, when it is determined that the value of the small win A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), since the time saving state is not ended by the small win winning this time, the processing of S505 to S507 for ending the time saving state is skipped and the process of S508 is shifted to.

Returning to the processing of S502 described above, the description continues. In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not the "small hit A" ("small hit B" or "small hit C") (S502: No), then it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit won this time is the "small hit B" (S510), and if it is determined to be the "small hit B" (S510: Yes), the value of the small hit B counter 203n is subtracted by 1 ( S511), after that, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

In the processing of S512, when it is determined that the value of the small winning B counter 203n is 0 (S512: Yes), it is a case where the time saving end condition (winning number of times ending condition corresponding to the small winning B) is established in the small winning of this time, so the processing of S505 described above is performed, and the processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203n is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time, so the processing of S505 to S507 for ending the time saving state is skipped and the process of S508 is shifted to.

In the processing of S510, when it is determined that the type of the small win won this time is not "small win B", that is, "small win C" (S510: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small win C counter 223p (S513), and it is determined whether the value of the small win C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

In the process of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 223p is 0 (S514: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small win C) is satisfied in this small win winning. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203p is not 0 (1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time, so the processing of S515 to S517 for ending the time saving state is skipped and the process of S508 is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol won as a small win has passed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small win win is subtracted, and it is configured to determine whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the small win win is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to terminate the time saving state according to the winning times termination condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state even when any of the time saving end conditions of the fluctuation frequency end condition and the winning number end condition are established.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the fluctuation number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is satisfied, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the finalized display of the special pattern (first pattern) is completed. When the winning number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times a small win is won in the lottery of the special pattern is satisfied, the start of the small winning game after the fixed display of the special pattern (first pattern). It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the set timing.

In other words, even if any of the time saving termination conditions are established, the time saving state is terminated immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition has been established and the time saving state set this time has ended. In order for the player to determine whether the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric role product 640a. For example, by setting the time saving state to end when the small winning start is set (immediately before the small winning game is started) as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state has ended immediately after the small winning game starts.

In this embodiment, even if any of the end conditions of the variable number of times end condition and the winning number of times end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the time saving state is ended at substantially the same timing (a concept including a time difference that is difficult for the player to distinguish). It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended after the end of the small winning game executed after the pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time-saving state during the period in which the small winning game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small prize game, the player cannot discriminate whether or not the time saving state has ended due to the winning of the small prize this time, and until the small prize game ends (until the game result as to whether or not two kinds of prizes have been obtained is notified), it is difficult to understand whether the time saving state has ended or not. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of acquiring two kinds of wins during the small winning game is configured to inform the player whether or not the time saving state has ended after the small winning game is finished, so that the current small winning game is based on the small winning winning that ends the time saving state. Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always aim for two kinds of wins willingly in the small win game executed during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time reduction frequency update process (S219) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the time saving frequency update process (S219). This time saving number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), updates the time saving number, and sets the game state to the normal state.

In the time saving frequency update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203k during time saving is greater than 0, that is, whether the present time is during time saving (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the counter 203k during time saving is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603.

In the process of S603, the number command of remaining time reduction which shows the value of the counter 203k in time reduction changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n and the small winning C counter 203p are set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42). Then, in any process, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) for indicating the state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, a value indicating each time saving end condition is set to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set. When the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition is determined, the value of the various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. When the corresponding time saving information is determined, the value of the counter is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the value of the counter after the addition is a value indicating the time saving end condition, the time saving state may be terminated. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a means for determining whether or not a time saving end condition is established, and an update means for updating time saving information corresponding to various time saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small wins, etc.) in the state where the time saving end condition is set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the time-saving end conditions, the end condition that is established when the number of times of each small win type reaches a predetermined number is used as the winning count end condition, but in addition to this, for example, the total number of times each small win type is set, that is, the time-saving state may be set continuously. It is also possible to set a condition for ending the number of wins that is established when

In this case, with respect to the number of wins in which the winning count end condition corresponding to only the small win B is satisfied (the number of times the winning count ends (e.g., 3 times)) and the number of wins in which the winning count end condition corresponding to only the small win C is satisfied (the number of times the winning count ends (e.g., 5 times)), the total number of times described above is set to be less than the sum of the number of times the small win B ends and the number of times the small win C ends. Good. This makes it difficult for a player to grasp the end timing of the time saving state because the end timing of the time saving state cannot be predicted unless the time saving situation is comprehended in relation to the small prize type set when winning the small prize during the time saving state.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning, ball winning) into the first winning hole (first ball hole) 64. If it is determined that a prize has been won, that is, if a ball is detected by a ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball hole 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters are obtained and their values are calculated. This is the process for executing the pending process.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning, winning) in the first winning hole (first ball entry) 64 (S701). Here, by determining whether or not a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 continues for three times of timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed, the winning of the ball into the first winning hole (first ball entrance) 64 is determined. In this way, it is determined that the ball has entered the prize only when it is determined that the ball has been detected continuously for a predetermined period of time (the period during which the timer interrupt process is executed three times (4 milliseconds)). ) and , can be executed separately.

In the case of using the control for determining that the ball has entered the ball when the ball has been continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, as described above, in addition to the case where the period during which it is determined that the ball has been detected is shorter than the predetermined period (instantaneous detection due to noise), it is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred and not to determine that the ball has won a prize (entered the prize) when the upper limit period longer than the predetermined period is exceeded. As a result, even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an unauthorized operation, it is possible to prevent the winning of a ball (ball winning) from being erroneously activated.

Then, when it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S704), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation is issued. command) is set (S705).

The reserved ball number command (Special Figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S705, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) are stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Then, in the processing of S707, prefetch processing is executed (S707). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning (entering a ball) into the first winning opening (entering ball) 64 (S701: No), or if it is judged that there is a winning (entering a ball) into the first winning opening (entering ball) 64 (S701: Yes), if it is judged that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (is 4) (S703: No), S707 is performed. Move to prefetch processing.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning information of the first special symbol (the right to execute the lottery) is configured so that it can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol cannot be retained and stored. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed also for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (ball opening) 640).

Also, when using a configuration in which winning information can be retained and stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the upper limit number of the winning information can be retained and stored for each special symbol may be unified (eg, 4), or different values may be set as the upper limit numbers (eg, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). Further, it is also possible to set the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to the sum of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories) of the second special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the look-ahead process (S707), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S707).

In this look-ahead processing (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball winning) in the first winning hole (ball winning hole) 64 (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S801: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a new prize has been won in the first winning hole (entrance) 64 (S801: Yes), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern are obtained in advance based on the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d (normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202d2) (S802).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S802 is set (S803), and the process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it executes the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) described later, sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, and performs processing to update the progress of the time saving state in advance (temporarily). Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a process for controlling the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S901). The winning of the normal pattern (second pattern) includes the time when the winning is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is controlled to be opened/closed. As a result of determination, when it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is in the process of winning (S901: Yes), it is in a state where a new normal pattern variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating) (S902). When it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be started (executed), it is determined whether or not a second winning random number counter is stored in a second symbol reserved ball execution area (S903).

In the process of S903, when it is determined that the second winning random number counter is not stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area, that is, when it is determined that there is no winning information of the normal symbol to be newly executed (S903: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S903: Yes), the stored value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired (S904).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S904 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S905). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of ``5-204'', it is determined that it is a hit of the normal pattern, and if it is in the range of ``0-4, 205-239'', it is determined that it is out of the normal pattern.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal pattern acquired by the processing of S905 is the winning of the normal pattern (S906), and when it is determined that it is the winning of the normal pattern (S906: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S907), and the processing is shifted to S909. In the process of S907, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S906, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S906: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S908, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the setting is made so that the "x" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S909.

When the processing of S907 or S908 ends, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S909), and when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S909: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbols in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S910), and then the normal symbol short variation flag 203q is set to ON. (S911), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal pattern time-saving state (it is in the normal state) (S909: No), the normal pattern fluctuation time in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S912), and this processing is terminated.

The normal symbol short variation flag 202q set to ON in the process of S911 is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is executed is the time saving state, and is referred to when the normal symbol variation is stopped and displayed and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set. Thereby, it is possible to vary the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state of the start timing of the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols and the timing of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols is temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used, for example, a storage area for temporarily storing the game state when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed may be provided in the game state storage means capable of always storing the currently set game state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbols is winning. Further, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the normal pattern lottery is performed, so that the game state at the timing at which the normal pattern lottery is performed may be determined. In other words, it is only necessary to provide a storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S913). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S910 or the process of S911 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S913, if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S913: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S913, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S913: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the lottery for the normal symbol is won and the display mode is set by the process of S907, the "O" symbol as the second symbol is set to be stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. - 特許庁On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S908, the ``x'' pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (lighted up) on the second pattern display device 83.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the period during which the second symbol is statically displayed is longer than the period during which one portion of the blinking display (alternating display of "O" and "X") indicating that the second symbol is fluctuating is illuminated (determined display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stop-displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S914, when the second symbol display update process (S1508 of FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S907 or S908.

When the processing of S914 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, it is determined whether the result of the lottery of the normal symbols (result of lottery of this time) performed by the normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 45, S106) is the winning of the normal symbols (S915). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S915: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a winning pattern (S915: Yes), it is then determined whether the normal pattern short variation flag 203q is set to ON (S916).

In the processing of S916, when it is determined that the normal short pattern variation flag 203q is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, when it is determined that the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current normal pattern is started is the normal state (S916: No), the opening time of the electric role product 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, in the processing of S916, if it is determined that the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal pattern is started is the short working hours state (S916: Yes), the normal short short fluctuation flag 203q is set to OFF (S917), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the short working hours state (during short working hours) (S918).

In the process of S918, if it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving state (S918: No), the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbol is started is the normal state, and the current game state (timing to set the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is the normal state. (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game state is the time-saving state (S918: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbol this time is started and the current game state (timing to set the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) are both time-saving states. operation is set (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the timing of executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbols and the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbols are in the time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player, so that, for example, even if the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is executed in the state that the normal state is set as the game state, and the win is won, and the time saving state is set until the variable time (30 seconds) of the normal symbols ends, the long opening is not set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Likewise, even when winning is won in the variation (lottery) of normal patterns executed in the state of setting the time saving state and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal patterns is stopped, the long opening of the electric accessory 640a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (long release of the electric accessory 640a).

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the long opening of the electric accessary 640a in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the period during which the lottery of special symbols (second special symbols) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed can be limited to the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used as a configuration for determining the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the game state set at each timing. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, only when the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set are in the normal state, the opening operation (opening operation set at S921 in FIG. 45) that is disadvantageous to the player is set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set at S919 in FIG. 45) is set in other states. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a benefit (long release) advantageous to the player even for normal pattern variations executed in a period before and after the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player is set, so that the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

Thus, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, compared with the case where the normal state is set, the variation time of the normal pattern becomes very short as ``30 seconds→3 seconds'', and the release period of the second prize winning opening 640 becomes very long as ``0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times'', so that the ball is easily entered into the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is terminated, so that the normal state is set during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, the time saving state is continuously set unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, during the small winning game executed while the time saving state is set, the V winning device 650 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, which is a specific period in which the ball can easily enter a plurality of winning openings (V winning opening 650a, second ball opening 640).

Using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the information of the V winning device 650 may be provided with the electric accessory 640a and the second ball entrance 640 so that the balls enter two winning ports (V winning device 650a and the second ball entrance 640) during the small winning game. can be given.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description continues. In the process of S920, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S920), and the process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S920, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1506) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S921 or S919 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 46, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (S101). The content of this detection is the same as the process of S701 of the above-described starting winning process (see FIG. 43), so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is in normal symbol variation (S1002), and when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is in normal symbol variation (S1002: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not in normal symbol fluctuation (S1002: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol is currently winning (S1003). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the process of winning (S1003: Yes), this processing is finished as it is. When it is determined that the normal pattern is not in the process of winning (S1003: No), since it is the timing at which the variation (execution) of the new normal pattern can be drawn, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (S101) is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area (S1004). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S1101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is ON (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S1102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1103), and this process ends. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S1102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned on (S1105), and the process ends.

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201). In the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203j is ON (S1201: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the V passage flag 203j is not ON (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S1202: No), the process ends.

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that V passage is present (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S1203). When it is determined that it is during the V passage valid period (S1203: Yes), the V passage jackpot type value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the V flag 203i indicating the acquired V passage jackpot type is set to ON (S1205). Then, a V passing command is set (S1206).

Next, the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). After that, the counter 203k during time saving is set to 0 (S1208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this processing ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not during the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1301), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial settings are executed upon power-on (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as sound lamp control device 113 and payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S1402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process proceeds to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405).

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1406), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1515 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1416, S1417).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. Similarly, when power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S1416, S1417). In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), the power failure information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1407: Yes), the power failure information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1409), and shifts to the processing of S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S1410, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the value of the counter 203k during time saving is read (S1411), and the state command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S1413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 39) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43). Further, by this external output processing (S1501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Also, the opening command (S1602), round number command (S1607), and ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502), the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650). Control processing is executed (S1504). In the jackpot control process (S1504), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or the corresponding winning opening (first variable It is determined whether or not a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning and small winning control processing for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1505). In the small winning control process (S1505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has passed, or the corresponding winning opening (first variable winning It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65 a of the device 65 or the V winning hole 650 a of the V winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S919 or S921 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished and the green LED is lit, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished and the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (see FIG. 2) is terminated, and set by the process of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). In the displayed mode, the stop pattern (first pattern) is stopped (lighted up) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1508). In the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S907 or S908 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). 83 is stopped (lighted up).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509). If power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the main process this time (S1510).

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1510: No), the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1502 (S1512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1501 to S1508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. .

In the process of S1509, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and as a result of the power failure signal SG1 being output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1513), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1509 is executed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1501 to S1508 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from the power failure state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1501 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is turned off, the process of S1501 can be started by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initialization process (S1401). Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state with special symbols, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S1601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. This jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216) when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is time to start the big win (if it is determined that the big win start flag 203c is ON) (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602), then the big win start flag 203c is set to OFF (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), next, it is determined whether the jackpot is currently in progress (S1604). The period during the special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the predetermined time after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and the period during which the above-described jackpot flag 203d is set to ON corresponds. In the process of S1604, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON) (S1604: Yes), determination processing (S1605 to S1612) for determining whether it is time to execute various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot is executed.

In the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current timing is the start of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to newly start is set (S1607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol variations (the number of lotteries) during execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which the time-saving state is repeatedly set between the jackpot games), the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games to be continuously executed. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 includes a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chance period) for determining that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the round game number (round number) of the new jackpot game to the round game number (round number) in the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and the round. A round accumulation number display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the round accumulation number accumulated by the number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S1605: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1608, if it is determined that the condition for closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is established (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650) is closed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not established (S1608: No), next, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). The start timing of the ending performance is discriminated as the start timing of the ending performance when 15 rounds (the final round game preset in the big win game of this time) are completed, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. It should be noted that the start timing of this ending effect and the end timing, which will be described later, are also determined based on the release scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) that is set when a big win is won.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), in the process of S1612, it is determined whether it is the end time of the ending effect (S1612). In the processing of S1612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S1612: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpots A to D is the jackpot type being executed (S1613). In the processing of this S1613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, corresponding time saving end conditions are set using the time saving giving table 202e (S1614). Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R with short working hours) or jackpot B (5R with short working hours), 100 is set for the short-time medium counter 203k, 1 is set for the small-hit A counter 203m, 3 is set for the small-hit B counter 203n, and 5 is set for the small-hit C counter p. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving with jackpot), 100 is set for the short-time medium counter 203k, 2 is set for the small-hit A counter 203m, 10 is set for the small-hit B counter 203n, and 50 is set for the small-hit C counter p.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot), it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot is finished, so the time-saving medium counter 203k, the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter p are configured so that values (time-saving end conditions) are not set. When the processing of S1614 described above is finished, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S1614 is set (S1615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time saving setting information command, it sets the time saving information indicating the time saving end condition of the current time saving state in the time saving information update area 223g and the temporary working time saving information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the variation (lottery) of the special pattern, the remaining number of times of the time saving state (remaining condition) is discriminated, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

When the processing of S1615 is completed, next, the state command corresponding to the game state set after the big win is set (S1616), the end of the big win is set (S1617), the mid-jackpot flag 203d is set to off (S1618), and this processing is finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the condition for ending the time saving state can be set differently according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a time-saving end condition that is difficult to be satisfied is set as a time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) when a big win is won by a lottery of a second special pattern, compared to when a big win is won by a lottery of a first special pattern.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when winning one type instead of two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that are set when a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbols are configured to set the same time-saving end condition. Also, some of the plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set so that the big win A is more likely to be established, and the other conditions are more likely to be established for the big win B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21(d), in the present embodiment, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number end condition regarding the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (based on the value of the time saving counter 203k) and the winning number end condition (end condition based on the value of each small win counter) regarding the number of times a small win was won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol.

In addition, it is configured to set end conditions corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of winning a small win as the end conditions for the number of times of winning. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand which small winning game corresponding to which small winning type will be executed and how soon the time saving state will end before the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In this embodiment, only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set as the fluctuation frequency end condition, but different fluctuation frequency end conditions may be set according to the jackpot type. Further, as the fluctuation number end condition, a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and the first special symbol fluctuation end condition is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set the end condition based on the measurement results of the counters (small win A counter 203m, small win B counter 203n, small win C counter 203p) corresponding to each small win type as the winning number end condition, but without being limited to this, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied simply based on the sum of the number of times the small win is won, or a predetermined number (two) of a plurality of (3 or more) small win types are set. It is also possible to provide a means for counting and counting the number of times the small winning game is executed, and to set the end condition based on the measurement result of the means.

Also, in the present embodiment, the time-saving end condition is set for all the small-win types that can be set when the small-win is won, but it is not limited to this, and the small-win type Z may be set as a small-win type in which the time-saving end condition cannot be established no matter how many times it is set when the small win is won. As a result, even if the player grasps that the small win has been won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is coming to an end due to the small win this time.

In addition, when the above-described small winning type Z is provided, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same contents as the small winning game in which the winning number end condition is set. By constructing in this way, even if the game contents of the small win game executed during the time saving state are identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the small win game this time.

In this way, by determining whether a small win has been won or by determining the game contents of a small win game executed based on the winning of a small win, that is, by discriminating the game contents of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end), so that the player can have a strong interest in the performance suggesting (informing) the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end). It should be noted that the contents of control of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 which will be described later.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 53, small hit control processing (S1505) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1505). This small winning control processing (S1505) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, it is processing for executing various effects according to the small winning and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203f is set to ON by the processing of S404 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S1701: Yes), an opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to OFF (S1703), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S1704). The small winning of the special pattern includes the time when the small winning of the special pattern (including the small winning game of the special pattern) is being displayed in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the predetermined time after the small winning game of the special pattern is finished. The determination of S1704 is determined by analyzing whether the flag 303g is set to ON during the small hit. In the processing of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the middle of a small hit (S1704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the midst of a small hit (S1704: Yes), the processing of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S1705). In the processing of S1705, when it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1706), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707).

In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing in the processing of S1707 (S1707: Yes), next, in the processing of S1708, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1708). ), and then set an instruction command corresponding to the read small hit type (S1710).

As the instruction command set in the processing of S1710, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on the small hit (for example, small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area during the small hit game as the small hit type and the small hit in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during the small hit game (for example, small hits B and C) is set.

Specifically, when the small win A, which is likely to win two types during the small win game, is set as the small win type, a display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) for forcing the player to execute the right-handed game is set, and after that, when the ball passes through the specific area, the display mode (see FIG. 16(b)) indicating that two types of wins have been successfully obtained is displayed. In this way, by varying the contents of the setting of the instruction command according to the degree of expectation for the ball to pass through the specific area in the small winning game to be executed, the player can be provided with a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S1711: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1713). In the processing of S1713, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1713: Yes), the ending command is set (S1714), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1713, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1713: No), in the process of S1715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S1715). In the processing of S1715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), this processing ends.

In the processing of S1715, when it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1716), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S1716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the content of the V flag 203i is set (S1717), and the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot middle flag 2 are set. 03d is set to ON (S1718), the V flag 203i is set to OFF (S1719), the V passage flag 203j is set to OFF (S1720), the small hitting medium flag 203g is set to OFF (S171721), and this processing is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 54, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, it is determined whether or not the current start-up processing was started during execution of the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. 55) due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S2115 in FIG. 55: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2062 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power-off processing of S2118 was completed, or was started when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), it will transfer to S2064 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

If the current start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (because the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut off), so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, if this launch process has been started after an instant power outage has been completed and the execution of the power supply process of S2118 is completed, or if a noise is reset only to the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, Since the keyword of 55AAh is memorized, the data of RAM223 is determined to be normal (S2063: NO), and will be transferred to S2068.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset during execution of the power-off processing in S2118. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2066). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormalities in the RAM 223 are notified by the lamp display device 227 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2118 is executed, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned on when the current start-up processing is started after a momentary power failure occurs and the execution of the power-off processing of S2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S2069) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), interrupt permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned off, for example, because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and the process of S2068 was reached via the processes from S2064 to S2066, or the process was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), the process skips S2069 for clearing the work area of the RAM 223 and proceeds to S2070, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), sets interrupt permission (S2071), and proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2069 is skipped is that when the process of S2068 is reached from S2064 via the process of S2068, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2064, and only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, and when the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of the lamp control device 113 can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). The reason why S2101 determines whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is that S2102 to S2112 are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short period (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S2113 and the variable display setting process in S2114 in a short period. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the variation performance without delay based on the command received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting performance processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the setting for switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing is a process of monitoring input as to whether frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as frame button 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect are pressed, and setting to perform corresponding performance when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Various counter update processes (S2111) are executed after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110). This various counter update processing is processing for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223 e provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 . That is, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . Here, a method for updating a plurality of counters held in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described.

In this embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all the counters are updated by 1 every time various counter updating processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, the update state of each counter will be synchronized, and randomness cannot be given to the set performance mode.

When various counter update processes (S2111) are finished, effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update processing (S2112) is for performing processing for varying the content of the effect currently being executed (already set variable display) during execution of the effect.

After effect update processing (S2112), command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from main controller 110 is performed (S2113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the processing of S2114, variable display setting processing is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116). On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203), other processing according to the command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process returns to the main processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value contained in the received pending ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 (the number of holding times of variation display in the special symbol N1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). In addition, in the processing of S2208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S2208 ends, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. 03b value. Therefore, due to the impact of noise, etc., even if the value of the speech lamp control device 113, one holding ball number counter 223B, the value of the second 223b of the main control device 110, one holding ball number counter 203b, the speech lamp control device 113 Special diagram of the audio lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start prize or the lottery of the special pattern. The value of the ball number counter 223b can be modified and the special pattern of the main control device 110 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball count 203b. Incidentally, when the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S2207, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), a winning information related process is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning information related process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process (S2210). In this winning information related processing (S2210), processing for determining whether or not to execute a tentative winning performance is executed based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current game situation.

When the winning information related process (S2210) is executed, first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the game state read in the processing of S2301 is in the time saving mode (S2302), and when it is determined that the time is in the time saving mode (S2302: Yes), next, it is determined whether the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to S2304, and the temporary time reduction end flag 223j is turned on. It is determined (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the temporary time saving end flag 223j is not on (is off) (S2304: No), the process proceeds to S2305, and this time, it is determined whether there is winning information in the winning information received from the main controller 110 (S2305).

On the other hand, in the process of S2303 described above, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is turned on (S2303: Yes), or if it is determined that the temporary time reduction end flag 223j is turned on in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the process of determining whether to execute the temporary hit production is skipped and the process of S2311 described later is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information related process (S2211), the provisional winning effect can be executed only when the read gaming state is the time saving mode. Therefore, since the provisional win effect can be executed only when the time is reduced, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the tentative winning determination flag 223h is ON, that is, when the tentative winning performance is already executed, a new tentative winning performance is not set, so that the tentative winning performance being executed can be provided to the player until the end.

Next, the processing (S2305 to S2311) for setting the temporary winning effect will be described. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information received from the main controller 110 this time (S2305). When it is determined that the received prize information is a win (S2305: Yes), the temporary winning determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the temporary short working hours information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information (S2305: No), the process of S2306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information updated in the process of S2307 is the time saving end condition (S2308). When it is determined that the time saving end condition is met (S2308: Yes), the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the end condition of time saving (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process of S2310 described later is performed. Next, the winning information command for display corresponding to the information in the provisional time saving information update area 223i is set (S2311), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2302, when it is determined that the read gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2302: No), the winning information command for display corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), the processing of S2311 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description continues. In the process of S2209, if the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a win-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). When a win-related command is received (S22111: Yes), the win-related process (S2212) is executed, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the win-related processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S2212). The winning-related processing (S2212) is to perform the processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the performance display corresponding to the big winning game or the small winning game to be executed when the big winning or the small winning is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, and the processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when winning the big winning or the small winning is executed.

In the winning related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether or not the command related to winning received by the command determination process (S2113) receives the command to start the big winning (S2401). When a jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2402), the provisional hit determination flag 223h is set to OFF (S2403), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2404). If the round number command has been received (S2404: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S2405), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, so the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. A round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of update commands may be provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the current round number may be calculated on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the round number command for display may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When a jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), a display jackpot end command is set (S2407), and a jackpot end process (S2408) is executed. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2406, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S2409). When the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S2411). When the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the small winning end command is not received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command is received (S2413). If the V entrance passage command has been received (S2413: Yes), the V entrance passage command for display is set (S2414), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2413 that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether the V pass command has been received (S2415). When the V passing command is received (S2415: Yes), a display V effect command for showing the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2416), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2415 that the V passage command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2417). If the instruction command has been received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2417 that the instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), this processing ends.

In this embodiment, a small winning game is executed by opening the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small winning game, and at the fifth or tenth opening timing, the V switch 650e3 is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that this instruction command is received, an instruction command for display is set in the third pattern display device 81 to display an emphasized guide display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) for emphasizing and guiding that the V winning device 650 wins the ball.

Then, when the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in the state in which the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the right-handed game is played to ensure that the ball wins the V winning device 650, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. In spite of such a configuration, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball at the fifth opening timing of the open/close door 650f1, when the small winning game is started, the left-handed game is executed without noticing the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(a)) of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the game has been stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make the player more likely to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed hit displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, the timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) is the timing when the ball shot in the right-handed game reaches the V winning device 650 during the small win game when the right-handed game is played after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player who has executed a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasized guidance display mode cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small winning game.

Here, the jackpot ending process (S2408), which is one of the processes in the winning related process (S2212), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S2408).

In the jackpot end processing (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the information read in the process of S2501 is the time saving state (S2502). When it is determined that the read information is the time saving state (S2502: Yes), all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2502: No), this processing ends.

After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the read information (S2504). If it is determined that there is hit information (S2504: Yes), a consecutive chan command for display is set (S2505). Next, the tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), the state display command for display is set (S2507), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no win information in the read state (S2504: No), the winning information command for display corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether a time-saving related command has been received (S2215). When it is determined that a time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), a time saving update process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2215, when it is determined that the time-saving-related command has not been received (S2215: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Next, the content of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the processing of S2601, it is determined whether or not the analyzed working hours related information is working hours setting information (S2602). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the time saving setting information (S2602: Yes), the time saving information is set in the time saving information update area 223g and the provisional working time information update area 223i (S2603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, when it is determined that the time reduction related information is not the time reduction setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time reduction related information is variation information (S2604). When it is determined that the time saving related information is variation information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the time saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2607). When it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining time saving times is less than 30 times (S2608). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 times (S2608: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the number of remaining time reductions is greater than 30 (S2608: No), this process ends. In the processing of S2607, if it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is ON (S2607: Yes), the processing of S2608 to S2609 is skipped and the processing of S2610 described later is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count is one (S2610). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S2610: Yes), the change flag 223n before the end of time reduction is set to ON (S2611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the number of times of remaining time reduction is not 1 (S2610: No), it is determined whether the number of times of remaining time reduction is 0 (S2612). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2613), and the time reduction before end fluctuation flag 223n is set to OFF (S2614). Next, the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2615), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 0 (S2612: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not the fluctuation information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is small winning information (S2616). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the small winning information (S2616: Yes), the small winning related update process (S2617) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it discriminate|determines that time saving relevant information is not small hit information (S2616:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.

Here, with reference to Drawing 61, small hit relation update processing (S2617) is explained. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related update process (S2617).

In the small hitting related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the semi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703). If it is determined that the semi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the semi-end condition is satisfied (S2704). If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the semi-end condition flag 223m is ON (S2703: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the semi-end condition is not satisfied (S2704: No), it is determined whether the end condition is satisfied (S2706). When it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF (S2707), and then the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2708). Next, the fluctuation flag 223n before the time saving end is set to OFF (S2709), the provisional time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, if it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a variable pattern command for display based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S2801: No), it means that no fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S2801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S2802), and then in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 56), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the effect setting process for setting the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is executed (S2804), and then the display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control of the variation presentation is started so that the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. When the process of S2805 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2807.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) is a process for setting the temporary winning effect of the variation pattern set in the current variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) and the temporary winning effect are set.

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2901). Next, in the processing of S2901, it is determined whether or not the read information is the time saving state (S2902). When it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is the time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2903). If it is determined that the tentative hit determination flag 223h is ON (S2903: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, when it is determined that the tentative hit determination flag 223h is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2903: No), information is read from the time saving information update area 223g (S2904). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation flag 223n before the end of time saving is on (S2905). When it is determined that the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is off (S2905: No), the state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 based on the setting of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m, the result of the determination, and the value of the state effect counter 223o (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is turned on (S2905: Yes), the state display mode is selected using the final state display selection table provided in the ROM 222 based on the value of the state effect counter 223o (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 62, the description continues. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after executing the process of S2806 described above, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is ON (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to OFF (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is acquired (S2809). Next, based on the extracted stop type, a stop type command for display is set (S2810), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is OFF (S2807: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 to complete drawing processing of one frame of an image. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", the data for one page including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from designating the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the NOR-type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. The boot program stored in d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like, while eliminating the need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4102, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and executes various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, subsequently, according to the rest of the boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S410). 3). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) to be executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) is completed (S4105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and ending the boot process.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all made up of DRAM. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. It is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects by using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, even if all the boot programs are not stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, and a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 accompanying the shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. good too. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 may be such that a part of the remaining boot program is further transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may be further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a may be set in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is repeated a plurality of times including the processes of S4101 and S4102, and then the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

In the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is canceled, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can start normally by inspecting whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the leading address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. be done.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 may write transfer end information indicating transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. The MPU 231 may read information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detect the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S4003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the power-on varying image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. transferred to The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process (see S6302 in FIG. 79A) is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S6302 in FIG. 79A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is kept ON until transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B), the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66B) are executed so that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (not shown), which are images when the power is turned on, are drawn.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, a player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problem when the power is turned on.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable effect to the voice lamp controller 113. , that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since a simple variation performance can be performed by using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play the game at ease even while the power-on main image is displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the power is restored.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(a). FIG. 66(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 66(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after identifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a drawing list (see FIG. 36) of the image is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the image drawing processing and display processing are not finished, it is possible to prevent the drawing of a new image from being started in the middle of drawing the image or the image being developed in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored in accordance with the new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 66(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). , command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. At the same time, if the display demonstration command or the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. do.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the drawing of the image can be controlled so as to display the performance image corresponding to the mode on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically specified. In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 receives a continuous notice image to be used in various effects. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the rear image and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 38 is generated from the types of sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S4304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to D, front and rear out reach, reach other than front and rear out, complete loss, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. 304 processing is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, the details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S4405), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always makes a judgment of the start of variation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the processing of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, when a variation performance having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is instructed by the main controller 110, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main controller 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and another variation display is suddenly started. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, display settings are made so that even when the main controller 110 actually instructs a variation effect having a longer variation time than the set display data table, the demonstration effect is displayed after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed and until the next display pattern command is received from the main controller 110, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the processing, the player can continue to see the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is completed, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406).

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, reach for front/rear loss, reach other than reach for front/rear loss, complete loss, chance number) is determined (S4601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set. (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set off (S4603), the stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S4603, and the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, but before drawing is performed in the third pattern display device 81, the image data necessary for drawing can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type table is determined on the assumption that the stop type is completely out of line. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S4602.

If the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is set, the stop pattern corresponding to the ``big hit of the special pattern'' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even when the ``big win of the special pattern'' is actually set, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has hit the ``big hit of the special pattern'', and there is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, by setting the stop pattern corresponding to the complete loss as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special pattern jackpot" even if the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop pattern of the complete loss in the case of a ``special symbol jackpot'' in fact, so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408).

Details of the back image change command process (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag is set to ON (S4701) for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state (S4701). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each of the back image types (back planes A and B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image discrimination flags corresponding to the other back image types are turned off (S4702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. Then, when the specified back image type is back B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the back image in a predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Also, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the back face image discrimination flag set in S4702, the range of the back face image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to the back face image range is stored and the address of the RAM. identify.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when the command determination process is executed, two or more background image change commands should not be stored in the command buffer area. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on, or the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410).

Details of the error command processing (S4411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (S4802), the error command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4802, and the warning image corresponding to the error type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a win-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412).

Details of the win-related command process (S4413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing win-related command processing. The hit-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command, display round number command, and display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the hit related command process (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). When it is determined that there is a hit start command for display in the process of S4901 (S4901: Yes), the big hit start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to S4903.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71(a), details of the jackpot start command process (S4902) will be described. FIG. 71(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the win-related command process (FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command process (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5005), and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4901, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903. After completing the processing of S4901 or S4902, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Details of the round number command processing (S4904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 71(b). FIG. 71(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This number-of-rounds command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined that the number-of-rounds command for display has been received in the winning-related command process (FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 the effect when the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated.

In the round number command processing (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process proceeds to S4905. After completing the processing of S4903 or S4904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907.

Details of the jackpot end command process (S4906) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command process (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907. After completing the processing of S4905 or S4906, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S4907). In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72(b), the details of the small winning start command process (S4908) will be described. This small winning start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that a small winning start command is received in the winning related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the start of a small winning game on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command process (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small winning start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5305), and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. After completing the processing of S4907 or S4908, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S4909). In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73(a), details of the small winning end command process (S4910) will be described. This small winning end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that a small winning end command is received in the winning related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying an effect suggesting the end of the small winning game on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command process (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4909, when it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to S4911. After completing the processing of S4909 or S4910, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is a V entrance pass command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

Details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will now be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). This V entrance passage command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V entrance passage command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed the V prize switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V prize device 650.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to S4913. After completing the processing of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). In the process of S4913, when it is determined that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the process proceeds to S4915.

Details of the V effect command process (S4914) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the probability that a jackpot game is awarded is high.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description is continued. In the process of S4913, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), the process proceeds to S4915. After completing the process of S4913 or S4914, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). In the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is an instruction command (S4915: Yes), the instruction command process is executed (S4916), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4915, if it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this processing ends.

Details of the instruction command process (S4916) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(b). This instruction command process (S4916) is a process executed when it is determined that an instruction command has been received in the win-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the probability of winning a big win game is high.

In the instruction command process (S4916), first, an instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the instruction effect display data table (S5653). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5655), and this process is terminated.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there are various performance-related commands corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands (S4414).

Here, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the effect-related command processing (S4415) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing effect-related command processing. This production-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to various production-related commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the effect-related command process (S4415), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description is continued. In the process of S4414, if it is determined that there are no various effect-related commands (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S4401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. .

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on varying image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. In the process of 02, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6001: No), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6002), the processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of S6003 and S6004.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6004).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for causing the third pattern display device 81 to display an error warning image corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to ON is developed (S6101).

In the task processing, based on the developed warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004), or if it is determined in the process of S6003 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6003: No), then the process proceeds to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, each data table has start information written at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after address "0001H". When the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. data can be read.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S6203: Yes), the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timer counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 to initialize (S6205), and this process is executed. End and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S6206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is described are always developed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 76, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and various parameters required for rendering, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether or not the fixed display flag is on (S6009).

As a result, if the fixed display flag is off (S6009: No), the production of the fixed display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the production of the fixed display, so first the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display performance is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6014), the content of the stop pattern discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S6015), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stop pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Compared with the conventional case of changing display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 does not have a heavy load, so various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes according to the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table describes the pattern offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task processing (S4304), until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, the stop pattern of the previously executed variable performance is specified from the last stop pattern discrimination flag set in S6015, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is specified by adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the fixed display flag is ON (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6017), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), the process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation performance is not received after the fixed display performance is finished.

In the processing of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: Yes), the demonstration performance is performed after the end of the fixed display performance, and it means that the demonstration performance is finished, so the display setting processing is finished as it is, and the V interrupt processing is returned to. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration performance is started again by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, as described above, so that the demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, a process of setting a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which prescribes stop display of a power-on varying image (not shown) corresponding to a stop pattern set based on a stop type command for display for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on varying image is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is completed, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is OFF (S6301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). FIG. 79B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6401). If the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6401: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S6402). In the process of S6402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer processing is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. If it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not ended (S6402: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the processing of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6403), and if there is resident object image data that has not been transferred (S6403: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident object image data that has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident object image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the head address of the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident object image data to be transferred here). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing of S6403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 66(b)), the command determination process (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident object image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing are resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing the image, so that the time required for the reading can be saved, the drawing of the image can be immediately performed, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as back images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, etc. are resident. Responsiveness can be kept high until 81 displays some image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S6303), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S6502), and if it is transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S6503). A transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Also, in the processing of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the processing of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505).

In the process of S6506, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the process of S6505, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the processing of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). If the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S6508), and after setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 as the image data to be transferred, the process proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is ON (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to OFF (S6510), the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag that is in the ON state is specified among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6513 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the leading address and the trailing address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred here is to be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer setting process in this way, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a given address so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the corresponding performance while drawing the image of each sprite designated by the display data table. Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list shown in FIG. 36 is generated from the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S4304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified, and the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and a drawing list is generated by describing, as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite, in the sprite order after the rearrangement. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can immediately identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the top address of the transfer destination in anticipation of the time when it is in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing can be simultaneously processed in parallel.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6602, the rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time drawing processing of V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image for one frame is developed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read, and the drawing processing and display processing of the image are executed. After 20 milliseconds from the completion of the drawing processing for the image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the first frame buffer 23 is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read. 6b is specified. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately designating one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c for each 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame, the display processing for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image for one frame is being rendered.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, when a big hit is won (symbol per or two types of wins are won) A time-saving end condition (special prize end condition) is set, a time-saving end condition (variation number end condition) is set when a special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times, and the number of times a small win is won in a special symbol lottery is set when a predetermined number of times is reached. Since the condition for ending the time saving (the condition for ending the number of wins) can be set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily predict the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (timing when the time saving state ends).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned winning number end condition is configured to be established when a small win is won multiple times, so every time a small win is won during the time saving state, the time saving state may end for the player. I can make you think. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small winning types can be set when a small winning is won, and as the plurality of small winning types, a small winning type for which the winning number of times end condition is set and a small winning type for which the winning number of times ending condition is not set are provided. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the time saving state ends based on the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

As described above, when setting a small winning type that sets the winning number end condition and a small winning type that does not set the winning number ending condition, it is preferable to set a small winning type that sets the winning number ending condition and a small winning type that does not set the winning number ending condition for the same small winning game (opening operation of the V winning device 650) (same concept including an error that the player cannot identify). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of small win types for setting the winning frequency end condition can be set, and the number of times set as the winning frequency end condition is different for each small winning type. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by determining the content of the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured to win a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is likely to be executed when the time saving state is set, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game corresponding to the won small win (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 opened by the small win game), the big win ( per 2 types) is configured to be set.

In the above-described first embodiment, the above-described setting of the two types of hits means that the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (jackpot game content) set when a small win is won by lottery of special symbols is configured to be executed on the condition that the ball has passed through a specific area during the small win game. It may be configured to read out (lottery) and execute a big win game corresponding to the read out (selected as a result of lottery) big win game, or set a big win on the condition that a ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, and execute a big win game corresponding to the big win class selected based on the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the first embodiment configured to be able to set two types of wins in this manner, small win games with different expectations for setting two types of wins according to the types of won small wins are set, and a time-saving end condition (winning frequency end condition) is set for each small win type. Furthermore, it is configured so that the number of times (the number of times of winning) that the winning number of times end condition is satisfied is smaller for the smaller winning game (smaller winning type) in which two types of winnings are more likely to be set.

By structuring in this way, when a small prize is won in the time saving state, the small prize game is executed while assuming both the possibility of winning two kinds of prizes and the possibility of ending the time saving state, so that the playability in the time saving state can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the time-saving state is more likely to be ended as the winning of the small winning game in which the two types of winning is more likely to be won, the game during the small winning game can be motivated.

In the first embodiment, among the types of small wins, the conditions for ending the number of wins are set to be once for the small win A that can obtain two types of wins if the right-handed game is continuously played (with some exceptions). By constructing in this way, a large penalty can be given only to a player who does not continuously play the right-handed game (a player who does not play an appropriate game), and the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the shortening of working hours.

Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, the timing at which the time saving state ends is differentiated according to the type of the time saving end condition that is established, and it is possible to set the case where the time saving state continues during the period when the small winning game is executed and the case where the time saving state ends. As a result, the game result can be changed depending on which time-saving end condition is met, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the time-saving end condition that has been met in addition to whether or not the time-saving end condition is met.

Specifically, when a small win is won in a special pattern variation in which the condition for ending the number of times of winning is met, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the variation of the special pattern is stopped (timing at which the pattern indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed), and the normal state is entered during the small winning game executed after that, whereas when the condition for ending the number of winning times is established, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is executed.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game is arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a (upstream of the flow path in which the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down), so that the ball is difficult to flow down to the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a during the small winning game. As a result, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs according to the established time saving end condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice it, so that it is possible to suppress the player's sense of incompatibility.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, if the normal symbol is won and the time saving state is set at the time when the opening action of the electric accessory 640a is set, even if the time saving state ends during the opening action of the electric accessory 640a, the opening action in the time saving state is continuously executed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the satisfied time saving end condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice it, so that it is possible to suppress the discomfort given to the player.

In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, it is not difficult to understand that the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the time saving end condition that has been established. In the case where the unique game property is given to greatly differing the timing at which the time saving state ends according to the time saving end condition that has been established, for example, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation starts, and when the winning number end condition is satisfied, the small winning game ends. It is good to constitute so that a time saving state may be ended at the timing which did. By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to vary greatly the period when a time saving state is set by the classification of the time saving end conditions satisfied.

In this case, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, and when the time saving state is set during the small winning game, many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a to enter the ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640), and the V winning device 650 that is opened by the small winning game wins. It is preferable that more balls are paid out from the entrance into which the ball is guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, as time-saving end conditions, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is set twice, and the condition for ending the number of wins is once, and only when a small win is won in the first special pattern change after the time-saving state is set, it is preferable to allow many balls to be inserted into the ball entrance guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small win game. By constructing in this way, when the time saving state is set, the game can be played while expecting the establishment of the specific time saving end condition, and new game characteristics can be provided.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened when a small win is won, is arranged in the right region, and a ball is won by the V winning device 650 by performing a right-handed game during a small winning game, and two types of winning are set when the winning ball of the V winning device 650 passes through the specific region (V switch 650e3 detects the ball). Further, the contents of the big win set as two types of wins (the contents of the big win game, the game state set after the end of the big win game, etc.) are set according to the kind of the small win which is the lottery result of the special symbols.

In such a game property, for example, when a small win is won, the result of the lottery is identified in the stop display mode of the first symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and the content of the big win set corresponding to the current small win is determined. When a player wins a small win in which a state (for example, a normal state) is set, there is a fear that the game is played so as to aim for the next small win without intentionally performing the act of winning the second kind of win.

Therefore, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the period until the ball fired after the right side game reaches the V winning device 650 is longer than the period from when the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stop-displayed on the first display device 37 to when the small winning game is executed (until the time when two types of winning can be obtained during the small winning game). It is preferable to provide a delay channel for delaying the flow of the gas.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain two kinds of hits when a right-handed game is played after determining the lottery result of the special symbols stopped and displayed on the first display device 37.例文帳に追加Therefore, in order to acquire two kinds of hits, a right-handed game can be continuously executed before the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed (while the special pattern is being variably displayed), so that the above-mentioned malicious game can be suppressed.

In this case, it is not necessary to set the period until the balls fired after the right side game reach the V winning device 650 for all small wins is longer than the period from when the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37 to when the small win game is executed (until the time when two types of wins can be obtained during the small win game), and some small win games (particularly, the small win types in which the contents of the big win are set to be advantageous to the player) are not required. It should be executed so that the conditions are satisfied.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the degree of expectation for two types during the small winning game (the possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area during the small winning game when the right-handed game is continuously played) is configured to vary depending on the small winning type. By making the opening timing of 50a different according to the kind of small win won, the degree of expectation for two kinds of win during the small win game (the possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area during the small win game when the right-handed game is continuously performed) may be made different.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during the small winning game is set to a constant operation regardless of the type of the small winning, and the flow path through which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game flows down alternately establishes a first period in which the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) passes through the specific area and a second period in which the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) communicates with the other flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1). The opening timing of the V winning opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing of opening.

Furthermore, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the right hitting game can be continued by executing the same effect as the small winning game. In this case, when the special symbols are lost in the lottery of the special symbols, the fixed display time of the special symbols, that is, the period during which the lottery results of the special symbols are stopped and displayed is changed according to the type of the failure, so that the fixed display time of the special symbols can be lengthened in some cases when the lottery results of the special symbols are lost (the period until the next special symbol variation is executed can be lengthened).

Therefore, it is possible to carry out a game aiming at two kinds of wins other than the case of winning the small win game. Further, by applying the effect (pseudo small winning game effect) at the time of loss to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the above-described delay member, the right-handed game can be played more continuously.

Furthermore, the V winning device 650a may be configured to be able to set a small winning type in which an opening operation (small winning game) in which the ball cannot win a prize is executed, and when winning a small winning (disappointing small winning) of the small winning type, that is, even when a small winning game with no expectation for two types of winning is executed, the above-described (pseudo small winning game performance) may be executed.

In addition, the number of special pattern lottery results (specific loss, disappointing small win) for which the above-mentioned pseudo small winning game performance can be executed may be measured, and the time saving end condition may be established based on the measurement result. As a result, the time-saving state can be ended based on the number of times the pseudo small winning game performance is executed, so that the V winning device 650 can be made to continuously play the right-handed game in order to grasp whether or not the small winning game performance is a pseudo one, that is, to grasp whether or not the ball wins during the small winning game performance.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. FIG. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured so that a small prize can be won even in the lottery of the first special pattern, the content set as the end condition of the time saving state is different, and the content of the effect display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is different.

In the above-described first embodiment, as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is possible to set a variation number-of-times end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols and a winning-numbers end condition established based on the number of times a small win is won, and the time-saving state is ended when any one of a plurality of time-saving end conditions is met. As a result, it is made difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the time saving state is continuously set, and the player can play a game with a sense of tension during the time saving state, thereby providing a game that does not get bored.

Furthermore, since different conditions can be set according to the type of small win to be set as conditions for ending the number of times of winning, the end timing of the time saving state is made more difficult to understand. In addition, since different time-saving termination conditions can be set according to the jackpot type for which the time-saving state is set, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made even more difficult to understand.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, it is only difficult for the player to grasp the plurality of time saving end conditions set according to the game result and the time saving information updated during the time saving state.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured so that the player can arbitrarily select whether to play the right-handed game or the left-handed game in the state in which the time-saving state is set, and the easy-to-establish time-saving end conditions are differentiated according to the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game).

In the second embodiment thus configured, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in the game during the time saving state executed according to the game content selected by the player, even if the time saving end condition is met early or if the time saving state can be continued for a long time, the player can be made to think that the game is played by himself.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is configured to be able to acquire two types of hits in the same way as the first embodiment described above, and the expected value of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the expected value of acquiring two types (acquisition expected value of two types per one variation of special symbol) are made different between when the first game (left-handed game) is performed in the time-saving state and when the second game (right-handed game) is performed.

Specifically, when the first game is performed, the time-saving game in which the time-saving state is likely to continue is likely to be short-term and two types of wins are likely to be obtained during the time-saving state is performed, and when the second game is performed, the period in which the time-saving state is likely to continue is likely to be long-term (longer than the first game) and the time-saving game is performed in which it is difficult to obtain two types of wins (difficult to obtain compared to the first game) during the time-reducing state.

By constructing the machine in this way, the player can select the game contents during the time-saving state according to his/her own convenience, so that the player who wants to play the game for a long time and the player who can only play the game for a short time can play the game without dissatisfaction. A detailed description of the contents for performing a game with different game characteristics during the time saving state will be given later.

<Regarding production content in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the contents of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 82(a), the effect contents during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the display screen, the elements that are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, a comment ``enjoy your favorite game after the jackpot'' for guiding the game method in the time-saving state set after the jackpot game is finished and a comment ``jackpot end'' for notifying that the jackpot game is over are displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm.

In the sub display area Ds, there are formed a first guidance display area Dm4 showing the contents of the first game executable during the time saving state, a second guidance display area Dm5 showing the contents of the second game executable during the time saving state, and an acquisition content display area Dm9 for showing the privilege acquired during the jackpot game. In the second embodiment, the first guidance display area Dm4 displays a comment of ``Left-handed'' indicating a left-handed game as the first game executable during the time-saving state, and ``Short time game'' indicating a characteristic game property when the left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state.

In addition, in the second guidance display area Dm5, a comment of ``right hitting'' indicating a right hitting game as a second game that can be executed during the time saving state and a comment of ``relaxing game'' indicating a characteristic game property when the right hitting game is performed during the time saving state are displayed in the second guidance display region Dm5. That is, in the second embodiment, it is possible to display immediately before the time-reduction state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game) that a left-handed game in which the time-reduction state is settled in a short period of time or a right-handed game in which the time-reduction state can be enjoyed for a long period of time can be selected as a game method during the time-reduction state. Therefore, at the timing when the time saving state is set, the player can be made to play a game with an arbitrary game method.

In the present embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in characters in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5 to make it easier for the player to select a game method in the time saving state. Further, as shown in FIG. 82(a), only the major differences may be displayed in the first guide display area Dm4 and the second guide display area Dm5, and detailed contents may be displayed by selecting the first guide display area Dm4 or the second guide display area Dm5 during the display period.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate display mode to both a player who thinks that it suffices to roughly grasp the game contents that differ depending on the game method and a player who wants to grasp the details of the game contents that differ depending on the game method.

Next, with reference to FIG.82(b), the display content immediately after a time saving state was set is demonstrated. FIG.82(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen displayed immediately after a time saving state was set. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has a function of holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbols up to a predetermined number (four) as an upper limit. It is configured such that four reserved symbols Dsi are displayed.

This reserved design is similar to the reserved design of the first special design (the first reserved design Dsb to the fourth reserved design Dse) described above, and is displayed in order from the first reserved design Dsf to the fourth reserved design Dsi, that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2, in the order of reserved storage (in the order in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 that triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special design). In other words, both the first special symbol reserved pattern (Dsb to Dse) and the second special symbol reserved pattern (Dsf to Dsi) are displayed so as to gradually shift toward the executing pattern Dsa, so that the player can easily grasp the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern to be executed next from the display contents of each special pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 immediately after the time saving state is set. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether the current time saving state is to be executed in the first game (left-handed game) or in the second game (right-handed game). In addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 82(b), it is sufficient to display a display mode in the game guide display area Dm2 for indicating that the game method in the time saving state is not decided, for example, the characters "left or right" may be displayed to indicate that it is a period in which either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be played.

Although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, it is determined whether the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is entered after the time saving state is set, and the game method arbitrarily selected by the player is determined based on the determination result. Therefore, during the period from when the time saving state is set until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the character "?" is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display contents of FIG. 82(b) are continued for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time saving state is set, and the variation pattern is set so that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information held and stored when the time saving state is set during that period ends. By constructing in this way, when winning information for winning a big win is included in the reserved ball of the special pattern, the special pattern variation corresponding to the big win can be terminated before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (before the display mode for guiding the game method is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which a big win is won due to a special symbol variation on the side different from the game method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity given to the player.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the game method during the period in which the time saving state is set is configured to be displayed in the guide display area Dm2, but the currently set game method may be displayed in other display areas. That is, during the jackpot game, it is necessary to perform a display for guiding (instructing) a game method that is advantageous to the player, so it is necessary to display the display method in the guidance display area Dm2. The game method may be displayed in another area for displaying the current game method instead of m2. Further, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode (for example, the color and shape of characters) may be differentiated so that the situation in which the game method is guided (instructed) to the player and the situation in which the current game method (the game method selected by the player) is displayed can be distinguished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83(a), description will be given of the effect content when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83(a), when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 imitating a "lottery box" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a game content display 811 for guiding the player to the game content of the first game is displayed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm. Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 for suggesting the number of times the first game is finished.

In other words, in the first game (left-handed game in the time-saving state) in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery is executed in accordance with the variation (lottery) of the special symbols, and the result (1st grade to loss) is displayed as the game result display 810, thereby performing the performance display to notify the lottery result of the special symbols. In addition, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as the game method during time saving, the characters "left-handed" indicating the game method of the first game are displayed in the game guide display area Dm2.

In addition, when a specific game method (game direction) such as "left-handed" or "right-handed" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2, if a game is played in a different game method (game direction) from the displayed game method (game direction), an error notification for correcting the game method (game direction) is executed. In other words, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) is played during the time-saving state, error notification is executed when the right-handed game is performed, and after it is determined that the second game (right-handed game) is performed during the time-saving state, error notification is performed when the left-handed game is performed. In addition, during the period in which neither game method is determined in the time-saving state, error notification is not executed even if either the left-handed game or the right-handed game is played.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 that displays the reserved number of the first special symbol (number of reserved designs) and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7 that displays the reserved number of the second special symbol (number of reserved designs) are formed, and only the special design (first special design) reserved design corresponding to the game method (left-handed game) currently selected in the sub display area Ds. is displayed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). By configuring in this way, only the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of special symbols corresponding to the game method selected by the player can be emphasized and displayed (effect display).

In addition, since the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special pattern is configured to be displayed in a dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7, the correct number of reserved patterns (number of reserved balls) for each special pattern can be notified to the player. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83(a), the current reserved number "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7 in a size that can be easily identified by the player.

Then, when the effect display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83(a) is executed, the lottery result is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the remaining number of times of shortening of time for suggesting the number of times of shortening of time is updated and displayed in the number of times of shortening of time based on the progress of each value (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of wins of the small prize) for the time saving end condition. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game during the time saving state by grasping the lottery result and the display contents of the time saving number display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a character 812 imitating a boy searches for a treasure box 813 for notifying the special symbol lottery result, and the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of special symbols (second special symbols) corresponding to the selected game method (right-handed game) is displayed in the secondary display region Ds2. In addition, the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. It should be noted that the content of the effect executed when this right-handed game is selected is different from the content of the effect in the above-described first embodiment except for the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the effects executed when the right-handed game is selected in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, contents different from the effects of the first embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the game screen when the right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the second embodiment, it is configured to display the presence or absence of establishment of the time saving end condition for the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, or the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. In FIG. Aspect 821 is displayed.

The advance notice display mode set for each reserved symbol is selected and displayed using a reserved display selection table 222aa, which will be described later.

Thus, by displaying the advance notice display mode for the reserved patterns, the player predicts the special pattern variation that ends the time-saving state, and plays the game eagerly to win a big hit until the special pattern variation is executed. Also, based on the content of the advance notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time saving state does not end, and to execute the special symbol variation without anxiety.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, game contents during the time saving state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 schematically shows the game content during the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type among the game contents during the time saving state in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is configured so as to be able to win a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol in contrast to the above-described first embodiment, and the first special symbol is configured to be easier to win a small winning game (a small winning game executed corresponding to the small winning A) than the second special symbol.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the above-described first embodiment is used, and when the time saving state is set, the opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is varied so that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 more easily than in the normal state. In other words, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, more balls than in the normal state are entered into the second ball entrance 640, and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be executed more. On the other hand, even if the time-saving state is set, the ease with which a ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 does not change from the normal state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, description will be given while comparing the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are game contents during the time saving state. First, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the time saving state (the number of prize balls that can be obtained by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) will be described. The number of prize balls in this time saving state is configured to be larger in the second game than in the first game. When the first game is played during the time saving state, only the same number of prize balls as in the case where the normal state is set can be obtained, and the game in which the number of balls (holding balls) decreases during the time saving state is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is performed, many balls can be entered into the second ball entrance 640, so many prize balls can be obtained, and as a result, the game of keeping the balls (holding balls) during the time-saving state is executed.

The period during which the time saving state can be continuously set is shorter when the first game is performed than when the second game is performed. Specifically, among a plurality of time-saving end conditions, there are at least a variation number-of-times end condition established when the number of variations of the first special symbol reaches 30 times and a variation number-of-times end condition established when the number of times of variation of the second special symbol reaches 80 times as a variation number of times end condition established based on the number of variations of the special symbol among a plurality of time-saving end conditions.

Further, the degree of expectation for winning a big win (including one type and two types) for one special pattern variation (lottery) executed during the time saving state is higher (larger) when the first game is performed than when the second game is performed. To explain the degree of expectation for winning the big win, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the big win (probability of winning per type) is the same (1/200) between the first special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery executed when the first game is executed) and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery executed when the second game is executed). In other words, the first game and the second game are configured so that the degree of expectation for winning two types of hits is different.

To explain this point in detail, the probability of winning a small prize is set to 1/10 in the lottery of the first special pattern executed during the first game, and the probability of winning the small prize is set to 1/2 in the lottery of the second special pattern executed during the second game. The distribution of the small prize types set when winning the small prize is set so that the ratio of small prize A:small prize B becomes 9:1 when the small prize is won in the lottery of the first special pattern. In other words, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by the first game, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, when a small win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by differentiating the probability of winning the small prize and the sorting of the small prize types set when the small prize is won, the first game is configured to have a higher expectation of winning the big prize (including one type and two types) based on the variation (lottery) of one special pattern than the second game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established when the first game is executed and the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established when the second game is executed are set differently. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is established when the small win A is won once is most likely to be established, followed by the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches 30 times, and the time-saving end condition that is established when the small win B is won three times are set to be less likely to be established in this order.

When the second game is executed, the time saving end condition which is established when the small win D is won 20 times is most likely to be established, the time saving end condition which is established when the number of variations of the second special pattern reaches 80 times, and the time reduction end condition which is established when the small prize A is won once are set to be less likely to be established in this order.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, so that games with different game characteristics can be executed.

In addition, as different game properties, a game property of aiming for a big win in a short period of time (first game) and a game property of aiming for a big win in a long period of time (second game) can be selected. In addition, as a technique for differentiating the game method, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set so that different time-saving end conditions are likely to be satisfied when the first game is played and when the second game is played. Thereby, the period in which the time saving state is continuously set can be made different between the first game and the second game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92, the details of the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed, and that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning random number 2 table 202aa is replaced with the first winning type selection table 202b, the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with the time reduction grant table 202e, and the time reduction grant 2 table 202a is changed. e is different from the above-described first embodiment in that an open scenario 2 table 202ag is provided instead of a small hit type selection 2 table 202af and an open scenario table 202g instead of a small hit type selection table 202f.

The first winning random number 2 table 202aa differs from the first winning random number table 202a of the above-described first embodiment in that the value (first winning random number counter value C1) for determining small winning is changed. Here, the first per random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the first winning random number 2 table 202aa has a special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. This special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the above-described first embodiment in that a value for determining a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa defines "10 to 109" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 as the small winning judgment value. That is, when determining (executing) the special symbol lottery using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when performing the lottery of the first special symbol), it is determined as a big win at a rate of 1/200 and a small win at a rate of 1/10.

Next, referring to FIG. 87(c), the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described. FIG. 87(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87(c), the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 defines "0 to 4" as the big hit determination value and "5 to 499" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 as the small hit determination value. That is, when determining (executing) the special symbol lottery result using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when executing the lottery of the second special symbol), it is determined to be a big win at a rate of 1/200 and a small win at a rate of 1/2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is constructed so that a small prize can be won in both cases, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Thus, even if the first game (left-handed game) for executing the lottery for the first special pattern is executed during the time-saving state, or the second game (right-handed game) for executing the lottery for the second special pattern is executed, it is possible to establish the condition for ending the number of wins, which is established based on the number of times the small win is won.

Moreover, since the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the first special pattern and the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special pattern can be set differently, the easiness of establishment of the conditions for ending the number of winning times can be differentiated between the first game and the second game. Therefore, it is possible to provide various games in which the easiness of ending the time saving state is different between when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 86(a), the description is continued. The first winning type selection 2 table 202ab differs from the first winning type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of the time saving state given to some jackpot types is changed, and the other elements are the same. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) to (c). Fig. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per type selection 2 table 202ab, Fig. 88 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, Fig. 88 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab has a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2 corresponding to the second special symbol. Various tables are used according to the corresponding special symbol.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 defines "jackpot A" as the jackpot type with the value of the acquired first hit type counter value C2 in the range of "0 to 9", defines "jackpot B" as the jackpot type in the range of "10 to 49", and defines "jackpot B" as the jackpot type in the range of "50 to 99". Hit C” is defined.

The ``jackpot A'' stipulated here is a jackpot type in which a round game executes 15 rounds of jackpot games, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the round game is 5 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. The ``jackpot C'' is a jackpot type of 5 rounds of a round game, and when the game state at the time of winning (setting) is the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the game state at the time of winning (setting) is the time saving state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the second embodiment has a jackpot type (jackpot C) defined so that the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is different according to the game state when the jackpot is won. As a result, the player can be made conscious of whether or not the big win is won and the type of the big win to be set, as well as the game state at the time of winning, so that the game can be made more complicated and early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

Next, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the value of the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", and "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad differs from the variation pattern table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in that the specified contents of the variation pattern selected during the period in which the time saving state is set are different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 included in the variation pattern 2 table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 89(a), the variation pattern 2 table 202ad has a normal variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and a time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 that is referred to when the time saving state is set. It is configured to set a pattern (fluctuation time).

Next, with reference to FIG. 89(b), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be described. This time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 differs from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment in that it is configured to set a variation pattern (variation time) in which a specific time is defined for special symbol variations (special symbol variations) for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big win (after the end of the big win game).

Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big win, the total time of 1 to 4 special symbol changes after the end of the big win is constant (3 seconds) even when the variation of any special symbol is executed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a selection display (see FIG. 82(b)) for allowing the player to select the game method set during the time saving state is displayed until a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved symbol) that has already been acquired when entering the time saving state can be easily executed during the period in which the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the variation of the special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) different from the special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol) mainly executed by the game method (for example, the left-handed game) selected during the time saving state is executed. It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set when a win (big win or small win) is won during the 1st to 4th spins after the end of the big win is changed according to the number of times the special symbols fluctuate after the end of the big win. The timing of stop-displaying that the lottery result of the special pattern of the rotating eye is a win is all set to be constant.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a selection display screen (see FIG. 82(b)) displayed when the time saving state is set for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the special symbol lottery result, and use the period during which the selection display screen is displayed to digest the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) corresponding to many reserved balls.

Further, when a win (small win, big win) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific variation pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set, so that when a win is won within a predetermined period after the end of the big win (within a predetermined number of special symbol variations (within 1 to 4 rotations)), the timing of informing the player of the winning result (timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating that the winning has been won). ) is constant.

In the second embodiment, a variation pattern table for selecting a special variation pattern is used for the variation pattern set in the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed four times. However, for the period when the special variation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used. A special variation pattern may be selectable for the corresponding number of times of special symbol variation (8 times), or a period from when the time saving state is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed twice may be targeted. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when winning a prize, a variation pattern dedicated to winning is set, but it may be configured to determine whether or not to set a variation pattern dedicated to winning based on the contents of the winning, and to set the variation pattern based on the determination result.

Specifically, only when winning a big win and when winning a small win set with a small win A (that is, a small win with a small win type that makes it easier to obtain two types of wins than other small win types), a variation pattern dedicated to winning may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the player who notices that the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern (variation time) different from the normal one is executed have a great sense of expectation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89(b), as a variation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol variation after the 5th rotation (including the 5th rotation) after the time saving state is set, the first special symbol is configured to set a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. As a result, if the variation of the special symbols can be continuously executed in the time saving state, the game (first game, left-handed game) that varies the first special symbols can execute lottery (variation) of the special symbols in a short period.

In addition, in FIG. 89 (b), as the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 that is referred to when the time saving state is set, the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol variations) is the 5th rotation or later (including the 5th rotation). is configured to select one of a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times, but detailed description thereof is omitted.

Thus, even in the variation pattern table configured to select one variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a shorter variation time than the second special symbol is easily set. Therefore, if the variation of the special symbols can be executed continuously in the time saving state, the game (first game, left-handed game) that varies the first special symbols can execute lottery (variation) of the special symbols in a short period. In addition, in all of the selectable variation patterns, the variation pattern with a short variation time is easily set, in addition to the case where the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the second special symbol, the variation time of the most easily selected variation pattern is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol. A configuration is also included in which the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the special symbol is set to be shorter than the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the second special symbol. That is, when the player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations per unit time should be set so that the first game (left-handed game) executing the fluctuation of the first special pattern is larger than the second special pattern.

The time saving 2 table 202ae is different from the time saving giving table 202e of the first embodiment described above in that the time saving end conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type are different, and the type of counter that sets the value as the time saving end condition is changed (increased). Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the time saving provision 2 table 202ae will be described with reference to FIG. 88(d). FIG.88(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction provision 2 table 202ae. This time saving 2 table 202ae is different from the above-described time saving giving table 202e in that the special figure 1 counter 203ad instead of the time saving medium counter 203k, the special figure 2 counter 203ae, and the small winning D counter 203ac instead of the small winning C counter 203p are provided, and the values to be set (given) for various counters are different.

As described above, the second embodiment is configured so that the player can select the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game) as a plurality of games with different game characteristics during the time saving state, and the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied among the plurality of end conditions (time saving end conditions) for ending the time saving state when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88(d), when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "100", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is set to "100", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "100". When the hit type is "jackpot B", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is set to "80", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20".

In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to 40, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is set to "70", the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "5", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40". "30" to the value of ad, "80" to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae, "1" to the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "3" to the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "20" to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac.

That is, when the time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the "jackpot A" is set, when the first game is executed, the time saving end condition is most likely to be established by winning the small hit A twice (the value of the small win A counter 203m becomes 0). By becoming), the time-saving end condition that is established becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be established.

In addition, when a time saving state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the "jackpot B" is set, when the first game is executed, the time saving end condition that is established by winning the small win A once (because the value of the small win A counter 203m becomes 0) becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be established, and when the second game is executed, by winning the small win D 20 times (because the value of the small win counter 203ac becomes 0). The end condition becomes the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

When the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the "jackpot C" is set, when the first game is executed, the time-saving end condition is most likely to be established by winning the small hit A twice (by the value of the small win A counter 203m becoming 0). ) The established time-saving end condition is the most likely to be established time-saving end condition, and when the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the “jackpot D” is set, the same time-saving state (time-saving end condition) as the above-mentioned “jackpot B” is set.

In other words, in a state in which the time saving state is set, by making the game method to be executed (selected) different (according to the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)), it is possible to differentiate the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be established. Therefore, the player can be made to play a different game as a game during the time saving state.

Further, the conditions for shortening time (values set in various counters) are differentiated according to the type of jackpot that is won, and the conditions for shortening time, which are likely to be established when the same game (for example, a right-handed game) is played during shortening of time, are differentiated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are provided as jackpot types set when winning a jackpot, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of jackpot types having the same game contents (opening period, number of round games, interval period between rounds, ending period) of the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won, and to make the time-saving end conditions different for each jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving state (the content of the time saving end condition) set after the jackpot game ends based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(d), the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied in a shorter period when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. Thereby, the 1st game can shorten the period (time shortening) during which the time saving state is continuously set.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured to make it easier to win a small win (a small win A is set as a small win type) by executing the first game than by executing the second game. By constructing in this way, the first game can be a game that provides the player with the game property of aiming for two wins in a short period of time, and the second game can be a game that provides the player with the game property of aiming for one win in a long time period.

Therefore, by the player selecting a game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time saving state, games with different game characteristics can be executed, and the game can be provided to the player without getting bored. In addition, in the second embodiment, since the game period during the time saving state is differentiated between the first game and the second game, the player can select a game method according to the playable period, and suitable games can be provided to various players.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, no matter which game method is selected during the time-saving state, the probability of winning a big win in the time-saving state (the probability of winning a big win by lottery of special symbols and the probability of a ball passing through a specific area during the small-winning game and winning a big win) are made substantially the same (including an error that the player does not notice (for example, an error of 10% or less)), so that any player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the second embodiment, no matter which jackpot type is set, in the first game and the second game, the time-saving end condition is set so that the player does not have an advantage or disadvantage, but as another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, the time-saving end condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It may be configured to set the time saving end condition so that the game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

By configuring in this way, a game method advantageous to the player can be set according to the set jackpot type (executed jackpot game), so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the game method (first game, second game) advantageous to the player is differentiated according to the type of jackpot, it should be configured such that when all the types of jackpot are set in consideration of a predetermined distribution rate, the player is not disadvantaged or advantageous when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed. As a result, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from always selecting only one game method.

In addition, storage means for storing the jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, the period after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) may be provided, and notification means for notifying (displaying) the contents (time saving history) stored in the storage means to the player may be provided. Thereby, based on the time saving state set in the past, the time saving state to be set in the future can be predicted, and the game method can be selected. In addition, it is also possible to notify the player of a suggestion mode suggesting a game method that is advantageous to the player by using the performance display (jackpot performance display) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. The small winning type selection 2 table 202af differs from the small winning type selection table 202f of the first embodiment in that it is possible to win a small winning even in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and that the probability of winning a small winning is different in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 90 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small per type selection 2 table 202af, Figure 90 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table 202af1, Figure 90 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small per type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202af has a special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1 and a special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2 that are referred to when executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2).

Special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the range of the value of the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is "0 to 89", "small hit A" as the small hit type, "90 to 99", "small hit B" is defined as the small hit type.

Here, the small win type "small win A" is the same as the "small win A" of the first embodiment described above, and "jackpot A" is set as the big win type to be set (executed) when passing V (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, when two types of wins are obtained). The "small win B" is the same as the "small win B" of the first embodiment described above, and the "jackpot B" is set as the big win type set (executed) when passing V (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, when two types of wins are won).

In addition, the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the value of the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is "0", "small hit A" as the small hit type, "1 to 99", "small hit D" is defined as the small hit type.

Here, the small winning type "small winning D" is a small winning type in which a small winning game with the lowest expectation for winning two types among a plurality of small winning types (about 5%) is executed, and "big winning B" is set as a big winning type set (executed) when passing V (when a ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game, when winning two types). In other words, it is the most disadvantageous small win for the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag is different from the opening scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that the opening scenario corresponding to the small win C is defined instead of the opening scenario corresponding to the small win C, and the rest is the same. The open scenario corresponding to the small win D is different from the open scenario corresponding to the small win C in that the ON period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened to make it more difficult to pass V (passage of the ball to the specific area), and that the open scenario set at the time of passing V (when acquiring two types) is changed from 15 rounds to 5 rounds. Therefore, detailed illustration is omitted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86(b). FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(b), the RAM 203 of the second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a small winning D counter 203ac is provided instead of the small winning C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, a special figure 1 counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the first implementation failure described above for the second special symbol. It is variably set when the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols is executed.

The small hit D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit D is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is established, and in the big hit control processing 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 98: Yes), the value defined in the time saving 2 table 202ae. is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small winning time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small winning start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), when it is determined that the small winning type won this time is small winning D, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (not shown). When it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state. In addition, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset). Thus, even when a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (fifth time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small winning D counter 203ac is satisfied among a plurality of time saving ending conditions, the value of the small winning D counter 203ac is set to 0 (reset), so that the process of subtracting the value of the small winning D counter 203ac is continued despite the end of the time saving state. In addition, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to initial values (0), so that the processing after the time saving state is ended can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, a value corresponding to the number of times of variation of the first special symbol set as an end condition for ending the time saving state is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol fluctuates during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the period when the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, a value corresponding to the number of times of variation of the second special symbol set as an end condition for ending the time saving state is set, and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol varies during the time saving state. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, as the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol A time saving end condition established based on is provided. Thus, when the first game (the game in which only the first special pattern is varied) or the second game (the game in which only the second special pattern is varied) are executed, the dedicated time-saving end conditions can be established.

In the second embodiment, by providing the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 202ae, it is configured to measure the number of times of variation of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol. (e.g., special figure 1 counter 203ae) for measuring either the number of times of variation of the first special symbol or the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (e.g., equivalent to time saving medium counter 203k in the form).

By constructing in this manner, two counters can be used to manage the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the end condition established based on the combined number of fluctuations of the special symbols as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols among the time-saving end conditions. In order to achieve the same effect, the value measured by the special figure 1 counter 203ae of the second embodiment (value subtracted) and the value measured by the special figure 2 counter 203af (value subtracted) may be added to calculate the total number of fluctuations.

Next, contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the ROM 222 of the second embodiment differs from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26(a)) of the first embodiment described above in that a pending display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the RAM 223 of the second embodiment deletes the provisional hit determination flag 223h, the provisional time saving end flag 223j, the time saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-ending condition flag 223m, the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa, and the right hitting flag 223ab. , a left-handed flag 223ac, a time-saving start flag 223ad, and a time-saving counter 223ae. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 91(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The reserved display selection table 222aa refers to the reserved symbols (see FIG. 84(a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the reserved balls of the special symbols obtained during the time saving state, and is referred to when selecting the display mode (see FIG. 84(a)) for notifying the player of the preliminary determination result of the winning information for the reserved symbols, and whether the time saving state ends (update status of the time saving end condition) and the adequacy determination result of the special symbol. is suggested (notified) to the player in advance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the contents defined in the pending display selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, the same display mode as the state display mode set for the special symbol variation being executed in the first embodiment described above is configured to execute a pending mode effect that is set for the pending symbol (see FIG. 84).

The pending display selection table 222aa is a table referred to when selecting the display mode of the pending mode effect, and various pending display modes are defined based on the provisional time saving information stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (time saving information provisionally updated based on the result of the look-ahead process) and the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o. Note that the values indicating the pending display modes described in the pending display selection table 222aa are the same as the state display modes of the first embodiment described above, and the display modes shown with reference to FIG.

When the contents defined in the pending display selection table 222aa are specifically explained, the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information corresponding to the current process is "jackpot", and the information indicating the big win (existing winning information) is not stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (existing winning information "none"), and the time saving end is completed. When pre-end information indicating that a precondition is satisfied is stored (pre-end information ``yes''), the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is specified in the range of '0 to 69' with the pending display mode '3' and in the range of '70 to 99' with the pending display mode '9'.

In addition, in the case where the current winning/failure determination result is ``big win'', the information before the end is ``none'', and the value of the state effect counter 223o is ``0 to 49'', ``3'' is defined in the range of ``0 to 49'', ``1'' in the range of ``50 to 69'', and ``9'' in the range of ``70 to 99''.

Further, when the hit information is ``yes'', regardless of the presence or absence of the information of the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as ``-'' in which the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69'' in which the reserved display mode is not set, and in the range of ``70 to 99'', the reserved display mode is ``9''.

In this way, the winning information corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the reserved display mode is to be set this time and the winning information already stored in the provisional time saving information update area 223i (winning information acquired earlier than the winning information to be targeted this time) are included in the winning information and the winning information obtained earlier than the winning information to be targeted this time). can be

Therefore, when the reservation display mode which is likely to end the time saving state is displayed, the game can be motivated to win a big win before the reservation display mode is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to set a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the sudden end of the time saving state in a game machine in which the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is difficult to understand, and to suppress the execution of a game that gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

Next, when the current win/loss determination result is "small hit A", the previous winning information is "no", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as "5" in the range of "0 to 49", "5" in the range of "50 to 69", "9" in the range of "70 to 99", and "9" in the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the state effect counter 223o is "no". The reserved display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the reserved display mode "7" in the range of "50 to 69", and "9" in the range of "70 to 99".

Further, when the hit information is ``yes'', regardless of the presence or absence of the information of the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as ``-'' in which the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69'' in which the reserved display mode is not set, and in the range of ``70 to 99'', the reserved display mode is ``9''.

On the other hand, when the current winning/failure determination result is "small hits B, D", the information before the end is "no", the information before the end is "yes", the value of the state effect counter 223o defines the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 49" as the pending display mode "5", the range of the value of the state effect counter 223o as "6" in the range of "50 to 69", the pending display mode "6" in the range of "70 to 99" and the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "no". In the range of "0-49", the reserved display mode "2" is defined, in the range of "50-69" the reserved display mode "4", and in the range of "70-99" "9".

Further, when the hit information is ``yes'', regardless of the presence or absence of the information of the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as ``-'' in which the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69'' in which the reserved display mode is not set, and in the range of ``70 to 99'', the reserved display mode is ``9''.

When the current winning/failure determination result is "miss", the hit information is "none", and the pre-end information is "yes", the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined to be "1" in the range of "0 to 49", "4" in the range of "50 to 69", "9" in the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the state effect counter 223o is "none", and the value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 69". , and '9' is defined in the range of '70 to 99'.

Further, when the hit information is ``yes'', regardless of the presence or absence of the information of the change before the end, the value of the state effect counter 223o is defined as ``-'' in which the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of ``0 to 69'' in which the reserved display mode is not set, and in the range of ``70 to 99'', the reserved display mode is ``9''.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the pending display selection table 222aa is described so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the situation display mode in the first embodiment. In addition, when the winning prize information obtained earlier includes the information (result of winning/failure judgment) of winning the jackpot, the display modes that can be set (selected) for subsequent reserved patterns are restricted (only the reserved display mode "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected). Therefore, when it is configured to select and display a reserved display mode for each of a plurality of reserved symbols, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode is configured to vary with a high probability for the acquired winning information (reserved pattern), but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to have a determination means for determining whether or not to actually display the pending display mode selected in the pending display selection table 222aa, and to vary the display mode of the pending pattern according to the determination result of the determination means, and the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o may be changed. , a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39") may be configured so that the pending display mode is not selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the future game content (whether or not the time saving state has been completed, whether or not a jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped only by the display mode of the reserved symbols.

Furthermore, regardless of the information included in the acquired winning information (reserved pattern), the reserved display mode "9" is selected at a predetermined probability, so that future game contents (whether or not the time saving state is completed, or whether or not a jackpot is won) can be suppressed from being easily grasped only by the display mode of the reserved pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa is a counter for updating the reserved ball number of the second special symbol in accordance with the contents indicated by the command when receiving a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110. The detailed configuration is the same as the configuration of the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a except that the target command is changed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The right-handed flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to perform a right-handed game (second game), and is set to ON to indicate that it is a period for performing a right-handed game (second game). This right hitting flag 223ab is, in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100), when the received winning information is not special figure 1 (first special symbol) related winning information (that is, special figure 2 (second special symbol) related winning information) (S3002 in FIG. 101 (a): No) , is set to on.

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the pending display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

The left-handed flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to execute a right-handed game (second game), and when set to ON, indicates that it is a period for executing a left-handed game (first game). This left-handed flag 223ac, in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100), is set to ON when the received winning information is determined to be special figure 1 (first special symbol) related winning information (S3002 in FIG. 101(a): Yes).

Then, it is referred to in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the pending display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set can be selected by adjusting the direction in which the player actually shoots the ball. The game method selected by the player is determined as an appropriate game method during the time saving state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined as an inappropriate game method during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) arranged in the left-handed area (area where the ball can flow down (pass) when performing a left-handed game) or the second ball entrance 640 arranged in the right-handed area (area where the ball can flow down (pass) when performing a right-handed game). It is configured to determine by analyzing the award command and determine an appropriate game method during the time saving state based on the determination result, but it is sufficient to determine whether or not an appropriate game is being played in the state where the time saving state is set, and to execute an error notification when the appropriate game is not being played. A configuration other than the configuration of the second embodiment may be used.

For example, an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided, and a game method in the time saving state is selected by operating the operation means during a jackpot game or during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and an appropriate game method is set when a ball passes through a game area corresponding to the game method selected by the operation means. As a result, the game method desired by the player can be set as an appropriate game method more reliably.

Also, while the time saving state is set, the player may variably set an appropriate game method. By structuring in this way, the game method is changed while predicting the update status of the time saving end condition, so that the player can be made to actively play the selection game (the game for setting the game method) so as to achieve a more advantageous time saving state. In this case, it is preferable to set the fact that the game method is to be varied by operating the operation means so that any game (first game, second game) executed during the game method variable period is not determined as an inappropriate game. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation for changing the game method during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters a specific ball entrance, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of the ball entrance into which the ball entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent a wrong game method from being set by causing a ball to be shot into a game area corresponding to an undesired game method due to an erroneous operation.

The time saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time saving state has been set as the game state, and indicates that the time saving state has been set by being set to ON. This time saving flag 223AD is determined that the command judgment processing 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) is determined to have received a time -saving command (S2215: YES), and the received time -saving command is the time -saving configuration information (information indicating that the time -saving status has been set). When it is determined, it is set to on and on (S2253 in FIG. 99) (S2253 in FIG. 99).

Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and when it is determined to be ON, the value of the time saving counter 223ae described later is set to 4000 (S3302 in FIG. 104), and the flag is set to OFF (S3303 in FIG. 104). In other words, the time saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time saving state has been set on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and only when it is set to ON, dedicated processing (processing to be executed only when the time saving state is set) is executed.

The time-saving counter 223ae is a counter for continuing the elapsed period (elapsed time) after the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a predetermined value is set, and by subtracting the value, the elapsed time after the time-saving state is set is determined. When it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104) in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104), a value of 4000 is set to the time saving time counter 223ae (S3302).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the game flow in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 and FIG. 28 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal game state (during the normal state), a left-handed game is performed and a special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is performed. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, after the jackpot ends, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state (normal game), the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 (it is difficult to do so). As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery (game) for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol in the time-saving state. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second special design winning information (the winning information obtained when the ball is entered at the 2nd entrance 640) is not holding and memory, so, for example, in a time -saving state (in a state where electricity 640a is easily operated in the protruding position), the second special pattern of the prize memories are retained and the holding memory is retained. There is no lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern in the normal state based on the winning information. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, so that a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special pattern, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area) to start the big winning game. In this embodiment, when a big winning game is set (executed) via a small winning game, after the big winning game ends, a time saving state is set as a gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, a small winning game with different possibilities (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting the ball) of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is executed according to the small winning classification (small winning A to C) set when winning the small winning by lottery of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player (game state more advantageous than the normal state), the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) When the number of fluctuations (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times), the end condition of the number of fluctuations (first time saving end condition) and the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) As a result of the lottery, the win was won. A condition for ending the number of times of operation (second time saving condition) established when the number of times (the number of times of operation of the V winning device 650 operated based on the winning of the small prize) reaches the specified number of operations is set.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning.

Then, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is established, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (one type is won), or the special symbol lottery is won. set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, if either the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) or the second time saving end condition (end condition according to the small winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied before winning one or two types, the game state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time saving state (possibility of fulfilling the second time saving end condition) and the possibility of obtaining two types of wins when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern executed when the time saving state is set. Therefore, the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the time-saving state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By constructing in this way, in a state in which a normal state is set as a game state, that is, a state in which a left-handed game is played, a jackpot is won when the number of reserved balls (retained memory number) of the first special pattern is the upper limit number (4), and even if the player wins the jackpot, even if the player wins the jackpot in the ``first special pattern variation (lottery) during the time-saving state'' that can be executed when the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. can be suppressed from being provided to

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
The control processing in the second embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. FIG. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) is changed to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 94), and the time saving number update processing 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation processing. 44), the prefetching process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed. Furthermore, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). This special symbol variation process 2 differs from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above in that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired and the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the time saving number update process.

When this special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are acquired (S251), and the acquired special figure. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the handle 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (S253), and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by calculation is set (S254). After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the processing of S206 to S210 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), the processing of S211 to S213 is executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment. In the process of S213, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S213: Yes), the processes from S214 to S218 are executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), and this process ends.

In the processing of S213, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), instead of the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment, time saving number update processing 2 is executed (S271). This time saving frequency update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time saving frequency and setting the game state to the normal state, similarly to the time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 42). The details of this time saving frequency update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) ends, this process ends after executing the processes of S220, S221 and S218 in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the time reduction number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving frequency update process 2 (S271). This time saving number update process 2 (S271) is different from the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above in that the number of time saving times is subtracted even for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. Other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes of S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. When the processing of S602 is finished, it is determined whether the variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (S651). If it is determined that the variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is subtracted by 1 (S652), and the process proceeds to S653. On the other hand, in the process of S651, if it is determined that the current variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (that is, the variation of the special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is subtracted by 1 (S654), and the process proceeds to S653.

In the process of S653, set the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of various counters (S653), then the value of any one of the time reduction counter 203k, special figure 1 counter 203ad and special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 or not (S655). When it is determined that none of the values of the time saving counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are not 0 (S655: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S655, if it is determined that the value of any one of the time saving counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the processing of S605 to S607 is performed in the same manner as the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S155) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S155). In this starting winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the second ball entrance 640, and if there is a starting winning to the second ball entrance 640, processing for holding the values indicated by various random number counters and processing for prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol from the values shown by the reserved various random number counters are added. Also, the difference is that the prefetching process 2 is executed instead of the prefetching process (see FIG. 44).

When the starting winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same manner as the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the processing from S704 to S706 described above is executed.

When the processing of S706 is completed, it is next determined whether the present time is during time saving or during a special symbol jackpot (S751). If it is determined that the current time is during time saving or during the special symbol jackpot (S751: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of S751, when it is determined that the present time is not during time saving and during the special symbol jackpot (S751: No), prefetching process 2 (S752) is executed, and the process proceeds to S753.

In the process of S701, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not detected (S701: No), when there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b is the maximum value of 4 (S703: No), and when the process of S752 ends, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the process of S753. It is determined whether or not the ball has been hit (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, if there is no entry into the second ball entrance 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to look-ahead processing 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the same manner as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the process of S705, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) described above executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa of the RAM 223.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S757, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (special figure 2 reserved first area to special figure 2 reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa of RAM 203 (S758). In the process of S758, as in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reserved second area, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, when the process of S758 ends, the process proceeds to the prefetching process 2 (S752) and ends this process.

Next, contents of the prefetching process 2 (S752) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 2 (S752). The look-ahead processing 2 (S752) in the second embodiment refers to the first random number table 202a, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2) that are referred to when there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64, in contrast to the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above. 202aa, special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, and variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving variation pattern table 202ad2) are referred to, and the addition of prefetching of the lottery result in the second special design is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prefetching process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the process of S801, which is the same as the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above, is executed. In the process of S801, if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S851: Yes), special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, special figure 1 small per type selection 2 table 202af1, and variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time reduction variation pattern table 202ad2) based on the lottery result, jackpot type, small winning type , and the variation pattern is acquired in advance (S852).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process proceeds to S854. On the other hand, in the process of S851, even if there is no new winning at the first ball entrance 64 (S851: No), the process proceeds to S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning at the second ball entrance 640 (S854: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: Yes), special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, and fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2) based on the lottery result, jackpot type, small hit Types and fluctuation patterns are acquired in advance (S855).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern obtained in the process of S855 is set (S856), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed in place of the above-described jackpot control process (see FIG. 52).

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above are executed, and in the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the time of winning the jackpot is during the time saving (S1651). When it is determined that the jackpot winning is during working hours (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to S1653. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time of winning the jackpot is not during time saving (that is, it is in the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was jackpot C (5R no time saving jackpot) (S1652).

If it is determined that the jackpot winning is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and if it is determined that it is not the jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) in the processing of S1652 (S1613: No), or if it is determined that the jackpot winning is during the time saving in the processing of S1651 (S1651: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to each jackpot type is set to the time-saving end condition 2 table 202ae (Fig. 88(d)) (S1653).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot winning is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and when it is determined in the process of S1652 that it is the jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot) (S1652: Yes), or when the process of S1653 ends, the same processes as S1617 to S1620 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) described above are executed, and this process ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105, control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, command determination processing (see FIG. 56) is replaced with command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 99), winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) is replaced with winning information related processing 2 (see FIG. 100), variable display setting processing (see FIG. 62) is replaced with variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 103), and effect setting processing (see FIG. 63) is replaced with effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 104). 105(a)), detailed description of the update processing of various counters (see FIG. 105(a)), and detailed description of effect update processing (see FIG. 105(b)). The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2163). This command determination process 2 (S2163) is the same as the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above in that the process to be executed when the winning information command is received from the main controller 110 is changed from the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) to the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), and the content of the process to be executed when the time saving related command is received is changed. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2163 of FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as the command determination process (S2113 of FIG. 56) of the first embodiment are executed. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is the winning information command (S2209: Yes), the winning information related process 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process proceeds to S2217. Details of the winning information related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the winning information command (S2209: No), then the same S2211 to S2215 processing as the command determination processing (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and in the processing of S2215, if it is determined that the command received this time is a time-saving related command (S2215: Yes), then when it is received It is determined whether or not the content of the short-related command is time saving setting information, that is, information transmitted from the main controller 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is the time saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2217. In addition, in the process of S2254, the value used as time saving end conditions is set to various counters based on the information contained in the time saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, when a command containing time-saving setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of the jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot B (a command indicating time-saving information corresponding to the content set in S1614 of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98)) is received, referring to the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", and the small hit A The value of the counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20" (see FIG. 88(d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the description continues. After completing the processing of S2254, the processing of S2217 is then executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information included in the time saving related command received this time is not the time saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the time saving related command received this time is the time saving information corresponding to the time saving end condition (the number of fluctuations and the number of small winnings) is updated (close to the time saving end condition) If it is information (time saving update information), the information on the time saving end condition is already set, and the time saving game is started, the process of S2253 for setting the time saving start flag to ON is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2254.

In the process of S2254 in this case, the time saving update information is read out of the plurality of information included in the time saving related command received this time, and the process of updating the target working time saving information is executed. In addition, when the content indicated by the time saving information after updating indicates that the remaining period until the time saving end condition is satisfied is shorter than a predetermined period, that fact is stored in the time saving information update area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the winning information related process 2 (S2251) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information related process 2 (S2251). This winning information related process 2 (S2251) is different from the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above in that the content of the process for setting the display mode indicating the updated content of the time saving information based on the winning information is different, and the processing for setting the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is added. Since other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning information related process 2 (S2251) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f (information indicating the currently set game state) is read (S2301), and it is determined whether the game state indicated by the read information indicates a time saving state (whether it is a time saving state) (S2302). By the processing of S2302, if it is determined that the present is not in the time saving (S2302: No), the same processing as S2312 of the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the currently set game state is the time saving state (S2302: Yes), then the game state setting process is executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game), and executes processing for setting an appropriate game in the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S2351, next, the game content determination processing is executed (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) executes a process for determining whether an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 101(b). After the process of S2352 is completed, the pending display setting process is subsequently executed (S2353), the process proceeds to the process of S2311, and the process ends.

The pending display setting process (S2353) is for setting the display mode of the pending symbol to be displayed corresponding to the winning information command received this time, based on the winning information included in the winning information command received this time. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101(a), the contents of the game state setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 of the figure 100) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state setting process (S2351). In this game state setting process (S2351), processing for setting a game method (game direction) to be executed during the current time saving state is executed based on the winning information included in the winning information command first received after the time saving state is set.

When the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). This time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON when it is determined that the time saving setting information is received in the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), that is, when a new time saving state is set (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the processing of S3001, it is determined whether the state is immediately after the time saving state is set.

In the process of S3001, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), then the winning information received this time is special figure 1 related (winning information for showing the lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol) (S3002), and if it is determined to be special figure 1 related (S3002: Yes), in the state where the time saving state is set, in the left hitting area Since it indicates that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3003), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3004), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to the special figure 1 (related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No), it indicates that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 arranged in the right-handed area in the state where the time saving state is set, so the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3004. and then terminate this process. Moreover, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON in the process of S3001 (it is set to OFF) (S3001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the second embodiment, the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON from the time the time saving state is set until the first winning information command is received, and while the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the ball is shot to the area (right-handed area, left-handed area) where the ball entrance is arranged. It is set to be an appropriate game in the middle, and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF.

As a result, the timing for setting the game method during the time saving state can be limited to the period during which the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(b), the contents of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 101(b) is a flow chart showing the content of the game content determination process (S2352). In this game content determination processing (S2352), it is determined whether or not the winning information included in the winning information command received this time is based on the proper game method for the game method set as the proper game method during the time saving state, and processing for setting an error command is executed based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol) (S3101). In the process of S3102, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), in a state where the left-handed game (first game) in the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game (while the left-handed flag 223ac is on), a winning command indicating entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball fired by the left-handed game can be received. Since this is the case, this process is terminated as it is without determining that it is abnormal.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3102: No), in a state where the right-handed game (second game) in the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game (with the right-handed flag 223ab turned on), the ball is not allowed to enter the first ball entrance 64 in which the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter. Since it is the case where the winning command indicated above has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, an error command for display is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S3101, if the winning information received this time is not related to the special figure 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol), that is, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 2 (winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3103) ), and if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON, the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3103: No), the left-handed game (first game) during the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game (with the left-handed flag 223ac turned on), the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 that is fired by the right-handed game. Since the winning command indicating the ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, an error command for display is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

As described above, when a winning command is received after setting an appropriate game method in the current time saving state by the game state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. With this configuration, even if a player can select a game method (a direction in which a ball is shot) at his or her own will, the game method selected by the player can be set as an appropriate game method, and an error command indicating an abnormality can be set when another game method is executed, so that a game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)) is executed in the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), and then the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed. Therefore, the game content determination process is not executed when neither the right-handed flag 223ab nor the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101(b), when one flag (one of the right-handed flag 223ab and the left-handed flag 223ac) is not set to ON, it can be determined that the other flag (the other flag of the right-handed flag 223ab and the left-handed flag 223ac) is set to ON, so that the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), an appropriate game method in the time-saving state is set based on the winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed, the appropriate game method has already been set (either the right-handed flag 223ab or the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON). .

On the other hand, for example, as the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), the winning information command is received a plurality of times, and based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. When executing the process of setting the appropriate game method in the time saving state, the appropriate game method in the time saving state cannot be set until a predetermined period has elapsed after the time saving state is set (until the winning information command is received a predetermined number of times). In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate that the game method has not been set, and if the unset flag is ON, that is, if the game method has not been set, the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) may be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent an error command from being set based on the game (shooting the ball) that was executed while the game method was being determined.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is configured to be determined based on the winning information included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. Therefore, there is no need to collect dedicated information for determining the gaming method, and the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified. A means for detecting passage of a ball in an area through which a ball flowing down surely passes and a means for detecting passage of a ball in an area through which a ball flowing down in a right-handed hitting area surely pass are provided, and detection results of ball passage of each means may be collected to set an appropriate game method during a time-saving state. With such a configuration, it is necessary to add a dedicated configuration and the control processing becomes complicated, but since the game method selected by the player can be reliably detected, the setting accuracy of the game method can be improved.

Furthermore, in order to discriminate the game method selected by the player, the detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 based on the change in electric resistance may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the content of the pending display setting process (S2353) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the content of the pending display setting process (S2353). In this reservation display setting process (S2353), when a proper prize winning information command is received during the time saving state, processing for setting the performance mode of the holding suggesting performance suggesting the possibility of execution of the big winning game or the updating state of the time saving state to the reserved pattern displayed corresponding to the winning information command is executed.

When the pending display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time includes winning information related to special figure 1 (winning information for showing the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol). In the processing of S3202, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, so the processing of S3203 to S3206 described later is performed, and the processing for executing the pending suggestion effect using the pending symbol for the received winning information command is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command that does not correspond to an appropriate game (in a state where the right-handed game (second game) is determined to be an appropriate game, the winning information command of the first special symbol is received), S3203 to S320. 6 is skipped, and this process ends.

Similarly, in the processing of S3201, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information related to the special figure 1 (S3201: No), that is, if it is determined that it is the winning information related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), then it is determined whether the flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S3207: Yes), this time reception Since the received prize information command is a prize information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the processing of S3203 to S3206 to be described later is performed, and processing for executing a pending suggestive performance is executed using a pending pattern for the received prize information command.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command that does not correspond to an appropriate game (in a state where the left-handed game (first game) is determined to be an appropriate game, the winning information command of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received), S3203 This processing ends by skipping the processing of S3206.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when a winning information command is received, it is determined whether or not the winning information included in the received winning information command corresponds to the gaming method selected by the player, and only when the winning information corresponds to the gaming method selected by the player, an effect (holding display effect) using the winning information included in the winning information command is executed. As a result, it is possible to prohibit execution of the holding display effect for a game not intended by the player (for example, a game in which the player erroneously operates the operation handle 51 and shoots the ball in a direction different from the intended direction).

Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player himself/herself, the player can obtain information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player by the holding display performance), so that the player can be motivated to play the game. In the second embodiment, when the player plays an unintended game (a game method different from the game method selected by the player himself/herself), the pending display effect is not executed. However, compared to the case where the player plays the game method selected by the player himself/herself, it may be configured so that the information that the player can acquire is disadvantageous. You may display the display mode which shows the information of a content.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description continues. In the process of S3203, the information in the temporary working hours information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), the holding display mode is selected using the holding display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the temporary working hours information updating area 223i (S3204), and the selected holding display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), corresponding to the selected holding display mode. A pending display command for display is set (S3206), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). This variable display setting process 2 (S2134) differs from the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above in that the effect setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) is replaced with the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 103), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). This effect setting process 2 (S2851) is different from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when the time saving state is set as the game state is different. Other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same S2901 and S2902 processes as the above-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) are executed, and when it is determined that the information read in the process of S2902 is not the information indicating the time saving state (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information read in the processing of S2902 is information indicating the time saving information (S2902: Yes), next it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, when it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is time to set the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

In the processing of S3302, 4000 is set to the value of the time saving counter 223ae, then the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF, the game selection command for display is set (S3304), and this processing ends. The display game selection command set in the processing of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display game selection command, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 executes control for displaying a game selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) for allowing the player to select a game method during the time saving state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3305).

The time-saving counter 233ae measures a predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time-saving state is set, and in the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not the current timing has passed the above-described predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment).

In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that 4 seconds have not passed since the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state was set (S3305: Yes), the selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) for selecting the game method on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is continuously displayed, so S33. This processing ends by skipping the processing of 06 to S3308.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3305; No), the pending mode information included in the winning information storage area corresponding to the current variation is read (S3306), the presentation mode corresponding to the read pending mode information is set (S3307), the presentation mode command for display indicating the selected presentation mode is set (S3308), and this process is executed. end.

As described above, when setting the variable display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol, the performance mode corresponding to the variable display can be set based on the reservation mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, the variable display of the performance mode associated with the suspension performance display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed based on the reservation mode information. Therefore, it is possible to execute the performance with relevance for a long period of time (the period during which a plurality of variations of the special symbols are executed), thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, as described above in the reservation display setting process (see FIG. 102), since it is configured to set the reservation mode information only for the winning information corresponding to the game method selected by the player (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)), when the special symbol variation targeted when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed is a special symbol variation that does not correspond to the gaming method selected by the player, Since the pending mode information is not set in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the presentation mode is not set for the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect display (see FIGS. 83(a) and (b)) using only the special symbol variation corresponding to the game method selected by the player, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(a). FIG. 105(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the various counter updating process 2 (S2161). This various counter updating process 2 (S2161) differs from the various counter updating process (S2111) of the above-described first embodiment in that a process for updating (subtracting) the value of the time saving timer counter 223ae is added, and other elements are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

When the various counter update process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3401). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S3401: Yes), the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (S3402), then the values of other various counters are decremented (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this process ends. Note that the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update process of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3401: No), the process of S3402 is skipped, the process proceeds to S3403, and then the process ends. That is, since the value of the short time counting counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (updated) each time the various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond is executed, the value of 4000 set in the effect setting processing 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105(b), the content of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update process 2 (S2162). This effect update process 2 (S2162) is different from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 during the time saving state is added, and the others are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

When the performance update process 2 (S2162) is executed, it is first determined whether the time saving state is set (S3501), and when it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed since the special symbol variation during the time saving state was executed.

In the process of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving timer counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3503). migrate. When this display right-handed command is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 . When the display control device 114 receives the right-handed command for display, it displays the characters "Right-handed" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and guides the player to execute the right-handed game.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3503: No), then it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3504). .

In the process of S3506, when the left-handed command for display is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the left-handed command for display, it displays characters "Left-handed" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and guides the player to execute the left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3505, if it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3505; No), that is, the variation of the special symbol held and stored after the time saving state is set is executed, but if 4 seconds have passed without a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a standby command for display is set (S3507). ), the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the processing of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, it continuously displays the character "?"

By configuring in this way, even if the game is temporarily interrupted for a restroom break or the like after the jackpot game ends, the game can be easily resumed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the player is configured to be able to select a game (left-handed game) for executing the special figure 1 lottery and a game (right-handed game) for executing the special figure 2 lottery.

As a result, it is possible to play a plurality of types of games in the state in which the time saving state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the games.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the game (left-handed game) for executing the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the game (right-handed game) for executing the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, and it is easier to win the small winning that is easy to win two types.

With such a configuration, the player can select a game in which a big win is likely to occur but the time saving state is likely to end and a game in which a big win is unlikely to occur but the time saving state is difficult to end, so that the player can arbitrarily select a game according to his or her convenience.

In the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is regarded as an advantageous state, and in this advantageous state, the player is configured to select a plurality of types of games, but in addition to this, for example, the game state in which the variable probability state is set may be the advantageous state, or the case where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set may be the advantageous state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in a state in which an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state) is set, when an end condition (for example, a time saving end condition) for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, the game state (for example, a normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to quickly transition from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state.

Furthermore, as advantageous state ending conditions for ending the advantageous state, a disadvantageous ending condition in which a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state) is set that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state and an advantageous ending condition in which a super advantageous state (for example, a latent state) that is more advantageous than the advantageous state may be set may be set, or in addition to the ease with which the advantageous state ending condition is established, the ease with which the disadvantageous ending condition and the advantageous ending condition are established may also be set differently depending on the game method to be selected.

By constructing in this way, the subsequent game result can be greatly changed according to the game method selected while the player is in an advantageous state, so that the player can be given the feeling of playing the game by himself.

In the second embodiment, an example in which two types of game methods (left-handed game and right-handed game) are selected by the player is shown.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 124. FIG. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided in place of the V winning device 650 and game contents based on the lottery result of the second special symbol are different.

Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, when a small win is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbols, a small winning game is executed to open the V winning device 650, and when a ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game passes through a specific area, a big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is completed. Only a small winning game for opening 650 is executed, and the difference is that a specific area is not provided in the second variable winning device 1650 . That is, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it uses a pachinko machine 10 that does not have the same game characteristics as the two types.

First, referring to FIG. 106, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650 and the configuration of the electric accessory 640a is changed.

As shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a second ball entrance 640 with an electric accessory 640a on the downstream side of which a ball flowing down the right side area (right hitting area) of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the through gate 67. A plurality of general prize winning ports 63 are provided on the downstream side thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left side area (left-handed area) of the variable display unit 80, that is, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbols is mainly performed, and while the time-saving state is set as the game state, the ball is moved to the right side area (right-handed area) of the variable display unit 80. A game aimed at the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed hitting game, that is, a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed.

The details are omitted because they have been explained in the first embodiment, but in the second embodiment as well, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 1650 in the left region (on the left side of the lower end position of the variable display device unit 80) where the balls shot in the left-handed game can flow down. This second variable prize winning device 1650 performs an opening operation in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won by lottery of the second special symbols.

Although details will be described later, in the small winning game of the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period is 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 1650 is executed, and as shown in FIG.

That is, only the second special pattern among a plurality of special patterns is designed to win a small prize, and when a right-handed game is played to execute the lottery for the second special pattern, a second variable winning device 1650 is provided in a left-handed area where balls cannot flow down. By configuring in this way, when the small winning game is executed, it is configured such that the ball is unlikely to win the second variable winning device 1650 .

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small winning of the second special symbol can be used only in order to establish the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, since a privilege (a prize ball) is not given to a player by a small prize game executed by winning a small prize, even if the probability of winning is set so as to win a small prize with a high probability, the situation of excessively giving a privilege to the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the period in which the second variable prize winning device 1650 is opened is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for balls to win the second variable prize winning device 1650, even if the winning probability is set so as to win a small prize with a high probability, a situation in which a player is given an excessive privilege can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third embodiment, since the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the left area different from the game area (right side area) where the ball fired in the right-handed game in which the second special symbol lottery flows down, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is open (executing the small winning game). I can.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player. Alternatively, for example, a decorative member may be provided between the glass unit 16 and the second variable winning device 1650 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the second variable winning device 1650. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (executing the small winning game), so that the small winning game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, a decorative member provided near the second variable prize winning device 1650 may be provided with a light emitting member (for example, an LED) for allowing the player to visually recognize the light emitting state, and the light emitting member may be configured to operate (light up) partly when a small winning game is executed. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a small winning determination means for determining that a condition for executing a small winning game is established, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery when the small winning determining means determines that a small winning game is to be executed, and a light emission control means for executing control for operating a light emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

By constructing in this way, a difference can be provided between the number of actually executed small winning games and the number of small winning games to be visually recognized by the player (operating the light emitting member), and the number of times the small winning games are actually executed can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time saving end condition established based on the number of times the small prize game is executed (the number of times the small prize is won) is established (when is the end timing of the time saving state).

Further, it is preferable that the light emission control means executes the control to light the light emitting member described above even when the small prize is not won. As a result, the number of times that the light-emitting member emits light can be made larger than the number of times that the small win is actually won, so that it is difficult for the player to predict when the time saving end condition established based on the number of times the small win game is executed (the number of times that the small win is won) will be established (when is the end timing of the time saving state).

In this case, when there is a lottery result of a special pattern corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed or a lottery result of a special pattern corresponding to the winning information retained and stored as a big win, the light emitting member should be easily operated. In other words, it is preferable to configure so that the light emitting operation executed for notifying that effect when winning the small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

Thus, when the light-emitting member emits light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small winning game is executed, whether the player wins the big winning with the special pattern, or whether it is just a decorative presentation. Furthermore, since the light-emitting member is lighted in a state disadvantageous to the player (execution of the small win game), that is, in a state in which a factor for terminating an advantageous state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is established, and in a state advantageous to the player (winning a jackpot), the player can be interested in the game result after the light-emitting member is lighted.

In the case of using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the light emission control means emits light may be set to various timings such as the timing at which the small winning is won (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing at which the small winning game is started, the timing during the small winning game, the timing after the small winning game is finished, the timing at which the special symbol is changed, or a predetermined timing.

Further, the light emission control means may change the conditions for light emission of the light emitting member based on the operation result of the operation means (the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 times or more in 2 seconds (continuous hitting operation)) is established, light emission control may be performed so that the number of operations of the light-emitting member and the number of winning small prizes are similar (more similar than when the predetermined operation condition is not established). As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate.

In addition, using the light emitting operation of the light emitting member described above, for example, the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (the number of remaining small winnings) and the small winning type of the small winning won this time may be notified (suggested) to the player. As a result, the player can be interested in the details of the light emitting operation of the light emitting member.

In the third embodiment, by making it difficult for the player to know whether or not a small win has been won, it is made difficult for the player to understand the end timing of the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is made to play a game with a sense of tension. It may be configured to notify the technician. In this case, in order to notify the player of winning the small prize, the third symbol display device 81 may display a specific display mode (for example, the third symbol may be displayed in a stopped manner in a display mode in which the player can identify that the small prize has been won), or the second variable winning device 1650 may be provided in the right-hand beating area. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of winning small prizes during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while predicting the end timing of the time saving state.

<Regarding production content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, the effect during the time saving state executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. The figures described in FIGS. 107 to 110 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment.

This third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the winning information of the second special symbol can also be retained and stored. Therefore, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is different in that an effect using the pending memory information of the second special symbol is executed as a suggesting effect (effect for suggesting the remaining period of the time saving state to the player). Hereinafter, the content of the short remaining time suggestive effect in the third embodiment will be described, focusing on the points different from the content of the effect used in the first embodiment.

Fig.107 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen displayed when a time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107(a), when the time saving state is set, an effect start screen for explaining the content of the effect to be executed during the time saving state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a first situation display mode Dm11a, a second situation display mode Dm11b, a third situation display mode Dm11c, and a fourth situation display mode Dm11d are displayed as a plurality of situation display modes in the small display area Dm11.

Each of the plurality of status display modes corresponds to the degree of establishment of the plurality of time saving termination conditions (progress until the time saving termination condition is satisfied), and the display modes are configured to be variable corresponding to the progress until the time reduction termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, a bomb having a fuse of a predetermined length is displayed as each situation display mode, and the fuse is lit when the first variation is executed after the time saving state is set.

Then, among the time-saving end conditions, the situation display mode corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than the other situation display modes. By varying the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by the performance (remaining time reduction suggesting performance) executed by the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(a), in the production start screen (time saving start screen), in order to notify the player of the content of the short remaining time suggesting production in the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "If even one explodes, the time saving ends" and the characters "big hit with completion of digestion" are displayed. As a result, it can be easily grasped that the time-saving state ends when even one of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, and that if the fires of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished, a big win will occur.

The state shown in FIG. 107(a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b, that is, the special symbol is being varied in the time saving state. Therefore, a plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are lit. When it is determined that the variation of the special symbols is not started in the state where the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished (the state where the variation of the special symbols is not started after the jackpot game is finished), a screen indicating that the remaining time shortening suggestive performance for starting the variation of the special symbols is to be executed may be displayed as the time saving state standby screen.

When the game progresses in the state where the time saving state is set and the establishment of the time saving end condition is approaching (when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times or when the number of winning small wins in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times), as shown in FIG. FIG. 107(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the remaining working hours suggestive effect in the working hours saving state.

This combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed when the progress of a plurality of time saving end conditions satisfies pre-end conditions (for example, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols reaches 30 when the number of fluctuations of special symbols is 50 as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations, or when the number of times of small winning A winning reaches 3 when the number of times of winning A winning is 5 is set as the ending condition of the number of winnings). Therefore, by displaying the combination status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time saving state will end soon.

Further, by displaying the combined state display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress of the plurality of time saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end conditions, when the time saving state ends (when any one of the set time saving end conditions is met), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is met to end the time saving state. In other words, as shown in FIG. 107(a), if a plurality of situation display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) whose display modes change according to the progress of each time saving end condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, it is necessary to execute an effect in which one of the situation display modes explodes when the time saving state ends. There was

In this way, the player easily grasps which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions the time-saving end condition established this time is, so that the plurality of time-saving end conditions set when shifting to the time-saving state are easily predicted, and there is a fear that the timing at which the time-saving state ends is also easily predicted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when a pre-termination condition is established for a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, a combination state display mode Dm11z is displayed in order to prevent the player from grasping the progress of each time-saving termination condition. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which time saving end condition is satisfied to end the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, the combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed only when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions. However, the combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when even one time-saving end condition satisfies the pre-end condition, or the combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when a value corresponding to a specific time-saving end condition among a plurality of time-saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition.

Then, when the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. Figure 108 (a) shows the display screen when the time saving end condition is satisfied for one of the winning times end conditions, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b is displayed stopped by the combination of "341", and in the small display area Dm11, the display mode showing the bomb exploded state is displayed. The word "end" is displayed to inform the technician.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the contents of the remaining working hour suggesting effect for a special situation when the working hours reduction state is set will be described. Figure 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for holding and storing the winning information of the first special symbol, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state (during the left-handed game) and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the big win is completed, the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved and stored first special symbol may be executed.

And among them, there was a case where the prize information of the first special symbol that is reserved and stored includes the prize information that wins a jackpot (so-called reservation-in-residence). In this way, in spite of the setting of the time saving state, when the next big winning game is executed based on the winning information which has already been obtained before the time saving state is set, instead of the winning information of the special symbols obtained during the time saving state, if the performance (remaining time saving suggesting performance) executed during the time saving state is executed, the content of the performance and the game result are inconsistent, and the performance effect is lowered.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol that is reserved and stored has the winning information that will be a big hit, and if it is determined that there is the winning information that will be a big hit, a special effect (performance during time saving and pending) is executed instead of starting (executing) the usual short remaining time suggesting effect (see FIG. 107 (a)). As a result, if the performance executed during the time saving state (remaining time shortening suggestive performance) is executed, a contradiction arises between the performance contents and the game result and the performance effect is prevented from being lowered, and the special performance is executed in a rare situation that the big win is won again in the reserved memory after the big win is finished, thereby giving the player a sense of superiority.

When the time-saving and on-hold performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, the characters "!?" By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that an unusual effect is being executed.

Further, in FIG. 108(b), since the variation of the first special symbol is executed as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variation display area Dm1b.

The display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) may be configured to be executed, for example, even when it is determined that any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied based on the winning information that has already been acquired before the time-saving state is set. By configuring in this way, the screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed after the end of the big win, so that the player can be informed that the big win will be won immediately (until all the special symbol variations corresponding to the winning prize information retained and stored are completed) or the time saving state will end, so that the player can be interested in the performance contents to be executed next.

When the time saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed to inform the player that the time saving state ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109(a) is displayed. FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the timing when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won after time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 108(b).

As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol that has already been reserved and stored in the state in which the time saving state is set, the big hit is won, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating the big win in the special figure 1 variation display area Dm1a, and the extinguished coalescence status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11. In the central part of the main display area Dm, characters of "extinguishment completed" and "jackpot" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot has been won.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big win (the timing at which the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win is executed), the content of the winning information retained and stored is discriminated, and as a result of the discrimination, when it is determined that there is the winning information for winning the big win, a special performance (performance during the time reduction during suspension) different from the performance during the normal time reduction state (remaining time reduction suggesting performance) is executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which a big win is won immediately after the short remaining time suggestive performance is executed, the performance content of the short remaining time suggestive performance and the game result do not match, or to suppress the change of the performance content of the short remaining time suggestive performance in order to correspond to the game result, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect for the short remaining time suggestive performance.

Next, the production contents of the remaining time reduction suggesting production in the case where the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of remaining time reductions is determined during the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, a plurality of fluctuation number end conditions that are established when a special symbol variation is executed, and a winning number of times end condition that is established when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery are set. It is made difficult to predict the period (timing when the time saving state ends) to improve the interest of the game during the time saving state.

Even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in this way, the period until the time saving state ends may be determined. For example, when the game progresses in the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is three times until the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, and the number of winnings of the small prize is five times until the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied, the small prize is won only once at maximum for one fluctuation of the special pattern, so that the time saving state is ended when the lottery of the special pattern is executed three times regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern.

In the third embodiment, when the period until the time-saving state ends (the number of special symbol variations) is determined, as shown in FIG. With such a configuration, in a game machine capable of intricately setting the timing at which the time saving state ends by setting a plurality of time saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance, the timing can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can play the game considering the remaining period of the time saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is determined, the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations ("3 times" in the example of FIG. 109 (b)) is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win many small wins while the number of remaining special symbol variations is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

When such effect display is used in the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, there is a possibility of obtaining two kinds of prizes by winning a small prize, so that the game can be played more motivated. That is, in the above-described first embodiment and second embodiment, when a small hit is won during the time saving state, it is configured to have a chance to win two types and a pinch to end the time saving state, but as shown in FIG. Since the player can be notified that only a chance to obtain two types of prizes will come when winning a small prize while the fixed notification performance is being executed, the player can be motivated to play the game to win many small prizes.

In addition, in the third embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, and in part of them, each time-saving end condition may be set so that the time-saving end condition does not hold for a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set.

In the third embodiment, an effect for notifying the player that it is a period in which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set is configured to be executable. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen at the time of rushing in after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113(a), but in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, the time saving end condition is set so that the time saving state does not end until the special symbol variation is executed at least 20 times. In other words, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times is a period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the special symbol lottery result.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the present is a specific period after the time saving state is set (a period in which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol). During this invincibility presentation, a non-fired bomb is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the player is notified that the bomb is not exploding (a period in which the time saving state is not terminated).

A remaining period state 820 for notifying the remaining period of the invincibility effect is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110( a ), the characters “until the fuse is lit…” and “20” are displayed as the remaining period mode 820 . In this way, by executing the performance (invincible performance) for showing the player the period during which the time saving state will not end, it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind during the time saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19A) in the above-described first embodiment, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the first random number table 202a, the small winning type selection 3 table 202bb is replaced with the small winning type selection table 202f, the time reduction grant 3 table 202bc is replaced with the time reduction grant table 202e, and the opening scenario 3 table 202b is replaced with the opening scenario table 202g. The difference is that d is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112(a), the contents of the first winning random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112(a), a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 are defined in the first per random number 3 table 202ba.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(b), the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described. FIG. 112(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. This special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 defines the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 20(b)) of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 112(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 is different from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 20(c)) of the above-described first embodiment in that the range of values determined as small hits is different, and the rest is the same. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the obtained first winning random number counter value C1 defines a small winning determination value within the range of "5 to 499".

That is, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that it is a big hit with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200), and it is determined that it is a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a big win or a small win with a probability of 1/2.

In addition, the range to be judged as a big win or a small win is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and may be defined so that the probability of being judged as a small win is lower than the probability of being judged as a big win, or the range to be judged as a big win or a small win may be defined not only by continuous values but also by spaces. In addition, in the third embodiment, the same table is used to determine the big win or the small win regardless of the game state to be set.

Specifically, the table used when the time-saving state is set as the game state should be configured so that the range for determining the small win is wider than the table used when the normal state is set as the game state. By constructing in this way, even if it is constituted so that a small prize winning used for ending the time saving state occurs frequently during the time saving state, frequent occurrence in the normal state can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), in the third embodiment, the small winning is not won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the small winning is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol.

By constructing in this way, for example, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state can be ended immediately when the winning information of the first special pattern reserved and stored includes the prize winning information for winning a small prize. When such a configuration is used, for example, it is preferable to use it in a game machine that can provide a game state that is more advantageous to the player if the time-saving state ends immediately.

Specifically, as a game state, in addition to the normal state and time-saving state, as a result of the special design lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is a low-probability state (normal state: special design low-probability state, normal design low-probability state, time-saving state: special design low-probability state, normal design high-probability state) Special design high-probability state (variable state: special design high-probability state, normal design high-probability state, latent state: special design high probability) A probability state, a low probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and when a time-saving end condition is satisfied during a period in which the variable probability state is set, the latent probability state is set so that the latent probability state becomes the most advantageous game state for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, in a state where the variable probability state is set, it is possible to make it advantageous to the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine full of interest. Further, in such a game machine, when the winning information of the first special pattern reserved and stored when the variable probability state is set, when there is winning information for winning a small prize, the variable probability state is immediately ended and shifted to the latent probability state, so that the game can be motivated to store the winning information of the first special pattern up to the upper limit number (four pieces) before the variable probability state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb differs from the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of each small hit type are different. Other than that, for example, the small hit types defined for the range of the small hit type counter value C5 are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the third embodiment does not have a V winning device 650 and does not have the game property of passing a ball through a specific area during a small winning game to win a big win (two types of wins).

FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the time saving 3 table 202bc is different from the time saving giving table 202e (see FIG. 21 (d)) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the time saving end conditions set for each jackpot type are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set to "100" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols among the time-saving end conditions, and the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "1", the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to "10", and the value of the small win C counter 203ac is set to "50" as the winning number end condition established based on the number of small wins won. stipulated in That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state a) is set in which the termination condition is met when any of the following conditions are satisfied: ``the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times'', ``the small win A (set) is won once'', ``the small win B (the small win set) is won 10 times'', and the end condition is satisfied. .

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set to "50" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the time reduction end conditions, and the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "5", the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to "5", and the value of the small win C counter 203ac is set to "25" as the winning number end condition established based on the number of times the small win is won. . That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is completed, a time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time saving state b) is set in which the end condition is met when any of the conditions of ``the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 50 times'', ``the small prize A (set) is won 5 times'', ``the small prize B (the small prize set) is won 5 times'', or ``the small prize C (the small prize set) is won 25 times'' is satisfied.

When the jackpot type is the jackpot D, the value of the time-shortening medium counter 203k is set to ``100'' as a variation frequency termination condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, and the value of the small winning A counter 203m is set to ``20'', and the value of the small winning C counter 203ac is set to ``80'' as the winning frequency termination condition to be established based on the number of winning times of the small winning. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state c) is set in which the end condition is established when any of the conditions of ``the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 100'', ``the small prize A (set) is won 20 times'', or ``the small prize C (the small prize set) is won 80 times'' is satisfied.

As described above, in the third embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of different time-saving end conditions are set according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won, and the time-saving end conditions are configured to end when any of the set time-saving end conditions are met. Therefore, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be diversified.

In addition, since the establishment of time-saving end conditions that are likely to be established is different according to the time-saving state (a to c) set according to the type of big win, the time-saving state ends based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols during the time-saving state and the time-saving state ends based on the number of times a small win is won during the time-saving state can be generated in a mixed manner, so that the pattern of ending the time-saving state can be diversified.

In the third embodiment, the number of items set as the time saving end condition is varied depending on the time saving state to be set. Specifically, in the time-saving states a and b, a time-saving end condition that can be established when the small win B is won is set, but in the time-saving state c, the time-saving end condition that can be established when the small win B is won is not set.

By configuring in this way, even if the player grasps the type of the small winning game to be executed during the time saving state (even if the player grasps the type of the small winning game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed in the gaming machine that stops and displays the first symbol corresponding to the small winning type set for the winning small winning), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the type of the small winning game is set as a time saving end condition, so that the time saving state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the is finished.

In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of special symbols, the time-saving end condition is set for all the small win types (small wins A to C) that can be set. As a configuration other than this, for example, a small win type that is set when a small win is won (for example, small wins X to Z) may be added, and the time-saving end condition may not be set for the added small win type.

Such a configuration makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the time saving state is approaching the end (under the time saving end condition) when winning a small prize during the time saving state, and thus makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Also, in this case, it is preferable that the operation contents of the small winning game to be executed are the same (including an error that the player cannot identify) between the small winning type (for example, small winning A) for which the time saving end condition is set and the small winning type (for example, small winning X) for which the time saving ending condition is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the current small winning type by the operation contents during the small winning game.

Next, referring to FIG. 114, the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd. As shown in FIG. 114, the opening scenario 3 table 202bd is different from the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described above in that the contents of the opening scenarios defined corresponding to the small wins A to C are different and the contents of the opening scenario defined corresponding to the big win D are different, and the other elements are the same.

Here, among the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd, the differences mentioned above will be explained. Note that detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted. As described above, the third embodiment is configured to execute a small winning game that opens the second variable winning device 1650 (a small winning game that opens the second variable winning opening) as a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, even if a ball wins the second variable prize winning device 1650 during the small winning game, it is configured so as not to win the second prize.

Therefore, in the open scenario defined corresponding to the small winning A to C of the open scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation contents for one round (1R) corresponding to the small winning game are defined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, in the present third embodiment, opening scenarios are defined corresponding to the small hits A to C with an error that is difficult for the player to identify.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small win A, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 seconds, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small winning B, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 seconds, and in the opening scenario corresponding to the small winning C, the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.09 seconds. Each opening scenario is defined so that the opening operation is executed as follows.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the current small winning game from the contents of the actually executed small winning game while defining different release scenarios for each small winning type.

In addition, in the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the current small winning game from the contents of the small winning game to be executed, an opening scenario is defined in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is changed to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify. may differ to such an extent that they are difficult to identify. Also, each time may be varied so that the period of the open scenario defined corresponding to each small hit type is the same.

In addition, for a specific small winning type among a plurality of small winning types, an opening scenario different from the other small winning types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it) is defined, so that the player can recognize that the specific small winning type is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the timing at which the time saving state ends by grasping the contents of the small winning game to be executed.

Further, the same release scenario may be specified for a plurality of small winning types, and in this case, it is preferable to perform different performances according to the small winning types based on the establishment of a predetermined condition while the small winning game is being executed. Here, as a predetermined condition to be set while the small winning game is being executed, for example, it is preferable to set a condition established by winning a ball in the second variable winning port of the second variable winning device 1650 during the small winning game or operating the frame button 22 by the player during the small winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period during which the small winning game is being executed (during the predetermined period).

In addition, as the effect executed when a predetermined condition is established during the small winning game, for example, a different effect may be performed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in addition to an effect in which the type of sound generated when the ball passes (enters) the predetermined area is changed, or in addition to an effect in which the sound or light is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 115(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26(a)) in the first embodiment, and a time saving remaining period determination table 222ba is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the content of the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba. This time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba is updated based on the time-saving related command indicating the game information (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the number of small winnings) corresponding to the various time-saving end conditions set in the set time-saving state, that is, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k, the value of the small win A counter 203m, the value of the small win B counter 203n, and the value of the small win C counter Based on the information included in the time saving information update area 223g. It is for determining that the time saving state has passed for a certain period of time.

By referring to this time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, the current time saving state can be roughly classified. By varying the presentation mode according to the classification, it is possible to roughly inform the player of the progress of the time saving state. In addition, in the third embodiment, the progress of the time saving state is configured to be determined in two stages, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be determined in three stages or more. In this case, for example, a plurality of thresholds may be defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba, and the current progress may be determined based on the corresponding thresholds.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described. In the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, the number-of-remaining-time reduction flag 223ba and the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb are added with respect to 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction frequency determination flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of the time saving state is determined, and is set to ON when the number of times of special symbol variation until the end of the time reduction state is determined. That is, in the third embodiment, as time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, a fluctuation number end condition that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, and a winning number end condition that is established when the number of times that a small win is won during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number.

That is, for example, when a value of ``100'' is set as the condition for ending the number of times of variation and a value of ``2'' is set as the condition for ending the number of wins, the time saving state ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times or the small win is won twice. On the other hand, even when the above-described time-saving end condition is set, when the game progresses in the time-saving state, the variation of the special pattern is executed 98 times, and no small win is won even once, it is determined that the number of times of special pattern variation is two times until the time-saving state is ended.

In this way, when the remaining period (the number of special symbol residual fluctuations) until the end of the time saving state is determined, the situation in which the time saving state is abruptly ended can be suppressed by executing the performance of informing the player of that effect. Furthermore, as in the third embodiment, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations and the condition for ending the number of wins are provided as time saving end conditions, when the remaining period until the end (the number of special symbol remaining fluctuations) is determined, by executing the effect of informing the player of that fact, it is possible to make the player expect to win a small prize without having a sense of danger that the time saving state will end.

This remaining short time number determination flag 223ba is set to ON when it is determined that the number of remaining short time periods has been determined in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), and is referred to in the effect setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122) (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that this remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (Fig. 122 S3356: Yes), a display time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number (special symbol fluctuation number) is set (S3357 in Fig. 122). As a result, the number of special symbol variations until the time-saving state ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed (see FIG. 109(b)).

In the third embodiment, when the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the time saving state ends is determined, a remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate that fact. A special pattern 2 remaining time reduction frequency determination flag for indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations of the special pattern is determined is provided, and when the special pattern 1 remaining time reduction frequency determination flag is set to ON, the remaining variation frequency of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the special symbol 2 remaining time reduction frequency determination flag is set to ON, the remaining variation frequency of the second special symbol is displayed.

By configuring in this way, for example, in a game machine in which a game in which only the first special symbols are varied (lottery) and a game in which only the second special symbols are varied (lottery) are set separately during the time saving state, it is possible to display the number of remaining variations of the special symbols according to the contents of the actually executed game (type of special symbols for which the lottery is actually performed).

The fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that a period from setting of the time saving state to satisfaction of the time saving end condition at the shortest is longer than a predetermined period, and is set to ON when the number of times of special pattern fluctuations until the time saving end condition is satisfied is 15 times or more. When it is determined that the minimum value corresponding to the values of the various counters indicating the time saving end conditions is 15 or more (S3653 of FIG. 124: Yes), the fixed change flag 223bb sets the time saving command for display corresponding to the minimum value (S3654 of FIG. 124). , is set to ON (S3655 in FIG. 124).

Then, when it is determined that the minimum value indicating the value of the various counters indicating the time saving end condition is not 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: No), a display time saving command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (S3656 in FIG. 124). (see S3608 of ).

As a result, the player can be notified of the period in which the time saving end condition cannot be established after the time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy that the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set. Therefore, the player can play a game without worrying about the termination of the time-saving state during the time-saving state.

In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the fixed variation flag 223bb to ON by referring to the values of all counters set corresponding to all the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state, but it is sufficient to have a configuration that can determine the period in which the player can play games during the time saving state with peace of mind. It may be configured to determine whether or not to set the definite variation flag 223bb to ON by referring only to the value of the counter corresponding to the time saving end condition, or to determine whether or not to set the definite variation flag 223bb to ON by providing a determining means for determining the time saving end condition that cannot be satisfied in the current time saving state, and excluding only the counter value corresponding to the time saving end condition determined by the determining means.

<Regarding control processing in main controller 110 of the third embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment differs from the control processing in the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 . Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is changed to the timer interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 118), and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is performed in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 43). It is different in that the small hit control process is changed to the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 120), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the detailed description of the contents of the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment is also omitted.

First, the content of timer interrupt processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 3. FIG. This timer interrupt process 3 differs from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the above-described first embodiment in that instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 43), the special symbol changing process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment are executed, and the V entrance passing process (see FIG. 47) and V passing process (see FIG. 48) are not executed. .

When this timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above. Then, when the process of S103 is completed, the special symbol variation process 3 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S174). The details of the special symbol variation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 43), the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment is executed (S155). The details of this starting winning process 2 are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, and then the process of S110, which is the same as the process of S110 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174). This special symbol variation process 3 differs from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the above-described first embodiment in that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired and the start of the small hit is set instead of the small hit start setting process.

When this special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not changing (S202: No), the same S251 to S255 processes as the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment described above are executed. Details of the processing of S251 to S255 are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the processing of S206 to S210 which is the same as the processing of S206 to S210 of the special symbol variation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are changing (S202: Yes), the processes of S211 to S220 are executed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment. In the process of S220, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), an opening scenario for a small win corresponding to a small win type set corresponding to the won small win is set by referring to an open scenario 3 table 202bd (S271). Next, the start of the small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set to ON (S273). After that, a small winning time saving update process is executed (S274), and the process ends. This small winning time saving update process (S274) is executed in the small winning start setting process (FIG. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 41, S405).

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of the small winning control process 3 (S1555) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). This small hit control process 3 (S1555) is a process executed by changing the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the above-described small hit control process (see FIG. 53) is performed by deleting the processing related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j, and replacing the V winning device 650 with the target to be operated during the small hit game. 2 variable winning device 1650 is different.

When the small winning control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same processing as S1701 to S1705 of the small winning control process (see FIG. 53) described above is executed, and in the process of S1705, when it is determined that it is the second variable winning opening timing (timing to open the winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), S17 of the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53) The process of S1706, which is the same as the process of S1706, is executed, and then the process ends. In addition, the processing of S1701 to S1706 executed in the small winning control processing 3 executes the operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small winning control processing of the above-described first embodiment (See FIG. 53) differs in operation target, but since the control content is the same, the same reference numerals are attached and the description thereof is omitted.

Also, in the process of S1705, if it is not the second variable winning hole open timing (S1705: No), the same processes as S1711 to S1715 of the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53) are executed. In the process of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), the process of S1720 which is the same as the process of S1720 of the above-described small winning control process (see FIG. 53) is executed, and then this process is finished.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured to be able to set the normal state and the time-saving state as the game state, and during the period when the normal state is set, a left-handed game is performed in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 provided in the left side area and a lottery for the first special symbol is executed. A right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of .

The time-saving state, which is a game state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed, is continuously set until either of a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, that is, a variation frequency end condition established based on the number of times of variation of the special symbols (number of lotteries), or a winning frequency end condition established based on the number of times a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbols is established.

By varying the content of the time saving end condition according to the type of the winning jackpot, the timing of ending the time saving state (the period during which the time saving state is continuously set) is made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

Further, even when a time saving end condition that makes it difficult to end the time saving state is set, the time saving state can be ended early by the lottery result of the special pattern, or even if the time saving end condition that the time saving state is easy to end is set, the time saving state can be continued for a long time by the lottery result of the special pattern.

<Regarding control processing in the audio ramp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124, control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that command determination processing (see FIG. 56) is replaced with command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 121) and effect setting processing (see FIG. 63) is replaced with effect setting processing 3 (see FIG. 122). The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 in FIG. 99) with respect to the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (S2113 in FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 in the second embodiment (S2163 in FIG. 99) If it is determined that the command received this time is a time saving related command (S2215: Yes), then the time saving information update area 2 23g is updated, and the process proceeds to S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a time-saving-related command is received, the received command is stored as it is, instead of performing the process of varying the corresponding flags and counters as in the first embodiment.

Then, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to grasp the time saving state. Also in the third embodiment, when a time-saving related command is received as in the first embodiment described above, the process of varying the corresponding flags and counters as in the first embodiment may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process of effect setting process 3 (S2871) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this production setting process 3 (S2871), the production mode for suggesting the remaining period of the time saving state is set based on the progress of the time saving state (situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (number of remaining fluctuations) and the number of fluctuations after the time saving state is set).

When the effect setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is the time saving state (S2902). If it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (S2902: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in a time saving state (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3351), the special symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of this fluctuation (main fluctuation), the lottery result is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied in this fluctuation (S3353).

As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S3353: Yes), a display time saving command indicating the time saving end is set (S3355), and this process ends. In the process of S3354, if it is determined that the time saving termination condition is not satisfied (S3354: No), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356).

Then, in the process of S3356, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), the remaining time reduction period determination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, is executed (S3358), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the remaining working hours determination process (S3358) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining working hours determination process (S3358). In this time-saving remaining period determination processing (S3358), the current time-saving situation is determined according to the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g, that is, the time-saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the processing for setting the performance mode based on the determination result is executed.

When the time saving remaining period determination processing (S3358) is executed, first, the time saving remaining period is determined based on the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3601). Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the remaining period has reached the pre-end condition more than once (S3602), and if it has not reached more than once (S3602: No), fixed fluctuation determination processing is executed (S3063), and this processing ends. The content of the fixed variation determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124, but in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving end condition (values of various counters) set this time is determined, and the processing for determining the period (special symbol variation number) in which the time saving state does not end without fail when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a plurality of remaining periods have reached the conditions before termination (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604), and if it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the number of remaining short time periods is fixed. A time-saving command is set (S3605), and the process ends. When the time saving command for display indicating the combination mode is set in the process of S3605, the combination status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107(b) is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which of the time-reduction end conditions is likely to be established, and to inform the player that a plurality of time-reduction end conditions are almost established (that is, that the time-reduction state continues for a long time).

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604: Yes), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to OFF (S3608), and the process proceeds to the process of judging whether the number of remaining time reductions is fixed. In addition, when it is determined in the processing of S3604 that the number of remaining time reductions has been determined, then information indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored in the time reduction information update area 223g (S3606), a display time reduction command indicating the number of remaining time reductions is set (S3607), the remaining time reduction number fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063). In this fixed variation determination process (S3063), as described above, the period in which the set time saving state cannot be terminated is determined, and a command for displaying that fact on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Thus, in a game machine having a game property (a game property having a plurality of time saving end conditions) in which it is difficult to know when the time saving state ends, the player can grasp the period during which the game can be played without anxiety by confirming the display mode (see FIG. 110) displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

When the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063) is executed, first it is determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3651: No), the values corresponding to the time saving medium counter 203k, the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, and the small winning C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value thereof is extracted. (S3652).

In the present embodiment, in the processing of S3652, based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, it is configured to determine the values of the above-described various counters that the RAM203 of the main controller 110 has, but without being limited to this, the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided with a counter that varies in synchronization with the various counters that the RAM203 of the main controller 110 has, and the determination may be made based on the value of the counter.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in this embodiment) that can be notified as a fixed change (S3653), and if it is determined that it is equal to or more than the condition value (15) (S3653: Yes), then a short time command for display indicating the minimum value is set (S3654), the fixed change flag 223bb is set to ON (S3655), and this process ends.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to notify the player to that effect only when the period in which the time saving state cannot be terminated (the number of times of special symbol variation) is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, so that the performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 only when the fixed variation flag 223bb is set to ON can be the performance mode for allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind. In other words, for example, when the time-saving state cannot be terminated (the number of times of special pattern fluctuation) is one time, the player is notified of that effect, and the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

In the present embodiment, when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, it is configured to set an effect mode for notifying the player of that fact. number of times) is less than a predetermined number of times, or when the player performs a special operation, the period in which the time saving state cannot be terminated (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is a special number of times greater than the predetermined number of times, the notification may be made to that effect.

In the process of S3653, when it is determined that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), the display time saving command corresponding to the updated time saving information is set (S3656), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3651 that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651: Yes), the processes of S3652 and S3653 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3654.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 153. FIG. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a plurality of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) can be drawn (varied) at the same time (in parallel).

Then, as the time saving state, a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is likely to be selected (i.e., the second special symbol is drawn (varied) more often), and a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is easier to select than the variation time of the second special symbol (i.e., the first special symbol is more often drawn (varied)). The difference is that game states with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided in the time saving state.

Moreover, it is different in that different productions (display of the number of times of time saving) are executed corresponding to the plurality of time saving states described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment will be described with respect to the differences from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the game machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of this embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-handed area is different. In this figure, a ball shot in a left-handed game flows down a left-handed (left) area along an arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and a ball shot in a right-handed game flows down a right-handed (right) area along an arrow PA2 shown in the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, in the present embodiment, a first starting opening 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting opening 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. As shown in FIG. The left first starting port 64 has an opening with a size that allows one game ball to enter on the upper surface, and two nails are arranged at a position facing the opening at an interval slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of the game to the left first starting port 64 (for example, when 250 game balls are shot, the ratio of the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64) can be varied.

In the right region of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a right first starting port 64) are arranged vertically in parallel. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of the decorative member attached to the game board 60, through which one game ball can enter. A normal electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is arranged on the front side (facing surface) of the opening. This ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and one end thereof is rotatably supported. Then, based on the winning of the second symbol, the game ball is rotated at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in this embodiment) in a direction in which it can be guided to the second starting port 640 (a direction away from the opening) for a predetermined number of times (one or two times in this embodiment) and a predetermined number of seconds (0.5 seconds or 1 second in this embodiment). The ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In the normal state (other than when the second symbol is hit), the opening of the second starting port 640a is closed (vertically standing state).

Also, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640 . Then, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in an open state (tilted in the horizontal direction), the normal electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first start port 64. By configuring in this way, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first start port 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is the high probability state (probability variable state) and the time-saving game state, the probability that the second symbol is determined as winning is increased. When the game state is the low-probability game state, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80, and executes the game so that the game ball wins the left first start port 64.例文帳に追加Then, when the third pattern becomes a hit and the probability that the second pattern is determined to be a win increases when the game shifts to a probability variable game or a time-saving game, the second pattern is easily hit when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁As a result, the player executes the game by shooting the game ball so as to pass through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, the probability that the normal electric accessory 640a will be in the open state is high, so that the second starting port 640 is easily won, while the right first starting port 64 is less likely to win.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the variable probability gaming state, winning with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the big wins are the big wins to which the variable probability is likely to be given after the big win game, and the remaining 50% are configured to be the big wins to which the short-time game (low probability game state) is easily given (the variable probability game is difficult to be given) after the big win game.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when a big win is achieved, a 100% jackpot that is likely to be given a probability variable game after the jackpot game is awarded. That is, it is configured such that the probability variation gaming state is likely to be given to those who are elected in the second special symbol.

In addition, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the distance between the tip of the normal electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one or more and less than two game balls. A through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening is arranged so that a game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67. - 特許庁A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is difficult to enter the right first starting port 64 due to the nail arranged downstream of the through gate 67 . Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, a game ball does not flow down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 due to a nail arranged in the upper part of the opening of the right first starting port 64. That is, when winning the right first starting port 64, the normal electric accessory 640a is configured so as to be limited to being maintained in a closed state (vertically standing state).

In the present embodiment, in the open state of the normal electric accessory 640a, it is configured not to enter the right first starting port 64. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 may enter the right first starting port 64.

Next, the contents of the effect mode (the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device) in the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. First, with reference to Drawing 126, the display screen at the time of time saving state entry displayed corresponding to the classification of the set time saving state is explained.

In the fourth embodiment, although the details will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) at the same time (in parallel), and furthermore, by making the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set during the time saving state different, the first time saving state in which the first special symbol is more likely to be changed than the second special symbol during the time saving state, and the second special symbol is more likely to be changed than the first special symbol. It is configured to be able to set a second time saving state that is likely to be set.

Only the lottery of the second special symbol is set so that a small win is won, and when a small win is won, two kinds of wins can be obtained as in the above-described first embodiment. In addition, when a specific lottery result (for example, winning) is won in the lottery of one special pattern, the other special pattern during variation is forcibly stop-displayed as a stop pattern indicating a failure so as to prevent the simultaneous occurrence of a lottery result advantageous to the player by varying (lottery) a plurality of special patterns at the same time (parallel).

Further, when the time saving state which is a game state advantageous to the player is set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the number of times of setting the time saving state (the number of times of time saving) is subtracted corresponding to the variation start timing of each special symbol executed simultaneously (side by side).

That is, when the 1st time saving state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, it is easy to perform a time saving game in accordance with the number of fluctuations in the special symbol set as the time saving end condition, but when the 2nd time saving state in which the 2nd special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, based on the small hit as described above, the first special symbol during fluctuation is forcibly stopped. There was a problem that a big difference would occur with the number of tricks.

Specifically, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reaches 100 times is set as a time saving end condition, when the first time saving state is set, only the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special pattern is executed (so that a long time (a longer time than the first special pattern fluctuates 100 times) is set as the second special pattern fluctuation time), and about 100 special pattern fluctuations are executed during the first time saving state. (There is no forced stop due to the second special symbol being out of the second special symbol due to the lottery result of the first special symbol).

On the other hand, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times is set as the time saving end condition, when the second time saving state is set, only the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed (Long time as the variation time of the first special symbol (longer time than the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times)). When it is configured to win a small prize with a probability except for the probability of winning a prize, every time a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the change of the first special pattern is out of the range and the machine is forcibly stopped, so that the number of actually executed fluctuations is about 50 times.

In this way, even when the same condition is set as the time saving end condition, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed while the time saving state is set (the number of fluctuations not forcibly stopped) differs depending on the type of the time saving game to be executed. In such a case, if the actually set number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) is displayed to the player regardless of the type of the time saving state to be set, there is a problem that the time saving state that makes the player feel uncomfortable is provided.

Therefore, in this embodiment, according to the type of the time saving state to be set, on the display screen (time saving state entry screen) when the time saving state is set, the number of times of time saving (remaining time saving number of times) to be notified to the player is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a time-saving state that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration for displaying the number of times of shortening time (number of times of remaining time reduction) to be notified to the player differently according to the type of the set time saving state, when the number of times of remaining time reduction notified to the player and the actual number of times of remaining time reduction are different, the process of correcting the number of times of remaining time reduction notified to the player is executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the state where the first time saving state is set, by temporarily interrupting the game in the middle of the game, the second special symbol is executed multiple times, or in the state where the second time saving state is set, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a loss other than a small win. It can be synchronized with the time saving number of times.

Specifically, when the above-described second time saving state (time saving A) is set, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), even if the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times in practice, even if it is set as a time saving end condition, "50" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped by the small winning, and the first time saving state (time saving B) is set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 126(b), "100" is displayed in the remaining time reduction count display area Dm10.

Thus, when the second time-saving state is set, the player can be made to think that the time-saving end condition is set such that the number of variations of the special symbol is 50 times. Even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is updated (subtracted) by the forced stop of the special symbols, the number of remaining short time displayed in the short time remaining display area Dm10 is not updated (subtracted) according to the update (subtraction), and the number of short time remaining displayed in the short time number display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) according to the number of times of variation of the second special symbol. It can be updated (subtracted) without giving.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and (b), when the time saving state is set, the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol are not displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving the number of variations of the special symbols that are actually executed while the time saving state is set, by the mode of digestion of the reserved symbols. In the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, the main display area Dm is formed with a special figure 1 reserved ball number display area Dm6 and a special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm7 that display the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. A notification means may be provided to notify the number of balls in a light emitting manner. Furthermore, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the contents of the correction effect for correcting the number of times of remaining time reduction displayed in the above-described remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen (time reduction state setting screen) when the time reduction state is set is changed according to the type of the set game state (see FIG. 126). In this case, for example, when the game is temporarily interrupted in the state where the first time saving state is set and the second special pattern is executed a plurality of times, or when the lottery result of the second special pattern is not stopped while the second time saving state is set and the first special pattern is not forcibly stopped, there is a possibility that the number of times of remaining time saving and the number of times of remaining time saving are different from each other.

As such a case, for example, during a time saving game in which the time saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, that is, if the actual number of remaining time shortening times is greater than the number of times corresponding to the notified remaining time shortening number of times, first, as shown in FIG. The same presentation mode (concept including an error that is difficult for the player to notice) is displayed when notifying the player of the lottery result of (1). That is, during the variable display of the second special symbol, a pseudo stop performance is executed to make the player think that the variation of the special symbol has stopped, and in correspondence with the pseudo stop performance, the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 (remaining time reduction number of times for notification) is updated (subtracted), and the correction performance is executed so that the state shown in FIG. 127(b) is obtained.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the notified number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, although detailed description will be given later, this correction effect is configured to be executed only when the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer). Therefore, even if the pseudo stop effect is executed during one time of the special symbol fluctuation period, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the actual number of times of remaining time reduction is smaller than the number of times corresponding to the notified number of times of remaining time reduction, an effect (multiple variation fusion effect) for updating (subtracting) the display mode (remaining time reduction number of times for notification) of the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 across a plurality of special symbol variations may be executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are changed.

FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number 4 table 202ca, a first winning type selection 4 table 202cb, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small winning type selection 4 table 202ce.

First, the first winning random number 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 4 table 202ca. In this first winning random number table 202ca, as in the first embodiment described above, a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol are stipulated. Otherwise, they are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129(b), this special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 is different from the above-described special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in that the range determined as a small hit is changed from "5 to 989" to "5 to 998", and the rest is the same. That is, in the lottery for the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won with a probability of 994/1000.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130(a), the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb will be described. FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb. This first hit type selection 4 table 202cb is different from the above-described first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21 (a)) in that a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 is provided instead of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is provided instead of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1. This special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 differs from the above-described special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21(b)) in the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed as the jackpot games, then a time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when the jackpot B is selected, 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed as the jackpot games, and then the time saving state (time saving A) is set. Then, when the jackpot C is selected, a jackpot game of 5 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and then the normal state is set. That is, the jackpot types A and B are jackpots in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) are set as time-saving states that can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the lottery of the second special pattern is mainly executed as a game in the time saving state, and when the time saving B is set, the lottery of the first special pattern is mainly executed as the game in the time saving state. In this way, different game specifications can be set in the time saving state by varying the variation (lottery) of the special symbols mainly executed in the time saving state according to the time saving state to be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having game specifications equal to or greater than the types of game states that can be set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 130(c). FIG. 130(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2. This special-figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 differs from the above-described special-figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21(c)) in that the types of jackpot types defined corresponding to the possible values of the first hit type counter value C2 are increased, the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot types, the jackpot D is defined in the range of the first hit type counter value C2 of "0 to 69", and the jackpot E is defined in the range of "70 to 99". When the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, 15 rounds of the jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game, after which a time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when the jackpot E is selected, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game and then the time saving state (time saving B) is set.

That is, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the time saving state is always set after the big win game is finished, and 70% of them are set to the time saving A and 30% are to the time saving B.例文帳に追加Here, when the time saving A is set as the time saving state, the time saving game centering on the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is executed again. On the other hand, when time saving B is set, a time saving game mainly based on lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is executed.

In this way, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the probability variable state, and when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the state is shifted to an advantageous latent probability state at a rate of 58% (big wins B, D). Then, in the latent definite state, the player hits to the right, and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once a latent definite state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbols is easily executed by winning the second ball entrance 1640 by striking to the right, and the state of high probability of big win and the big win of the second special symbols are easily repeated. Therefore, the player can play the game with the purpose of making the transition to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. As described above, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd defines random values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the variation pattern 4 table 202cd, at least a normal variation pattern table 202cd1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state and a variation pattern table for time saving A for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state 202cd2 and a variation pattern table for time saving B 202cd3 are defined. Next, specific contents of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a table referred to when the game state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal variation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 defines a random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type (appropriateness determination result).

Concretely, as a variation pattern determined when a win (big win) is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, and in the range of "51 to 198" is associated with super reach (30 seconds).

On the other hand, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is lost in the lottery, the fluctuation pattern of short out (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, which is out of the range of "171 to 198".

Furthermore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the winning long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small winning long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The deviation long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, when right-handed hitting is performed in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(a), details of the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A will be described. FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving A fluctuation pattern table 202cd2. The variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which the time saving A is set among the time saving states.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the first special symbol (special figure 1) jackpot has a jackpot super-short variation (1 second) associated with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). In addition, the deviation of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is defined in association with the deviation super long variation (60 seconds) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

On the other hand, the big hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the full range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the full range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. A deviation short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (0 to 198).

Next, details of the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 133(b). FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3. The variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which the time saving B is set among the time saving states.

As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the first special symbol (special figure 1) jackpot has a jackpot short variation (5 seconds) associated with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). In addition, the deviation of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is defined in association with the deviation super long variation (5 seconds) for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

On the other hand, the big hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the full range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the full range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. An off-long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the full range of possible values of 1 (0 to 198).

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce will be described. This small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection 4 table 202ce, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 69" in association with "small hit A". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game of the same opening pattern as the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, 70 random numbers become the ``small winning A'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning, the ratio of determining the ``small winning A'' is 70% (70/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "small hit B". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 6 times for 0.06 seconds during the small win game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, 30 random numbers become the ``small winning B'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small winning, the ratio of determining the ``small winning B'' is 30% (30/100).

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 137 to 151, control processing of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment differs greatly from each of the above-described embodiments in that the lottery (fluctuation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is configured to be redundantly executable.

Then, in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving state (first time saving state) in which the lottery of the first special pattern is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special pattern (first time saving state) and the time saving state (second time saving state) in which the lottery of the second special pattern is more frequently executed than the lottery of the first special pattern (second time saving state) are different in that they can be set.

In the fourth embodiment, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the first time-saving state, can be set as the time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a plurality of game states having different advantageous levels, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 137, special symbol variation processing 4 (S194), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S194). In the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), various judgments and determinations are made based on the counter values acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the determined variable display mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control is executed to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (whether or not the flag 203d in the jackpot is on) (S7001), and when it is determined that the game is in the middle of a jackpot (the flag 203d in the jackpot is on) (S7001: Yes), there is no need to set the lottery of special symbols or the stoppage of the fluctuation display, etc., so this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the big hit (the flag 203d in the big hit is off) (S7001: No), it is determined whether or not the game is in the small hit game (whether the flag 203g in the small hit is on) (S7002). In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that the small winning medium flag 203g is on (S7002: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the small hit (the flag 203g during the small hit is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003).

In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to S7006. Here, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the variation time of the first special symbol being varied and displayed has elapsed, the processing for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol, and when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is to be stop-displayed, the second special symbol being variable-displayed is forcibly stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. Details of the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S7003: No), on the condition that at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the big hit determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7006. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S7006 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S7004) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S7006). This second special symbol variation stop process (S7008) is, like the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has elapsed. The details of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7006, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7006: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected, a second special symbol variation start processing is executed for setting the start of a new variation display by executing a lottery for the second special symbol (S7007), and this processing ends. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the variation (lottery) control of the first special symbol and the variation (lottery) control of the second special symbol are configured to be executed independently. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether or not the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery for the special symbol a plurality of times in a short period of time, and the game efficiency can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol lottery wins a big win or a small win, and while a winning game (big win game, small win game) based on the winning is being executed, a new special pattern variation (lottery) is not started. By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to perform a complicated act of predicting the lottery result of the special symbols while playing the winning game, and the player can be made to pay attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present fourth embodiment, when one special symbol among a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, the other special symbol during variation is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a state in which special patterns fluctuate during a big win game, or a state in which one special pattern wins a big win (during a big win game) and the other special pattern wins a big win, so that a game more easily understandable to the player can be provided.

In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol variation start processing and the special symbol variation stop processing are not executed during both the big winning game and the small winning game. It can be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute more variations of special symbols (lottery), so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the first special symbol variation start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S7004).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S7103), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S 7104).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

When the process of S7104 is completed, next, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S7105 is completed, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is executed (S7106). This first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on the set game state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the process of S7106 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 138, S7107). Although details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (S7108). This game state update process (FIG. 138, S7108), which will be described in detail later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time saving medium counter 203k) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of S7108 ends, this process ends. A detailed description of this game state update process will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of random numbers for the big win or small win specified in the first winning random number table 202a matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S7202 is a big win (S7203), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S7203: Yes), the big win flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the big win (S7205). Then, based on the value of the obtained winning type counter, the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value corresponding to the current game state (for example, 0 for the normal state and 1 for the time saving state) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost (S7203: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208), and then this process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so as not to win a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the processing of S7203 (S7203: No), it is determined that the lottery result is out, and the processing of S7208 is configured to be executed. 7203: No), it may be configured to determine whether or not a small hit is won, and to execute processing according to the determination result. In this case, with respect to special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (see S7708 in FIG. 145), which will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the first special symbol jackpot is set (S7301). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the processing of S7204 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139).

In the process of S7301, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S7301: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7201, the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 130) determines (selects) the jackpot type (S7302), S7303 Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S7301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7304), and the process proceeds to S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state that can be set as a game state is configured to be able to set a time saving A (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a time saving B (second time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A. Therefore, the game state that can be set is configured to be three types of normal state, time saving A, and time saving B, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k and the value of the time saving state storage area 203cd are stored. The current game state is determined based on the information received.

Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0, it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), it is determined that the current game state is the time-saving state. Then, when the information indicating the time saving A (for example, the information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current game state is determined to be the time saving A (first time saving state). is determined to be

The configuration for determining the current gaming state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area may be provided for temporarily storing the currently set game state while constantly updating it, and the current game state may be discriminated using the information stored in the game state storage area. By configuring in this way, although the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, the current game state can be reliably determined. Furthermore, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, four types), it is possible to easily determine the current game state.

In the process of S7305, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state) (7305), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S7306).

When the processing of S7306 ends, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S7307). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S7308), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the game state update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138), will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S7108). In this game state update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations set continuously in the time saving state is executed.

That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the time saving end condition established based on the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is updated at the timing of stopping the special symbol fluctuation. In the fourth embodiment, the time saving end condition established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is updated at the timing of starting the special symbol fluctuation. By constructing in this way, even when a process capable of independently executing variation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used (even when the order of starting the variation of the special symbols and the order of stopping the variation of the special symbols are exchanged), it is possible to appropriately set the time saving state corresponding to the predetermined number of times of variation of the special symbols.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (S7401). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S7402), and after setting a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203k (S7403), this process ends.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the remaining time reduction command, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the time reduction counter 203k from the remaining time reduction command, and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the time saving information update area 223g is updated according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the value of the time saving medium counter 203k of the main control device 110 It is possible to update the value while synchronizing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (S7005). In this first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), processing for stopping the first special symbol when the variation time elapses, and processing for forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol during variation with the combination of symbols indicating failure when the first special symbol is stopped by the combination of symbols indicating a big win are executed.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S7501), and when it is determined that it is the end timing (S7501: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S7502). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7503), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a symbol (S7505).

When the processing of S7505 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), and the jackpot flag 203ca and the counter 203k during time saving are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S7508), the jackpot middle flag 203d is set to ON (S7509), and the process proceeds to S7510.

On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the process of S7503 to S7509 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is fixed and stopped (stopped display) is set (S7510). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S7511), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S7501, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S7512), and this process is terminated. The special symbols are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 while the processing of S7512 is being executed.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has passed (S7501: Yes), the processing (S7503 to S7511) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S7502: Yes), a process (S7503, S7504) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missing symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed (after the jackpot game is completed), the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139), a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S7506 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 142). A jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506 based on the game state obtained.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (other) is forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, but it is not limited to this. may be forcibly stopped at the missing symbol, or at the time point when the small winning symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). After the jackpot of one pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is finished (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable display of the other pattern (for example, the second special pattern) may be restarted.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment and the above-described examples, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific stop symbol (big win symbol, small winning symbol) indicating a win, the configuration of stopping or temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol has been described. The variation of the pattern is continued without stopping or temporarily stopped, and when the other special pattern is stopped and displayed as a stop pattern (for example, a big win pattern) indicating a win during the execution of the winning game (for example, a big winning game) based on one special pattern, the execution of the winning game (for example, a big winning game) based on the other special pattern may be put on standby (postponed) until the one winning game is completed.

By constructing in this way, the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols can be surely notified to the player, and the simultaneous occurrence of a plurality of winning games can be suppressed to provide a game that is difficult to understand. Furthermore, after one winning game is finished, another winning game can be started continuously, so that advantageous benefits (winning games) can be continuously provided to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to notify the player that a big win has been won in the other special pattern (the big win pattern is stopped and displayed) by using the performance (hit performance) executed during one of the winning games. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Further, when the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one winning game is not winning (losing), it is preferable to configure so as not to report the losing by using the winning performance being executed. Thus, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a lottery result in which no privilege is newly given to the player, the performance for the privilege currently given is preferentially provided to the player, so that the game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (in parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a hit (small hit, big win) as a result of the lottery, control is performed to forcibly remove the variation (lottery) of the other special symbol. is started), in the lottery for the other special symbol to be executed thereafter, a forced lottery (judgment using a special table in which outliers are defined for the entire range of the obtained first winning random number counter value C1) excluding winning lottery results may be executed.

By configuring in this way, even if a plurality of special symbol lotteries are independently executed, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous execution of a plurality of winning games. In addition, since the other special pattern can be forcibly lost by the timing of performing the lottery of the special pattern (the start timing of the variation at which the stop pattern indicating the win is stop-displayed) rather than the timing when the stop pattern indicating the win is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the content of the performance executed during the variable display of the other special pattern and the lottery result of the other special pattern contradict each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the second special symbol variation start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S7007).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (S7607), and this process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is a flag that is set to ON while stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss when the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends (when the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit). That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is ON in the process of S7601, without executing each process of S7602 to S7606 to set the start of fluctuation, it is configured to end this process as it is. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the second special pattern, which is forcibly stopped, from starting to fluctuate again within the same processing when the first special pattern is stop-displayed as a jackpot pattern. In the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to the special symbol variation processing 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after performing the variation processing regarding the first special symbol, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is used. When configured to execute the variation processing according to, instead of the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203cc, the special figure 1 variation stop flag (the target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) may be used.

Also, as in the fourth embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently (in parallel) fluctuating (lottery), and the lottery result of one of the special symbols indicates winning, the variation processing of each special symbol (special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 137)) may be defined so that the variation processing for the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is executed first. As a result, for example, when a holding storage function (holding storage means) is provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the variation of the special pattern is started at the same time (within the same processing) after the end of the big win game, it is possible to preferentially handle the lottery result of the special pattern which is advantageous to the player, and to suppress the provision of a disadvantageous game to the player.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine capable of independently executing a first special symbol lottery that easily gives a player an advantageous privilege (for example, per 16 rounds) and a second special symbol lottery that makes it harder to give a player a privilege that is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery, a storage means capable of storing up to a plurality (for example, four) of rights for executing each special symbol lottery is provided, and the lottery of each special symbol is performed at the same time (same process) after the end of a big win game. When the lottery result of each special pattern shows a win with the same fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds), the process related to the first special pattern is preferentially executed, so that the winning game of the first special pattern (advantageous privilege for the player) can be given regardless of the lottery result of the second special pattern.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7601, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S7601: No), it is determined whether or not the winning (entering ball) for the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S7602). If the winning (entering the ball) into the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S7602: Yes), next, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 are acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S7603), and the second special symbol big winning determination process for executing the second special symbol big winning determination is executed based on each stored counter value ( S7604). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S7604 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S7603, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S7605). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S7605 ends, the game state update process (see FIG. 141) described above is executed (S7606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7602 that the winning for the second ball entrance 1640 has not been detected (S7602: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the variation (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the variation of the special symbol (lottery) is executed. That is, in the state that the time saving state is set, when executing the process of changing (lottery) the first special pattern and the second special pattern at the same time (within the same processing), the number of times of time saving is subtracted by two.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of special symbols are independently (parallelly) varied (lottery), but in the third symbol display device 81, one of the special symbols is used as the main special symbol according to the game state, and an effect is executed to make it look as if a game using only the main special symbol is being performed (see FIG. 126), thereby providing an easy-to-understand effect to the player. However, even when the variation display emphasizing only the main special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, internally, the number of times of time saving is subtracted according to the variation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), so that a contradiction occurs between the display mode of the number of times of time saving and the update status of the game state (internal number of times of time saving). Alternatively, there is a problem that the updated content of the display mode of the number of times of time saving is inconsistent with the effect content of the variable display emphasizing only the main special symbol.

Regarding such a problem, details will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, display control is performed so that the number of times of reduced time for display (number of times of remaining reduced time) is updated according to the number of times of fluctuation (lottery) of the main special symbol. When there is a difference between the number of times of reduced time displayed and the actual number of times of reduced time, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the main special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more). It is configured to execute a process of correcting the number of times of reduced working hours for display so as to fill the difference from the actual number of reduced hours of working hours.

By constructing in this way, a player can grasp an appropriate time-saving situation (remaining time-saving number of times) only by playing the game while paying attention to the performance executed corresponding to the main special pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81, and can play an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) will be mainly described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, the processing of S7702 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not a big win is executed based on the acquired counter values and the first 4-win random number table 202ca. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is obtained from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area), and otherwise the same control as the first special symbol jackpot judgment process (see FIG. 137) is executed.

When the processing of S7702 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S7703), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (S7703: Yes), the processing of S7704 to S7707 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to a big hit is executed, and this processing is finished. In each process of these S7704-S7707, the same process as each process of S7204-S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S7703, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S7703: No), a special figure 2 loss variation process for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit of the second special symbol or a loss is executed (S7708), and this process is finished. Next, the details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S7708).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S7708), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S7702 in FIG. 144 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S7801 (S7801: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7805), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set (S7902). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the processing of S7704 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 144).

In the process of S7902, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S7902: Yes), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144), the jackpot type is determined from the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 131 (a)) (S7904).

When the process of S7904 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (S7906). Then, the process proceeds to S7908.

On the other hand, in the process of S7902, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S7902: No), the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907) is executed, and the process proceeds to S7908.

In the processing of S7908, the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S7908). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S7909), and then terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S7907) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8001). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is ON (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134), the small hit type is selected (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S8004), and from the read variation pattern selection table, a small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S8005). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S8006), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd corresponding to the current gaming state (See FIGS. 131 to 133) is read (S8007), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S8008). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S8009), to end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the second special symbol variation stop process (S7008), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S8103). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8105), and the process proceeds to S8106.

Next, the processing after S8106 differs from the processing after S7505 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 140, S7005) in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special figure 1 confirmation command is changed to the special figure 2 confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S8102), and this processing is terminated. In addition, in the processing of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S8103: No), special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S8104), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S8104), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S8104).

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S8203).

After completing the processing of S8203, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S8204). After that, the small hit flag 203cb is set to OFF (S8205), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S8207).

When the processing of S8207 ends, a special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S8208). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S8209), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S8201: No), the special figure 2 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the determination of the second special symbol is set (S8210). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S8211), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). This jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is different from the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) of the first embodiment described above in that the content of the process (the process of setting the game state after the jackpot game is finished) executed at the end timing of the ending effect, that is, at the end timing of the jackpot game. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above have differences in the configuration of the game board 13 and the contents of the main control, so there are cases where the detailed operation contents differ during the big win, but even in such a case, the processing contents are the same and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) of the first embodiment described above are executed. That is, during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the big win, the same process as the big win control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed. Then, in the processing of S1612, when it is determined that the present time is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the current big win type is the big win C (S1691).

In the processing of S1691, the current jackpot type is determined based on the information stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area for temporarily storing the currently executed jackpot type.

In the processing of S1691, if it is determined that the current big win type is not the big win C (any one of the big wins A, B, and D) (S1691: No), that is, if it is determined that the time saving state is set after the current big win (after the big win game ends), then it is determined whether the current big win type is the big win D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the time-saving state is set so that the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A or B or the jackpot D. Therefore, the processing of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player or a time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time-saving state.

In the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot D (S1692: No), information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1693), and the process proceeds to S1694. On the other hand, in the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is the jackpot D (S1692: Yes), information indicating the time saving B state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694.

Here, when the time saving A state is set, that is, when the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot A, B, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time saving state, the variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A (see FIG. 133 (a)) is referred to, and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is more likely to be performed than the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol. When the short B state is set, that is, when the current jackpot type is the jackpot D, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time saving state, the variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B (see FIG. 134(b)) is referred to, and the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed more easily than the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the time saving state is provided according to the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state and the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol are made different depending on the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set. It is configured to be able to set the time saving state (time saving B) that becomes the pattern. And it is configured so that the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to give the player an advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring in this way, in the fourth embodiment, as the time-saving state set as the game state, the time-saving state (time-saving B) disadvantageous to the player and the time-saving state (time-saving A) advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, it is possible to set game states with different degrees of advantage only by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol, so there is no need to use a special configuration for varying the degree of advantage, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1693 or S1695, next, the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to 100 (S1694), and the state command for notifying the set game state to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1696). After that, the processing of S1617 and S1618, which are the same as the jackpot control processing (see S1504 in FIG. 52) described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) can be set, and the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to 100 regardless of which time saving state is set. In other words, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment, only the variation count end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 100 times is set.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the same time-saving end condition (the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 100) is set regardless of the type of the set time-saving state (time-saving A, time-saving B), but different time-saving end conditions may be set according to the type of the time-saving state that is set. You may comprise so that the time-saving end condition which is hard to be satisfied may be set rather than the case where it is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the small winning control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning control process 4 (S1595). This small winning control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) differs from the small winning control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the process executed at the opening timing of the V winning opening is deleted, and otherwise the same process is performed. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the small hit control process 4 (S1595 in FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same S1701 to S1706 processes as the above-described small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) are executed, and when the process of S1706 is finished, the processes of S1707 and S1708 are skipped, the processes of S1709 and S1710 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the current time is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the process of S1711 to S1721, which is the same as the process of the small winning control process (S1505 in FIG. 53) described above, is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be performed independently (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation configuration), and the one-type per winning lottery of special symbols and the two-type per winning method of winning a big win when the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game (so-called one type and two mixed configuration). and are different from the above-described embodiments.

In the game state in which the time saving state is set, the time saving state (time saving B) in which the variation of the first special pattern is mainly executed and the time saving state (time saving A) in which the second special pattern is mainly changed can be set by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in the simultaneous variation.

Further, the second special pattern is configured to make it easier to win a small prize than the first special pattern, and the time saving state in which the time saving A is set is a game state more advantageous to the player than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. In addition, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is configured so that the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is larger than that in the normal state.

That is, by applying the above-described simultaneous variation configuration to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described one type and two types mixed configuration and configuring the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol in the time saving state to differ according to the type of big win, it is possible to execute a time saving game in which many variations (lottery) of the second special symbol are performed and a time saving game in which many variations (lottery) of the first special symbol are performed.

In addition, by configuring the second special pattern so that it is easier to win a small hit than the first special pattern (including a configuration where a small winning lottery is not performed in the first special pattern), the time saving game in the time saving state is an advantageous time saving state (time saving game that executes many variations (lottery) of the second special pattern) and a disadvantageous time saving state (first special pattern) that is advantageous to the player by aiming for both per type and two per type. It is possible to set a time-saving game) in which many fluctuations (lottery) are executed. Further, even when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, as a game state advantageous to the player, it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different advantageous stages to provide various games to the player, and to provide the game rich in interest, in contrast to the conventional game machine having a mixed configuration of one type and two types, in which only the game state (time saving state) in which two types of wins are more likely to be obtained than the normal state can be set.

As described above, the control of the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is configured to be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped for a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can grasp that the lottery game which was in the middle of the variable display is not extinguished, and can play the jackpot game without anxiety.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 152 and 153, control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is configured to be redundantly executable (so-called simultaneous variation configuration).

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state, a time saving state (time saving B) for mainly executing the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and a time saving state (time saving A) for mainly performing the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are configured to be settable, and the number of times of time saving displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (number of times of time saving on display) is configured to be different according to the time saving state to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the number of times of time saving according to the number of times of variation production executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the number of times of variation of the main special symbol).

Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery (see FIG. 129 (b)), and when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery (when the small winning symbol indicating the small winning is stopped and displayed), the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost symbol indicating the loss.

And since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit at a ratio of 994/1000 (see FIG. 129(b)), in the gaming state in which the time saving A is set, even if 100 times are set as the number of times of time saving, the variation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can only be executed about 50 times.

Therefore, when the time saving A is set, 50 times are displayed as the number of times of time saving for display on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the number of times of time saving for display is updated (subtracted) every time the variation (lottery) of the main special pattern (second special pattern) is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game by making the player think that 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving without making the player notice that the number of times of time saving is actually set to 100 times and the number of times of time saving is subtracted corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol to be forcibly stopped.

In the case of performing the above-described time-saving number of times display, for example, when the second special symbol is won by lottery, or when the reservation memory of the first special symbol is lost and the new variation of the first special symbol is not started, and when the second special symbol is won (when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed) When the first special symbol does not change at the time of winning, that is, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the situation where the variation of the first special symbol cannot be stopped. In this case, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state becomes greater than the number of times of time saving for display, and if the variation of the first special symbol stops while the second special symbol is not changing, and a new variation of the first special symbol is started, the variation of the first special symbol is executed regardless of the variation of the second special symbol. A problem arises in that the number of times of fluctuation becomes smaller than the number of times of time reduction for display.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the display time saving count and the actual time saving count, the time saving count correction performance for correcting the error is executed (see FIG. 127). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is terminated with an error between the number of times of variation of the main special pattern executed during the time saving state set this time (remaining number of times executed during the time saving state) and the number of times of time saving for display, and the player feels uncomfortable.

In addition, since the number of times of time saving for display is updated according to the variation of the main special pattern executed during the time saving state, the player can play the game in the time saving state with confidence only by paying attention to the variable display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the number of times of time saving.

In addition, as the correction effect of the number of times of time saving described above, the subtraction correction effect executed when the number of times of saving time for display is larger than the actual number of times of time saving is performed. At the time of temporary stop), or at the time of resuming the variation from the state of temporary stop, an effect of updating (subtracting) the number of times of shortening time for display is executed. As a result, it is possible to subtract the number of times of shortening the display time during one special pattern variation without any sense of incompatibility.

On the other hand, the addition correction performance executed when the number of times of time saving for display is smaller than the number of times of saving time for display may be configured to determine whether the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), perform addition display for indicating that the number of times of saving time for display is added on the display screen when the variation pattern is longer than the predetermined time, and add the number of times of time saving for display. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of time reductions has been added on the way.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the same number of times of time saving is set, by setting the number of times of time saving to be displayed differently according to the set time saving state, the game can be played during the time saving state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, since the number of time saving times to be displayed in advance is varied according to the time saving state to be set, the frequency of execution of performance for correcting the number of time saving times for display during the time saving state can be reduced, so that a game easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, the effect mode of the correction effect for correcting the number of display time reductions during the time saving state is not limited to the above-described one. For example, as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the main special symbol, an item may be displayed on the display screen to reduce the number of display time reduction times in one main special symbol variation. You can

In addition, the effect mode of the addition correction effect is not limited to the above-described one, for example, after the number of times of time saving for display reaches "1 time", "? times" may be displayed so that the player does not know how long the time saving state will continue. Although the main special symbol variation is executed twice, it may be configured such that the display time reduction frequency is subtracted only once.

Also, even when there is no error between the number of times of time saving for display and the actual number of times of time saving, it may be configured to intentionally execute the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect. As a result, since various effects can be executed during the time saving state, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get bored.

Among the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, the differences from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 152, the content of the effect setting process 4 (S2891) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the content of effect setting process 4 (S2891).

This production setting process 4 (S2891) replaces a portion of the production setting process (see S2804 of FIG. 63) with the production setting process 2 of the second embodiment (see S2851 of FIG. 104) described above, sets different display commands according to the type of time saving state to be set (time saving A, time saving B), and corrects the number of times of saving time for display according to the actual number of times of saving time (number of times of remaining time saving). The difference is that the processing to do is added.

When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 of FIG. 152) is executed, first, the processes of S2901 and S2902 which are the same as the above-described effect setting process (see S2804 of FIG. 63) are executed, and then the process of S3301 which is the same as the above-described effect setting process 2 (see S2851 of FIG. 104) is executed. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time saving state is set, if the first special symbol variation is completed, the same S3306 to S3308 processing as the production setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed, and then the time saving number correction process for display is executed. (S3376), this processing ends.

In this display time saving frequency correction process (S3376), the display time saving frequency displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the time saving state is discriminated from the actual time saving frequency, and when a predetermined error occurs in the determination result, a process for correcting the value of the display time saving frequency is executed. The detailed content of this display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the currently set time saving state type is time saving A (S3371). The display time saving B start command set here is output toward the display control device 114 by the command output process in the same manner as the other display commands described above, and is referred to when displaying the display screen shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time saving A in the process of S3371 (S3371: Yes), the time saving A start command for display is set (S3373), and the process proceeds to S3374. When the time saving A start command for display is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126(a) is displayed.

In the processing of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3375), and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the time reduction number correction process for display (S3376) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the content of the time reduction number correction process for display (S3376). In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described lower correction effect process with reference to FIG.

When the display time reduction frequency correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time reduction frequency counter Ca, that is, the remaining time reduction frequency displayed in the remaining time reduction frequency display area Dm10 of the display screen is read (S3701). When the time saving counter Ca for display is set to the time saving A, that is, when the time saving state in which the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern is mainly performed is set, it is updated each time the variation of the second special pattern is performed, and when the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special pattern is mainly performed is set, it is updated each time the variation of the first special pattern is performed.

Next, the actual remaining number of time saving stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3702), the difference between the value read in the process of S3701 and the value read in the process of S3702 is calculated (S3703), and it is determined whether there is a difference between the values compared in the process of S3703 (S3704). The time is read (S3705), and it is determined whether or not the read variation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

In the process of S3706, if it is determined that it is 30 seconds or more (S3706: Yes), then the number of times of pseudo stop corresponding to the difference value calculated in the process of S3703 (the number of times the special symbol (third symbol) is temporarily stopped in the pseudo stop effect) is set (S3707), and the correction variation pattern corresponding to the set number of times of pseudo change (number of times of pseudo stop) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the time saving counter for display Ca is corrected to the value of the time saving information update area, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that there is no difference (S3704: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3706 that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S3706: No), this process ends.

<Regarding the first modification of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol lottery is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing the right-handed game. Then, when a small win is won by lottery of the second special pattern, a plurality of small win types (small wins A to C) can be set, and based on the number of times the small win is won in a state where the time saving state is set, more specifically, when the number of set times of the small win type set to the difference of winning the small win reaches a predetermined number, a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established.

On the other hand, in this modified example, by executing a right-handed game, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed. Thus, in the right-handed game executed during the time saving state, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are configured to be executed, so that the condition for ending the special pattern 1 based on the lottery for the first special pattern and the condition for finishing the special pattern 2 based on the lottery for the second special pattern can be set as time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time-saving state ends, so that the game content becomes monotonous due to easy prediction of the game content, and early boredom of the game can be suppressed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification will be described. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right area. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right area, and balls shot in a right-handed game are alternately distributed to a left channel 701 and a right channel 702 formed on the left side of the distribution member.

A movable lid 1500 is provided on the upstream side of the left channel to form a flow-down surface thereof, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a fixed opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown).

Specifically, the main processing (see FIG. 51) of the main controller 110 includes a movable lid opening/closing process as a process executed every 4 milliseconds, and the movable lid opening/closing process repeats an open period of 0.1 seconds and a closed period of 2 to 3 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b that is controlled to open and close in this way is configured to make it more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entrance 64. As shown in FIG.

After flowing down the left channel 701 and above the movable lid 1500, the ball flows down the curved portion of the left channel 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the downstream end of the left channel 701, and flows out to the lower region of the right region. Furthermore, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be able to enter above the through gate 67 of the left channel 701, and when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation, the ball flowing down the left channel 701 is guided to the second ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 flow into the inlet 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the far side of the left flow path 701 (the far side from the viewpoint of FIG. 154), and flow out to the lower area of the right area. Here, the ball outflow position of the left channel 701 and the ball outflow position of the right channel 702 will be described with reference to FIG.

The operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will now be described in detail. This normally movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110, the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 0.8 seconds, which is repeatedly executed.

In other words, in the game board 13 of Modification 1, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the rolling surface on which the movable member 1500 is always arranged. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is in the open state, the ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the left first ball entrance 64b.

The timing for rolling on (or falling on) the constantly movable member 1500 is every 1.2 seconds, and the timing for the constantly movable valve 1500 to be open is 0.1 second out of 0.9 seconds, so the timing at which the two coincide is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the first left ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball enters the left first ball entrance 64b periodically, so that when the jackpot game ends and shifts to a time-saving state, the occurrence of a state in which the special figure 1 is not reserved can be prevented. In addition, since a period (0.1 second) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit is set as a period in which the movable valve 1500 is opened once, the right-handed game can be disadvantageous to the player rather than the left-handed game aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a in the normal game state.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, when a left-handed game is played, about 15 of 250 shot balls are designed to enter the left first ball entrance 64a, and when the balls enter, 5 prize balls are paid out. Also, it is designed so that about five balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, it is possible to let about 20 balls enter the left first ball entrance 64a, considering that the paid-out prize balls are shot again.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state, it is designed so that about 9 out of 250 shot balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b when the right-handed game is played, and when the balls enter, 2 prize balls are paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are shot, only about 10 balls can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the paid-out prize balls are shot again. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes is not provided with the general prize-winning opening 63, but the general prize-winning opening 63 may be provided based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game when the game state is normal. As a result, the number of balls paid out as prize balls can be increased in the right-handed game during the time-saving state or during the jackpot state.

Next, among the structures arranged in the right region of the game board 13 in Modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 will be described, focusing on the differences from the structure of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above.

In Modified Example 1, the through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 can flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without lowering the flow velocity. Therefore, it is possible to keep the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 constant, thereby preventing the balls from lining up in the second flow path 702 and causing a plurality of balls to enter the second ball inlet 640 at the same time. In addition, when the third symbol display device 81 reports that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened (see FIG. 23(b)), the ball can be quickly entered into the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, since the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol are arranged in different flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) distributed by the distribution member 700, it is difficult to let the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 when the distribution member 700 is broken so as to cause the ball to flow down only to one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled). can be reduced. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed to create a state in which the ball flows down only to one flow path, thereby making it possible to create a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modified example, it is possible to suppress the creation of a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 illegally.

By configuring in this way, when a right-handed game is played in a state in which the time saving state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed. In addition, even if a ball is shot aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player, the right first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player is provided in the left channel 701 which is the channel of the ball which can enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the execution of only the lottery of the second special symbol can be suppressed.

In this modification, a ball entrance (left first ball entrance 64b) that triggers the lottery for the first special symbol and a ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) that triggers the lottery for the second special symbol are provided in the right area of the game board 13, so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can enter either of the entrances. A sorting device that alternately sorts the first guideway leading to the first ball entrance 64b and the second guideway leading to the second ball entrance 640 may be provided.

By configuring in this way, since the right-handed game is executed, the lottery condition for the first special symbol and the lottery condition for the second special symbol can be established alternately, so that the player is provided with an excessively advantageous game state (that is, only the second special symbol lottery is biasedly executed during the time saving state) and the player is provided with an excessively disadvantageous game state (that is, only the first special symbol lottery is biasedly executed during the time saving state). can be suppressed.

<Regarding the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. In the above-described second embodiment, the time-saving end condition (special figure 1 end condition) that can be established based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the time-saving end condition (special figure 2 end condition) that can be established based on the lottery of the second special symbol are made different, and the degree of expectation to obtain the second type per lottery based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the degree of expectation to obtain the two type per lottery based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be different.

Specifically, in the lottery for the first special pattern, the time saving state is easier to end (the time saving ending condition is easier to be established) than in the lottery for the second special pattern, and two types of wins are easier to obtain. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the time-saving state is set, a performance screen for selecting either a left-handed game (a game for drawing a lottery for the first special symbol) or a right-handed game (a game for drawing a lottery for the second special symbol) is displayed, and the player is made to play a desired game.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, an effect for performing one game (right-handed game) is executed in a state where the time-saving state is set, and when it is determined that the one game is in a state immediately before the time-saving end condition is satisfied (state before the time-saving end condition is satisfied), an effect for performing the other game (left-handed game) is executed. By configuring in this way, the game can be enjoyed to the maximum extent by playing the game along with the effect to be executed (by varying the game method).

Next, the display screen in the state in which the time saving state of this modified example is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. Figure 155 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot (jackets A, B, D in the second embodiment described above) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after the conditions before the time saving end about a beating game are satisfied. In addition, in each display screen, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that display the same effect modes as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), in the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying "Right shot" in the guidance display area Dm2, a display mode indicating "Right shot" is also displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Here, unlike the above-described second embodiment, in this modified example, an effect display for prompting the player to play the game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and a display mode corresponding to the instruction command for notifying the game direction according to the game state is displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20.

That is, during the jackpot game and during the time-saving state, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to always display the display mode indicating "right-handed". Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment saying "After the jackpot is over, enter the rush and hit right" is displayed in order to make the right-handed game be played after the jackpot game is over.

Then, when the right -handed game is executed during the time -saving state, just before the time -saving conditions that can be established based on the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special pattern (special figure 2) are established (when the special map 2 time is established), as shown in Fig. 155 (B), the right -handed play technique in the reduced time has ended. The comment of the rush end, the pull -back zone rush is displayed, and the word "left -handed" is displayed in the guide display area DM2.

As a result, the player ends the right-handed game and starts the left-handed game. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. In fact, since the time saving state has not ended, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 continues to display "Right shot". In the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbols that can be acquired by the left-handed game are displayed.

Then, when the player starts a left-handed game, as shown in FIG. 156(a), an effect in the withdrawal zone is executed. In addition, since the effect in the pullback zone is the same as that in the above-described second embodiment, when the left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156(b), in the state where the time saving state is set, it is configured to determine the satisfaction (progress) of a plurality of time saving end conditions, and execute the effect of causing the game to be played to the right or the game to be played to the left. As a result, there is an effect that the player can play various games during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the game direction is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 so as to perform a right-handed game in the first half of the time-saving state and a left-handed game in the second half. Thus, the right-handed game can be executed continuously from the jackpot game, and the left-handed game can be continuously executed when the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Furthermore, when the state immediately before the time saving state ends in the right-handed game, that is, when it is determined that the time saving end condition established based on the information updated by the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern is immediately before establishment, the performance for guiding the left-handed game is executed, so that the player can be guided to the game in which the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is difficult to be established according to the current situation. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to an advantageous game method.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modified example is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, the ratio of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 in a left-handed game is the same whether the normal state is set as the game state or the time-saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time-saving state is set or the normal state is set in the "pull-back zone" in which the left-handed game is performed in the second half of the time-saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modification is applied, as described above, the time-saving state is configured to make it easier to acquire two types of winnings based on the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, in the ``retraction zone'' where the time saving state is set, the ease of lottery (fluctuation) of the first special pattern is the same as in the case where the normal state is set, but since it is easy to acquire two kinds of wins based on the lottery, the game state is more advantageous than the normal state.

Therefore, a game state in which a big win is actually more likely to be set (easier to obtain a double win) than in a normal state can be produced as a ``pull-back zone,'' so that the effect of production can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the timing at which the pre-time-saving end condition is established based on the right-handed game differs depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (the lottery result of the second special symbol), the period during which the ``pull-back zone'' is executed is indefinite. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the "pull-back zone" will continue for a long period of time.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the game state, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is set according to the game state and the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is met), and the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20, thereby positively guiding the game method to the player. , the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 may be varied according to the game state and the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is met). In this case, when the condition before the end of the time saving is satisfied by the right-handed game (the game for executing the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol) during the time saving state, it is preferable to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so as to be less conspicuous than when the condition before the time saving end is not satisfied.

In this way, in a state where the time saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode according to the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied), so that the player can visually determine the degree of advantage when the game is executed in accordance with the game direction (for example, hitting right) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20.

<Regarding the fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. FIG. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set. In the above-described second embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the game (first game) for drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game (second game) for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) were configured so that the player can select (see FIG. 82). When the first game is selected, the lottery for the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the lottery for the special figure 2 is performed by aiming for the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game (see FIG. 2).

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different so that the player can select the game in which the time saving end condition is easily established (the time saving condition is easily ended) and the game in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established (from the game).

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, the game (first game) in which the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is more likely to win the jackpot in one special symbol lottery than the game (second game) in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied. was configured to be high.

In the second embodiment configured as described above, various games can be executed by allowing the player to select a game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. In addition, since the easiness of ending the time saving state (easiness of establishing the time saving end condition) and the degree of expectation for a big win for one special drawing lottery can be changed according to the game method selected by the player, the player himself/herself can select the game suitable for him/herself, and the game suitable for various players can be provided.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one game (second game) among the game methods selected by the player during the time saving state is a game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 where it is easier to enter a ball than in the normal state. There was a problem that it was difficult to give.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. FIG. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set. In the above-described second embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the game (first game) for drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game (second game) for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) were configured so that the player can select (see FIG. 82). When the first game is selected, the lottery for the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the lottery for the special figure 2 is performed by aiming for the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game (see FIG. 2).

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the conditions that can be established by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different so that the player can select the game in which the time saving end condition is easily established (the time saving condition is easily ended) and the game in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established (from the game).

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, the game (first game) in which the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is more likely to win the jackpot in one special symbol lottery than the game (second game) in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied. was configured to be high.

In the second embodiment configured as described above, various games can be executed by allowing the player to select a game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. In addition, since the easiness of ending the time saving state (easiness of establishing the time saving end condition) and the degree of expectation for a big win for one special drawing lottery can be changed according to the game method selected by the player, the player himself/herself can select the game suitable for him/herself, and the game suitable for various players can be provided.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one game (second game) among the game methods selected by the player during the time saving state is a game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in which the ball is easier to enter than in the normal state by setting the time saving state. There is a problem that it is difficult to give a sense of advantage by setting the state. In other words, by setting the time-saving state, the variation (lottery) of the special patterns is more efficiently performed than in the normal state, and in this state, it is not possible to provide different game properties (easiness of ending the time-saving state and the degree of expectation for a big win in one special drawing).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is provided.

Thus, by setting the time-saving state, the variation (lottery) of special patterns is more efficiently performed than in the normal state, and a game can be provided that allows the player to select different game characteristics.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment) (see FIG. 2) in the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 (the game area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and the configuration of the game area below the variable display unit 80. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side region is divided into two, and the momentum of the ball fired by the right-handed game, that is, the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is detected by the change in electrical resistance.

Specifically, when the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds the reference amount, the shot ball is configured to flow down the right side area. Further, when the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is greater than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (soft right-handed game), the ball is shot toward the first right area 901a on the left side of the areas divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900 provided in the center of the right area. When the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 is greater than or equal to the limit amount and less than or equal to the limit amount (strong right-handed game), the ball is shot toward the second right region 901b on the right side of the regions divided into left and right by the regulation wall (regulation member) 900. In the fifth embodiment, the firing intensity is increased according to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51. However, the operating handle 51 can be rotated even after the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 reaches a predetermined amount of rotational operation and the firing intensity reaches its maximum. By configuring in this way, when performing a hard right-handed game, it is not necessary to operate the operating handle 51 to the limit (to the upper limit) of the rotating operation range of the operating handle 51, so that the operating handle 51 can be made difficult to break.

Hereinafter, in the right hitting game, a game aiming at the first right side area 901a is called a weak right hitting game, and a game aiming at the second right side area 901b is called a strong right hitting game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the magnitude of the firing strength of the right-handed game, but it may be configured to divide the right-handed game into a plurality of games by other configurations. The right area may be formed so that the ball flows down different areas for each game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is classified into a plurality of games according to the shooting intensity of the ball.

Returning to FIG. 157, the description continues. A ball shot in a weak right-handed game enters an opening formed between a plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80) and the variable display unit 80, and flows down the first right side area 901a. On the other hand, the ball shot by the hard right hitting game enters an opening formed above a plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80) and flows down the second right area 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, on the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment, as identifiers for indicating that the right side area is divided into a plurality of right side areas (a first right side area 901a and a second right side area 901b), a fish-like mark (first right side area display) 910 and a turtle-like mark (second right side area display) 911 are pasted (on the surface of the game board 13) near the entrance of each area in a manner that is visible to the player. It is With this configuration, whether or not a game desired by a player (strong right-handed game, weak right-handed game) is actually performed can be easily determined by identifying the mark attached to the trajectory of the shot ball.

In the fifth embodiment, the above-described first right area display 910 and second right area display 911 are attached one by one near the entrance of each area. Further, instead of sticking on the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 may be made of a transparent member (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and each mark may be attached so as to be buried in the transparent member. With this configuration, the marks (the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911) do not come into contact with the shot balls, so that the problem of the marks peeling off due to the contact with the balls can be suppressed.

A second ball entrance 640 is provided in the first right area 901a of the area partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and most (approximately 95%) of balls entering the first right area 901a enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured to set a variation time of 10 minutes for the special figure 2 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state. The number of balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls) when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set to one.

By configuring in this way, even if a weak right-handed game is executed in a normal state, the number of balls does not increase (the number of balls to be put out is less than the number of balls to be shot), and even if the rate of entering the second ball entrance 640 is increased, the execution of the special figure 2 lottery can be suppressed efficiently.

Next, the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 964 are arranged in the second right side area 901b of the area partitioned by the regulation wall 900 . An electric accessory 964a is attached to the right first entrance 964. As shown in FIG. This electric accessory 964a operates on the same operating principle as the electric accessory 640a of the second embodiment described above, and can be changed between an open state in which a ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 964 and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter (a ball cannot be entered) according to the lottery result of a normal drawing lottery executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67. In addition, since it is the same as that of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above about a detailed content, it abbreviate|omits.

By arranging different ball entrances for each of the divided areas in this way, different special figure lotteries are executed according to game contents during the time saving state. Although details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a short time (5 to 60 seconds) variation time is set for the special figure 2 lottery executed in the state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state.

Therefore, since both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed during the time saving state, the player can select any game and play the game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, different lottery results are given to the player depending on whether the special figure 1 lottery is performed or the special figure 2 lottery is performed during the time saving state.

Specifically, the special figure 1 lottery makes it easier to finish the time saving state than the special figure 2 lottery, and the privilege (the number of prize balls) given when a big win is won is increased. That is, during the time saving state, the special figure 1 lottery can execute a high risk high return game than the special figure 2 lottery (games with different game characteristics can be executed). In this way, when the player is allowed to select a game method, the player can be motivated to select a game method by executing different game features according to the selected game state.

In addition, since the duration of the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, continues (average duration) depending on the game method to be selected, the player can select whether or not to end the time saving state in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game according to his own convenience.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when a game method is selected in which the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is ended in a short period of time (shorter than other game methods), a greater benefit is given to the player than when the other game method is selected when a big win is won in the time-saving state. Thus, even if a game method in which the time-saving state ends in a short period of time is selected, a privilege can be given fairly to the player, so that the player can be made to easily select a desired game method.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first passage sensor 905a is provided in a first right area 901a partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and a second passage sensor 905b is provided in a second right area 901b.

The first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b are detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface (ball flow bottom surface) of the game board 13, and are composed of proximity sensors capable of detecting the flow (passage) of the ball in a non-contact state. The first passing sensor 905a and the second passing sensor 905b are provided in a region where the passage width is equal to or more than one ball and less than two balls (for example, 15 mm) in each region in order to reliably detect the ball passing through each region. By limiting the flow width of the ball flowing down each area in this manner, the detection accuracy of the ball can be improved. Also, the number of detection means required to detect the sphere can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, as the above-described first passing sensor 905a and second passing sensor 905b, a proximity sensor is provided that is embedded in the game board 13 so that its detection area is the surface of the game board 13 (lower surface of the ball flow) and detects a change in capacitance caused by a ball flowing down the surface of the game board 13 (lower surface of the ball flow). can be

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the proximity sensor corresponding to one region from detecting a ball flowing down the other region, the proximity sensors are configured to have a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm) so that the detection ranges of the proximity sensors do not overlap.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, a dedicated detection means is provided in order to determine which of the regions (the first right region 901a and the second right region 901b) the ball fired in the right-handed game has passed through. Further, the adjustment amount of the operation handle 51 may be detected, and based on the adjustment amount, a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game may be determined.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the configuration and processing for determining whether the currently executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game are provided, so that the current game method can be notified to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 158, the upper part of the game board 13, that is, the structure of the part where the balls shot in the right-handed game are distributed to the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b will be described. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper side of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIG. 158, a ball fired in a right-handed game is distributed to either an opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 or an opening 902a formed below the opening 902b and between the tip nail K1a and the variable display unit 80 at a position where it has passed through the top part of the game board 13 (the uppermost part of the game area of the game board 13 which is circular in the front view of FIG. 157). is configured to Furthermore, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 has an entrance width of 2 cm (the distance between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 when the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a is extended to the rail 62), and the opening 902a has an entrance width (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display unit 80 and the tip nail K1a in the straight line passing the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) of 4 cm. Configured.

This is because when a strong right-handed game is performed in the right-handed game, the shot ball moves stably along the rail 62, whereas in the weak right-handed game it is difficult to stabilize the trajectory of the ball.

In other words, by widening the entrance width of the opening 902a, it is possible to widen the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 corresponding to the weak right-handed game, so that the player can easily perform the weak right-handed game.

A fish mark (first right area display) 910 is attached near the opening 902a in the first right area 901a, and a turtle mark (second right area display) 911 is attached near the opening 902b in the second right area 901b. In this way, each mark is affixed to the area through which the ball (the ball immediately after being distributed to the partitioned area) passes through each opening, so that the player can easily grasp which area the shot ball has reached.

In the present embodiment, marks (first right area indication, second right area indication) for indicating each area are affixed in the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b. may be configured to be attached. In this way, the mark (first right area display, second right area display) for indicating each area is attached not only to the partitioned area but also to the area through which the ball that is determined to enter the specific partitioned area passes, so that the mark can be easily attached to the position where the player can easily see it in the limited space of the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 159(a) is an enlarged view of the right area with the variable winning device 9650a open, and FIG. 159(b) is an enlarged view of the right area with the variable winning device 9650a closed.

As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured so that the player can select the weak right-handed game aiming at the first right side area 901a and the strong right-handed game aimed at the second right side area 901b as the game method during the right handed game, and the player is provided with games with different game characteristics according to the selected game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the player has to select a desired game method from the weak right-hand hitting game and the hard right-hand hitting game, and adjust the operation handle 51 according to the game method. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a for weak and right-handed games is configured to be wider than the opening 902b for strong right-handed games so that the adjustment range of the operating handle 51 for weak right-handed games, which is difficult for the player to adjust, becomes wider, so that the player can easily select the game method.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the fifth embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, even if any game (weak right hitting game, strong right hitting game) is being performed, a variable winning device 9650a that is opened in the big winning game is arranged so that the big winning game can be executed while continuing the game.

Thus, even if a big win is won during the time saving state, the game method selected during the time saving state can be continued, so that the player can play the game without feeling troublesome in the state where the time saving state and the big win game state are repeatedly set.

Furthermore, since the variable winning device 9650a is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640 arranged in the first right side area 901a and the first ball entrance 964 arranged in the second right side area 901b, the ball fired in the right-handed game during the big win game does not enter each ball entrance before winning the variable winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be performed smoothly.

In addition, the variable winning device 9650a, as shown in FIG. 159(b), except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed), as a part of the regulation wall 900, the first right side area 901a and the second right side area 901b. Since it is closed so as to partition, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down each area from entering different areas during the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a variable winning device 9650 is arranged so that a ball flowing down any region (first right side region 901a, second right side region 901b) can win a prize so that a jackpot game can be executed while maintaining the game method selected by the player during the time saving state. It may be configured such that the variable winning device 9650 is arranged in the area through which the player passes before being sorted to 1b).

Also, it may be configured to provide a variable winning device corresponding to each area. Specifically, the bulb of the special figure 2 is executed. The ball of the weak right -handed game flows in the first -right region 901a, and the special diagram 2 variable entry prize device that is opened when won by a large hit 2 by a lottery of the special figure 2 is arranged, and the ball of the strong right -struck game in which the lottery of the special diagram 1 is executed. The 1B is configured so that the special diagram 1 variable entry prize device that is opened when the jackpot is elected by the lottery of the special figure 1 will be arranged.

By constructing in this way, when winning a jackpot by playing one of the games (weak right-hand hitting game, hard right-hand hitting game) in a state where the time saving state is set, the player can be made to execute the big winning game while continuing the game method as it is. Further, when a big win is won according to the game method to be executed, different variable prize winning devices are opened, so that the player can easily understand that different games are executed by changing the game method while the time saving state is set.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied) in a state where the time saving state is set, or when the number of times a small win is won by the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied), the time saving state is shifted to the normal state (from the advantageous game state to the disadvantageous game state for the player). Note that this configuration differs from the above-described second embodiment only in the values set as the end conditions, and the processing for determining whether each end condition is satisfied and the processing for shifting the game state to be executed when each end condition is satisfied are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, by making it possible to win a small win in the lottery of the first special pattern and not to win a small win in the lottery of the second special pattern, the game for executing the lottery for the first special pattern (strong right-hand hitting game) and the game for executing the lottery for the second special pattern (weak right-hand hitting game) are made different in the easiness of ending the time-saving state. Furthermore, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the amount of privilege (amount of prize balls) granted to the player in one big win is larger than in the case of winning the big win in the lottery of the second special pattern, so that the player can be motivated to select a game method during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the jackpot effect executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen at the time when the big win (jackpot game) is started, and FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the big win (jackpot game).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player can select (by operating the operation handle 51) a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game in a state where the time saving state is set, and furthermore, during the big winning game in which the right hand hitting game is performed in the same way as during the time saving state, it is configured to be able to guide the game method corresponding to the time saving game desired by the player.

That is, as shown in FIG. 157, in the fifth embodiment, as a game method (time saving game method) in the time saving state, a weak right hitting game and a strong right hitting game are configured to be executed. By constructing in this way, a game method corresponding to the game method in the time saving state desired by the player can be executed in advance using the period during which the jackpot game is executed, which is the stage before the time saving state is set.

Therefore, when different time-saving game methods are executed based on the operation of the operating handle 51 as in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving game method desired by the player can be reliably executed. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game contents actually executed during the jackpot game (same as the execution game storage area) match the game state desired by the player during the time saving state, and performance is executed based on the determination result. As a result, the player can easily understand the current game method (the game method during the jackpot game).

When the jackpot game is started (at the opening period of the jackpot), the comment "Right shot" is displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen is displayed for the player to select a desired game method in the time-saving state set after the end of the current jackpot game. Specifically, a safe mode display mode 851 and a challenge mode display mode 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a desired game method is selected by operating the frame button 22 in a state in which an arrow pointing to each display mode repeatedly points to one of the display modes.

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right-handed game in the time saving state, that is, a game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is desired, and the challenge mode display mode 852 is selected when a strong right-handed game in the time reduction state, that is, a game that executes the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). 160(a) shows a state in which an arrow 853 indicating a safe mode display mode 851 is displayed, and by operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state, the player can select a desired game method as the safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160(a), the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the arrow 854 indicated by a dotted line is displayed by a solid line.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters ``Please select a desired game'' are displayed as a comment for making the player select a desired mode, and a diagram simulating a frame button 22 for guiding the selection operation is displayed. Based on the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the player grasps the contents to be selected at the start of the jackpot and selects a desired game method during the time saving state. The game method being executed during the jackpot game is determined with respect to the game method selected here.

During the jackpot game, the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, "Right shot" is continuously displayed in the guide display area Dm2, and the current round game number is displayed in the round number display area 858. - 特許庁In the example of FIG. 160(b), "ROUND5" indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current game method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired game method selected at the start of the jackpot game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), the current game display area 860 displays a display mode indicating "safe mode", and the desired game display area 861 displays a display mode indicating "challenge mode". That is, the display contents when the actually executed game method is different from the game method desired by the player are displayed, and the comment ``strike to the right more strongly'' is displayed in the game guide area 859 of the sub display area Ds to change the game method.

By constructing the display mode in this way, the adjustment for matching the actual game method with the game method desired by the player (the game method desired to be executed during the time saving state) can be performed during the period during which the jackpot game is executed before the time saving state is set. Further, when the game method being executed during the jackpot game is different from the desired game method, the guide display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the desired game method can be easily executed during the period when the jackpot game is being executed.

Returning to FIG. 160(b), the description continues. On the display screen during the jackpot game, an executing jackpot history 855 indicating a game method when the jackpot is won during execution, a safety mode jackpot history 856 indicating the number of times the jackpot is won in the safety mode, and a challenge mode jackpot history 857 indicating the number of times the jackpot is won in the challenge mode are displayed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the character "V" indicating that the big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is displayed as the running big win history 855.

If the currently executed jackpot is the jackpot won by the second special symbol lottery triggered by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in the state where the time-saving state is set, the character "V with a fish mark" is displayed in the winning history 855 during execution, and if the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery executed by the ball entering the right first ball entrance 964, the winning is during execution. A character "V with a turtle mark" is displayed in the history 855 . As a result, even when the big win is won in any game state, the chance of winning the big win can be easily grasped.

In addition, by providing a safety mode jackpot history 856 and a challenge mode jackpot history 857, when playing a game on the pachinko machine 10, especially when playing a game in a time-saving state, the past game history can be referred to as to what kind of game is played. As a result, it is possible to predict a game method that is advantageous to the player, and to motivate the player to play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, as the past game history, a configuration is used in which the game methods set in the case of winning the big win are cumulatively displayed, but in addition to this, regardless of whether or not the big win has been won, the cumulative value of the game methods selected in the past may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, game contents during the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing time-saving game contents in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed according to the game method executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right side area 901a is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, most of the shot balls enter the second ball entrance 640 and one prize ball is paid out.

Further, the lottery for the second special pattern executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set so as not to win a small prize, and is set to execute 10 rounds of a big prize game when the player wins a big prize. Also, in the game state in which the time saving state is set, the same degree of variation time is set for the variation pattern set according to the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation pattern set according to the lottery of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when a hard right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right side area 901b is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 964a is opened based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67.例文帳に追加When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 964 while the electric accessory 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, about ⅓ of the balls shot to the second right side area 901 b are configured to enter the right first ball entrance 964 while the time saving state is set. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the right-handed game is played during the time-saving state, even when the weak right-handed game is played and when the strong right-handed game is played, it is possible to obtain a prize ball to the extent that the ball is maintained (prize ball = medium).

Further, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed by the hard-right hitting game, unlike the above-described lottery of the second special symbol, it is constructed so that a small win can be won (winning probability is 1/60). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as the time-saving end condition which is a condition for ending the time-saving state, in addition to the change number end condition that is established when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the time-saving end condition is established even when a small win is won. That is, when the time saving state is set, the hard right hitting game in which the lottery of the first special pattern is executed is more likely to end the time saving state than the weak right hitting game in which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed.

When a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, 12 rounds of big win games are executed in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) given to the player is larger than that in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern.

By configuring in this way, the time-saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times in the time-saving state, but the weak right-handed game (safe mode) for executing the lottery of the second special symbol with less privilege when winning the big hit is performed, or the time-saving state is set until the special symbol variation is performed 100 times or the small win is won. Different playability can be provided to the player depending on whether a hard-right hitting game (challenge mode) for executing the lottery of the first special pattern with many benefits (12-round big win) in the case of winning a hit is performed, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured so that a small win is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the time-saving end condition is established when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, but the time-saving end condition described in each embodiment described above may be set. For example, a small win is won in both the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern, and only when the type of small win set for the winning small win is a specific small win type (for example, small win A), the time reduction end condition may be established, and only when the small win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the above-mentioned specific small win type (small win A) may be set. As a result, it is not possible to judge whether or not the time-saving state ends only by winning a small prize, so that the player can be provided with a thrilling feeling.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win is won, that is, when a small win is won once, the time-saving end condition is established. Further, when winning a small prize, a plurality of small prize types may be set, and different time-saving end conditions may be set for each small prize type.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to vary (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in the values set in each table, but the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same locations and locations where the values are simply changed are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 162(a), among the configurations of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd, which is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment described above, will be described. FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. This variation pattern 5 table 202dd is different from the variation pattern 4 table 202cd described above in that the defined contents of the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the above-described fourth embodiment, according to the time saving state to be set (according to the winning jackpot type), a different variation pattern table is configured to be referred to, and a time saving state in which the first special symbol is likely to change and a time saving state in which the second special symbol is likely to vary can be set. They are different in that respect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the contents defined in the simultaneous variation pattern table for time reduction 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the simultaneous variation pattern table for time reduction 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162(b), this time saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 is different from the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state of the fourth embodiment described above in that there is no significant difference in the variation time set for any of the variation pattern defined corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2).

That is, in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the right-handed game executed when the time saving state is set, the game board 13 is configured so that the lottery is executed for both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is mainly performed is varied by varying the length of the variable time set for each special symbol according to the type of the time saving state set as the game state.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set, the variation time set for each special symbol is set to the same length, and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is mainly executed is varied by differentiating the game area where the player shoots the ball.

Therefore, in the time saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162(b), regardless of whether it is a special figure 1 or a special figure 2, the lottery result (whether determination result) is a variation pattern (jackpot variation 1 to 3) with a variation time of 10 seconds to 60 seconds for the jackpot. are It should be noted that only the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that it can be determined as a small hit as a success judgment result, but for this small hit, a variation pattern (small hit fluctuations 1 to 3) of 10 seconds to 30 seconds is defined in the same way as the case where the above-mentioned success judgment result is out. As a result, the same variation time can be set for the variation for winning a small win and the variation for winning a loss.

Therefore, it is possible to apply the effect suggesting that the reduction in working hours is over by winning a small prize as it is even when the result of the lottery (result of winning/failure determination) is a failure. In the fifth embodiment, an effect suggesting that the time saving is finished (an effect for suggesting that a small win has been won) is configured to be executed in the case where the result of the success/failure determination is a failure and in the case of a small win, but in addition to this, for example, the variation time specified for the case where the lottery result (response determination result) is a small win and the variation time specified for the case of a big win are made the same, and an effect indicating that the player has won either the big win or the small win is executed. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult until the end to understand which of the situation in which a player wins a big win and acquires a privilege or the situation in which a small win wins and the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that a first pass counter 223da, a second pass counter 223db, a selected game storage area 223dc, an executed game storage area 223dd, and a jackpot information storage area 223de are added.

The first passing counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first passing sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls passing through the first right region 901a during the jackpot game. The value of the first pass counter 223da is added by 1 when it is determined that the first pass sensor 905a is turned on during the jackpot in the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the sound ramp control device 113 (see S3803). Also, the value added when determining the game method being executed is referred to (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second passing counter 223db is a counter similar to the above-described first passing counter 223da, and is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the second passing sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls passing through the second right region 901b during the jackpot game. The processing using the second passage counter 223db is different only in that the target of the first passage counter 223da is changed from the first passage sensor 905a to the second passage sensor 905b, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time saving state. In the selected game storage area 223dc, the game method selected during the game selection period set for a predetermined period (10 seconds) after the start of the jackpot game (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set) is stored. The technique is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, the game method desired by the player during the time saving state is determined, and the display mode of the current game method on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160(b)) is set. The information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is configured to be held until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the selection screen (see FIG. 160(a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game may be configured so that an arrow points first to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc.

Furthermore, when the selection screen (see FIG. 160(a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game is displayed (during the game selection period), if the player does not select any game method (the frame button 22 is not pressed during the game selection period), the game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) may be automatically selected.

In this case, the presentation mode during the game selection period should be set so that the arrow indicates the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc at the start and end of the game selection period when the selection screen is displayed. By constructing in this way, even if the player does not select a game method, it is possible to automatically execute a performance that makes one of the game methods seem to have been selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc.

The executed game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the actually executed game method. This execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area in which the ball launched during the big win (during the big win game) flows down. , second right area 901b and information indicating a game method based on the number of balls flowing down (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the area where the shot ball actually flows down, and determine the current game method based on the determination result, so that determination accuracy can be improved.

The information stored in the executed game storage area 223dd is used to determine the currently executed game method, and is referred to when setting the display mode to be displayed in the desired game display area 861 of the display screen during the jackpot game (FIG. 160(b)) (S3554 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to jackpots. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information about the jackpot that has been won, and stores information indicating the type of the jackpot that was won, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game method when the jackpot is won (for example, the special symbol type that is the target of the lottery that has won the jackpot). (S2211: Yes), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Regarding control processing in the main controller 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment executes control processing similar to the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independent (in parallel). When winning is won in the lottery of one of the special patterns (when the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing winning), the other special pattern variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode showing loss.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game that is executed when the special symbol lottery wins the small win (by detecting the ball with the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, which is the specific area), control processing is provided so that a big win (two types of wins) can be obtained.

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, two game states, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), are configured to be settable. State, low probability state of the normal design) is different in that it is configured to be able to set.

<Regarding control processing in the sound ramp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 164 to 168, control processing of the audio ramp control device 1113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select the game method when the time saving state is set, and the player operates the operation handle 51 to execute either a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game.

A weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game executed during the time saving state is a detailed classification of the game method of the right-handed game in which the ball is shot to the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right side in FIG. 157 when viewed from the front) by greatly operating the operation handle 51, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for a player to execute a desired game method, a certain amount of adjustment period and adjustment shooting (shooting a ball while adjusting the amount of operation) are required.

In particular, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 157 is configured so that at least when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is maximized (when the operation handle 51 is turned all the way to the right), the operation amount corresponds to a hard right-handed game, so the player can easily execute a hard right-handed game. 0 to the extent of reaching the right side area), it must be adjusted to the extent that it does not become a hard right hitting game (to the extent that the shot ball does not flow down the second right side area 901b), and an adjustment period and adjustment shooting are required.

Therefore, as in the effect display (see FIG. 82(a)) executed in the above-described second embodiment, at the timing when the ending screen of the big win game is displayed, that is, at the timing immediately before the time saving state is set, the effect display for making the player select the game method is executed. There is a problem that the game is likely to be executed.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the opening screen of the big win game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the big win game is started, a performance display is executed for the player to select the game method during the time saving state set after the end of the big win game. As a result, since the game method can be adjusted using the period during which the big win game is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game during the time saving state in a game method unintended by the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, even if the player executes any of a plurality of game methods selectable by the player as the game method during the time saving state, the same privilege can be obtained during the big winning game, so that the period during which the big winning game is executed can be used as the period for adjusting the operation amount of the operating handle 51 toward the game method during the time saving state without giving a disadvantageous situation to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select a desired game method during the time-saving state, the game method selected by the player is compared with the game method actually executed during the jackpot game, and based on the comparison result, a display is provided to guide the player on the operation amount of the operation handle 51.例文帳に追加As a result, the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward the game method desired by the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the amount of privilege (amount of award balls) to be given when winning a big hit is different depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time saving state. In a period in which the time-saving state (including the variable probability state) and the big winning game are repeated, that is, the period in which the normal state (excluding the big winning state) is not set as the game state (continuous winning period, effective period), the number of times of winning the big winning (the number of consecutive winnings) is displayed by classifying it for each game executed when winning the big winning.

As a result, the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the state of winning the jackpot (the number of wins) can be visually confirmed, so that the game method when the time saving state is set next time can be selected based on the past results. Therefore, it is possible to provide a strategy element to the game, and to improve interest.

164 to 168, in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 55) is replaced with the main processing 5 (see FIG. 164), the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 99) is replaced with the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 165), and the effect update processing 2 (see FIG. 105(b)) is replaced with the effect update processing. 5 (see FIG. 168) is used.

The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the content of the control processing of the main controller 110 is replaced with the control processing of the main controller 110 of the above-described fourth embodiment. Therefore, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 based on the change of the control processing of the main controller 110 is the same as in the fourth embodiment, and the other control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 is the same as in the second embodiment.

First, with reference to FIG. 164, the contents of main processing 5 executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of main processing 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 164, main processing 5 differs from main processing 2 (see FIG. 55) in that frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2197) is performed instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), command determination processing 5 (S2193) is performed instead of command determination processing 2 (S2163), and signal input processing (S2151) is added.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193). This command determination process 5 (S2193) is different from the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) in that when a win-related command is received, information indicated by the received command is stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de.

When the command determination process 5 (S2193 of FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2209 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 of FIG. 99) are executed. Then, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same winning information related process 2 (S2251) as in the above-described second embodiment is executed, then the process of S2217 is executed, and this process ends.

In the above-described second embodiment, in the above-described winning information related process 2 (S2251), it is determined whether the game method during the time saving state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Based on the determination result, the content of the effect (effect for guidance notification, effect for error notification) is set.

Next, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209 in FIG. 165: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165), and if it is determined that a winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de according to the received content (content indicated by the winning-related command). is updated (S2291), and then the same processes of S2212 and S2217 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed, and this process ends.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de updated in the process of S2291 described above includes, for example, information for indicating the number of jackpot wins and the trigger for the jackpot lottery (the game method that triggered the jackpot lottery). In this way, by updating the contents of the big win information storage area 223de immediately after winning the big win, there is an effect that it is possible to study the past big wins during the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 165, the description continues. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the same processes of S2213 to S2217 as in the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the signal input processing (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of the signal input process (S2151). In this signal input processing (S2151), when the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect passage of the ball, processing based on the detection result is executed. Specifically, the number of balls passing through (flowing down) each region (first right region 901a, second right region 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and when the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls), a process of determining the game method corresponding to the region in which a large number of balls are detected, that is, the region in which a large number of balls have flowed down is determined as the actual game method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input processing (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3801: Yes), then it is determined whether the first passing sensor 905a detects a ball (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a has detected a ball (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first passing counter 223da (S3803), and then the process proceeds to S3804. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3802 that the first passing sensor 905a has not detected the ball (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether or not the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804). If it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second passing counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passage sensor 905b has not detected the ball (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

Then, in the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first passing counter 223da and the value of the second passing counter 223db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls passing through the first right area 901a (the value of the first passing counter 223da) and the number of balls passing through the second right side area 901b (the value of the second passing counter 223db) during the jackpot game is calculated.

After the processing of S3806 is finished, next it is determined whether the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807). If it is determined that the difference is 5 or more (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first passage counter 223da is larger than the value of the second passage counter 223db. (S3808).

In the process of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first passing counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first passing counter 223da is not larger than the value of the second passing counter 223db (the value of the second passing counter 223db is larger) (S3808: No), a hard right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this processing ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls that have flowed down the first right region 901a and the number of balls that have flowed down the second right region 901b among the right regions of the balls launched during the jackpot game are measured, and based on the measurement results, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right-handed game in which balls flow down to the first right region 901a or a strong right-handed game in which balls flow down to the second right region 901b.

The information (game method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 and the processing of S3810 is displayed in the current game display area 860 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game as shown in FIG.

In the fifth embodiment, the current game method is set when the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (five balls). In other words, immediately after the jackpot game is executed (the period when five or more balls are not shot by the right-handed game during the jackpot game), the game method is not displayed in the current game display area 860 because the current game method is not set in the execution game storage area 223dd regardless of which area the balls are shot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the display of the current game method on the display screen in a state where the game method in the right-handed game of the player is not fixed (unstable state) immediately after the start of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not specified until the difference value between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db reaches a predetermined amount (5 balls). By configuring in this way, frequent switching of the display mode for indicating the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 166, the description continues. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether the present time is the end timing of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a command indicating that the time-saving state is set (a command including the content indicating that the current game state is the time-saving state) is output, or when it is determined that the command indicating that the big winning game is in progress is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot is finished.

In the process of S3811, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db added during the big win game are cleared to 0 (S3812), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the jackpot (S3811: No), that is, when the game state is neither the jackpot nor the jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813), and this processing is finished.

As the processing of S3813 described above, for example, when the game state is the normal state (when the game state is set such that a left-handed game aiming at the left side area is an appropriate game), when the first passage sensor 905a or the second passage sensor 905b detects a ball, that is, when it is determined that a right-handed game is being performed, a process for executing guidance display for guiding the game method to the player, and a process executed by the player In the case of a game state (for example, a time-saving state) in which different games are executed according to the game method to be played, the game method being executed is determined based on the detection of the ball by the first passage sensor 905a or the second passage sensor 905b, and the processing for displaying the current game display area 860 is executed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is started (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the player selects the game method in the time-saving state desired by the player, and the period during which the jackpot game is executed is used to allow the player to change the game method. It may be configured so as to execute an effect (see FIG. 160(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, the difference is that the operation processing of the frame button 22 during the game selection period (see FIG. 160(a)) during which the player selects the desired game method is added.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and if it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected (S3851: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3851 that the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3851: Yes), then it is determined whether the game selection period is now (S3852).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), when a hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes), in the hit-related process (S2212), 10 seconds after the start of the jackpot (after it is determined as the start timing of the jackpot) is set as the game selection period. This game selection period is configured to measure 10 seconds by setting a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the value of a period counter (not shown) and updating the counter value in various counter updating processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every millisecond.

In the processing of S3852, if it is determined that the current game selection period is in effect (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 is set in the selected game storage area 223dc (S3853), the game method set in S3853, that is, the display press command indicating the game method corresponding to the button pressing is set (S3855), and this processing is executed. end.

The display pressing command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S2102 in FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the player (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the game method desired by the player himself/herself during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, the game method desired by the player and the game method being executed during the jackpot game are both displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not it is necessary to adjust the game method based on the display contents displayed on the display screen.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the game method desired by the player during the jackpot game does not match the game method being executed during the jackpot game, the game method to be actually executed is the game method desired by the player himself/herself. As a result, the player can be guided to a specific adjustment method, so that the player can easily execute a desired game method.

Returning to FIG. 167, the description continues. In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current time is not the game selection period (S3852: No), then it is determined whether it is during another operation period (S3854), and if it is determined that it is during another operation period (S3854: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, other operation periods include, for example, a part of the special symbol fluctuation period for showing the lottery result of the special symbols, and a period in which the game is not executed (a so-called demonstration period in which the fluctuation of the special symbols is not executed). Configured.

Also, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected) during a so-called demonstration period in which the game is not executed, a screen explaining the game contents of the pachinko machine 10 and today's game history are selectively displayed. In this way, by differentiating the privilege (executed performance) for the operation according to the game state and the game situation when the frame button 22 is operated, various performances can be provided to the player and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the content of effect update processing 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 5. FIG. This effect update process 5 is different from the effect update process of each embodiment described above in that a process of updating the display contents of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game is executed.

When performance update processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big win is currently in progress (S3551), and when it is determined that a big win is in progress (S3551: Yes), information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is read (S3552), and then information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read.

Then, a display game method command corresponding to the game method being selected and the game method being executed is set (S3554). The display command set here is output toward the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S2102 in FIG. 164) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display mode showing the game method corresponding to each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 168, the description continues. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether or not the information (selected game method) read out in the process of S3552 and the information (executed game method) read out in the process of S3553 match (S3555). set and terminate this process.

In addition, in the process of S3556, when the display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is set, for example, a comment "Keep as it is" is displayed in the game guide area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can enter an advantageous state advantageous to the player by maintaining the current game technique supplement.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3555 that the selected game and the executed game do not match (S3555: No), a display instruction command for indicating a comment for changing the current game method is set (see S3557). Here, for example, when the selected game is the challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the executed game is the relief mode (weak right-handed game), characters of ``strongly right-handed'' are displayed in the game guide area 859 in order to change the game method. As a result, when the game method currently being executed is changed to the desired game method, it is possible to easily comprehend the details of adjustment that must be specifically executed.

Then, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S3551: No), furthermore, when the process of S3556 or the process of S3557 is completed, another effect update process is executed (S3558), and this process ends. In addition, in the processing of S3558, the corresponding processing is executed among the various effect update processing that can be executed in each of the above-described embodiments.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the advantageous state (probability variable state, time saving state) that is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the first advantageous game (strong right-handed game) that executes the lottery of the first special symbol, or the second advantageous advantage (weak right-handed game) that executes the lottery of the second special symbol. Both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the lottery for the special symbol can be executed more easily than when the normal state is set as the game state.

By constructing in this manner, the player can select one advantageous game from a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which the lottery of special symbols can be more easily executed than in a normal state during an advantageous state for the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of which game the player selects, the lottery of the special symbols can be executed more easily than in the normal state, so that the player can be provided with the pleasure of selecting the game method.

In the fifth embodiment, the player is allowed to select a game method in an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of game methods selectable by the player are configured to have different end conditions for the advantageous state. Specifically, the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal patterns) is an advantageous state, and as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, in addition to the fluctuation number end condition that is established when the special pattern fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (100 times), the winning number end condition that is established when the number of times that a small win is won in a special symbol lottery (small winning game is executed) reaches a predetermined number of times (1 time) is set, and the first special symbol lottery is better than the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that.

By constructing in this way, the probability of ending an advantageous state in the first advantageous game in which the lottery of the first special pattern is executed and the second advantageous game in which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, that is, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot during the advantageous state can be varied.

Furthermore, among a plurality of advantageous games that can be selected by the player, when a player wins a big win in a first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is difficult to continue, the content of the big win game is set so that the number of prize balls given during the big win game is larger than in the case of winning a big win in the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than in the first advantageous game. ), a jackpot game for 12 rounds is executed, and when a jackpot is won during a second advantageous game (when a jackpot is won by lottery of the second special pattern), a jackpot game for 10 rounds is executed.

Thus, the player can select either the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is easily ended but the privilege at the time of winning the big win is large, or the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more difficult to end than the first advantageous game but the privilege at the time of winning the big win is less. Therefore, the player can select a desired game method according to the time that can be spent on the game and the convenience of the player himself such as the current condition, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the fifth embodiment, the time-saving state is used as the advantageous state, but it is not limited to this, and the variable probability state may be the advantageous state. In other words, as the probability variable end condition for ending the probability variable state, the variable frequency end condition and the winning frequency end condition can be set, and the probability variable end condition may be established differently between the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern. Even when constituted in this way, there can exist an effect similar to the case where the time saving state mentioned above is made into an advantageous state.

When the variable probability state is used as the advantageous state, it is preferable to set a first variable probability end condition in which a normal state is set and a second variable probability end condition in which a time saving state is set when the variable probability end condition is established, and to change the transition destination of the game state according to the previously established end condition. In this case, for example, when the first variable probability end condition is satisfied, a game state which is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state is set, and when the second variable probability end condition is satisfied, a game state which is more advantageous than the variable probability state is set.

Specifically, the first probability variable end condition is established when the fluctuation frequency end condition is established, and the second probability variable end condition is established when the winning frequency end condition is established, and as the fluctuation frequency end condition, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency end condition that is established when the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches 50 times, the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency end condition that is established when the fluctuation of the second special symbol reaches 80 times, the first special symbol, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. It is preferable to set a condition for ending the total number of fluctuations, which is established when the total number of fluctuations reaches 100 times.

Since the game specifications can be further differentiated between the first advantageous game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the second advantageous game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol by constructing in this manner, the meaning of prompting the player to select the game method can be strengthened. In addition, since the conditions for ending the total number of fluctuations are set, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of games in an advantageous state by alternately executing a plurality of advantageous games by the player.

In addition, the game specifications can be further differentiated by setting the special figure 1 winning frequency ending condition established when the first advantageous game is executed and the special figure 2 winning frequency ending condition established when the second advantageous game is executed for the winning frequency ending condition.

In the fifth embodiment, the termination condition of the advantageous state (time saving state) is made different according to the type of the special symbol, and the player is made to select the game method during the advantageous state (the type of special symbol to be drawn during the advantageous state), thereby providing the player with various games. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of games in an advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the above-described fifth embodiment, the expected value of the privilege amount to be given to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (that is, the value obtained by dividing the privilege amount (number of prize balls) in the case of winning one jackpot by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous state is continuously set when the advantageous state is set once) is the same regardless of which game method is selected during the advantageous state. In the case of using the configuration for making the termination conditions of the advantageous state different, it is preferable to configure so that the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player is larger when the first advantageous game is selected than when the second advantageous game is selected, according to the winning jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, four states can be set as game states: normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state). A plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage can be set.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is constructed so that more benefits are more likely to be given to the player when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win than when the first special symbol lottery is performed. Specifically, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, compared with the case where the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, more prize balls can be obtained, and the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbol is increased (the jackpot type that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, which will be described later, is easily selected).

As the variable probability state, a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous) and a variable probability state 2 in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed (that is, relatively advantageous) compared to the variable probability state 1 are provided. In addition, as the time saving state, a time saving state 1 in which the lottery for the first special pattern is easily executed (that is, comparatively disadvantageous) and a time saving state 2 in which the lottery for the second special pattern is easily executed (that is, comparatively advantageous) compared to the time saving state 1 are provided.

In this way, even when the same game state is set, the type of the special pattern that is likely to be drawn is switchable, and the amount of prize balls that can be obtained according to the details of the set game state and the ratio of transition to the variable probability state are varied, thereby allowing the player to play the game aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. The probability variable state 1 is a state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and the probability variable state 2 is a state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 2 (time saving state 2) are combined.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) during the time saving state are prepared, and based on the set operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 It is configured to be able to vary the special symbol that is likely to be selected during the time saving state. The operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is configured to be variably set based on the winning jackpot type.

By constructing in this manner, the special symbols that are likely to be drawn (fluctuation) during the time saving state can be changed based on the winning jackpot type, so that various game properties can be provided to the players. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time-saving states for ending the time-saving state are established based on a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, as the end condition of the number of fluctuations established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the end condition of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol 1 established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the end condition of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the end condition of the total number of fluctuations established based on the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol are set. 0 times, 100 times the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is set as the special figure 2 fluctuation number end condition, and 100 times as the fluctuation number corresponding to the total fluctuation number end condition.

In addition, as the winning times end condition established when a small win is won in the lottery of special symbols, the special 1 winning times end condition established based on the special 1 small win (small win A) won by the lottery of the 1st special pattern, the special 2 winning times end condition established based on the special 2 small win (small win B) won by the lottery of the 2nd special pattern. is set.

By configuring in this way, a game in which the time saving state is likely to end (a time saving game in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is likely to be performed) and a game in which the time saving state is difficult to end (a time saving game in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is likely to be performed) can be set according to the type of the special symbol in which the lottery (variation) is performed during the time saving state.

In addition, the time saving end condition set for each special symbol in the sixth embodiment only needs to make the ease of ending the time saving state different depending on the type of special symbol, and any of the specific examples used (shown) in the above-described embodiments may be adopted. The probability that any condition for ending the number of wins is satisfied may be set differently for each type.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state end conditions (time saving end conditions) for ending the advantageous state (time saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player can be set, and the ease with which the advantageous state end condition is established is made different according to the type of the set advantageous state. Then, a plurality of advantageous states with different easiness of establishment of advantageous state end conditions are configured to be shifted based on the winning jackpot type.

As a result, the player can be made to play games with various advantageous conditions through a plurality of jackpot winnings. In addition, since the sixth embodiment has a special advantageous state that can be shifted only when the jackpot is won a plurality of times from the state in which the normal state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to shift to the special advantageous state through a plurality of jackpot wins.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a game state (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) is set with different expectations for transition to a special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game state (advantageous state) with a high degree of expectation for transition to a special advantageous state is set, it is possible to make it easier to continue playing the game, and to increase the operation of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko game in the first embodiment. This is the difference from machine 10. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 169, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, in the sixth embodiment, the structure of the lower side and the right side area of the variable display device unit 80 is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, two ball entrances (first ball entrance 64a1, right first ball entrance 64a0) that trigger the lottery of the first special symbol are provided as entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbols, and a second ball entrance 64b that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are provided, that is, three entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbols are provided.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the present embodiment, a first ball entrance 64a1 is provided on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, a right second ball entrance 64b is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, and a right first ball entrance 64a2 is provided on the right side of the right second ball entrance 64b in front view.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. That is, the first ball entrance 64a1 and the right first ball entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 64b is a ball entrance having a function different from the above-described two types of ball entrances because the lottery for the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the right first ball entrance 64a2 is provided with a first operating accessory 645a. The first operating accessory 645a is formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so as to be variable between an open state in which the ball can (easy) enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 and a closed state in which the ball cannot (difficult) enter the right first ball entrance 64a2. This first operating accessory 645a is switched to an open state when a ball enters a first operating port 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a, which has been switched to the open state, switches to the closed state when one ball enters.

Similarly, the right second entrance 64b is provided with a second operating accessory 645b. The second operating accessory 645b is also formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so as to be variable between an open state in which the ball can (easy) enter the right second ball inlet 64b and a closed state in which the ball cannot (difficult) enter the right second ball inlet 64b. This second operating accessory 645b switches to the open state when the ball enters the second operating opening 707 provided inside the distribution winning device 700 . On the other hand, the second operating accessory 645b switched to the open state switches to the closed state when one ball enters the right second ball entrance.

In the sixth embodiment, a first operating accessory 645a and a second operating accessory 645b formed of a pair of vane-shaped members are provided as restricting members for restricting the ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64a2 and the right second ball inlet 64b. may be regulated so as to allow the ball to enter the ball entrance by being positioned in a buried state in which the ball is buried in the game board 13 . In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the operating accessory is in the closed state, the ball cannot enter the corresponding entrance (to which the operating accessory is attached).

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operating accessory 645 is configured to be positioned in two states, the open state and the closed state, but it may be configured to be variable in three or more states. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which an operating accessory is associated with each of the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b, but other configurations may be used. For example, by changing one operating accessory to the first state, it is easier for a ball to enter one of the entrances (easier to enter than the other entrance) and difficult to enter the other entrance (more difficult to enter than one entrance). ) and change to a second state different from the first state, so that, contrary to the above-described first state, it is difficult for a ball to enter one ball entrance (difficult to enter a ball through the other ball entrance) and easy for a ball to enter the other ball entrance (easily enter a ball through the one ball entrance). As a result, it is possible to vary the degree of entry of a ball into a plurality of entry holes according to the operation contents of one working role.

A distribution winning device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. This distribution winning device 700 is a device for distributing (entering) a ball entered into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707 . As described above, if the ball is distributed to the first operation port 704 (if the ball is entered), the first operation accessory 645a associated with the right first ball entrance 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operation port 707 (if the ball enters), the second operation accessory 645b attached to the right second ball entrance is switched to the open state, and the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b.

Details of the distribution winning device 700 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution winning device 700 provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The top side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured so that balls can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so the ball that reaches the upper surface of the distribution winning device 700 basically flows down in the lower left direction. In addition, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the distribution winning device 700 . The electric accessory 701 is configured to be switchable between an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easy) the inside of the distribution winning device 700 and a closed state (projection state) in which a ball cannot enter (difficult). This electric accessary 701 is set to an open state when winning by lottery of normal symbols.

The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 branches into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706 . Since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703 , the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704 . On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided downstream of the second flow path 706 , the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707 . Also, at a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 branch, a switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is provided for a flow path through which the ball that enters the sorting winning device 700 flows down through the electric accessory 701. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 can be switched (slid) between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the left in the front view, thereby blocking the upstream side of the second flow path and opening only the first flow path, so that the ball advances to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is slid to the right in the front view to close the upstream side of the first flow path, leaving only the first flow path open, so that the ball advances to the second flow path.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state based on the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds after the winning state of the normal symbol) has passed since the win of the normal symbol. Further, when a specific period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after switching to the second switching state, the switching state is switched to the first switching state again.

If the ball can enter the sorting winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down toward the second operating port 707 . When the ball enters the second actuation port 707, the second actuation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high rate of giving the variable probability state of the special symbol when the jackpot is won, it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the flow direction of the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 707). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first actuation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first actuation port 704 . The first operating port 704 is composed of a known non-electric accessory, that is, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the first operating port 704. In addition, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entered into the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operating port 707 . The second actuation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first actuation mechanism 705 . That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball entering the second operating port 707. In addition, when the second operating accessory 645b is in the open state, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by entering the ball into the distribution winning device 700, the ball is entered into the first operating opening 704 or the second operating opening 707, and the first operating role 645a or the second operating role 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the lottery for the special pattern 2 results in a big hit, it is more advantageous than the lottery for the special pattern 1, so it is possible to draw attention to whether the ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence relationship between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, two types (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) are provided for the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 . When the open pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set in the open state for a relatively long time (that is, 1 second) immediately after the winning of the normal symbols is started, and then set in the closed state for 1.4 seconds. After the open state is set for 0.1 second, the winning state ends. During the open period of one second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 during this period is distributed to the first operating port 704 . On the other hand, during the open period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so the balls entering the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the second operation opening 707 . However, since it is difficult to enter a ball during the open period of 0.1 second, in many cases, a ball that enters the sorting device 700 while the open pattern A is set is sorted to the first operating port 704, and the right first ball-entering port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, if the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the open pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (that is, 0.1 seconds) immediately after the winning of the normal symbols is started, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Then, the hit state ends after the open state is set for a relatively long time (ie, one second). During the open period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 during this period is distributed to the first operating port 704 . However, as described above, it is difficult to enter the ball during an extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state during the open period of 1 second, so the ball entering the sorting prize winning device 700 is sorted to the second operation port 707 during this period. Therefore, in many cases, a ball entered into the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is sorted to the second operation opening 707, and the right second ball entrance 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this manner, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the set release pattern, so that the player can be interested in the release pattern each time the normal symbol wins. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability variable non-time-saving state), time-saving state 1, and probability-variable state 1, the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 701 when the normal symbol hits. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, the open pattern B is set when the normal drawing hits. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, it is difficult for the second special symbol lottery to be executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed can be changed according to the game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 169, the description continues. A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is achieved by a jackpot lottery caused by entering (winning) a ball into the first ball entrance 64a1, the right first ball entrance 64a2, or the right second ball entrance 64b, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, so that the stop symbol of the big win is displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device. Displayed at 81, the occurrence of a jackpot is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is as described above in the first embodiment. However, for convenience of explanation, the numeral "65" is added in the sixth embodiment to the numeral "650" in FIGS. Although the details are omitted, a game ball that enters the variable ball entry device 65 during the big win passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (switch used in place of the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above) inside the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a variable probability state is imparted after the end of the big win. Since other configurations and functions are the same, description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure showing the contents. The selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 is referred to determine the kind of big win when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, and the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 is referred to determine the kind of big win when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win.

First, with reference to Drawing 174 (a), selection table 202b1 for special figures 1 contained in the 1st hit classification selection table 202b is explained. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first per type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, a variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of a variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 1 is imparted after the jackpot. The pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is, for example, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (the flow path provided with the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is opened). Since the player hits the ball continuously toward the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot, one or more balls can flow down to the variable probability switch 65e3 in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability variable switch 65e3 in the big hit, the probability variable state is given after the big hit.

That is, the variable probability state 1 (game state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is given after the big hit. On the other hand, when the big win ends without the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win because the player did not hit the ball during the big win, a time saving state 1 (special pattern low probability state, normal pattern high probability state 1) is given after the big win. Although the jackpot A is likely to be in the variable probability state, the variable probability state to be provided is the variable probability state 1, and the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state, so it is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot F) to which the variable probability state 2 is likely to be given.

The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 49". This jackpot B is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four, a variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of a variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a short time state 2 (normal pattern high probability state 2) is imparted after the jackpot. When the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 in the big hit, the special symbol probability variable state 2 (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state 2) is given after the big hit.

That is, the variable probability state 2 in which the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given after the big hit. On the other hand, when the big win ends without the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win because the player did not hit the ball during the big win, only the time saving state 2 is provided after the big win B ends. The big win B is one of the most advantageous big win types in terms of the game state after the big win because it is easy for the player to shift to the variable probability state 2 which is the most advantageous. On the other hand, since the number of prize balls is smaller than that in the case of a big hit by lottery of the second special symbols, the prize balls are disadvantageous.

The jackpot C is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 94". This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, a variable probability solenoid (flow passage solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the variable probability switch 65e cannot be passed during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. The pattern that cannot pass the variable probability switch 65e3 is, for example, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 4 rounds (the flow path provided with the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 is opened). Even if the ball is entered at the same time when the specific winning port 65a is opened after the start of the 4th round, the ball cannot reach the channel provided with the variable probability solenoid 65k for 0.5 seconds, so the channel is closed before the ball reaches the variable probability solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the jackpot C, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not provided after the jackpot. That is, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which a variable probability state of the special pattern is not provided and a short-time state 1 in which the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to be executed is given, and the number of prize balls is smaller than when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, so that the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

The jackpot D is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "95 to 94". This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, a variable probability solenoid (flow passage solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the variable probability switch 65e3 cannot be passed during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. A variable probability state is not given and the number of prize balls is smaller than that of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern, but since the time-saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special pattern is easily executed is given, the jackpot D is more advantageous than the jackpot C.例文帳に追加

Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 174(b), also in the special figure 2 selection table 202b2, similarly to the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the jackpot type to be selected is defined for each value of the first per type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a variable probability solenoid (flow passage solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of a variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 1 is imparted after the jackpot. Although the big win E is likely to be in the variable probability state, the variable probability state to be given is the variable probability state 1, and the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to be executed during the variable probability state, so the state after the end of the big win is disadvantageous compared to the big win types (big win B, big win F) in which the variable probability state 2 is likely to be given.

The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 79". This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of a variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 2 is imparted after the jackpot. The big win F is one of the most advantageous big win types in terms of the game state after the big win because it is easy for the player to shift to the probability variable state 2 which is the most advantageous. Also, in terms of prize balls, a larger amount of prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a big hit by lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

The jackpot G is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 84". This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern in which the variable probability switch 65e3 cannot be passed during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 1 is imparted after the jackpot. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the probability variable state of the special pattern is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special pattern is difficult to execute is given, the game state after the jackpot ends is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than winning a jackpot by lottery for the first special symbol.

A jackpot H is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 94". This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, a variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and a time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. Although the variable probability state is not provided, the time-saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is provided, so that the big win H is more advantageous than the big win C and the big win G. In addition, it is more advantageous than getting a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in terms of prize balls.

Thus, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type differs in the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, the player can be made to pay attention to which jackpot type it will be when the jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, depending on whether the lottery for the first special pattern is a big hit or the lottery for the second special pattern is a big hit, the number of prize balls to be obtained and the ratio of the big hit type that becomes an operation pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 are different. That is, the player who wins the big prize in the lottery for the second special symbol can obtain more prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, the ratio of the big win types (jackpot E, F), which is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3, is 80%, whereas in the lottery of the first special pattern, the ratio of the big win types (jackpot A, B), which is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3, is 50%. Therefore, it is easier to be in a definite variable state when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. As a result, the player can expect a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern, so that the player can play the game paying attention to whether the lottery to be executed is the lottery of the first special pattern or the lottery of the second special pattern. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of the high-probability state of normal symbols is configured to be variable according to the jackpot type that is won. Specifically, a normal design high probability state 1 and a normal design high probability state 2 are configured to be settable. In addition to the normal state as the game state, five types of game states can be set, including a probability variable state 1 in which the normal pattern high probability state 1 is set for the special pattern high probability state, a probability variable state 2 in which the normal pattern high probability state 2 is set, a time reduction state 1 in which the normal pattern high probability state 1 is set for the special pattern low probability state, and a time reduction state 2 in which the normal pattern high probability state 2 is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172, a game state transition method in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in the sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big win is made, a new game state is set after the big win is over. As shown in FIG. 172, when it becomes a jackpot A in the normal state (non-probability variable non-time-saving state), basically (unless the ball is stopped during the jackpot), it shifts to the probability variable state 1. When it becomes a big hit B, it shifts to the probability variable state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is reached, the state shifts to the time saving state 1, and when the jackpot D is reached, the state shifts to the time saving state 2.例文帳に追加

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, the game state is the time saving state 1 (time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) and the variable probability state 1 (the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed). It should be noted that, although not shown, in the time saving state 1 or the variable probability state 1, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of time saving times is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 172, when the game state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the big win E is reached, the state is changed to the variable probability state 1, when the big win is F, the state is changed to the most advantageous variable probability state 2, when the big win is G, the state is changed to the time saving state 1, and when the big win is H, the time saving state 2 is changed (the time saving state 2 is looped). Further, as shown in FIG. 172, also in the probability variable state 2 (the probability variable state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed), the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed. It should be noted that, although not shown, in the time saving state 2 or the variable probability state 2, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving is executed without becoming a big hit, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 173, the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, a probability variable counter 203zg, a probability variable setting flag 203zs, and a probability variable passage counter 203. zt1, winning number counter 203zt2, operation counter 203zt3, counter buffer 203zh, remaining ball timer flag 203zt4, remaining ball timer 203zt5, probability variable effective flag 203zt6, probability variable effective timer 203zt7, discharge number counter 203zt8, short time medium counter 203zu, short time identification flag 203zx, jackpot flag 203zi, other memory area 203z at least have.

Of these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main controller 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the lottery for the winning of the normal symbol is determined based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so similarly to the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area with the area number smaller by 1. - 特許庁Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za.

The variable probability counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols), and if the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is greater than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of special symbols, and if the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability counter 203zg has an initial value set to zero, and in the main controller 110, when the variable probability flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the timing when the specific ball entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific ball entrance 650a closes (that is, the end timing of the jackpot) in the final round of the jackpot, that is, when the game ball enters the variable probability opening 900a and the game ball is detected by the variable probability switch (not shown), the value is set to 1. 00 is set.

In the sixth embodiment, the variable probability state is set (a predetermined value is set in the variable probability counter 203zg) after the end of the jackpot game by the ball flowing down the specific region (the region for the variable probability switch 65e3 to detect the ball) during the jackpot game.

When the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start processing or the special symbol 2 variation start processing, the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is greater than 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for high probability, while if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability.

The counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value, as described above.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the distribution winning device 650 or the variable winning device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 .

The variable probability setting flag 203zs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 has detected the game ball during the jackpot game). Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the fact that the variable probability flag 203r is set to ON. The variable probability setting flag 203zs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

The variable probability passage counter 203zt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (13 rounds in the jackpot B in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning hole 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203zt1 and the discharge number counter 203zt8, which will be described later. This probability variation passage counter 203zt1 is updated by adding one each time the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed. Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged game balls, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203zt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203zt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65, the value is updated by adding 1 at a time. On the other hand, when one round is finished, it is reset to "0" which is the initial value after it is determined whether or not the winning number of the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize winning number counter 203zt2) and the discharged number (the total value of the discharge number counter 203zt8 and the probability variable passage counter 203zt1) match. Incidentally, the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203zt3 is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds at the start of the 13th round in the jackpot B, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 13th round in the jackpot C. In the operation counter 203zt3, for the big win B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds, and for the big win C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203zt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203zt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zt5, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for discriminating the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is a counter for discriminating whether or not the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the winning game balls to be discharged to the first variable prize winning device 65 has passed when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after the end of one preset round. In this embodiment, the time required until the winning game ball 65 is discharged is 2 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203zt5. When the remaining ball timer 203zt5 reaches the upper limit value (three seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegality of allowing the game ball to illegally remain in the first variable prize winning device 65, giving an impact or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, making the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and passing the game ball through the probability variable switch 65e3 even if it is a big win C.例文帳に追加

When the winning number and the discharged number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203zs may not be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203zt6 is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, based on the passage solenoid 65k being ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge passage 65e2 is required to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 It indicates that it is less than the time. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203zt7 is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203zt6 described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203zt7, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203zt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge channel 65e2, it is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as making the ball enter the special discharge channel 65e2 and passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that it has passed by radio waves.

The discharge number counter 203zt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. This ejection number counter 203zt8 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejections are determined.

The counter 203zu during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. This time saving medium counter 203zu is set to 100 when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving state of 100 times.

The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of time saving state. If 0 is set to this time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is time saving state 1 (probability variable state 1). It should be noted that the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 even in the normal state where the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to be executed as in the time saving state 1 . On the other hand, when 1 is set to the time saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is time saving state 2 (probability variable state 2). When the winning pattern is normal, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set by referring to the time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time-saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and the normal pattern wins, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball enters the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701 so that the ball enters the first operation port 704 and enters the left first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, when the time reduction identification flag 203zx is 1, when the normal pattern wins, the opening pattern B is set, so that the ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701 so that the ball enters the second operation port 707 and enters the state where the ball can enter the left second ball entrance 64b. The time saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big win at the end of the big win. In addition, 0 is set when the time period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the time period counter 203zu becomes 0).

The reason why the time reduction identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state (non-variable non-time-saving state) is to suppress an irregular game method in which the ball is hit to the right side of the game board 13 in the non-time-saving state (so-called right hitting). That is, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player always hits to the right in an attempt to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In a normal state, the probability of winning a normal pattern is low, so it is difficult to enter a ball into the second right ball entry port 64b, but when a big win occurs, the probability of a special pattern varies 80% of the time. Therefore, there is a possibility that an irregular game method is induced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the time reduction identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, the winning probability of the normal pattern is low, and the opening pattern A is set even if the winning occurs, so that there is no merit for the player to execute right-handed hitting. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to hit left, thereby preventing (suppressing) an irregular game method.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. The sixth embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to store reserved balls, and that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the end of the big win.

First, with reference to FIG. 175, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). The special symbol jackpot period includes a period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and a predetermined time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not occurring (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (Z202). The number of times of suspension N2) is acquired (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball of variable display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204), and if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (Z204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (Z209), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 is determined. When it is determined that the value of b (N1) is 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no reserved ball for variable display in the special symbol, and this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (Z205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by calculation is set (Z206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter of the RAM223.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203aa are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In addition, the detailed description of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is omitted.

Also, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (Z204: No) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined to be greater than 0 (Z209: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special symbol 2 reserved ball is performed for the special symbol 1 reserved ball. In addition, about special design 1 fluctuation|variation start processing, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (Z214). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this variation time has not passed (Z214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). The stop design is set in advance by the special design 2 fluctuation start process (Z208) or the special design 1 fluctuation start process (Z213). When this special symbol 2 variation start process or special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of special symbol 2 or special symbol 1 is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

After the processing of Z216 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is started, it is determined whether or not the display of the special pattern (result of lottery of this time) performed by the special pattern variation start processing is a jackpot of the special pattern (Z217). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z217: Yes), a jackpot flag 203zi is set to ON (Z218), a jackpot start command is set (Z220), the values of a time-saving medium counter 203zu and a probability variation counter 203zg are reset (Z271), and the processing shifts to Z222.

By the jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218, the jackpot game process is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). Since the specific description is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, the description is omitted.

In addition, the jackpot start command set in the process of Z220 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114 . As a result, a display suggesting the start of the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made to recognize that the special game state has been entered.

On the other hand, in the process of Z217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update process (see S219 in FIG. 38) as the first embodiment described above is executed, and the information is updated for the change number end condition established based on the number of variations of the special symbol. When the process of S219 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the value of the probability variable counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter 203zg is decremented by 1 (Z224), the same processes of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment described above are executed, and the process proceeds to Z222. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

In the processing of Z222, a stop command is set in order to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the processing of Z216, and the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 (Z222). After completing the processing of Z222, this processing ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the special symbol variation processing 6 of the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a small win is won in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, and when a small win is won, a small win short-time update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the won small win is executed. By configuring in this way, as in the above-described embodiments, as a condition for ending the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), it is possible to set a time saving end condition (fluctuation frequency end condition) that is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number In addition, a time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is established when the number of times a small win is won in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set in addition to the high probability state of the normal symbol. And, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to be set to the upper limit of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the value set to the probability variation counter zg). In this way, when a game state (probability variable state) other than the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set as a game state advantageous to the player, the game state (probability variable state) may be configured to set an end condition.

In this case, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, a variable probability end condition other than the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state may be set.

In addition, it is good to configure so that the requirements that cause the establishment of the variable probability end condition and the requirements that cause the establishment of the time saving end condition are different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which end condition is satisfied first, out of the variable probability end condition and the time saving end condition. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied (when the special pattern lottery shifts from a state in which it is easy to execute the lottery to a state in which it is difficult to do so), it can be assumed whether or not the probability variable end condition has already been satisfied (whether or not the special pattern has shifted from a state in which it is easy to win a big win to a state in which it is difficult to win).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, as a game state that is advantageous to the player as a game state, it is possible to set a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). Since the condition for ending the number of times of winning (time-saving state winning number-of-times ending condition, probability variable state winning number of times ending condition) to be established when a predetermined number of times is reached is set, unlike the game property of only whether or not to shift from a game state advantageous to the player to a game state unfavorable to the player, it is possible to shift to various game states by the end of the time-saving state (satisfaction of the time-saving end condition) and the end of the probability variable state (satisfaction of the probability variable end condition).

Therefore, one end condition (e.g., time-saving end condition) is satisfied before the other end condition (e.g., variable probability end condition) for the player, and the period (e.g., probability period) from when one end condition is satisfied until the other end condition is satisfied may be configured to be the most advantageous game period for the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game property that allows the player to play the game while expecting that the end condition for ending the game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state which is one of the game states is satisfied.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, a time saving state (probability variable state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed and a time saving state (probability variable state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed can be set according to the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) to be set. The lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. The normal state is easily shifted to a time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed is easily shifted to the time-saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

With this configuration, a game state more advantageous to the player can be set by shifting the game state through a big win or the like, so that the player can be expected to play the game in the most advantageous game state. Further, in this case, in the state where the variable probability state (variable probability state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbols is mainly executed is set, it is preferable to shift to the most advantageous game state for the player only when the time-saving end condition is satisfied before the variable probability end condition.

As a result, a game state advantageous to the player is set based on the fact that the player has won a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, and further, in the state in which the game state advantageous to the player is set, the game state can be shifted to a more advantageous game state when a specific end condition for ending the game state is established, and can be shifted to a disadvantageous game state when a condition other than the specific end condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always play a game with a sense of tension.

As the specific end condition for ending a game state advantageous to the player and the end condition other than the specific end condition used in the sixth embodiment, various end conditions described in each of the above-described embodiments may be applied, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). This jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off (Z1301: No), since there is no need to control the jackpot, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1301, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is ON (Z1301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot (Z1371). When it is determined in the process of Z1371 that it is time to start the jackpot (Z1371: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1372), and this process ends.

In the process of Z1371, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (Z1374). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the processing of Z1374 (Z1374: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (Z1375) in order to set the opening/closing operation of the first specific winning port 64a and the switching operation of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1375), and this process ends.

Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario, and the switching operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the read opening scenario (data). Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, so even if an unexpected power cutoff occurs during the big winning game, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of ending the big winning game in the middle.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of Z1374 (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376).

In the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is time to switch the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: Yes), the state of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ending effect (Z1378).

In the processing of Z1378, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (Z1378: Yes), ending processing 6 is executed (Z1379), and this processing ends. The details of this ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z1378, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (Z1378: No), the winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), the abnormality process 6 is executed (Z1381), and this process ends.

When the prize winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached. The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period, it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a has passed, the winning number counter 203zt2 is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more.

When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more, it means that the end condition of the current round game is established, so that the open/close door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed, and the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

Thus, in the winning process 6, a process of determining whether or not the round game end condition is established during one round game in the jackpot game is executed. Further, a process of determining whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 appropriately during the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is updated by -1, and next, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, the value of the variable probability passage counter 203zt1 is updated by adding 1 to it. The variable probability setting flag 203zs is set to ON. After that, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zt3 is 0 or not. When it is determined that the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF, the variable probability effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, and this process ends. Here, when the variable probability effective flag 203zt6 is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the game balls remaining in the special discharge passage 65e2 pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability game can be set.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203zt7 is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball blowing time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Next, as the abnormal process 6 (S1381), a process of monitoring whether or not the game ball is illegally passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, details of the ending process 6 (Z1379 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process 6 (Z1379). In the ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set to the sound lamp controller 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to OFF (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103). When it is determined in the process of Z4103 that the variable probability setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103: Yes), the variable probability counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although illustration is omitted, based on the variable probability counter 203zg being set to 100, the variable probability setting flag 203zs is configured to be set to OFF. After that, it shifts to the processing of this Z4105.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4103, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203zs is not ON (Z4103: No), the process of Z4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4105.

In the process of Z4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed was a jackpot game based on one of jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined that the jackpot A, C, E, or G in the process of Z4105 (Z4105: Yes), 0 is set to the time reduction identification flag 203zx (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4105, if it is determined that none of the jackpots A, C, E, G (Z4105: No), 1 is set to the time reduction identification flag 203zx (Z4107), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

By processing Z4106 or Z4107, the time reduction identification flag 203zx is set to 0 or 1, so that the open pattern of the electric accessary product set in the normal symbol variation processing is switched. After completing the processing of Z4106 or Z4107, the value of the time saving counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this processing ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the time saving state (probability variable state) is given, the type of time saving state set according to the jackpot type is set to be different. Thus, in a time-saving state executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the sorting prize winning device 700, it is possible to switch whether the game ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707, and whether the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64a2 or the right second ball entrance 64b can be switched and set according to the type of the big win.

Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery is executed with the second special symbol. By setting different advantages to be given to the player in the lottery of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the size of the privilege to be given to the player can be changed according to the kind of big win. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, but the odds ratio, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of time reductions, the variable time, etc. may be set differently between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that different benefits may be set. In addition, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, even in the variable probability game state with the same big win probability, the type of the special pattern that varies during the time reduction (during the variable probability) can be switched according to the type of the time saving state to be given, and the benefits that the player can receive in the variable probability game state can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to set a variable probability gaming state in which a plurality of benefits to be provided are different. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the types of jackpot guided by the probability variation switch 65e3 are set more for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol, it is possible to set a plurality of probability variation ratios. Therefore, it is possible to change the probability variation rate according to the time saving state, and to provide the player with a fresh game.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the condition (easiness of termination) for ending the time saving state (probability variable state) is made different between when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the advantage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the above-described second embodiment and fifth embodiment, the player can select the game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and the game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol. That is, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol, a game for executing a lottery for the second special symbol) is configured to be executable, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, time saving state), one game (for example, a game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol) is set (time saving state 1), and the time saving state 1 is set. is set, a game state (time saving state 2) in which the other game (for example, a game in which a lottery for a second special symbol is executed) can be set when a predetermined condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set and provide different game states to the player in stages, so that a game machine with high attack elements can be provided as compared with the above-described second embodiment and fifth embodiment.

By constructing in this way, for example, in the lottery of the first special pattern executed when the time-saving state 1 is set, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is more likely to be established than the lottery of the second special pattern. Concretely, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special pattern reaches 30 times, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established, and when the lottery for the first special pattern wins two small prizes, the condition for the end of the number of winnings is established.

During the period in which the time saving state 1 is continuously set, the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed) is set after the big win (after the jackpot game is finished) in a part of the winning of the special symbol jackpot. As described above, in the lottery of the second special pattern, the time-saving end condition is configured to be less likely to be established than in the lottery of the first special pattern, specifically, the condition of end of the number of fluctuations is established when the number of times of fluctuation (lottery) of the second special pattern is 100 times, and the condition of end of the number of winnings is established when the second special pattern lottery wins 20 small wins.

By configuring in this way, once the time saving state 2 is reached, the time saving state is easier to continue than in the case of the time saving state 1 . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with time-saving states with different game degrees. In the above-described example, the time saving state is shown as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but it is not limited to this, it may be used for the variable probability state, and the end conditions of the variable probability state and the time saving state may be managed independently.

In addition, as the end condition of the game state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, either the end condition set in each of the above-described embodiments or the assumed end condition may be adopted, or a plurality of conditions may be combined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage is differentiated between when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, so that the player who wins a big win in the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of time saving states, namely, time saving state 1 and working time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving state provided after the end of the jackpot. A time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery for the first special pattern is easily executed (a ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 64a2), and a time-saving state 2 is a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special pattern is easily executed (a ball is easily entered into the right second ball entrance 64b). More specifically, in the time-saving state 1, the electric accessory 701 is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the first operating opening 704 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is easy to open) when winning. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the time saving state 1, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64a1, so that the lottery for the first special symbol can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the time-saving state 2, the electric role 701 is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the second operating opening 707 inside the distribution winning device 700 (the second operating role 645b is easy to open) when winning. Therefore, by hitting to the right in the time saving state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 64b, so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable probability switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and by varying the internal flow path, a big winning type in which a ball can (easy) pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a big win and a big winning type in which a ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 are provided. By varying the ratio of the jackpot types that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 depending on whether the lottery for the first special pattern is a big win or the lottery for the second special pattern is a big win, the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state of the special symbols is made variable. In other words, it is configured such that a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol makes it easier to shift to the variable probability state compared to a case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to want to execute the lottery for the second special pattern, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to which operation port (either the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707) the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 enters. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of states with different degrees of advantage are provided in the variable probability state as well as in the time saving state. That is, a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed and a variable probability state 2 in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed are provided. Since the rate of transition to the variable probability state differs depending on whether the lottery is for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern, and a plurality of variable probability states with different degrees of advantage are provided for the variable probability state to be given, the game can be played aiming at a better state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is varied (lottery) according to a predetermined regularity. However, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, it may be used in a gaming machine having a configuration in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently performed.

In the sixth embodiment, according to the type of the time-saving state (time-saving state 1, time-saving state 2), the type of the special symbol for which the lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the time-saving state is completely divided. For example, when the time saving state A is set, the ratio of the second special symbol lottery (variation) is performed twice for the first special symbol lottery (variation) once, and when the time saving state B is set, the second special symbol lottery (variation) is performed 3 times per the first special symbol lottery (variation). If it is, only the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with various game properties according to the time saving state that is set.

Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used, and a game (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) aimed at the first ball entrance 64a1 is executed in a normal game state. As a result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64a1, when the jackpot is won, the second variable prize winning device 65 is opened to execute the jackpot game, and the probability of winning the jackpot by the special figure lottery after the jackpot game ends becomes high according to the type of the winning jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot by the special figure lottery becomes high according to the type of the winning jackpot, and furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery of the special figure becomes easy (hereinafter referred to as the probability variable state), or the probability of winning the jackpot does not change, but the special figure of the game. A time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a time-saving state) that makes it easier to receive a lottery is granted.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery for the special figure 1 is substantially executed in the variable probability state, and a variable probability state 2 in which the lottery for the special figure 2 is substantially executed, although detailed explanation will be given later. Also, the jackpot based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the lottery of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be obtained by one big winning game is large, or the number of balls that can be obtained by one big winning game is large after the big winning game is ended, and the game state is set so that it is easy to win the big winning).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 provides a variable probability state 1 as a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and a variable probability state 2 that is more advantageous than the variable probability state 1.例文帳に追加As a result, for example, by increasing the ratio of shifting from the normal game to the variable probability state (making it easier to enter the variable probability state 1) and making it easier for the player to experience the game state (variable probability state) in which it is easier to win a big hit than in the normal game, it is possible to enjoy the game by making it easier to experience the performance during the big win game and the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10, the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 can be set in the same way as the probability variable state described above, and both of the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 are set to a game state in which a special figure lottery is easier to receive than in the normal game (a game state in which a ball is easily entered into a ball entrance where the special figure lottery is executed, and a fluctuation time shorter than the normal game state is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure lottery). Further, the time saving state 1 is constituted so that the lottery of the special figure 1 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is constituted so that the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is set as a game state more advantageous to the player than the time saving state 1.例文帳に追加

When using such a pachinko machine 10, the configuration of the game board 13 should be as follows. That is, referring to FIG. 169, when the game state shifts to the probability variable state or the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display unit 80) is executed. When a right-handed game is executed, a ball shot to the right side area of the game board 13 collides with a return rubber 69, passes through a through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 or between nails planted in the vicinity of the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, and flows down toward a distribution winning device 700.例文帳に追加The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured so that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is in an open state. This electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of a normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is a win. It should be noted that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and it is preferable that the timing at which the ball enters the distribution prize winning device 700 is different.

Although detailed description is omitted, the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the distribution winning device 700 is opened, the ball can enter the distribution winning device 700, and the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 falls on the switching valve 702 (the time required for the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 to reach the switching valve 702 is about 0.4 seconds). This switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on winning a winning (normal drawing) as a result of the normal drawing lottery, and depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702, either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate as a flow path through which the ball can flow down. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the switching valve 702 operates so that the second flow path 706 communicates during the period from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning of the normal figure, and the first flow path 703 communicates during the rest of the period.

In this way, the mechanism that changes the accessory between the open state and the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electric structure is a known technology called non-electric accessory. In this embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of this non-electric accessory has been omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

On the other hand, the ball that flows down the second flow path 706 in the distribution winning device 700 and enters the second operation port 707 is operated by the second operation mechanism 708 as in the configuration of the non-electric accessory described above. Open the second operation accessory 645b. The lottery of special figure 2, which is set more advantageously than special figure 1, is executed by entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b, which becomes possible by opening the second operating accessory 645b. In addition, the configuration of the non-electrical role comprising the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating role 645b is the same as the configuration of the non-electrical role comprising the above-described first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating role 645a, so detailed description will be omitted.

It should be noted that the switching valve 702 described above is operated to communicate with the second flow path 706 only for a predetermined period of time, that is, from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning of the normal pattern, and the first flow path 703 is communicated during the other period (including the period in which the winning of the normal pattern is not performed). Since the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) advantageous to the game is executed, it is to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed by an illegal game.

As for the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, when the first right ball entrance 64a2 or the second right ball entrance 64b becomes capable of being entered by a ball entered in the sorting winning device 700, the ball flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 without entering the sorting winning device 700 is guided by a plurality of nails to enter any of the possible ball entering holes.

Further, a switching valve 702 is provided in the sorting winning device 700 for sorting the entered balls to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706, and the switching valve 702 is configured to be operated to the position where the second flow path is communicated for 3 seconds after 1.5 seconds have passed after winning the normal figure. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is configured such that a constant operation is executed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710 .

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is controlled to operate at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) from the operation of the electric accessory 701 so that the ball that enters with the opening pattern A is reliably guided to the first flow path 703 and the ball that enters with the opening pattern B is reliably guided to the second flow path 706. As a result, it becomes possible to guide the ball entering the distribution winning device 700 to a desired flow path, and to prevent the ball from flowing down from the distribution winning device 700 during the operation of the switching valve 702 for varying the state.

According to another example described above, the opening pattern of the electric role (electric role) can be set based on the jackpot type, and a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates and a game state in which the special figure 2 substantially fluctuates can be set based on the set electric role (electric role) opening pattern. Further, it is set so that a privilege (the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game is large and the rate of transition to a game state in which the special figure 2 lottery is substantially executed is high) is given to the player when the special figure 2 lottery wins the big prize rather than when the special figure 1 lottery wins the jackpot.

Thus, the time saving state and the probability variable state can be further provided with a game state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, probability variable state 2) and a game state (time saving state 1, probability variable state 1) which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Specifically, by setting a high transition ratio of shifting from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability variable state 1, the player can easily see the production executed in the time saving state or the probability variable state 1. By setting the transition ratio to the probability variable state 2, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, low, the player who has shifted to the probability variable state 2 can be given a sense of superiority. has the effect of

Although two types of opening pattern A and opening pattern B can be set as the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory), it is not limited to this, and three or more kinds of opening patterns can be set. This makes it possible to set a wider variety of game states.

In addition, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the ball to the first flow path 703 and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) that guides the ball to the second flow path 706 are set as the opening patterns of the electric parts (electric parts). As a result, the player can enjoy which channel (the first channel 703 or the second channel 706) the ball that hits the electric accessory 701 is guided to, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game.

Further, a ball that enters the distribution winning device 700 is configured to enter one of the operation ports (first operation port 704 or second operation port 707). For example, a flow path may be provided for discharging the ball from the distribution winning device 700 to the game board 13 again, or a flow path may be provided for entering an out port communicating with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering each operation port. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls in the distribution winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined constant operation after a winning game is executed, but for example, it may be configured to always perform a constant operation after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or may be configured to switch the communicating flow path when the number of balls entered in the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Although the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (motor not shown), for example, the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, may be actuated when a ball comes into contact with it, and the communicating flow path may be switched when a predetermined condition (for example, 10 balls have passed) is satisfied.

Furthermore, a ball guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 is constructed so as to flow down the flow path and enter one of the working ports. However, for example, a distribution member may be provided to distribute the balls guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 to a plurality of flow paths, and the balls distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member may enter the corresponding working port.

In addition, it is configured so that the ball that enters the distribution winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 in a certain time (0.4 seconds in this embodiment). A distribution means may be provided for distributing a ball that has landed in (1) to one of the paths. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting at what timing the ball entering the distributed prize winning device 700 will reach the switching valve 702, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

Next, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of another example mentioned above is demonstrated. This pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift between a normal game state, a probability variable state 1 (unfavorable probability variable), a probability variable state 2 (advantageous probability variable), a time saving state 1 (unfavorable time saving) and a time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving) based on the winning jackpot type.

First, in the normal game state, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the variable probability state 1, 30% shifts to the variable probability state 2, 15% shifts to the time reduction state 1, and 5% shifts to the time reduction state 2.例文帳に追加

Next, since the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern in the probability variation state 1, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the variable probability state 1, when a jackpot is won, the variable probability state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to the variable probability state 2, 15% shifts to the time reduction state 1, and 5% shifts to the time reduction state 2.例文帳に追加In this way, since the variable probability state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 is substantially changed like the normal game state, it is different in that the big win probability is set higher than that in the normal game state, but the shift destination of the game state after winning the big win and its allocation are the same.

Since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern in the variable probability state 2, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 substantial variation). In the probability variable state 2, when a jackpot is won, the probability variable state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to the time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 1. - 特許庁In this way, the variable probability state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 is substantially changed and a game state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the normal game state, so that the game state is most advantageous to the player.

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the release pattern A is set as the electric role release pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (special figure 1 substantial variation). In the time saving state 1, when a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the variable probability state 1, 30% shifts to the variable probability state 2, 15% loops the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. - 特許庁Thus, since the time saving state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 is substantially changed like the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure and the normal figure is shortened, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 at the time of winning the normal figure is different from that in the normal game state, but the shift destination of the game state after winning the jackpot and its allocation are the same.

Since the release pattern B is set as the electric role release pattern in the time saving state 2, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (special figure 2 substantial variation). In the time saving state 2, when a jackpot is won, 80% shift to the variable probability state 2, 15% loop the time saving state 2, and 5% shift to the time saving state 1. - 特許庁In this way, the time-saving state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 is substantially changed, and the probability of shifting to the variable probability state 2, which is most advantageous to the player when winning the jackpot, is set to 2.5 times or more of the normal game state (so-called withdrawal zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the player shifting to the most advantageous game state (probability variable state 2) from the normal game state, and to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

It should be noted that the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate after the jackpot in each game state are not limited to these and may be appropriately set. For example, the time saving state to be shifted from the normal game state may be only the time saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who has not been able to shift to the variable probability state even though he has won a jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate may be changed according to the game state. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable probability state continues until the next big hit, and 10 times of time reduction is given regardless of the game state as a time saving state, but for example, the variable probability state may be configured to continue until the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, as the variable probability state advantageous to the player and the variable probability state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference may be provided in the number of times of variation of the special symbols at which the variable probability state ends, or the probability of lottery for shifting from the variable probability state to the normal game state may be varied.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 195. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, at least a first end condition (variation count end condition) that is satisfied when the variable display of the special symbols is executed for the first number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning the big win and a second end condition (winning count end condition) that is satisfied based on the fact that the small win is won the second time (for example, 5 times) without winning the big win are set as time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state. , the time saving state is terminated when any one of a plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied. Furthermore, by configuring the number of winning times ending conditions to be different for each type of small win, it is possible to realize a game property in which the timing at which the time saving state ends is difficult to predict. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured such that the advantage degree of the big win started when the V prize is generated (the game ball passes through the V prize switch 650e3) during the execution of the small win game regardless of the game state at the time when the small win is won.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the termination condition of the time saving state instead of having one type of termination condition of the time saving state. More specifically, when a small win is won, a player can select whether to enter a game ball into a V winning device 6500 provided in place of the V winning device 650 to execute a big winning game or to reduce the number of remaining time reductions without entering a game ball. The degree of advantage for the player is different between the case of winning the jackpot during the time saving state and the case of winning the jackpot after the time saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a jackpot in a normal state after the end of the time saving state is more likely to win a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (a jackpot of a type to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big win). As a result, it is possible to realize the playability in which the player selects whether or not to enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 each time a small win is won in the time saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The point is that Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 178, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment is provided on the left side of the board surface with a V winning device 6500 that is set to allow a game ball to enter for a predetermined period of time when a small win is won, similar to the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment. The reason why the V winning device 6500 is arranged on the left side is that in the seventh embodiment, the player is allowed to select whether or not to generate the V winning during execution of the small winning game in the time saving state. That is, when the V winning device 6500 is arranged in the direction in which the game ball is shot in the time-saving state (that is, the right side of the game board 13), even if the player intends to select not to generate the V winning at the time of the small hit, the game ball that has already been shot by hitting to the right may enter the V winning device 6500 and the V winning may occur against the player's will. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is provided on the left side of the board, and unless the game method is daringly changed in the time saving state (that is, switching from the right-handed game to the left-handed game), the V winning cannot occur (is difficult to occur). Thus, for a player who does not want to generate a V prize in a small winning game, the small winning game can be surely ended without causing a V winning.

The V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is provided with a V switch 6500e3 inside. The V switch 6500e3, like the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment, is configured to start a big hit when a game ball passes through. That is, in the small winning game in which the V winning device 6500 is set to be able to enter, the big winning game is started based on the game ball entering the V winning device 6500 and passing through the V switch 6500e3. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the internal mechanism of the V winning device 6500 is configured such that all game balls entering the V winning device 6500 pass through the V switch 6500e3. That is, inside the V winning device 6500 of the seventh embodiment, there is no structure corresponding to the normal discharge channel 650e1, the switching member 650h, etc. in the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment, and all the game balls that have entered are discharged to the outside after flowing down the special discharge channel 6500e2 and passing the V winning switch 6500e3. Therefore, in the small winning game, the big winning is determined when at least one game ball enters the V winning device 6500, so the playability of the small winning game can be made simple and easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are easy for the player to understand. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won, the player continuously strikes left to shoot game balls toward the V winning device 6500, and 10 or more game balls enter the V winning opening 6500a. Therefore, when a small win is won, the player who wishes to start the big win can easily pass the V winning switch 6500e3 to start the big win. Even if a plurality of game balls pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small winning game, only one game ball that first passes through the V winning switch 6500e3 is used for judging the start of the big winning, and subsequent game balls have no influence on whether or not the big winning can be executed. In other words, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 6500 in one small win game and pass through the V winning switch 6500e3, only one big win is executed (a plurality of rights to become big wins are not obtained with one small win). Therefore, substantially, the ratio of the number of game balls that trigger the execution of the big win to the number of game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 in the small win game is 1/10 or less.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, a second ball entrance 6400 is provided on the right side of the board surface instead of the second ball entrance 640 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the second ball entrance 6400 is provided with an electric accessory 6400a. Normally, the electric accessory 6400a closes the second ball entrance 6400. Therefore, while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, if the normal pattern lottery wins, the electric accessory 6 is allowed to run for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds x 1 time, or 2 seconds x 2 times). 400a is opened to form a state in which a ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 6400. FIG. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 178, in the seventh embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided (moved) on the upstream side on the right side of the board surface. As a result, the distance until the launched game ball reaches the through gate 67 is shortened when hitting to the right, making it easier to execute the lottery for normal symbols earlier.

Here, with reference to FIG. 179, details of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a top view of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is configured to form a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass on the upper surface thereof when closed. More specifically, on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, a flow path is formed that allows the game ball to flow down from the left side to the right side in a front view, and convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe are provided to prevent the game ball from flowing down the flow path. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 is prevented from flowing down by the projections 6500fa to 6500fe, so it flows down on the opening/closing door 6500f1 along the outer periphery of each projection 6500fa to 6500fe. That is, on the opening/closing door 6500f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the projections 6500fa to 6500fe. Therefore, compared to the case where the projections 6500fa to 6500fe are not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can flow down the opening/closing door 6500f1 linearly from the right direction to the left direction in the front view), the period required until it completely flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 can be lengthened. In other words, when game balls are continuously shot toward the V winning device 6500 in a left-handed game, a plurality of game balls are likely to fall simultaneously to the opening/closing door 6500f1. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened due to a small win, a plurality of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 at the time of opening can be dropped into the inside of the V winning device 6500 immediately after opening the opening/closing door 6500f1. As a result, more game balls can be entered in one small winning game, so that at least one game ball can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 for a player who wants to start the big winning (want to enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 and pass the V winning switch 6500e3) when winning the small winning. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 that is set when winning a small prize in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, only one type of opening pattern is specified as the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, the open/close door 6500f1 is kept closed for 3 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and the open/close door 6500f1 is opened after 3 seconds. By continuously hitting to the left during the closing period of 3 seconds, around 5 game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, so immediately after the opening/closing door 6500f1 is switched (changed) to the open state, the game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 can be entered into the V winning device 6500.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 180, the open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the opening/closing door 6500f1 is closed when 0.6 seconds have passed (3.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small win). After that, as shown in FIG. 180, a closed state for 3 seconds (a period in which a plurality of game balls can reach (accumulate) the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 by hitting to the left) and an open state for 0.6 seconds (a period in which the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 are guided into the V winning device 6500) are repeated a maximum of twice, and the small winning game ends when the third open state in total ends. In addition, when the entry of 10 or more game balls, which is the upper limit winning number in the small hit, is detected, the small hit game is terminated at the time of detection. If the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 before the small winning game ends, it passes through the V winning switch 6500e3 and the big winning starts after the small winning game ends. Thus, in the seventh embodiment, the combination of the upper surface structure of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the V winning device 6500 and the opening pattern of the small winning allows more game balls to enter in one small winning game. More specifically, as in the seventh embodiment, if the open period is not divided into three times and set for 0.6 seconds each, but simply set the open state for 1.8 seconds (0.6 seconds×3) immediately after the start of the small winning game, only about three game balls can be shot during the open period, so there is a possibility that no game ball will enter the V winning device 6500. In other words, even though the player hits to the left during the small winning game in hopes of starting the big winning, the player is unable to start the big winning, which may reduce the player's motivation for the game. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 in one small winning game, a player who wants to start a big winning and hits to the right during the small winning game can easily enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 to start the big winning. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing the game from being lowered, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, a characteristic effect during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the time-saving state of the seventh embodiment, as in the time-saving state of the first embodiment described above, every time a special symbol lottery is executed, the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box as part of a variable display effect (variation pattern effect) for indicating the special symbol lottery result. Then, if the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), an effect of finding a treasure box is executed, and when the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small win game and the start of the big win (two types of wins) is confirmed after the small win is completed, an effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and a V display 803 showing that the big win game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (see FIG. 13A). . On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the V winning device 6500 during execution of the small winning game because the player did not hit left during execution of the small winning game (the conditions for starting the big winning are not satisfied), the boy's character 801 passes through the treasure box 802 without opening it.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in a time-saving state in which the electric accessory 6400a is easily opened (a ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 6400), every time a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 6400 by hitting to the right and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, an effect of acquiring a key is executed. The details of the key acquisition (accumulation) effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 181(a) and (b). Note that the display contents of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are the same as in the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, a display area HR6 for indicating the remaining number of times of time saving is formed above the boy character 801. FIG. FIG. 181(a) illustrates a case where the remaining number of times of time saving is 10 times, and characters "10 times remaining" are displayed inside the display region HR6. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is always set to 10 times. That is, FIG. 181(a) is a diagram showing the display contents immediately after the end of the time-saving jackpot. In the seventh embodiment, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801 when shifting to the time saving state after the big win. Each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the number of held balls increases, a key image corresponding to the held ball is displayed in these four display areas. In addition, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 in which characters such as "Pump right to save keys!" is formed in the sub-display area Ds. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 181(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 181(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400, an image imitating a key is displayed in the display area HR4. This allows the player to easily understand that the ball entering the second ball entrance 6400 and the display of the key are linked. It should be noted that the key image has a plurality of modes. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when a V winning is generated (when a game ball is entered into the V winning device 6500) by the mode of the key. That is, when a V prize is generated, the degree of expectation that a time-saving state will be given after the end of the big win based on the V prize is suggested to the player by the display mode of the key image. More specifically, in addition to the key of the mode (normal mode) shown in FIG. 181(b), as a mode with a high degree of expectation, a mode with a key larger than the normal mode, and as a sun with a low degree of expectation, a mode that is more tattered than the normal mode is provided. Depending on the display mode of these keys, it is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V prize.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the ratio of giving the time saving state is higher for the jackpot executed when the V prize occurs in the small prize won in the normal state than in the jackpot executed when the V prize occurs in the small prize won during the time saving state. Then, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured such that a small hit can be won only in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the case of winning the small prize in the normal state is the case of winning the small prize with the reserved ball of the second special pattern which is reserved during the time saving state and used for the lottery after the working time saving state ends. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the seventh embodiment, even if a small win is won during the time-saving state, the expectation of the time-saving state is higher if a game method of continuing to accumulate reserves while avoiding the ball entering the V winning device 6500 provided on the left side of the board surface and terminating the number of times of time-saving in a state where more reserves are accumulated (that is, shifting to a normal state) and digesting the reserved balls of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the kind of big win (whether or not the time-saving state is given) to be started when the V prize is generated is estimated from the mode of the key, and V winning is avoided unless it is guessed that the big win to which the time-saving state is given is started, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, in the time saving state, the player can be made to want to keep the number of retained balls as large as possible (that is, the upper limit number of four), so that the player can be made to hit rightward more positively during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when winning a small prize during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 182(a), when a small prize is won in the time-saving state, an effect is executed in which a boy character 801 discovers a ragged-looking treasure box 802 in which the characters "DANGER" are written. During the time-saving state, the appearance of the treasure box is set to be tattered, thereby making it possible to make the user think that it is better not to open the treasure box 802 . That is, it is possible to suggest to the player that the rate of giving the time saving state is low when the V prize is generated during the time saving state and the jackpot is won.

In addition, at the bottom of the main display area DM, the display area of the horizontal abbreviated square shape in which the word "Select" is displayed is formed, and the left half of the sub -display area DS is displayed as the character "Use a key!" The display area of the horizontal square shape, which is displayed in the right half of the right half, and the character "Right -beat", and the character "right -handed", are formed. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. This arrow image YG allows the player to easily understand that the key that can be used for the currently displayed treasure box 802 is the key displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that by hitting to the left, the key displayed in the display area HR4 can be used to open the treasure box 802 (that is, a V win can be generated and a big win can be started, while by continuing to hit to the right, the treasure box 802 can be left unopened (that is, the small winning game can be ended without causing a V win). It is possible to realize a novel playability in which a player selects whether to go and start a big hit to aim for a time-saving state or to continue hitting to the right to end the small win game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.A key that has not been used due to the player continuing to hit to the right disappears at the end of the small win.

FIG. 182(b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of a small hit in the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state in the presence of the reserved ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 182(b), when a small prize is won in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, an effect is executed in which a boy character 801 finds a treasure box 802 with a shining appearance. A player can easily understand that the treasure box 802 should be opened by setting the mode to a more gorgeous appearance than when a small win is made during the time-saving state (when the treasure box 802 in a tattered mode is displayed). That is, it is possible to suggest to the player that if a V prize is generated in a normal state after exiting the time saving state (finishing the time saving state) and a big win is achieved, there is a high possibility that the time saving state will be provided after the big win. In addition, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a display area HR5 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape and displaying the characters "Use the left-handed key stocked!" is formed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that when a small win occurs after exiting the time saving state (after the number of times of time saving has passed and the state is shifted to the normal state), the player should hit left to generate a V winning prize.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the rate of giving the time saving state after the end of the big win is higher when the two types of winning are started by generating the V winning during execution of the small winning game won in the normal state than when the big winning (two types of winning) is started by generating the V winning during the execution of the small winning game won in the time saving state. During the time-saving state, it is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation that the time-saving state will be given when the V prize is generated by the effect mode (the display mode of the image of the key). As a result, when a small win is won in a time-saving state, it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property in which a player is allowed to select whether to finish the small win without causing the V win or to start the big win with the V win.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance modes are different between the time-saving state and the normal state after the time-saving state (the state in which the ball with the second special symbol is held) are different, and in the normal state after the time-saving state is finished, the configuration is such that the performance mode is set to urge (suggest) to hit left (that is, V winning) when a small win is won, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the time saving state has not ended, as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the maximum, it may be configured to execute an effect that encourages hitting to the left (V winning). If the number of reserved balls is maximum, even if the time-saving state is not given after the big win is finished (that is, even if the game state after the big win is set to the normal state), the degree of expectation that the reserved ball of the second special pattern will give a small hit in the normal state after the big win is finished (that is, the expectation that the two kinds of big wins can be started in the normal state where the rate of giving the time-saving state is high) is high, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time saving state, in the sub-display area Ds, both the game method (left hitting) for generating a V prize (using the key) and the game method (right hitting) for avoiding the V prize (not using the key) are mainly suggested to the player by characters (see FIG. 182 (a)), but it is not limited to this. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each game method (game method for generating and avoiding a V prize) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG may be moved to the left side of the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display areas HRR1 to HRR4) having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 and an image imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2) may be provided. As in the seventh embodiment, the display areas HR1 to HR4 on the left side may display an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802, and the display areas HRR1 to HRR4 on the right side may display an image simulating a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802. Then, the arrow image YG may be composed of a leftward arrow directed to the display region HR4, and the arrow image YG12 may be composed of a rightward arrow directed to the image of the bomb displayed in the lowermost display region HRR4 of the right display regions HRR1 to HRR4. By constructing in this way, the player can easily understand that the small winning can be ended (V winning is avoided) by blowing up the treasure box 802 with the bomb if the player hits right according to the instruction of the arrow image YG2 imitating the rightward arrow. On the other hand, the player can easily understand that the key displayed in the display area HR4 can be used to open the treasure box 802 (generate V winning) by hitting left according to the instruction of the arrow image YG imitating a leftward arrow. That is, the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2 can have a plurality of different roles such as a role of indicating items (keys and bombs) to be used in the small winning performance being executed and a role of indicating a player's game method (shooting direction of the game ball) for using the items. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to use the display elements efficiently, so that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 183(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19 (a)) in that the small hit type selection table 202f and the open scenario table 202g are deleted. Also, the difference is that the contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time reduction grant table 202e are partially changed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b), details of the first winning type selection table 202a in the seventh embodiment will be described. Although not shown, the first winning random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 21(a)) in the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment. Like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, this special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 defines a random number value (judgment value) determined as a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment, as the range of the counter value (random number) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big hit, "0 to 9" is defined in association. Therefore, in the lottery for the first special pattern, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value from '0 to 9', it is determined to be a big win, and when it is not any value from '0 to 9' (it is any value from '10 to 999'), it is determined to be out. Among 1000 counter values (random numbers) of ``0 to 999'' that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, 10 counter values (random numbers) of ``0 to 9'' are determined to be big wins, so the probability of being determined to be big wins in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000). In addition, in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the present seventh embodiment, a random value (counter value) determined as a small hit is not specified, like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol lottery (winning a small prize) is zero.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184(b), details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Like the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the first embodiment, this special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 defines random values (judgment values) that are determined to be big hits and small hits in the second special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment, as the range of the counter value (random number) determined as a big hit, "0 to 9" is associated and defined, and "10 to 989" is defined in association as the range of the counter value (random number) determined as a small hit. Of the 1000 counter values (random numbers) of '0 to 999' that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the counter values (random numbers) determined to be big wins are 10 of '0 to 9', and the counter values (random numbers) of '10 to 989' are determined to be 980 of '10 to 989'. The probability is 98/100 (980/1000). That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is configured so that a small win is won almost (at a probability of 98/100). Therefore, in the time-saving state, a small prize is won in the lottery of special symbols almost every time, so that the player can be more entertained with the playability of selecting whether or not to generate the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184(c), the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment will be described. This second winning random number table 202c, like the second winning random number table 202c in the first embodiment, is a data table that defines the range of values of the second winning random number counter C4 that is determined to be a winning of normal symbols. When the lottery for the normal pattern is executed, the random number value (counter value) defined in the second winning random number table 202c is compared with the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the lottery for whether or not the normal pattern wins is executed.

FIG. 184(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number counter C4 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184(c), the second winning random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment defines a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a normal symbol hit in a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) and a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a normal symbol hit in a normal symbol low probability state (normal state). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(c), 200 random numbers (counter values) of "5 to 204" are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be hits of normal symbols in a high-probability state of normal symbols. Among 240 random numbers of ``0 to 239'' that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4, 200 random numbers are determined to be hits of normal patterns, so the probability of winning of normal patterns is 1/1.2 (200/240) in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal patterns.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184(c), only "0" is defined as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Among 240 random numbers of ``0 to 239'' that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4, the random number determined as winning of normal patterns is 1, so the probability of winning of normal patterns is 1/240 in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal patterns.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning the normal design is set to be extremely low in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state in anticipation of the game ball entering the second ball entrance 6400 as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the normal symbol lottery wins in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the electric accessory 6400a is configured to be opened only for a very short time (0.2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if you make a right hit between the normal state, the probability of being hit by the lottery of the normal pattern is low, and even if it is hit, the game ball cannot be entered at the second entrance 6,400, so you can enter the game ball to the first ball in the 1st entrance ball 64 by the left hit, and enter the large hit with the first special pattern lottery. It is better for the players to think that it is better to do the game with the aim of being able to do it (it is not worth the right). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185(a), details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described. This first winning type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot, like the first winning type selection table 202b in the first embodiment. FIG. 185(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, a direct winning table 202be1 for specifying (determining) the big winning type when a special symbol lottery results in a big winning (so-called "direct winning" occurs), and a V winning table 202be2 for specifying (determining) the big winning type when a big winning occurs based on the occurrence of a V prize are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 185(b), the details of the direct hit table 202be1 will be described.

FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table 202be1. As shown in FIG. 185(b), in the seventh embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot (a direct hit occurs) occurs in a special symbol lottery. "Jackpot A7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, a time saving state of 10 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the normal state is set after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the "jackpot A7" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B7" because the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous. In addition, in the time-saving state, even if any jackpot is won, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot. This is because if a direct hit occurs at a relatively early stage after shifting to the time saving state, it becomes impossible to fully enjoy the game property of selecting whether or not to generate the V prize, which is the characteristic game property in the seventh embodiment, in the time saving state. In other words, in order to prevent disappointment of the player by shifting to the normal state without being able to fully enjoy the game in the time saving state, the game machine is configured so as to be always in the time saving state after a direct hit during the time saving state.

When a direct hit occurs, regardless of the type of special symbol that triggered the direct hit (whether it is a big win by lottery of a first special symbol or a big win by lottery of a second special symbol), either "big win A7" or "big win B7" is specified only according to the value of the first win type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 185(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in correspondence with the range of ``0 to 49'', ``jackpot A7'', and ``50 to 99'', ``jackpot B7'' is associated with the range. That is, 50 values of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with the "jackpot A7" and the "jackpot B7" respectively. Therefore, when a direct hit occurs, the ratio of specifying the "jackpot A7" and the ratio of specifying the "jackpot B7" are 50/50 (both 50%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 185(b), details of the V winning table 202be2 will be described. As described above, this V winning table 202be2 is a data table defining data for specifying (selecting) the type of big winning to be executed based on the occurrence of V winning in the small winning game (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 6500e3). FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the V winning table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 185(b), the V-winning table 202be2 defines four types of jackpots: "jackpot C7", "jackpot D7", "jackpot E7", and "jackpot F7".

As shown in FIG. 185(c), "jackpot C7" is defined in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. The "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot C7" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot C7' is 1. Therefore, the probability (percentage) that the 'jackpot C7' is determined (selected) as the jackpot type to be started when the V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 1/100 (1%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185(c), "big win D7" is defined in association with the range of "1 to 4" hits of the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state advantageous to the player when winning in the normal state, while the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state disadvantageous to the player when winning in the time-saving state. This 'jackpot D7' has the largest number of rounds next to the 'jackpot C7' and is a jackpot type that is advantageous next to the 'jackpot C7' because the game state after the completion of the jackpot is advantageous when winning in a normal state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot D7' is 4, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot D7' as the type of jackpot to be started when the V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 4/100 (4%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185(c), "big win E7" is defined in association with the range of "5 to 29" for the first win type counter C2. This ``jackpot E7'' is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state advantageous to the player when winning in the normal state, while the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state disadvantageous to the player when winning in the time-saving state. That is, it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot C7" and "jackpot D7" in terms of the number of rounds, and that the game state after the jackpot ends is the same as "jackpot D7". Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``jackpot E7'' is 25, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) ``jackpot E7'' as the jackpot type to be started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small prize game is 25/100 (25%).

Also, as shown in FIG. 185(c), the hit of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "30 to 99" with "jackpot F7". This "jackpot F7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and the game state is also disadvantageous, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with 'jackpot F7' is 70, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) 'jackpot F7' as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 70/100 (70%).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, when a V winning occurs during time saving and a jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends unless a ``jackpot C7'' with a distribution of 1% is won. On the other hand, in the normal state after the end of the time-saving state, when a small prize is won with the reserved ball of the second special pattern and a V prize is generated, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the big prize by winning one of ``big win C7'' (distribution 1%), ``jackpot D7'' (distribution 4%), and ``jackpot E7'' (distribution 25%). That is, it is configured such that the time saving state is set at a rate of 30%. Therefore, since the probability of a time saving state in which V winning is more advantageous in the normal state than in the time saving state is higher, the degree of advantage can be increased when a special game method of continuing right-handed hitting so as not to generate a V prize even if a small win is won until the time saving state ends (the number of times of time saving elapses). It should be noted that even if the state is shifted to the normal state, the time-saving state is set only at a rate of 30% of the jackpot based on the V prize (the majority is set to the normal state), at first glance, it seems that it is difficult to shift to the time-saving state. However, if right-handed hitting is continued until the time-saving state is completed, in most cases, the state can be shifted to the normal state with four reserved balls of the second special pattern accumulated, and in the lottery of the second special pattern, a small prize is won (at a rate of 98%). In other words, almost four chances of winning a jackpot based on the V prize are given. The probability of winning any one of the “jackpot C7” to “jackpot E7” with a ratio of 30% within four times is about 76% (the probability of being “jackpot F7” all four times is 70% × 70% × 70% × 70% = 24%). Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to end the time-saving state in a state in which the hold is accumulated to the maximum.

As soon as the reserve is accumulated to the maximum, even if a V prize is generated, the normal state is set after the big win is almost (at a rate of 99%). In other words, as in the case of avoiding the V prize until the number of times of time saving becomes 0, four chances for shifting to the time saving state are given, and one big win is obtained rather than avoiding the V prize until the number of times of time saving becomes 0, so that the range of options for the game method of the player can be expanded. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 186 (a), the details of time saving grant table 202e in a 7th embodiment are explained. This time reduction provision table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. At the end of the jackpot, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k is set with reference to the time-saving grant table 202e. The value of the time saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed and fluctuation is stopped. While the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more, it is in a time-saving state, forming an advantageous state in which the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 6400 by hitting to the right, while shifting to a disadvantageous normal state when the value becomes 0.

FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction provision table 202e. As shown in FIG. 186(a), "10 times" is defined as the number of time-saving grants in association with "jackpot A7" won in the normal state, and "10 times" is defined as the number of time-saving grants in association with "jackpot A7" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when "jackpot A7" is won, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), "0 times" is defined as the number of time reduction grants in association with "jackpot B7" won in the normal state, while "jackpot B7" won in the time reduction state is defined in association with "10 times" as the number of time reduction grants. Therefore, when a direct hit occurs and a ``big win B7'' is determined in a normal state, the game machine shifts to a normal state disadvantageous to the player, while when a direct hit occurs and a ``big win B7'' is determined in the time saving state, the game device shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 186(a), "10 times" is defined as the number of time reduction grants in association with the "jackpot C7" elected in the normal state and the time reduction state. Therefore, when a V winning occurs in a small win and a "big win C7" is determined, the game shifts to an advantageous time-saving state after the big win is completed regardless of the game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), while "10 times" is defined as the number of time reduction grants in association with "jackpot D7" won in the normal state, 0 times is defined as the number of time reduction grants in association with "jackpot E7" won in the time reduction state. In addition, the same time-saving number of times is also defined in association with the "jackpot E7". Therefore, in the normal state, when a V prize is generated in the small win and either "big win D7" or "big win E7" is determined, the time-saving state is set to be advantageous after the end of the big win. On the other hand, when these jackpot types are determined in the time state, the game is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 186(a), "0 times" is defined in association with the "jackpot F7" as the number of time reduction grants regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, in both the normal state and the time-saving state, if the "jackpot F7" is won, a disadvantageous normal state is set, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, regardless of the type of special symbol, the number of times of time saving (that is, the value of the counter 203k during time saving) is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be able to set different number of times of time saving. In this case, when shifting to the time saving state, the number of time saving times of the first special symbol may be set to 5 times, for example, and the number of time saving times of the second special symbol may be set to 10 times. By constructing in this way, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed maximum 10 times during the time-saving state regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the time-saving state. In other words, even when a ``jackpot A7'' is won in a state where the reserved ball of the first special pattern exists, or the reserved ball of the first special pattern exists at the time of shifting to the time saving state and the lottery of the reserved first special pattern is executed immediately after the completion of the big win, the number of times of drawing of the second special pattern which can be executed during the time saving state can be suppressed from being reduced. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the playability of selecting whether or not to generate a V prize in the small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described. The configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) in the first embodiment, and the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment differs only in that the specified contents of the normal variation pattern table 202d1 and the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 are partially changed. In addition, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the seventh embodiment differs from the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23(b)) in that both the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol are made common, and unified with the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first embodiment (the long variation of 180 seconds is not set in the lottery of the second special symbol). are omitted. In addition, in the normal state in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the long variation is not performed. In other words, when the player avoids the V winning prize in the small prize won during the time saving state and the lottery of the second special pattern is executed after the time saving state is terminated, if a long fluctuation time is set, the game will be prolonged and the player's interest may be spoiled, so this is intended to prevent this.

Next, the details of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 186(b). FIG. 186(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the working hours variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186(b), in the time saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, the pattern type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with the variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is defined in association with a short deviation with a variation time of 1 second. A normal reach is associated and defined. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the variation is completed in a very short time, so that when the state shifts to the time saving state with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining, the lottery for the first special symbol that cannot win a small win (that is, it is impossible to play the game of selecting whether to generate or avoid the V prize in the small win) can be completed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "missing" or "small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" with "short out" with a variation time of 3 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined with a "long out" with a variation time of 5 seconds in the range of "150 to 189". "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the range of ", and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "196 to 198". That is, compared to the case where the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (the variation pattern for the first special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 23(b))), the variation time is shortened when the lottery result is not a big hit. As a result, the game can be speedily played (completed) during the time-saving state, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant in the time-saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with "normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds with respect to the range of "0 to 49", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with "super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds with respect to the range of "50 to 194", and the value of the variation type counter CS1. A "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of "195 to 198". That is, even when the lottery for the second special pattern results in a big win during the time-saving state, the variable time is set to be shorter than when the lottery for the special pattern is executed in the normal state. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game from becoming redundant in the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 183(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb, and a winning state storage area 203ec in addition to the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(b)). They are different in that respect. Moreover, it is also different in that the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment are deleted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the empty areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) that constitute the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203a2. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the special symbol lottery or the like is determined based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, shift processing is performed to shift the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) having an area number smaller by 1.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the game balls entering the second ball entrance 6400, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

These special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 are added to store the second special symbol reserved memory which was not provided in the first embodiment.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is shifted (moved) to the execution area for executing the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol winning lottery or the like is determined based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored (stored) in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so similarly to the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (variable display reserved number M in normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the variable display reserved ball number increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S1013 in FIG. 191). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, which is the maximum value, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1012: No in FIG. 191). Also, the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S933 in FIG. 190).

The winning state storage area 203ec is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (that is, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0), "00H" is stored as information indicating the normal state in the winning state storage area 203ec. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (that is, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 1 or more), '01H' is stored as information indicating the time saving state in the winning state storage area 203ec. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ec is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the gaming state (that is, the number of times of time reduction) after the end of the big win (see S1621 in FIG. 192).

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a transition method for each state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, two game states are provided in the seventh embodiment. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of normal symbols is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is greatly different between the normal game state in which the second special pattern reserved ball exists immediately after the time saving state is finished and the normal game state in which the second special pattern reserved ball does not exist. That is, if even one reserved ball of the second special pattern exists, a small win or a big win is won (at a rate of 99%), so that an extremely advantageous state is formed as compared with the case where the reserved ball of the second special pattern does not exist. In the following description, for simplification of explanation, the normal game state in which the second special symbol reserved ball does not exist is called "normal mode", the normal game state in which the second special symbol reserved ball exists is called "stock release mode" in the sense that the game is played using the second special symbol reserved ball stored (stocked) during the time saving state, and the time saving game state is the game property of generating V prizes during the time saving state and executing a big hit. and the game property of avoiding the V prize during the small win and shifting to the "stock release mode".

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 187, a description will be given of how to shift from the normal mode (normal game state in which there is no held ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, when it becomes "jackpot A7" that wins at a rate of 50%, the mode after the big win is set to an advantageous select mode (time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, when it becomes a ``jackpot B7'' in which the player wins at a rate of 50%, the mode after the big win is again set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player (the normal mode is looped). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be played in anticipation of winning the "jackpot A7" in the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, as shown in the middle of FIG. 187, in the select mode (time-saving game state), when a small win is won and a V prize is generated to win a big win, and when the number of times of time-saving has elapsed (finished), there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the middle stage of FIG. 187, when a small win is won in a lottery of special symbols, a V prize is generated to win two kinds of wins (V win), and one of the big wins D7 to F7 is won as a big win type, the game shifts to either the normal mode or the stock release mode after the big win. That is, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0 at the end of the big wins D7 to F7, the mode is shifted to the normal mode after the big wins are finished, while if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 1 or more at the time of the end of the big wins D7 to F7, the stock release mode is changed after the big wins are finished. Similarly, when the number of times of time saving has passed (finished), when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0 at the time when the number of times of time saving has passed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game can be played with care so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become zero. In other words, since more game balls enter the second ball entrance 6400, the player can be positively hit to the right, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit occurs, or when a jackpot C7 with a distribution of 1% is determined by winning two types of wins, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the select mode again.

Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, in the stock release mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a big win (direct win and V win) is won. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, when the jackpot A7 is determined as a direct hit, the mode shifts to an advantageous select mode after the jackpot ends. In addition, if it becomes a direct hit, a big hit B7 is determined, and the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big win, the game shifts to the normal mode after the big win. Furthermore, when a V prize is generated during execution of a small winning game to result in two types of winning (V winning) and one of the big winnings C7 to E7 is determined, the mode after the big winning is finished is set to the select mode. In addition, a big win F7 is determined as a win type of two kinds (V win), and when there is no reserved ball of the second special pattern at the end of the big win F7, the game shifts to a disadvantageous normal mode after the big win ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot B7 or jackpot F7 is reached and there are one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends becomes the stock release mode again.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, according to the jackpot type and the number of held balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot (or at the time when the number of times of reduction in time has elapsed), the player has three modes with different degrees of advantage. Therefore, since various mode transitions can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 188 to 192. FIG. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since the second special symbol pending storage function is added to the first embodiment, the contents of the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) are also changed. However, since only the same deformation as the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment (similar to the seventh embodiment, the embodiment having the second special symbol pending storing function) is performed, detailed description of the starting winning process in the seventh embodiment will be given here. are omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 188, special symbol variation processing 7 (S121 in FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 7 (S121) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38, S104) in the first embodiment, and is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, like the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation process 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S201, S202, S206 to S218 and S220 are the same as the processes of S201, S202, S206 to S218 and S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIGS. 38 and S104) in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121) in the present seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not being varied in the processing of S202 (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N1 of holding the variation display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls counter 203b2 (the number of times of suspension of the variation display in the special symbol 2 N2) are acquired (S2). 31).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232), and when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0 (S232: No), the process proceeds to S206. On the other hand, in the processing of S232, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (S233), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 changed by calculation is set (S234).

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S234, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S235). In the process of S235, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203a2 are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S210.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, in the processing of S213, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S213: No), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203k during time saving is greater than 0 (S236), and if it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time saving is greater than 0 (S236: Yes), the value of the counter 203k during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S237), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S236 that the value of the counter 203k during time saving is 0 (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S220). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), instead of the small win start setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S238), and the process shifts to S218. The details of this small winning start setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S220, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), the process of S238 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the small winning start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This small winning start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) is a process executed instead of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 40, S221) in the first embodiment, and is a process for setting the start of the small winning game like the small winning start setting process in the first embodiment.

Of the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S401 and S404, the same process as each process of S401 and S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40, S221) in the first embodiment is executed. In addition, in the small winning start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, when the processing of S401 is completed, next, the V winning table 202be2 (see FIG. 185 (c)) of the first winning type selection table 202b Stores data indicating the specified big winning type in the V passing big winning type storage area 203h (S411), sets the start of the small winning (S412), and proceeds to S404. migrate.

Next, referring to FIG. 190, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIGS. 45 and S106) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, in order to control the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 6400a associated with the second entrance 6400, and the like. is the processing of

Of the normal symbol variation process 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912 to 920, the same process as each process of S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912 to 920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45, S106) in the first embodiment is executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not being varied in the processing of S902 (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203eb (the number of suspension times M of variation display in normal symbols) is acquired (S931). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is greater than 0 (S932). On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is not 0 (S932: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is subtracted by 1 (S933).

When the process of S933 is finished, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is then shifted (S934). In the process of S934, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203ea are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area→the execution area, the second reserved area→the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is acquired (S935).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is normal symbol time saving state (S936). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more, it is determined that it is in the normal pattern of the time-saving state.

In the process of S936, when it is determined that it is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S936: Yes), based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S936 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal design wins is acquired (S937), and the process proceeds to S906. In addition, in the process of S937, specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is out (see FIG. 184 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S936, when it is determined that the time saving state of normal symbols is not in effect (S936: No), then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S935 and the normal winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the winning of the normal symbols is obtained (S938), and the process proceeds to S906. In the processing of S938, specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the normal symbol wins, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is out (see FIG. 184 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, through gate passage processing 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This through gate passing process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) is a process executed instead of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 46, S107) in the first embodiment, and determines whether or not the game ball passes through the through gate 67. When the game ball passes, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea.

In the processing of S1001 of the through gate passage processing 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, the same processing as each processing of S1001 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 46, S107) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the through-gate passing process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 in the process of S1001 (S1001: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of times of holding variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S1011). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is a value smaller than 4 (S1012), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 4 (that is, the upper limit) (S1012: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is incremented by 1 (S1013), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea (S1014), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the jackpot control processing 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing various settings during execution of the jackpot game, similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

Of the jackpot control processing 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, in each processing of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, the same processing as each processing of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the first embodiment is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (ending period) (S1612: Yes), the jackpot type being executed and the number of times of reduced working hours corresponding to the data of the state storage area 203ec at the time of winning are read from the reduced working hours giving table 202e (see FIG. 186 (a)) (S1621), and the read out number of reduced working hours is read out. The counter value of the short and medium counter 203k is set (S1622), and the process proceeds to S1615.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 1113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 193 to 195. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 193, the winning information related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This winning information related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) is a process executed in place of the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment, and similar to the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from main controller 110.

In the processes of S2301, S2302, S2311 and S2312 of the winning information related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as the processes of S2301, S2302, S2311 and S2312 of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 57) are executed.

In addition, in the winning information related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the read gaming state is the time saving state in the processing of S2302 (S2302: Yes), then it is determined whether the received winning information command is a command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321). In the processing of S2321, when it is determined that the command indicates the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), the mode of the key corresponding to the lottery result notified by the winning information command is specified (S2322), the display of the key image of the specified mode is set (S2324), and the process proceeds to 2311. On the other hand, in the process of S2321, when it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No), the processes of S2322 and S2324 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2311.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the winning-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This win-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) is a process that is executed in place of the win-related process (see FIG. 58, S2212) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the win-related process (see FIG. 58) in the first embodiment.

Of the hit-related process 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S2401-S2409 and S2411-S2418 are the same as the processes of S2401-S2409 and S2411-S2418 of the hit-related process (see FIG. 58, S2212) in the first embodiment. In addition, in the hit related process 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the process of S2409 (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S2421), and then this process ends. Details of this small hit start command process (S2421) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the small hit start command process (S2421) described above. In this small hit start command process (S2421), first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S3901), and then it is determined whether or not the read information is information indicating the time saving state (S3902). In the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the read information is information indicating the time saving state (S3902: Yes), the start of the small hit effect for the select mode (see FIG. 182 (a)) is set (S3903), and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the read information is not the information indicating the time saving state (it is determined that it is the information indicating the normal state) (S3902: No), the start of the small winning effect for the stock open mode (see FIG. 182 (b)) is set (S3904), and then this processing is ended.

By executing this small winning start command process (see FIG. 195), the small winning performance can be changed according to whether the small winning is won in the normal state or the small winning in the time saving state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is configured such that a big win in a disadvantageous normal state makes it easier for the player to set a time-saving game state advantageous to the player as a game state after the big win, rather than a big win in an advantageous time-saving state. That is, it is constituted so as to win a small prize with a high probability in the lottery of the second special pattern which is likely to be executed during the time saving state, and when V winning is generated in the small prize and the big prize is started, the rate of giving the time saving state is higher for the small prize during the normal state than for the small prize during the time saving state. In other words, the player selects the first game method in which the player is aware of the risk that the possibility of entering the time-saving state will be low, and the V winning is generated by hitting to the left as soon as the small win is won in the time-saving state, and the jackpot is executed, and the second game method, in which the time-saving state is ended while many reserved balls of the second special pattern are kept, and the V prize is generated in the small win after the time-saving state ends, knowing the risk of requiring time and holding balls to end the time saving state. can be made

Here, in general gaming machines, the degree of advantage when a big win is achieved in an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state) is usually higher than the degree of advantage when a big win is achieved in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). Therefore, when shifting to an advantageous state, in most cases, the player plays the game with a strong expectation of a big win during the advantageous state. Therefore, when the advantageous state ends and the state shifts to the disadvantageous state, there is a possibility that the player will be discouraged and the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the termination of the advantageous time-saving state is constructed so that the degree of expectation for shifting to the time-saving state is higher, the player can be made to think that he/she wants to win the jackpot with the reserved balls of the second special symbol after the time-saving state is ended. In other words, when a small win occurs in the time saving state, in addition to the option of winning a big win by going left-handed to win a V prize, the player can be given an option of intentionally shifting to a normal state by avoiding the V prize in the small win during the time saving. Therefore, a very special and novel game method of intentionally avoiding a big win can be given as one of the options, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured so as to win a small win (98/100), but the small win probability may be determined arbitrarily. For example, 1/4 may be a small win. In such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to win a V prize with a small prize after shifting to the normal state, the possibility of not winning a small prize due to the holding of the second special pattern is increased, so that more players can select a game method of generating a V prize and executing a big prize as soon as a small prize is achieved during the time saving state. It should be noted that, instead of lowering the probability of a small hit, it is possible to balance by increasing the ratio of time reduction provision in the case of two types of hits in the normal state (for example, to 80%). In addition, instead of lowering the probability of a small win (to 1/4), it is possible to reduce the rate of occurrence of a V prize when hitting left in a small win (for example, to reduce the occurrence of a V prize only about once every four small wins). This allows more players to select the game method of ending the time saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, when a V prize is generated during the time saving state and a V win is won, the game state after the big win is set to a disadvantageous normal state at a rate of 99% regardless of the number of times of the time saving. That is, from the setting of the time-saving state until the number of times of time-saving elapses (the specific condition is established), the degree of advantage in the case of winning V is lower than after the number of times of time-saving has elapsed (after the specific condition is established), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the time-saving state, the ratio of giving the time-saving state when winning the prize V is high (for example, 30%, which is the same as when winning the prize V in the normal state). More specifically, for example, when a small win is won in the second half of the time saving state (for example, the last three lotteries of special symbols), and V winning occurs in the small win and becomes a V win, the time saving state may be provided at a relatively high rate as in the normal state. Conversely, if a small win is won in the first half (for example, the first two special pattern lotteries) in the time saving state, and V prizes are generated in the small win and the V win is achieved, the time saving state may be provided at a relatively high rate as in the normal state.

In the seventh embodiment, the constitution is such that a small prize can be won only in the lottery of the second special pattern, but the constitution is not limited to this, and the constitution is also possible in which the lottery of the first special pattern also has a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200) of winning a small prize. By constructing in this way, even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the player can expect to win a small prize, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when shifting to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated when the lottery of the special symbols is executed a total of 10 times regardless of the type of the special pattern in which the lottery is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to set a separate number of times of time saving for each type of special symbol (for example, the first special symbol 5 times, the second special symbol 10 times). That is, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time saving state, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol until the time saving state ends may be the same each time. By configuring in this way, the number of times of game characteristics for selecting whether or not to generate the V prize can be made the same each time in the time saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance mode is set differently between the time-saving state and the normal state after the time-saving state (the state where the second special symbol reserved ball exists), and in the normal state after the time-saving state is finished, the performance mode is set to urge (suggest) to hit left (that is, win a V prize) when a small win is won, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the time saving state has not ended, as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the maximum, it may be configured to execute an effect that encourages hitting to the left (V winning). If the number of reserved balls is maximum, even if the time-saving state is not given after the big win is finished (that is, even if the game state after the big win is set to the normal state), the degree of expectation that the reserved ball of the second special symbol will give a small win in the normal state after the big win is finished (that is, the expectation that the two kinds of big wins can be started in the normal state in which the rate of giving the time-saving state is high) is high, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time saving state, in the sub-display area Ds, both the game method (left hitting) for generating a V prize (using the key) and the game method (right hitting) for avoiding the V prize (not using the key) are mainly suggested to the player by characters (see FIG. 182 (a)), but it is not limited to this. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each game method (game method for generating and avoiding a V prize) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG may be moved to the left side of the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display areas HRR1 to HRR4) having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 and an image imitating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2) may be provided. As in the seventh embodiment, the display areas HR1 to HR4 on the left side may display an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802, and the display areas HRR1 to HRR4 on the right side may display an image simulating a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802. Then, the arrow image YG may be composed of a leftward arrow directed to the display region HR4, and the arrow image YG12 may be composed of a rightward arrow directed to the image of the bomb displayed in the lowermost display region HRR4 of the right display regions HRR1 to HRR4. By constructing in this way, the player can easily understand that the small winning can be ended (V winning is avoided) by blowing up the treasure box 802 with the bomb if the player hits right according to the instruction of the arrow image YG2 imitating the rightward arrow. On the other hand, the player can easily understand that the key displayed in the display area HR4 can be used to open the treasure box 802 (generate V winning) by hitting left according to the instruction of the arrow image YG imitating a leftward arrow. That is, the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2 can have a plurality of different roles such as a role of indicating items (keys and bombs) to be used in the small winning performance being executed and a role of indicating a game method (shooting direction of the game ball) of the player for using the items. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for the player to understand, and to use the display elements efficiently, thereby realizing a more suitable presentation mode.

In the seventh embodiment, only two types of game states, the normal state and the time saving state, are provided, and the ratio of giving the time saving state, which is more advantageous in the case of winning V in the normal state than in the case of winning V in the time saving state, is higher, but it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to these two types of game states, a so-called variable probability state and a latent probability state may be provided so that the degree of advantage in the case of a big win in the latent probability state is higher than in the variable probability state, or the advantage in the case of a big win in the time saving state is higher than in the variable probability state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to expect a big win in a comparatively disadvantageous state while realizing more various state transitions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 214. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above is configured so that only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed when hitting to the right in a time-saving state advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in an advantageous time-saving state, and further, the time-saving state is more likely to end when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed than when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. More specifically, the number of times of the time-saving end condition based on the number of lotteries of the second special pattern (time-saving number of times of the second special pattern) is smaller than that of the time-saving end condition of the number of times of lottery of the first special pattern (time-saving number of times of the first special pattern). On the other hand, since the lottery of the second special pattern is configured to have a higher small winning probability than the lottery of the first special pattern, the degree of expectation of a big win for one lottery (expectation of sum of direct hit and V win) is configured to be higher in the lottery of the second special pattern. As a result, if the lottery of the second special pattern is preferentially executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is increased, but the time saving state is likely to end early. Therefore, it is possible to allow each player to select a game property that matches his/her preference.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, when the player continues to hit to the right in the time-saving state, first, the end condition of the time-saving state is difficult to be met (the number of times of time-saving is large), and after the lottery for the first special symbol with low expectation for big win is continuously executed, the lottery for the second special symbol with high expectation for big win is executed. That is, in the latter half of the advantageous time-saving state (and when the second special symbol is held and consumed after the end), the expectation of the big hit is higher, which is an extremely innovative game property. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice ramp control device 11. 3 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of No. 3 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the seventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 196, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the eighth embodiment is different in that the V winning device 6500 is provided (moved) on the right side of the game board 13 (the position where the game ball fired by hitting to the right can enter). The structure, opening pattern, etc. of this V winning device 6500 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment, only by shooting a game ball to the V winning device 6500 during execution of a small winning game, a V winning occurs and a V winning is achieved. In other words, winning a small win and winning a big win are almost equal. In addition, the second ball entrance 6400 is deleted, and instead, the distribution winning device 700, which was also provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 169) in the sixth embodiment, is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The difference is that the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided. Since the distribution winning device 700, the right first ball entrance 64a2, and the right second ball entrance 64b have been described in the sixth embodiment with reference to FIG. 170 and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Although details will be described later, in the eighth embodiment, the electric role 701 is opened during the period in which the game ball easily enters the first operation port 704 as the normal symbol hit (the period in which the switching valve 702 is switched to the first switching state). At least a winning type (normal drawing winning B8) in which the object 702 is released is provided. And, when it hits the normal pattern in the time saving state, 80% is A8 per normal pattern and 20% is B8 per normal pattern. That is, in the time-saving state, the right first ball entrance 64a2 is configured to open more frequently (opportunities) than the right second ball entrance 64b. By constructing in this way, when the player continuously hits to the right in the time-saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed more preferentially. That is, only by performing a relatively simple game method of continuing to hit right, the lottery for the first special pattern with a low degree of expectation is first concentratedly executed, and then the lottery for the second special pattern with a high degree of expectation can be executed. Therefore, after shifting to the time-saving state, the game can be played for a relatively long period (until the lottery of special symbols is executed 96 times) in a state where the degree of expectation for big win is low (the big win can only be won by direct hit), and then the game can be played for a relatively short period in a state where the degree of expectation for big win is high (both direct hit and V win can occur). Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special pattern is not won in 96 times, the game can be realized with a novel game property that allows the player to play while having a sense of security that the lottery of the second special pattern with a higher degree of expectation is coming later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 197 and 198, a characteristic effect during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, by differentiating the small winning probability between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, the occurrence rate of the big winning due to the V prize (the probability of winning the V winning) is changed, and the expectation of the big winning of the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times of time saving for the second special symbol is smaller than the number of times of time saving for the first special symbol, and if only the lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of expectation is executed, the advantageous time saving state is likely to end relatively early, and if only the lottery for the first special symbol is performed, the time saving state can be enjoyed for a relatively long time. In the eighth embodiment, this specification (the lottery of the first special symbol has a low expectation of big win and makes it difficult to end the time saving state, while the lottery of the second special symbol has a high expectation of big win and makes it easy to end the time saving state).

FIG. 197(a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. Here, even in the time-saving state in the eighth embodiment, mainly the same variation pattern effects as in the above-described first embodiment and seventh embodiment are executed. That is, every time a special symbol lottery is executed, a boy character 801 searches for a treasure box is executed as part of a variable display performance (variation pattern performance) for showing the special symbol lottery result. Then, if the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), an effect of finding a treasure box is executed, and when the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small win game and the start of the big win (two types of wins) is confirmed after the small win is completed, an effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and a V display 803 showing that a big win game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (see FIG. 13(a)). .

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197(a), in the first display area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, a maximum of four reserved symbols of the first special symbol and four reserved symbols of the second special symbol are displayed. FIG. 197(a) is a diagram showing a state in which three reserved balls of the first special symbol and zero reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. The first special symbol reserved ball is displayed in a substantially circular shape on the upper side of the first display area Ds1, and the second special symbol reserved ball is displayed in a substantially equilateral triangle shape on the lower side of the first display area Ds1. Due to this difference in shape, it is possible for the player to easily distinguish between the reserved ball with the first special symbol and the reserved ball with the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 197(a), in the center of the sub-display area Ds, a running symbol Dsa for indicating the type of special symbol in the variable display being executed is displayed. In the example of FIG. 197(a), a state in which a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which has a substantially circular shape and a character "Normal" is displayed inside, is displayed (that is, a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is being executed). Further, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the characters "Right-handed 'Normal' pending digestion" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the reserved ball of the first special pattern is easily digested by hitting to the right in the time-saving state (the lottery of the first special pattern is preferentially executed over the lottery of the second special pattern).

Further, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a display region HR10 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is formed in the upper central portion of the main display region Dm. Inside the display area HR10, the number of times of remaining time saving of the first special design and the number of times of remaining time saving of the second special design are displayed. In the example of FIG. 197(a), the number of times of time saving of the first special symbol remains 94 times, and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol remains 4 times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), above the display area HR10, the character "94 times remaining" is displayed on the right side of the image simulating the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (the symbol having a substantially circular shape and the character "Normal" displayed inside). Further, in the center of the display area HR10, a character of ``remaining 4 times'' is displayed on the right side of the image simulating the reserved pattern corresponding to the second special pattern (the pattern of a substantially equilateral triangular shape in which the character ``heat'' is displayed inside). Furthermore, below the display area HR10, a character saying "If one of them becomes 0, the RUSH ends!?" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) for each special symbol.

FIG. 197(b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the time saving state when the start winning for the right second entrance 64b is first detected. As shown in FIG. 197(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 64b and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the reserved symbol of the second special symbol (a substantially equilateral triangular pattern with the word "heat" attached) is displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the character ``heat'' is generally used as a kind of character suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high, so by comparing the character ``average'' displayed in the reserved pattern of the first special pattern with the character ``heat'' displayed in the reserved pattern of the second special pattern, the player can intuitively understand that the lottery of the second special pattern has a higher expectation of the big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(b), when there are one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, the second display area Ds2 is displayed with the message ``Left-handed ``Heat'' reserved digestion! ? ” is added and displayed. As a result, the player can select, depending on the launching direction, whether to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol or to digest the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game in a game method suited to each player's taste, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suits the tastes of a wide range of players. Specifically, for example, for a player who wants to execute a lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of expectation rather than executing a lottery for a first special symbol with a low degree of expectation, the player is made to select a game method for executing a lottery for the second special symbol by detecting a start winning to the right second ball entrance 64b and performing a left shot (or stopping firing) every time the reserved pattern of the second special symbol increases (a game method in which the number of time reductions for the second special symbol passes first). I can. Also, for a player who wants to reserve the second special symbol lottery with high expectation for later, he/she can select a game method in which the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed by continuously executing the right-handed stroke during the time saving state and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is executed by the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol after the number of time saving times of the first special symbol has passed first). In addition, for example, until just before the number of time saving times of the first special symbol ends (for example, until the number of time saving times of the first special symbol is one remaining time), after the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed by continuing the right hand hitting, the lottery of the second special symbol that is likely to have accumulated up to the upper limit (that is, four) is executed four times, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by hitting right while the fourth second special symbol fluctuation display is being performed. It is also possible to select a game method in which the number of reserved balls is increased as much as possible and a lottery based on the reserved balls is executed after the end of time saving. In addition, immediately before the number of time reductions of the second special symbol ends (for example, until the number of time reductions of the first special symbol is one remaining time), the second special symbol lottery is executed (that is, left-handed or stopped firing) every time the start winning of the second special symbol occurs. It is also possible to select the game method to be passed. In this case, the lottery of the second special symbol with high expectation can be executed at least seven times by the lottery of the second special symbol for three times executed during the time saving state and the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated between the completion of the lottery of the three times of the second special symbol and the number of times of the time saving of the first special symbol (there is a high possibility that the ball will accumulate up to 4, which is almost the upper limit), so that the possibility of winning the jackpot can be further increased. In this way, it is possible to realize various game features with different expectations for big wins and different period lengths according to the player's playing method, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the reserved design of the first special design and the display mode of the reserved design of the second special design are made different, so that the lottery of the second special design makes it easier for the player to intuitively understand that the expectation for the big hit is higher than the lottery of the first special design (it is easier to win the small prize). The reserved pattern may be displayed differently within a range where the player can grasp whether it is a reserved pattern of a pattern or a reserved pattern of a second special pattern. More specifically, for example, the color of the reserved symbol may be changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit. That is, it may be possible to change the color to any one of white, blue, green, and red in descending order of the expected degree of big win according to the look-ahead result. Thus, considering not only the type of the special symbol but also the color of the reserved symbol, the player can select whether to execute the lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol by striking to the right or to execute the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol by striking to the left (or stopping shooting), so that the range of game characteristics can be further expanded. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, in addition to this, when a special symbol lottery hits a jackpot (a direct hit occurs) during the time saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state at a predetermined ratio (for example, 20% ratio) (no time saving jackpot is determined), and the possibility of winning a time saving jackpot as a reserved pattern increases (easier to be selected in the case of a time saving jackpot, and less likely to be selected in the case of a miss or a time saving jackpot). A configuration (for example, a reserved pattern imitating a bomb) may be provided. By constructing in this way, when the reserved pattern of the first special pattern is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the player can be made to think that he should have digested the reserved ball of the second special pattern and aimed for a big win before the start prize corresponding to the reserved ball occurs. Therefore, in particular, a player who has selected a game method of simply continuously hitting right during the time-saving state can be encouraged to try the game method of first digesting the reserved ball of the second special symbol in the next time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. In addition, when the game is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb) and the result of the lottery based on the reserved ball is reported as a mere loss, the player can be relieved even though no advantageous result is reported. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, when the reserved pattern of the second special pattern is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), a lottery for the first special pattern (a lottery executed with priority over the second special pattern) is executed so that the reserved ball corresponding to the special mode is not digested, thereby aiming to win a big win. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a game property in which the game method is changed according to the state of the reserved symbols, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198(a), the display mode after one of the time saving end conditions is established (after the number of times of time saving of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed) will be described. FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the end of the time saving state. The example of FIG. 198(a) illustrates the case where the time saving state is terminated after the number of times of the time saving of the second special symbol has elapsed. Also, it shows a state in which four reserved balls of the first special symbol and one reserved ball of the second special symbol are reserved at the end of time saving. As shown in FIG. 198(a), when the time-saving state is completed, the character "one remaining time" is displayed on the right side of the image simulating the reserved design corresponding to the first special symbol in the display area HR10, and the character "remaining 0 times" is displayed on the right side of the image simulating the reserved design corresponding to the second special symbol. Furthermore, below the display area HR10, characters "RUSH finished..." are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended because the number of time saving times of the second special symbol has become 0. Also, the characters "Right shot" are erased in the small display area Ds2. As a result, the time-saving state is terminated, and it is possible to suppress the player's loss by continuing the right-handed stroke even though the start-up prize is unlikely to occur even if the right-handed stroke is made.

Further, as shown in FIG. 198(a), at the end of the time saving state, a small number indicating the number of reserved balls ("4" indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and "1" indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is displayed in the first display area Ds1 at the left end of the sub display area Ds. That is, compared with the time saving state, the reserved design is displayed in a simple and inconspicuous manner. Then, in the second display area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, the characters "RUSH end..." are displayed in a more conspicuous (larger) manner than the number of reserved balls. As a result, the player can have a stronger impression that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended. The time saving end screen indicating the end of the time saving state (RUSH) continues to be displayed until the lottery based on the reserved balls held at the time of the end of the time saving state is completed. If a big win or a small win is won with a reserved ball while the time saving end screen is displayed, a special effect (resurrection effect) is executed. This resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 198(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198(b), the display mode in the case of a big win or a small win after the time saving state ends in the lottery based on the held ball held at the time the time saving state ends will be described. As shown in FIG. 198(b), when a jackpot is won while the time saving end screen is being displayed, three patterns simulating the number "7" break through the display area HR10 from the back side of the display area HR10, and appear for a relatively short time (for example, 0.2 seconds). In addition, a character "BONUS confirmed!!" indicating that a big win or a small win has been won is displayed in the second display area Ds2. By executing this resurrection presentation, the player who has been under the impression that the time saving state has ended can be given greater surprise and joy, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. It should be noted that the symbols displayed in this resurrection effect and the characters "BONUS confirmed!!" are configured to continue to be displayed until the start of the big win or the small win. For this reason, in the eighth embodiment, the variation time is extremely short (0.1 seconds) regardless of the number of lotteries from the end of the time saving state until at least all the reserved balls are digested. As a result, the screen (three '7' patterns and the characters 'BONUS finalized!!') at the end of the resurrection performance is kept displayed for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the change over time of the effect mode when there is a big hit or a small hit among the held balls held at the end of the time saving state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 199(a), the change over time of the effect mode when the ball corresponding to the small hit is held within 5 seconds from the start of the last variable display in the time saving state will be described. Here, the period of 5 seconds is a period until the character 801 discovers the treasure box 802 in the effect of searching for the treasure box 802 . If the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the performance that the found treasure box 802 is empty is executed, and if it is a win (big hit or small win), the performance that a V display 803 appears from the found treasure box 802 is executed. That is, within 5 seconds (before opening the treasure box 802), it is possible to rewrite the result of performance according to the content of the reserved ball without discomfort (even if the performance that the contents of the treasure box 802 are empty is set at the start of the fluctuation, the performance is changed to the appearance of the V display 803 from the treasure box 802). In other words, FIG. 199(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode when detecting a reserved ball corresponding to a small hit and rewriting the effect within a period in which the effect result can be rewritten after the effect corresponding to the loss is started (within 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 199(a), when the last variable display in the time-saving state (in the example of FIG. 199(a), the deviation display of the second special symbol) is started, the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box 802 for 5 seconds. Since the time-saving state continues until this last variation is completed, the electric accessory 701 is opened by the player hitting to the right, and the game ball enters the first operation port 704 and the second operation port 702, so that the game ball can enter the first right ball entrance 64a2 and the second right ball entrance 64b. In the example of FIG. 199(a), the start winning is detected 3 times before 5 seconds elapse, and the case is shown in which 2 times are missed and 1 time is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), when the last variable display in the time-saving state is off and a starting prize corresponding to a small win is detected within 5 seconds after the start of the variation, an effect in which the character 801 searches for a treasure box 802 is executed in 5 seconds, and then an effect in which a V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802 found by the character 801 is executed in 5 to 10 seconds. The state in which the V display 803 is displayed continues until the variation display corresponding to the small winning is completed, and the opening presentation of the small winning is started when the small winning variation (and the stop display period of the small winning pattern) elapses. As described above, the variation display based on the held ball after the end of the time saving state is set to an ultra-short variation of 0.1 seconds (variation time 0.1 seconds, stop display time 0.1 seconds) regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, the period from the end of the last variation display in the time saving state to the start of the small hit can be extremely short (0.6 seconds in the example of FIG. 199 (a)). Therefore, even if the display period of the V display 803 is extended (the V display 803 continues to be displayed even after the last variation of the time saving state ends), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, FIG. 199(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the production mode when a held ball that becomes a small hit is detected after 5 seconds have elapsed since the last variable display in the time saving state was started. In the example of FIG. 199(b), after the held ball corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol is held within 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the held ball corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol is held after 5 seconds have passed. As shown in FIG. 199(b), when a small win occurs after 5 seconds have passed, the character 801 searches for the treasure box 802 during the 10-second variation time of the loss variation. After that, the effect that the found treasure box 802 is empty is performed for 4 seconds. The time saving end display continues for 1 second until 10 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation, which is the fluctuation end timing, and the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is executed after the fluctuation stops. When three patterns imitating the same number indicating a win (big win or small win) are displayed by this resurrection effect, the pattern display is maintained until the start timing of the small win. In this way, when a winning ball (big win or small win) is detected after the start of the performance for confirming the contents of the treasure box 802, the winning is notified by the resurrection performance without forcibly rewriting the performance mode, thereby preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity with the performance contents and giving great joy to the winning. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment in that a per-universal figure type selection table 202af is added. Moreover, it is also different in that the contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the time saving grant table 202e are partially changed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 200(b) and (c), the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described. Although not shown, the first winning random number table 202a in the eighth embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 21(a)) in the first embodiment and the seventh embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 200(b), the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 200(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 184(a)) in the seventh embodiment described above, defines a random value (determination value) that is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment, as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a big hit, "0 to 3" is defined in association. Therefore, in the lottery for the first special pattern, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value of '0 to 3', it is determined to be a big win, and when it is not any value of '0 to 3' (is any value of '4 to 999'), it is determined to be out. Among 1000 counter values (random numbers) of ``0 to 999'' that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the counter values (random numbers) judged to be big hits are 4 of ``0 to 3'', so the probability of being judged to be big hits in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000). Further, the random number value (counter value) determined as a small hit is not defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol lottery (winning a small prize) is zero. Therefore, since the lottery of the first special pattern is constructed so that only direct hits can occur (V wins based on small wins cannot occur), the degree of expectation for big wins is lower than that in the lottery of the second special patterns.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200(c), details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, like the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184(b)) in the seventh embodiment, defines a random value (determined value) that is determined as a big win and a small win in the second special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment, "0 to 3" is defined in correspondence as the range of the counter value (random number) determined as the big hit, and "4 to 230" is defined in association as the range of the counter value (random number) determined as the small hit. Of the 1000 counter values (random numbers) of '0 to 999' that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the counter values (random numbers) determined to be big wins are 4 of '0 to 3', and the counter values (random numbers) determined to be small wins are 226 of '4 to 230'. /4.4 (226/1000). In addition, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won, about 10 game balls can enter the V winning device 6500 only by continuously shooting game balls aiming at the V winning device 6500. Therefore, winning a small win is almost synonymous with winning a big win. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, a direct hit occurs with a probability of 1/250, and a small win is won with a probability of 1/4.4, and a V win almost certainly occurs, so that the degree of expectation for the big win is greatly increased as compared with the lottery of the first special pattern. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the player can be made to expect a big win more strongly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201(a), details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment will be described. This first winning type selection table 202b, like the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first win type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 200(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment includes a first direct hit table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win (first special symbol direct hit occurs), and a second direct hit table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win (second special symbol direct hit occurs). A direct win table 202bf2 and a V win table 202bf3 for specifying (determining) a big win type when a big win is achieved (a V win occurs) based on the occurrence of a V prize during execution of a small win game are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 200(b), the details of the special 1 direct hit table 202bf1 will be described.

FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202bf1 for special first direct hits. As shown in FIG. 201(b), in the eighth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A8" and "jackpot B8", are provided as jackpot types that can be determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (direct hit of the first special symbol occurs). "Jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and a time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state. On the other hand, "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the normal state is set after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, the "jackpot A8" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B8" because the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous. In addition, in the time-saving state, even if any jackpot is won, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player by shifting to the disadvantageous normal state even though the big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern with a low expectation of the big win in the time saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201(c), the details of the special 2 direct hit table 202bf2 will be described. FIG. 201(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 2 direct hit table 202bf2. As shown in FIG. 201(c), in the eighth embodiment, only "jackpot C8" is provided as a jackpot type that can be determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs) ("jackpot C8" is associated with all the values of the first win type counter C2). "Jackpot C8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15 rounds, and the normal state is set after the jackpot ends when winning in the normal state. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit in the normal state, there is no possibility of shifting to an advantageous time-saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method aiming to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by striking to the right at normal times. In addition, when winning the "big hit C7" in the time saving state, an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the big win. As a result, disappointment of the player by shifting to a disadvantageous normal state can be suppressed even though the player has won a direct hit with a low probability in the time saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201(d), details of the V winning table 202bf3 will be described. As described above, this V winning table 202bf3 is a data table that defines data for specifying (selecting) the type of big winning to be executed based on the occurrence of V winning in the small winning game (the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 6500e3). FIG. 201(d) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this V winning table 202bf3. As shown in FIG. 201(d), the V-winning table 202bf3 defines three types of jackpots: "jackpot D8", "jackpot E8", and "jackpot F8".

As shown in FIG. 201(d), the value range of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot D8" with respect to the range of "0 to 39". This "jackpot D8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D8" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the game state after the jackpot ends is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``jackpot D8'' is 40, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) ``jackpot D8'' as a jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small prize game is 40/100 (40%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 201(d), "big win E8" is defined in association with the range of "40 to 59" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot E8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot E8" is the second most advantageous jackpot type after the "jackpot D8" because it has the second largest number of rounds after the "jackpot D8" and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is advantageous. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot E8' is 20, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot E8' as the jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 20/100 (20%).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 201(d), "big win F8" is defined in association with the range of "60 to 99" for the first win type counter C2. This "jackpot F8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, this type of jackpot is more disadvantageous than "jackpot D8" or "jackpot E8" in terms of the number of rounds, but is equivalent in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot F8' is 40, so the probability (percentage) of determining (selecting) the 'jackpot F8' as the jackpot type to be started when a V win occurs during execution of the small win game is 40/100 (40%).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern and a V win occurs, the time saving state is always set after the big win regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In addition, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit (= V hit) with a very high probability compared to direct hit of 1/4.4. Therefore, in the time saving state (and while the second special pattern reserved balls stored in the time saving state after the shift to the normal state are being digested), expectations for the time saving state being given again every time the lottery for the second special pattern is executed can be enhanced, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 202 (a), the details of time reduction grant table 202e in the 8th embodiment are explained. Fig.202 (a) is the figure which showed the specification content of this time reduction provision table 202e. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "jackpot A8" won in the normal state, "96 times" as the number of times of time reduction of the first special symbol (the value of the special 1 time reduction counter 203k1 for indicating the number of times of time reduction of the first special design), "4 times" is defined as the number of times of time reduction of the second special design (value of the counter 203k2 for time reduction of the second special design for indicating the number of times of time reduction of the second special design). are In addition, the same number of time-saving grants is defined in association with the "jackpot A8" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when "jackpot A8" is won, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "jackpot B8" won in the normal state, "0 times" is defined as the number of time reduction grants of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in association with each other. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big hit B8'' is determined in the normal state, the game machine shifts to the normal state disadvantageous to the player, while when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big hit B8'' is determined in the time saving state, the game shifts to the time saving state advantageous to the player. Similarly, with respect to the ``jackpot C8'', the ``jackpot C8'' won in the normal state is defined in association with ``0 times'' as the number of time-reduction grants of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, while the ``jackpot C8'' elected in the time-reduction state is regulated in association with ``96 times'' as the number of times of time-reduction granting of the first special symbol and ``4 times'' as the number of times of time-reduction granting of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big hit C8'' is determined in the normal state, the game machine shifts to the normal state disadvantageous to the player, while when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big hit C8'' is determined in the time saving state, the game shifts to the time saving state advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), regardless of the game state at the time of winning, "96 times" as the number of times of shortening of the first special symbol and "4 times" of the number of times of shortening of the second special symbol are defined in association with "jackpot D8" to "jackpot F8". Therefore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern during the time saving state and the pending digestion after the time saving state ends, and the V win occurs, the time saving state is always given after the V win ends. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small winning probability (1/4.4) is executed, not only the player's expectation of the V winning can be raised, but also the expectation of the time saving state can be raised. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.202(b), the detail of per general figure selection table 202fa is demonstrated. This normal per figure type selection table 202fa is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the per type when the normal pattern is a hit. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the per-universal figure type selection table 202fa. As shown in FIG. 202(b), two types of per general pattern type are defined in the per normal pattern type selection table 202fa in the eighth embodiment. Concretely, two types of hit types are defined, “per normal map A8” and “per normal map B8”. The ``normal pattern hit A8'' is a normal pattern hit type in which an open pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the normal pattern hit is set when winning in the normal state of the normal pattern, and an open pattern A (see FIG. 171) is set when winning in the normal pattern time saving state. As described above, the switching valve 702 is fixed in the first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 for 1.4 seconds after the start of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the normal symbol wins and the "normal symbol win A" is won in the normal state, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the distribution device 700 during the open period of 0.2 seconds. The ball enters the first actuation port 704 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, even if an irregular game method is performed in which game balls are aimed at the distribution device 700 by striking to the right at normal times, it is difficult for the game balls to enter the distribution device 700, and even if the balls are entered, only the lottery of the first special pattern can be executed, so that merits of the irregular game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during the normal state. On the other hand, as described above in the explanation of the sixth embodiment, when the opening pattern A is set, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the sorting device 700, and the entered game ball almost enters the first operation opening 704.

In addition, "normal pattern winning B8" is a normal pattern winning type in which an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the normal pattern winning is set when winning in the normal state of the normal pattern, and an opening pattern B (see FIG. 171) is set when winning in the time saving state of the normal pattern. Therefore, when winning 'normal game B8' in a normal state, it is difficult to enter the sorting device 700 similarly to 'normal game A8', and an open pattern is set in which the game ball enters almost only the first operating port 704 even if the ball enters. On the other hand, when a ``normal game hit B8'' is won in the time saving state, the game ball is likely to enter the sorting device 700, and the entered game ball almost enters the second operation opening 707, so that the right second ball entry opening 64b is opened as a lottery opportunity for the second special pattern which is advantageous (that is, the degree of expectation for the big hit is high). Therefore, it can be said that "B8 per normal map" is a more advantageous type per normal map than "A8 per normal map".

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), the value of the second per type counter C6 for determining the type per general pattern is in the range of "0 to 79", "per normal pattern A8" is defined in association with the type per general pattern. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the second winning type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``A8 on a normal pattern'' is 80 of ``0 to 79''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the value of the second per type counter C6 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "per normal pattern B8" as per normal pattern type. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the second winning type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with ``general pattern winning B8'' is 20, ie, ``80 to 99'', so that the probability of determining ``general pattern winning B8'' when winning a normal pattern is 1/5 (20/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the time-saving state and the winning is achieved, the right first ball opening 64a2 is likely to be opened at a rate of 80%. By constructing in this way, the lottery of the first special pattern, which has a large number of times of time saving and is preferentially executed, can be preferentially executed, so that only the lottery of the second special pattern is executed immediately after the start of the time saving state, and even though the player wishes to execute the lottery of the first special pattern first and then the lottery of the second special pattern in the second half, the time saving state can be suppressed from ending in a relatively short period. Therefore, convenience for the player can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, a transition method of each state in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, in the eighth embodiment, two game states are provided as in the seventh embodiment. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of normal symbols is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage is greatly different between the normal game state in which the second special pattern reserved ball exists immediately after the time saving state is finished and the normal game state in which the second special pattern reserved ball does not exist. That is, if even one reserved ball of the second special pattern exists, it becomes a small win with a probability of 1/4.4 and wins the V win, and after the V win is finished, the time saving state is surely set again, so that a very advantageous state is formed as compared with the case where the reserved ball of the second special pattern does not exist. In the following description, for simplification of explanation, the normal game state in which the second special symbol reserved ball does not exist will be referred to as "normal mode", and the time-saving game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed and the normal game state in which the second special symbol retained ball is present will be referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B" in the sense that the expectation of a big win is high.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 203, a description will be given of how to shift from the normal mode (normal game state in which there is no held ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, when the lottery of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot, the winning rate becomes ``jackpot A8'' at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, when it becomes a ``big win B8'' in which the player wins at a rate of 50%, the mode after the big win is again set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player (the normal mode is looped). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be played in anticipation of winning the "jackpot A8" in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to the central portion of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (time-saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of shifting from chance mode A to other modes only when the number of times of working hours has passed. More specifically, when the number of times of time saving has passed (96 times of lottery of the first special pattern or 4 times of lottery of the second special pattern has been completed after entering the time saving game state), if there is a reserved ball of the second special pattern, the game shifts to chance mode B.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol when the number of times of time saving has elapsed, the game shifts to a normal mode that is disadvantageous to the player. In the case where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol at the time of the number of times of time saving in the chance mode A, for example, when four reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated, left hitting (or stop firing) is performed. If you didn't. In addition, as another case, for example, there is a case where ``normal pattern win B8'' is won continuously immediately after the shift to the chance mode A, and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed four times in succession without executing the lottery for the first special pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in the central part of FIG. 203, when a direct win or a V win based on a small win occurs in the chance mode A, the mode after the end of the big win is always set to the chance mode A advantageous to the player regardless of the kind of the big win. As a result, it is possible to please the player when a direct hit or a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery in the chance mode A.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from chance mode B (normal game state in which a second special symbol reserved ball exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 203, the chance mode B shifts to another state (mode) not only when a big win is won, but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs and the type of the direct hit is ``jackpot A8'' determined at a rate of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol, the game shifts to a chance mode A advantageous to the player after the big hit. In addition, even when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a small win and a V win is won, the game shifts to a chance mode A advantageous to the player after the big win.

On the other hand, if either a ``jackpot B8'' determined at a rate of 50% when a direct hit of the first special pattern occurs or a ``jackpot C8'' determined at a rate of 100% when a direct hit of the second special pattern occurs, and furthermore, if the number of held balls of the second special pattern is 0 at the end of the big win, the state (mode) after the end of the big win is set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Also, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed (all the lottery of the second special symbol after shifting to the chance mode B is lost), the mode is shifted to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the second special pattern holding ball is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of ``jackpot B8'' or ``jackpot C8'', the state (mode) after the jackpot is finished becomes the chance mode B again.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous because it is configured such that three types of states are switched to each other with a big win or the like as a trigger.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(b)) in that a final variation flag 223fa, a final effect set flag 223fb, and a hit effect flag 223fc are added.

The final variation flag 223fa is a flag indicating whether or not the last variation display is being executed in the time saving state. If this final variation flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is not being performed. This final variation flag 223fa is set to ON when the last variation in the time saving state is started, and is set to OFF when the number of times of time saving becomes 0 (that is, when the last variation display in the time saving state ends) (see S2622 in FIG. 213).

The final effect setting completion flag 223fb is a flag indicating whether or not the type of effect after discovering the treasure box 802 (the effect mode after 5 seconds from the start of the change) has already been set in the last variation display of the time saving state. If the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON, it means that the effect type has been determined, and if it is OFF, it means that the effect type has not been determined. When a winning pending ball is detected during the execution of the final variation (a start winning of a big win or a small win is detected), it is determined whether or not to inform the winning by the resurrection performance (see FIG. 198(b)) according to the state of the final performance setting completion flag 223fb and the state of the winning performance flag 223fc, which will be described later.

The winning effect flag 223fc is a flag for indicating whether or not a winning effect (that is, a effect in which a V display 803 appears from a treasure box 802) or a resurrection effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is set as the effect of the last variable effect in the time saving state. When the win performance flag 223fc is on, it means that the performance mode showing winning or the resurrection performance is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the performance mode showing loss is not being executed or the last variable display in the time saving state is not being executed. The win effect flag 223fc is set to ON when the effect mode indicating the win is set (see S3516 in FIG. 209) or when the start of the revival effect is set (see S2326 in FIG. 211), and is set to OFF when the effect mode in the time saving state (and during the pending digestion) ends.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 205 to 207. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 205, special symbol variation processing 8 (S131 in FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 8 (S131) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, like the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment.

In each of S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235 and S238 of the different symbol variation processing 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S23 of the special symbol variation processing 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIGS. 188 and S121), respectively. 5 and S238 are executed.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, the order of the process of S206 and the process of S232 is changed. That is, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter b is first determined by the processing of S206, and only when the value is 0 (S206: No), the processing of S232 is executed. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is one or more, a specification is adopted in which the lottery of the second special pattern is not started (specification that the lottery of the first special pattern is preferentially executed over the lottery of the second special pattern).

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the processing of S213 (S213: No), the number of times of working hours is updated. Details of this time saving frequency update process 8 (S241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing this time saving frequency update process 8 (S241).

This time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) is a process for updating the time saving number of times of the normal symbol similarly to the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42, S219) in the first embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, as the time saving counter 203k, a special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time saving times of the first special symbol and a special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time saving times of the second special symbol are provided. In the time saving frequency update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the corresponding time saving medium counter is updated according to the type of the special symbol.

Among the time saving number update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment, in each process of S601, S604 and S607, the same process as each process of S601, S604 and S607 of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42, S219) in the first embodiment is executed. In addition, when the time saving frequency update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611). In the process of S611, when it is determined that the current timing is the timing to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol (S611: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203k1 for special time reduction is greater than 0 (S612). In the process of S612, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203k1 during the time saving for special 1 is 0 (S612: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is not 0 (S612: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 (S613), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 after the subtraction is set (S614), and the process proceeds to S604.

On the other hand, in the processing of S611, if it is determined that the current timing is not the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: No), it means that the fluctuation stop of this time is the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. In the processing of S615, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203k2 is 0 during the time saving for special 2 (S615: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 is not 0 (S615: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k (S616), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 after the update is set (S617), and the process proceeds to S604.

Further, in the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, in the process of S604, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k becomes 0 (that is, the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 or the value of the special 2 working time saving medium counter 203k2 becomes 0) (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S618), and the special 1 time saving medium counter 2 03k1, the value of the counter 203k2 during the time saving for special 2 is set to 0 (S619), and the process proceeds to S607.

By executing this time saving frequency update process 8 (see FIG. 206), the time saving frequency of the first special pattern and the time saving frequency of the second special pattern can be accurately updated according to the type of the special pattern whose variation is stopped.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the normal symbol variation process 8 (S132) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 8 (S132) is a process executed instead of the normal symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for controlling the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 701 in the distribution device 700.

In each of S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912 to 915, S920 and S931 to S938 of the normal symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912 to 915 of the normal symbol variation processing 7 (see FIGS. 190 and S122) in the seventh embodiment, respectively , S920 and S931 to S938 are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, in the processing of S915, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S915: Yes), then the normal symbol per type selection table 202fa (see FIG. 202 (b)) is referred to, and the open pattern corresponding to the current game state is specified (S941), and the process proceeds to S920.

By executing this normal pattern variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207), when the normal pattern hits, the normal pattern hit A8 is determined at a rate of 80%, and the normal pattern hit B8 is determined at a rate of 20%. Therefore, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the right first ball entrance 64a2 can be more easily opened than the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, since the lottery of the first special pattern with a low substantial expectation for big win can be preferentially executed, the lottery of the second special pattern with a high expectation can be easily executed in the latter half of the time-saving state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 214. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 208, main processing 8 (FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This main process 8 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment).

In the main processing 8 (see FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed in that the effect update processing 8 (S2121) is executed instead of the effect update processing (S2112), the command determination processing 8 (S2122) is executed in place of the command determination processing (S2113), and the variable display setting processing 8 (S21) is executed instead of the variable display setting processing (S2114). 23) is the only difference. First, with reference to FIG. 209, details of the effect update process 8 (S2121) described above will be described.

FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing effect update process 8 (S2121). This effect update process 8 (S2121) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see S2112) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the main process 8 (see FIG. 208), and is a process for updating the effect mode according to the progress of the variable pattern effect (variable display effect).

In the effect update process 8 (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the final variation flag 223fa is ON (S3511), and if it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is OFF (S3511: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511: Yes), it means that the last variation display in the time saving state is being executed, so next it is determined whether the final effect set flag 223fb is on (in the last variation display in the time saving state, the type of effect after finding the treasure box 802 has been determined) (S3512). In the processing of S3512, when it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is off (the final effect in the time saving state is not determined) (S3512: No), next, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the start of this fluctuation (S3513). In the processing of S3513, if it is determined that the current timing is 5 seconds after the start of this variation (S3513: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a big hit or a small hit in the reserve (S3514). When it is determined that there is a big win or a small win in the reserve (S3514: Yes), the start of the effect that V appears from the treasure box is set (S3515), the win effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3519.

On the other hand, in the process of S3514, when it is determined that there is no big win or small win in the reserve (S3514: No), the start of the effect that the contents of the treasure box are empty is set (S3517), the winning effect flag 223fc is set off (S3518), and the process proceeds to S3519. In the process of S3519, the final effect set flag 223fb is set to ON (S3519), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3512, if it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON (S3512: Yes), and in the process of S3513, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the start of this fluctuation (S3513: No), there is no need to determine the effect mode in the last variable display in the time saving state, so this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this effect update processing 8 (see FIG. 209), the performance mode to be executed in the variable time of the last variable display (and the variable display based on the suspended ball) in the time saving state can be set in consideration of the look-ahead results of the reserved balls accumulated during the lapse of 5 seconds from the start of the last variable display in the time saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 210, the command determination process 8 (S2122) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 8 (S2122) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process for performing control according to various commands received from main controller 110, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment.

In the command determination process 8 (S2122) in the eighth embodiment, in the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), the winning information related process 8 (S2231) is executed instead of the winning information related process (S2210), the stop command process (S2232) is executed instead of the process of S2214 for setting the stop display of the third symbol, and the time saving update process (S2216). ) is different only in that the time saving update process 8 (S2233) is executed instead. First, referring to FIG. 211, the winning information related process 8 (S2231) described above will be described. This winning information related process 8 (S2231) is, like the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), a process for executing control according to the look-ahead result notified by the winning information command received from main controller 110.

In the processes of S2311 and S2312 of the winning information related process 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, the same processes as those of S2311 and S2312 of the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed. In the winning information related process 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting flag 223fb is ON (S2321). On the other hand, in the processing of S2321, when it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON (S2321: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the winning effect flag 203fc is ON (that is, whether the effect mode indicating the win or the small win is set as the effect mode of the last variation display in the time saving state) (S2322). In the process of S2322, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 203fc is ON (S2322: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the winning effect flag 203fc is off (S2322: No), next, it is determined whether or not the received prize information is the prize information digested within the high-speed digestion period (that is, the period in which the variable time of 0.1 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result after the end of the time saving state) (S2323). In the process of S2323, if it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information to be consumed within the fast redemption period (S2323: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information is the winning information to be consumed within the fast digestion period (S2323: Yes), next it is determined whether the received winning information is the winning information corresponding to the big win or the small winning (S23234), and when it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information for the big win or the small win (S2324: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information is the winning information corresponding to the big win or the small win (S2324: Yes), the execution of the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is set (S2325), the winning effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2326), and the process proceeds to S2311. In the processing of S2325, if the final variation in the time saving state is being executed, the resurrection performance is set to start based on the end of the final variation, while if the final variation in the time saving state is finished, the resurrection performance is set to start immediately.

By executing this prize winning information related processing 8 (see FIG. 211), when winning prize information corresponding to a big win or a small win is detected after the final performance of losing is set, the player can be notified of the big win or the small win without a sense of incongruity by the resurrection performance, so that the performance mode can be set more suitably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, details of the stop command processing (S2232) described above will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing this stop command processing (S2232). This stop command process (S2232) is one process in the command determination process 8, and is a process for performing control according to the stop command received from the main controller 110. FIG.

In this stop command process (see FIG. 212), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON (S9001), and when it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is OFF (S9001: No), the process proceeds to S9007. On the other hand, in the process of S9001, if it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is ON (S9001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning effect flag 223fc is ON (S9002). In the processing of S9002, when it is determined that the hit production flag 223fc is on (S9002: Yes), next, it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command corresponding to a win or a small win pattern (S9004). On the other hand, when it is determined that a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning symbol has been received (S9004: Yes), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the process of S9005, the end of the final effect is set (S9005), the final effect set flag 223fb and the hit effect flag 223fc are set to OFF (S9006), and the process proceeds to S9007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9002 that the hit effect flag 223fc is off (S9002: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is 1 or more (S9003). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of balls on hold is 0 (S9003: No), the processes of S9005 and S9006 are executed, and the process proceeds to S9007. In the process of S9007, the stop display of the 3rd design corresponding to the received stop command is set (S9007), and this process is complete|finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, details of the time saving update process (S2233) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this time saving update process 8 (S2233). As described above, this time saving update process 8 (S2233) is a process executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 210 and S2122), and is similar to the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). is the processing of

In this time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating that the number of time saving times has become 0 (S2621). In the processing of S2621, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the number of times of time saving has become 0 (S2621: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the last variation display in the time saving state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the number of times of time saving has reached 0 (S2621: No), the process of S2622 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2623.

In the process of S2623, the data in the time saving information update area 223g and the display setting of the number of times of working time saving are updated according to the notified working time saving related information (S2623), and this process ends. By executing this time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), the actual number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 can be matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, details of the effect setting process 8 (S2821) in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, the effect setting process 8 is executed instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment. Note that the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment differs from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment only in that the effect setting process 8 (S2821) is executed, so illustration of the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is omitted.

FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process 8 (S2821). This effect setting process 8 (S2821) is, like the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), according to the variation pattern (variation time) notified by the variation pattern command.

In this effect setting process 8 (S2821), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON (S2911). In the process of S2911, when it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is off (S2911: No), the effect mode of the variation pattern effect according to the lottery result is set (S2912), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2911, if it is determined that the final effect setting completion flag 223fb is ON (S2911: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning effect flag 223fc is ON (S2913). In the process of S2913, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is ON (S2913: Yes), the process proceeds to S2917.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2913, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 223fc is off (S2913: No), then it is determined whether or not the data in the winning information storage area 223a includes a winning or a small winning (S2914). In the process of S2917, the continuation of the display mode of the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is set (S2917), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2914, if it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a includes a win or a small win (S2914: Yes), the start of the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is set (S2915), the win effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and this process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured so that both the lottery condition for the first special symbol (starting winning) and the lottery condition for the second special symbol (starting winning) can be established in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, and the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol (the possibility of winning a big win is substantially higher). By selecting the first game method (the game method in which the player continuously hits to the right), the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed. On the other hand, by selecting the second game method different from the first game method (the game method in which the game ball is hit to the left or the firing is stopped each time the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b), the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed. The timing for executing the lottery for the second special symbol can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to realize game characteristics that match the preferences of each player, so that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of termination conditions for the time saving state (state advantageous to the player), and is configured so that the time saving state is more likely to end when the lottery for the second special pattern is executed than when the lottery for the first special pattern is executed. More specifically, the number of lotteries (number of times of time saving) for ending the time saving state is made different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of times of time saving of the second special pattern (4 times) is smaller than the number of times of time saving of the first special pattern (96 times). If the game method of preferentially executing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is high), is continued, the possibility of ending the time saving state in a short period of time compared to the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed is increased, so the lottery of the first special symbol with the low expectation of the big win is executed to some extent (for example, 95 times) within the number of times of the time reduction of the first special symbol, and then the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. can be one of the player's options. Conversely, a player who wants to know the result of the time saving state (whether it will be a big hit or whether the time saving state will end) in a relatively short time can be made to select a game method of preferentially executing the lottery of the second special pattern, knowing that the number of times of the time saving of the first special pattern will be a loss. In this way, it is possible to realize a game with a high degree of freedom in which the timing of executing the lottery of the second special symbols can be selected according to each player's taste, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is controlled to be executed preferentially over the lottery of the second special symbol (when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol exist, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is preferentially moved to the execution area and used for the lottery). By constructing in this way, only by practicing a relatively simple game method of continuously hitting to the right during the time-saving state, it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special pattern while executing the lottery of the first special pattern for the number of times of the time-saving of the first special pattern. Then, when the number of times of time saving of the first special pattern becomes 0, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is almost accumulated up to the upper limit of 4, and the lottery of the second special pattern based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern of the upper limit number (that is, the lottery with high expectation of big win) can be executed. In other words, it is possible to realize a game property in which the expectation for a big win is low during the period from the start of the time saving state until the first condition is satisfied (until the number of times of the time saving of the first special symbol is consumed), and the expectation for the big win is high during the period after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied (until the reserved ball of the second special symbol disappears).

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) is won, a first game state (for example, variable probability state) advantageous to the player is first set up to a predetermined lottery number of times as an upper limit after the end of the jackpot, and a second game state (for example, time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set when the player does not win a jackpot within the predetermined number of lotteries. However, in such a conventional game machine, since the degree of advantage is usually higher in the first game state than in the second game state, there is a problem that when the first game state ends, the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, a lottery for a first special symbol with a low expectation of a big win (that is, a low degree of advantage for the player) can be easily executed from when the time saving state advantageous to the player is set until the first condition is satisfied, and a lottery with a second special symbol that has a high expectation for a big win (that is, the degree of advantage for the player is high) is easily executed after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. configured as follows. In other words, when it shifts to an advantageous time-saving state, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a state with a high advantageous degree through a state with a low advantageous degree first. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is not won until the first condition is established, the player can feel a sense of security that a state with a higher degree of expectation for the big win is coming later, so that the player's motivation for the game can be suppressed from being lowered when the first condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, after the transition to the time saving state advantageous to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed until immediately before the time saving number of the second special symbol ends (until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed three times), then the time saving number of the first special symbol is terminated first by continuously executing the right hitting, and then the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated until the time saving number of the first special symbol elapse are digested. By executing the game method, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols to be executed during the time saving state and until all the reserved balls accumulated in the time saving state after the time saving state is finished can be easily increased (to seven times). In other words, it is possible to realize a very special and novel specification that a game method of continuing right-handed hitting after the establishment of the specific condition is most advantageous to the player by executing left-handed hitting (or stopping shooting) so as to facilitate the execution of the lottery of the second special pattern until the specific condition is satisfied (the number of time-reducing times of the second special pattern is left 1), so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, the number of times of time saving for the first special symbol is configured to be larger than the number of times of time saving for the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol and the number of time reductions of the second special symbol may be the same number of times (for example, both 4 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period in which the lottery of the first special symbols with low expectations is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant during the time saving state. Further, for example, the number of times of time saving of the first special symbol may be set to be less than the number of times of time saving of the second special symbol (for example, three times). When configured in this manner, the probability that the number of time reductions of the first special symbol will pass before the game balls are fully entered into the right second ball entrance 64b (up to the reserved upper limit number) is relatively high. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the normal pattern is hit, it is configured to win the normal pattern B8 at a rate of 20% (become in a state where the ball can be entered into the right second entrance 64b), but it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of winning B per normal pattern may be low (for example, to 1/50). By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the reserved balls of the second special pattern to accumulate in the time saving state, so that the playability that can please the player when the reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment described above, when a V win occurs as a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols, the game state after the V win is set to an advantageous time-saving state regardless of whether the small win that triggered the V win was won during an advantageous time-saving state or during a disadvantageous normal state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, the rate of setting the time saving state is higher when the V win occurs during the normal state than when the V win occurs during the time saving state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to carry out a game method in which right-handed hitting is continuously performed so that the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed during the time-saving state, and the lottery for the first special pattern with low expectation for big win is executed, the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is increased, and after the time-saving state is finished, the lottery based on the reserved ball for the second special pattern is aimed at a V win. That is, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to more reliably realize a novel game property in which a state with a low degree of expectation for a big win is shifted to a state with a high degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when the normal pattern is hit during the time saving state, the right first ball entrance 64a2 is easier to open (the first operation hole 704 is easier to enter). was configured to be determined at a high rate. As a result, the lottery condition (start winning) of the first special symbol is established more often when the player continues to hit to the right in the time-saving state.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is configured so that the game ball enters only the first operation opening 704 even if the normal pattern hits during the first period (for example, 180 seconds) after the transition to the time saving state, and is configured so that the game ball can enter both the first operation opening 704 and the second operation opening 707 only during the period from the first period to the second period (for example, 360 seconds). did. With this configuration, only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed and only the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased during the period from the start of the time saving state to the elapse of the first period, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game balls from continuously entering the second operation opening 707 immediately after the start of the time saving state, the number of times of the time saving of the second special symbol passing in a relatively short time, and the time saving state ending early.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 of the sorting device 700 (see FIG. 170) in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the switching valve 702 in the eighth embodiment described above is configured to switch between a first switching state in which the first flow path 703 can pass and a second switching state in which the second flow path 706 can pass in a specific switching pattern, triggered by the start of winning of the normal symbol (see FIG. 171). On the other hand, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is configured to start the switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the end of the jackpot (or the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) regardless of the winning period of the normal symbols. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing the switching pattern of this switching valve 702. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 215, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is set to a switching mode (first switching mode) in which the first switching state is maintained for 180 seconds when the jackpot ends. While the first switching mode is set, the electric accessory 701 is opened by hitting the normal pattern, and when the game ball enters the sorting device 700, the game ball is guided (flows down) to the first operation port 704, and the right first ball entrance 64a2 is opened. Therefore, if right-handed hitting is continued while the time-saving state and the first switching mode are set, the game balls enter only the right first ball entry port 64a2, the lottery of the first special pattern is biased and executed, and only the reserved balls of the first special pattern can be accumulated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215, when 180 seconds set in the first switching mode elapse, a switching mode (second switching mode) in which the second switching state for 1 second and the first switching state for 3 seconds are periodically repeated is set for 180 seconds (that is, for 180 seconds after the switching pattern is started and until 360 seconds have passed). That is, while the second switching mode is set, the ratio of the period in which the switching valve 702 is set in the first switching state is 3/4, and the ratio of the period in which the switching valve 702 is set in the second switching state is 1/4. If the player continues to hit to the right while the second switching mode is set, about 1/4 of the game balls entered into the sorting device 700 as normal symbol hits enter the second operating port 707, and 3/4 of the game balls enter the first operating port 704.例文帳に追加Therefore, if right hitting is continued while the second switching mode is set, game balls enter the right first ball entrance 64a2 at a higher rate than the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, while the second switching mode is set, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased while preferentially executing the lottery of the first special symbol. During the 180 seconds in which the second switching mode is set, the second switching state is switched to the second switching state at a rate of one second every four seconds (the second switching state is set 45 times), so that by continuing to hit to the right, almost four or more game balls can enter the right second ball entrance 64b. In other words, it is possible to easily accumulate the upper limit number (four) of the reserved balls of the second special symbol simply by continuously hitting to the right during the second switching state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215, a switching mode (third switching mode) is set in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state for a period of 3600 seconds after the start of the switching pattern until 3600 seconds have elapsed. While the third switching mode is set, game balls enter only the right first ball entrance 64a2, similarly to the period when the first switching mode is set, so that the lottery for the special pattern can be biased toward the lottery for the first special pattern. These first switching mode, second switching mode, and third switching mode are the minimum unit of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702, and thereafter, the switching pattern is repeatedly executed from the beginning each time the switching pattern of the minimum unit is completed.

In addition, since the fluctuation time of the deviation in the time saving state is about 4 seconds on average, the period until the time saving number of times of the first special symbol elapses takes about 384 seconds (4 seconds x 96 times). That is, since the number of times of time saving of the first special pattern has passed while the third switching mode is set, the possibility of increasing the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be reduced while the time saving state is terminated and the reserved balls of the second special pattern are digested. Therefore, in each time-saving state, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols with high expectations for big wins can be unified, so that the expectations for big wins in one time-saving state can be uniformed.

Here, as in the eighth embodiment, if the operation opening to which the game ball entering the sorting device 700 is likely to be guided is changed according to the type of the normal pattern, especially when the electric role product 701 is opened by winning the "normal pattern hit B8" just before the time saving state ends, and the opening continues until at least one lottery using the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started, the distribution device 70 during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. There is a possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases even after the game ball enters 0 and the time saving state ends. That is, there is a possibility that the possibility of winning the jackpot in the time-saving state of 1 remarkably increases or decreases depending on the timing of winning the normal symbol and the type of winning the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the third switching form is configured before and after the end of the time -saving state (that is, around 384 seconds after the jackpot), so it is elected to the hit of a normal pattern just before the end of the time -saving state, and the open period of the electricity 701 based on the corresponding part is the second special pattern. Even if the holding ball is continued until at least one is consumed, it may suppress the increase in the holding ball of the second special pattern after the time saving state. That is, even if the game ball hits the normal pattern with good timing and the game ball can enter the sorting device 700 with good timing, it can be configured so that only the reserved balls of the first special pattern with low expectation can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to equalize the degree of expectation for a big hit in the time saving state of 1.例文帳に追加

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 216, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided inside the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 200(a)) in that the defined contents of the time reduction provision table 202e are changed. Also, as the jackpot types defined in the first hit type selection table 202b, the difference is that jackpots A9 to F9 are defined instead of the jackpots A8 to F8 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, since the jackpots A9 to F9 are exactly the same as the jackpots A8 to F8 in terms of the number of rounds and the associated random value (the range of the counter value of the first hit type counter C2), etc., the detailed description is omitted here.

With reference to Drawing 216, details of time reduction grant table 202e in a 9th embodiment are explained. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction provision table 202e in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot A9" won in the normal state, "96 times" as the number of times of shortening of the first special symbol (the value of the counter 203k1 for the number of times of shortening of the first special symbol) and "4 times" as the number of times of shortening of the second special symbol (the value of the counter 203k2 of the number of times of shortening of the second special symbol) are defined in association with each other. In addition, the same number of time-saving grants is defined in association with the "jackpot A9" won in the time-saving state. Therefore, when "jackpot A9" is won, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216, the "jackpot B9" won in the normal state is defined in association with "0 times" as the number of times of shortening of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, while the "jackpot B9" elected in the time saving state is defined in association with "96 times" as the number of times of shortening of the first special symbol and "4 times" as the number of times of shortening of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big win B9'' is determined in the normal state, the game machine shifts to the normal state disadvantageous to the player, while when the direct hit of the first special pattern occurs and the ``big win B9'' is determined in the time saving state, the game shifts to the time saving state advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot C9", regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the time-saving state, "96 times" as the number of time-saving additions of the first special symbol and "4 times" as the number of time-saving additions of the second special symbol are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs and a "jackpot C9" is determined, the game shifts to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for "jackpot D9" to "jackpot F9" won in the normal state, "96 times" as the number of time reduction grants of the first special symbol and "4 times" as the number of time reduction grants of the second special symbol are defined in association with each other. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the time saving state and the V winning is won, the V prize is generated and the V winning is won, and the disadvantageous normal state is always set. Therefore, during the time-saving state, a novel game property can be realized that is advantageous to the player by practicing a game method of storing the reserved balls of the second special pattern up to the upper limit number while continuously executing the right-hand shot so as not to execute the lottery of the second special pattern, and executing the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern after the time-saving state is ended. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, a transition method for each state in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the ninth embodiment, like the eighth embodiment, is provided with three modes (normal mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B). First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 217, a description will be given of how to shift from the normal mode (the normal game state in which there is no held ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode only when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, when the lottery of the first special pattern becomes a jackpot, when it becomes "jackpot A9" that wins at a rate of 50%, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to an advantageous chance mode A (time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, when it becomes a ``big win B9'' that wins at a rate of 50%, the mode after the big win is again set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player (the normal mode is looped). Therefore, in the normal mode, the game can be played in anticipation of winning the "jackpot A9" in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to the central portion of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (time-saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the central portion of FIG. 217, the chance mode A may shift to another mode when a jackpot is won or when the number of times of time saving has passed. More specifically, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special symbols in the chance mode A, and a V prize is generated to win the V prize, the game shifts to a disadvantageous normal mode after the big prize is completed. When the number of times of time saving has passed in the chance mode A (after entering the time saving game state, the lottery of the first special pattern is completed 96 times or the lottery of the second special pattern is completed 4 times), and if there is a reserved ball of the second special pattern, the game shifts to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, as shown in the central part of FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs in the chance mode A, the mode after the end of the big win is always set to the chance mode A advantageous to the player regardless of the type of the big win (the chance mode A is looped). Thus, in the chance mode A, there is no possibility of winning a small win (that is, a V win occurs), and the execution of the lottery of the first special pattern, which has a possibility of winning a direct win, realizes a game property that makes a player expect a direct win. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player want to preferentially execute the lottery of the first special pattern with a low expectation of big win over the lottery of the second special pattern with a high expectation of big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from chance mode B (normal game state in which a second special symbol reserved ball exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 217, the chance mode B shifts to another state (mode) not only when a jackpot is won, but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217, when a direct hit occurs and the type of the direct hit is "jackpot A9" determined at a rate of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol, or "jackpot C9" determined at a rate of 100% of the direct hit of the second special symbol, the game shifts to the chance mode A advantageous to the player after the big win. In addition, even when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a small win and a V win is won, the game shifts to the chance mode A advantageous to the player after the big win.

On the other hand, when a direct hit of the first special pattern occurs, a ``jackpot B8'' determined at a rate of 50% is won, and further, if the number of held balls of the second special pattern is 0 at the end of the big prize, the state (mode) after the finish of the big prize is set to a normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Also, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed (all the lottery of the second special symbol after shifting to the chance mode B is lost), the mode is shifted to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the second special pattern holding ball is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of ``jackpot B8'' or ``jackpot C8'', the state (mode) after the jackpot is finished becomes the chance mode B again. For this reason, in the chance mode B, the game can be played with the expectation that the second special symbol lottery will result in a small win (that is, winning a V win) rather than a direct win. Therefore, until the chance mode A is finished, right-hand hitting is continuously executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is not executed, and the number of time reductions of the first special symbol elapses, and after shifting to the chance mode B, special and novel game characteristics can be realized in which a small win can be expected in the lottery for the second special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 218 and 219. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 218, startup processing 9 in the ninth embodiment will be described. This start-up process 9 is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), is a process executed for initializing the pachinko machine 10 based on power-on.

In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) of the ninth embodiment, the processes of S1401-S1417 are the same as the processes of S1401-S1417 of the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the first embodiment. In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) of the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1417 is completed, the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is set to start (S1421), and the process proceeds to S1410.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, details of the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 9 (S1521) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), is a process for performing various settings during execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, in each process of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, the same process as each process of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52 and S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1617 is completed, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is set (S1623), and the process proceeds to S1618.

By executing these start-up processing 9 (see FIG. 218) and jackpot control processing 9 (see FIG. 219), the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 can be initialized at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the second special symbol held balls to increase from 180 seconds after the jackpot to 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the distribution device 700 immediately after the end of the time saving state, the right second ball entrance 64b can be suppressed from being opened (the winning of the normal symbol is started just before the end of the time saving state, and the game ball entering the distribution device 700 is guided to the second operation port 707 after the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started immediately after the end of the time saving state). The number of lotteries for special symbols can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the jackpot expectations in the time saving state of 1.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is configured so that both the lottery condition for the first special symbol (starting winning) and the lottery condition for the second special symbol (starting winning) can be established in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, and the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol (substantially higher possibility of winning the jackpot). If the second special pattern lottery wins in the time saving state, the possibility of shifting to a normal state disadvantageous to the player increases (if a direct hit with a low probability occurs, the state shifts to the time saving state, but if a V win based on a small win with a high probability occurs, the state shifts to the normal state). That is, after the shift to the time saving state, until the specific condition is established (the time saving state is ended), it is easier for the player to win a big hit based on the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol than to be a big hit based on the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol. It is constructed so as to be more advantageous to the player than the case of winning a big hit. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize the novel game property that the type of the special pattern that the player wants to execute the lottery can be changed before and after the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. That is, until the specific condition is established, a game method in which the number of reserved balls in the second special pattern increases while the lottery in the first special pattern is continuously executed (that is, the game method in which the ball is hit to the right continuously) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the period in which the second special symbol held balls may increase in the time saving state is limited to a specific period (from 180 seconds after the end of the jackpot to 360 seconds). In other words, before and after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right second ball inlet 64b regardless of whether or not the normal symbol hit occurs. By configuring in this way, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to four times at maximum. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the jackpot expectations in the time saving state of 1.

In the ninth embodiment, it is configured so that winning a V win in a normal state is more advantageous than winning a V win during a time saving state, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the time saving number of times, and a game method for digesting the reserved ball of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state after the time saving number of times has passed, but the invention is not limited to this. Conversely, it may be configured so that winning V within the number of times of time saving is more advantageous than winning V by winning a small win with a reserved ball of the second special pattern after the end of the time saving state. By constructing in this way, when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed within the number of times of shortening the working hours, the player can be made to think to generate a V prize, so that the degree of freedom of the game can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is switched in a fixed switching pattern at the end of the big win, and the period in which the second special pattern reserved balls are stored is limited to the time from 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the end of the big win, but it is not limited to this. The period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored may be determined arbitrarily. Further, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 does not need to be fixed, and for example, it may be configured to set different switching patterns according to the jackpot type. That is, it is possible to provide a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern is set so that the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be stored during the time-saving state, and a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern is set to make it impossible (difficult) to save the reserved balls of the second special pattern.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control such as the eighth embodiment described above may be adopted. That is, a control may be employed in which a switching operation is performed with a fixed switching pattern triggered by the start of winning a normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is varied according to the type of winning a normal symbol. Conversely, the switching control of the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment may be adopted in the eighth embodiment described above.

In the ninth embodiment, switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern at the end of the jackpot, and the possibility that the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state before and after the end of the time saving is increased, so that the game ball entering the sorting device 700 immediately after the end of the time saving enters the second operation port 707, the right second ball entrance 64b is opened, and after shifting to the normal state, the second special symbol reserved ball is suppressed from increasing. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as the fixed display time of the last variable display of the time saving state, a period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the winning period (2.5 seconds) of the normal pattern set when the normal pattern is hit during the time saving state may be set, and the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation time (the fixed display period of the last variable display is controlled so that the time saving state has already ended). By constructing in this way, even if winning of normal symbols is started immediately before the confirmation display, winning of normal symbols can be finished during the confirmation display period, so that entry of game balls into the right second ball entrance 64b after one or more second special symbol lotteries are started in the normal state (that is, after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is decreased) can be surely suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching modes (first to third switching modes) are configured to vary according to the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot (and after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a switching mode may be changed according to the number of times of time saving. More specifically, for example, the first switching mode (switching mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 64b) is set while the number of times of time saving remains 80 times or more, and the second switching mode (switching mode in which the game ball can be entered into the second right ball entrance 64b) is configured to be set when the number of times of time saving is less than 80 times and is 20 times or more remaining. If the number of times is less than 20, the third switching mode (the switching mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 64b) may be set. With this configuration, even if only a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is selected in the time saving state and the time saving state ends in about 300 seconds, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the right second ball entrance 64b immediately after the time saving state ends and at the time when one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) triggered by the end of the jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the start of the jackpot may be used as a trigger to start the switching operation of a specific switching pattern. Since the timing of setting the second switching mode can be changed according to the time required for the big winning game by constructing in this way, the second switching mode can be set in a relatively short time after the big winning is finished, or the second switching mode can be continued even just before the end of the time saving state. Therefore, since the degree of advantage for the player can be varied according to the progress of the game during the big win, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is triggered by the end of the jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) regardless of the jackpot type, but it is not limited to this. For example, the switching pattern set after the end of the jackpot may be changed according to the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, in the case of direct winning, the state of the switching valve 702 may be switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the case of direct winning during the time saving state can be increased, so that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of direct winning. Further, for example, when the direct hit of the first special symbol is won, the switching valve 702 is configured to be switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 248. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, two types of game states, a normal state disadvantageous to the player and an advantageous time-saving state, are provided as game states, and further, the degree of advantage of the normal state is largely variable depending on the presence or absence of the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the normal state disadvantageous to the player and the time saving state comparatively advantageous to the player, the latent state disadvantageous to the player and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player are provided as game states. That is, in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, there are provided a latent state in which the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal state, but the electric role 64ra is difficult to open and a special symbol lottery is difficult to execute, and an advantageous variable probability state in which the probability of a big win is high and the electric role 64ra is easy to open. Further, in the 10th embodiment, when a big win is won, the high probability state (latent probability state or variable probability state) of the special pattern is set at a high rate (ratio of 90%) after the end of the big win. Instead, the upper limit number of times (for example, 11 times) is set for the number of consecutive times of the high probability state of the special pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big win, so that a deep game can be realized.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, both the lottery condition for the first special symbol and the lottery condition for the second special symbol can be satisfied when hitting to the right in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation system is adopted). Thus, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special pattern lottery can be executed more efficiently. In addition, when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are simultaneously varied, when one of them stops varying with a jackpot stop symbol, the other variation display is stopped and displayed with a lost stop symbol regardless of the remaining variation time or the lottery result. As a result, during execution of the big win game, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed with the big win and the big win is started redundantly.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the normal state and latent probability state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability state or the time saving state, these advantageous states are almost terminated by executing the lottery of the special symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) after the end of the big win. , a probability variable state that continues until the next big win, or a time-saving state that continues until the lottery of 100 times of special symbols is completed after the end of the big win is set. That is, in the normal state and the latent definite state, first, a jackpot in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is given a predetermined number of times (8 times) is won, and by winning the big win in the lottery within the eight times, it is possible to shift to the probability variable state that continues until the next big win or the time saving state that continues until the lottery of the special pattern 100 times after the big win is finished. If it shifts to the probability variable state continuing until the next big win, the next big win can be surely won in the state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, so even after the next big win ends, the probability variable state continues until the next big win or the time saving state continues until the lottery of the special symbols 100 times after the big win ends. Therefore, the most advantageous state for the player is formed. In addition, even in a time saving state that continues until the lottery of 100 times of special symbols is completed, if a big win can be won within 100 times, the variable probability state continues until the next big win or a short time state of continuing until the lottery of 100 times of special symbols is completed after the end of the big win, so that a relatively high degree of expectation for an advantageous state is formed.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, it shifts to a probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot, and the probability variable state and the jackpot are repeated by continuing to win the probability variable jackpot that is won at a rate of 90%, and when the upper limit number of times of the probability variable state of the special symbol (probability variable limit number of times) is reached, regardless of whether the probability variable jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won. In addition, when a jackpot is won within the number of time-saving times (so-called pullback occurs), the ratio of an advantageous jackpot type (a jackpot with a large number of rounds) is more likely to be higher than when a jackpot is won during the variable probability state. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special pattern is configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage (selection ratio of the small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special pattern, and the lottery frequency of the second special pattern is remarkably lowered in the time-saving state set by reaching the probability variable limit number of times. That is, the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly set to 600 seconds regardless of the result of the lottery), and the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once. In other words, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to increase the chance of winning a big hit. As a result, when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the big win will be brought back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the seventh embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 220, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 220, the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment differs from the board structure of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the V winning device 6500 is removed, the right first ball entry 64r is provided as a starting prize opening that triggers the first special symbol lottery at the position where the second ball entrance 6400 was provided, and the second special symbol lottery opportunity is provided on the right side of the board. The difference is that a second ball entry hole 6450 is provided as a start winning hole. The reason why the V winning device 6500 is omitted is that the 10th embodiment adopts a specification in which only one of the special symbol lottery is lost or a big win is won, and a small win is not provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a characteristic effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the 10th embodiment, when a jackpot is won while the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the time saving state of the normal pattern is always provided after the big win is finished. That is, basically, when winning a variable probability big win, a variable probability state continuing until the next big win is set, and when winning a normal big win or reaching the variable probability limit number of times, a time-saving state continuing until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times is set. In the 10th embodiment, when a jackpot win is won while the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, it is not clearly notified whether the game state set after the big win is the time saving state or the probability variable state, but is suggested by the performance mode. An example of suggestion by this presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 221(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation in which the variable probability state is set is relatively high. As shown in FIG. 221(a), when the display mode indicating that the probability variable state is set and the degree of expectation is high is set, the character 801 searches for the treasure box 802 in the forest with many trees in the main display area Dm. In addition to this, the characters "forest area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this forest area is configured to be selected more frequently when the variable probability state is set than when the time saving state is set.

On the other hand, FIG.221(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which shows that the degree of expectation of a probability change state is relatively low (the possibility of a time saving state is high). As shown in FIG. 221(b), when the display mode indicating that the expectation of the variable probability state is low is set, an effect is developed in which the character 801 searches for the treasure box 802 in the desolate wasteland in the main display area Dm. In addition to this, the characters "wilderness area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this wilderness area is configured to be selected more frequently when the time saving state is set than when the variable probability state is set.

In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the forest area and wilderness area production modes described above, a sky area production mode (a production in which the character 801 searches for a treasure box 802 in a sea of clouds) is provided in which it is confirmed that the variable probability state is set at the time of execution. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each time a new variation pattern effect (variation display) is started, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the display mode can be changed. As a result, even if the performance mode of the wilderness area with a low degree of expectation is set, the game can be played with the expectation that the performance mode will be changed to a performance mode with a high expectation degree of the probability variable state each time the variable display is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 222(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 183(a)) in that a variation pattern scenario table 202ga is added. Moreover, it is also different in that the configuration of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the time reduction grant table 202e is partially changed.

First, with reference to FIG. 223(a), details of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 223(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment, a random number (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit in the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol and a random number (the counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined as the big winning in the low probability state of the special symbol are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223(a), 25 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 24" are defined as random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the high-probability state (latent probability state, probability variable state) of special symbols. Among 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special pattern is 25, ie, ``0 to 24''.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), seven random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 6" are defined as random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a big hit in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of special symbols. Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special pattern is 7 of ``0 to 6'', so the probability of being judged to be a big hit when the lottery of the special pattern is executed in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1/143 (7/1000).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is greatly different between the high probability state of the special symbols and the low probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, since the game can be sharpened, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.223(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 10th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 223(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first win type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(b), in the first winning random number table 202b in the tenth embodiment, at least a special 1 winning table 202bf1 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and a special 2 winning table 202bf2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 224(a), the details of the special 1 win table 202bg1 will be described.

FIG. 224(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the special 1 win table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 224(a), in the special 1-per table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment, eight types of "jackpot A10" to "jackpot H10" are defined as the first special symbol jackpot types. “Big win A10” to “Big win C10” are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the big win is set to the high probability state of special symbols. In addition, "jackpot D10" to "jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special pattern. In addition, "jackpot G10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is nine and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special pattern. Furthermore, "jackpot H10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state. In addition, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is given is configured to differ according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 5" in association with "jackpot A10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with 'jackpot A10' is 6 of '0 to 5', so that the ratio of determining (selecting) 'jackpot A10' when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "6 to 46" as the jackpot type "jackpot B10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B10" is 41, ie, ``6 to 46'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot B10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 41% (41/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "47 to 66" in association with "jackpot C10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot C10'' is 20, ie, ``47 to 66'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot C10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value "67" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "jackpot D10" (3-round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot D10'' is 1, so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot D10'' when winning the big prize in the lottery of the first special pattern is 1% (1/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "68, 69" in association with "jackpot E10" (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot E10'' is two, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot E10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 2% (2/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 89" as the jackpot type "jackpot F10" (3 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot F10'' is 20, ie, ``70 to 89'', so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot F10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 20% (20/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 92", and the jackpot type "jackpot G10" (9 round normal jackpot) is defined in association. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot G10'' is 3, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot G10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 3% (3/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" in association with "jackpot H10" (3-round normal jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot H10'' is 7, so that the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot H10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is 7% (7/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the ratio of 90% (when any one of ``jackpot A10'' to ``jackpot F10'' is obtained) is a probability variable jackpot, and the ratio of 10% (when either ``jackpot G10'' or ``jackpot H10'' is obtained) is configured to win a normal jackpot. In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224(b), the details of the special 2 win table 202g2 will be described. This special 2 winning table 202g2 is, as described above, a data table for determining the winning type when the big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 224(b), in the tenth embodiment, four jackpot types of "jackpot I10" to "jackpot L10" are provided as the jackpot types of the second special symbols. “Big win A10” to “Big win C10” are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the big win is set to the high probability state of special symbols. In addition, "jackpot D10" to "jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special pattern after the jackpot is set to the high probability state of the special pattern. "Jack I10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. Also, "jackpot J10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol high probability state. "Big win K10" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of special symbols after the end of the big win is set to the low probability state of special symbols. Furthermore, "jackpot L10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of special symbols after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 26" in association with "jackpot I10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of '0 to 99' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the 'jackpot I10' is 27 of '0 to 26'.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "27 to 89" as the jackpot type "jackpot J10" (3 round probability variable jackpot) in association with each other. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot J10'' is 53, ``27 to 89''.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 92", and the jackpot type "jackpot K10" (9 round normal jackpot) is defined in association. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot K10'' is 3 of ``90 to 92'', so the ratio of determining (selecting) the ``jackpot K10'' when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "93 to 99" as the jackpot type "jackpot L10" (3-round normal jackpot) in association with it. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the ``jackpot L10'' is 7, ``93 to 99''.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, similarly to the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of 90% (when either ``jackpot I10'' or ``jackpot J10'' is obtained) is a probability variable jackpot, and the ratio of 10% (when either ``jackpot K10'' or ``jackpot L10'' is obtained) is configured to win a normal jackpot. In addition, it is configured such that a jackpot with 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%, and a jackpot with 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%. That is, in terms of the number of rounds, the case where the lottery for the first special symbol is a big win is more advantageous than the case where the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225(a), details of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment will be described. This variation pattern table 202d, like the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, is a data table in which data for determining the special symbol variation time is defined according to the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. FIG. 225(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 225 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment is a normal table 202dg1 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, and a time-saving table 202dg2 for determining (selecting) the variation pattern (variation time) in the game state (time-saving state, probability variable state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set. , and a limit reaching time table 202dg3 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in a state in which the probability variation limit number of times is reached. First, the details of the normal table 202dg1 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(b).

FIG. 225(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202dg1. As shown in FIG. 225(b), in the normal table 202dg1 in the tenth embodiment, the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 139", and the "short out" of 7 seconds is defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1. "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of "150 to 179", and "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198".

Also, as shown in FIG. 225(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "jackpot", "normal reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 29", and "super reach" with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189". A "special reach" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with the range of "190 to 198".

On the other hand, if the pattern type is the second special design (special figure 2), and if the lottery result is "off", the value of the CS1 by variation is "0-198", that is, the overall fluctuation time is 600 seconds, and if the lottery result is "large hits", it is a variable count 1. The value of "0 to 198", that is, the perfection of 600 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 198". Therefore, even if a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 6450 by hitting right in a normal state or a latent state, the lottery of special symbols can be executed only every 600 seconds, so that the game efficiency can be remarkably deteriorated when an irregular game method of hitting to the right is performed in a game state in which the normal state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state or the latent state.

Next, with reference to Drawing 226 (a), the details of table 202dg2 for time reduction which are one of the data tables which constitute variation pattern table 202d are explained. As described above, this time saving table 202dg2 is a data table referred to for determining a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a game state in which a time saving state of normal symbols is set. FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the time saving table 202dg2, the special symbol lottery result and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with each other. That is, in the time-saving state and the probability variable state, basically (except when the probability variable limit number of times is reached), the variation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol regardless of the type of the special symbol. This is because, in the time saving state of the normal symbols in the tenth embodiment, since the game balls frequently enter the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 6450 by hitting to the right, the lottery for one of the special symbols is not executed biasedly.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149", the "short out" with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the "long out" with a variation time of 5 seconds in the range of "150 to 189", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "190 to 1". "Normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the range of 95", and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "196 to 198". In other words, compared to the case of determining the deviation variation pattern with reference to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)), it is configured to facilitate determination of a short variation time. As a result, it is possible to efficiently perform the game in the probability variable state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set.

Also, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "big win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "50 to 194", the "super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. "195 to 198" is defined in association with "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. In other words, even when the lottery result is a win, it is configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be determined than when the variation pattern is determined using the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 226(b), the details of the limit reaching time table 202dg3, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, this limit reaching time table 202dg3 is a data table in which data for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is defined during the time saving state set after reaching the probability variation limit number of times. FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), each variation pattern is selected in the same distribution as the time saving table 202dg2 (see FIG. 226(a)). On the other hand, if the pattern type is the second special design (special figure 2), and if the lottery result is "off", the value of the CS1 by variation is "0-198", that is, the overall fluctuation time is 600 seconds, and if the lottery result is "large hits", it is a variable count 1. The value of "0 to 198", that is, the perfection of 600 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 198". Therefore, if the player hits to the right in a time-saving state after reaching the variable probability limit number of times, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed intensively while the super-long variation of the second special symbol is being performed. Here, as described above, the jackpot of the first special pattern is structured such that the jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous than the jackpot of the second special pattern is easily determined, so that the first special pattern lottery can be strongly expected to be a big win within the number of times of shortening the time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, details of the time reduction provision table 202e in the tenth embodiment will be described. This time reduction grant table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of times of time reduction after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won, like the time reduction grant table 202e in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction provision table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot A10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D10 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set. If the probability variable jackpot hits before the probability variable limit is reached, the number of time reductions that continues until the next jackpot is given. Therefore, if a jackpot A10 or a jackpot D10 is won before the probability variable limit number of times is reached, a variable probability state (most advantageous game state) continuing until the next big win is set, while when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, only a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of eight times are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether the probability variable limit number of times is reached or not. In addition, as the number of times of time saving to continue until the next big win, for example, the number of times sufficiently large with respect to the probability of big wins, such as 65536 times (the number of times that can be regarded as surely winning the big win within the number of times of time saving) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot A10 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot D10 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability variable jackpot hits before reaching the probability limit limit, the time saving state that continues until the next jackpot is given, while if the probability limit number is reached due to the jackpot, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times. Therefore, even when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery of the special pattern can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls in hand, so that the player can have a feeling of anticipation for pulling back the big win. In addition, as described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is configured not to clearly notify the player whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether the variable probability state or the time saving state). Therefore, even if the variable probability limit number of times is actually reached and the time saving state is set, the player can expect the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot B10 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I10 (9 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, 8 time reduction times are given even if the hit is before the probability limit is reached or the probability limit number is reached. In other words, before the limit is reached, the probability variable state is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed eight times after the end of the jackpot, and the probability state is maintained after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the limit number of times has been reached, the time-saving state is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed eight times after the end of the jackpot, and the normal state is established after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot B10 (9-round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot I10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time-saving state, probability-variable state) in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set are associated with the same time-saving grant times as the jackpot A10 and the jackpot D10. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times. Therefore, when the jackpots B10, E10 and I10 are won in the normal state or the latent probability state before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, they are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 and D10 in terms of the game state after the end of the jackpot, and when winning in other circumstances (when winning in the probability variable state, the short time state, or when the probability variable limit number of times is reached), the same game state as the jackpots A10 and D10 is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot C10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, if you win the probability variable jackpot in the normal state, the probability variable limit number of times will not be reached, so the number of time reduction grants when the probability variable limit number is reached is not specified (because the probability variable limit number cannot be reached, there is no need to specify). In addition, 0 times is defined as the number of times of shortening time even if the winning is before reaching the variable probability limit or the number of times of probability variable limit is reached for the jackpots C10 and F10 won in the latent probability state. In other words, when the jackpots C10 and F10 are won in the latent probability state, the time-saving state of normal symbols is not provided even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot C10 (9 rounds probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3 rounds probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set are associated with the same time saving number of times as the jackpots A10, B10, D10, E10, I10. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot G10 (9-round normal jackpot), jackpot H10 (3-round normal jackpot), jackpot K10 (9-round normal jackpot), and jackpot L10 (3-round normal jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set are defined in association with 8 times as the number of times of time reduction. In addition, since the probability variation limit number cannot be reached when winning a normal jackpot, the number of time reduction grants when the probability variation limit number is reached is not defined (no need to be defined). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, 100 times are associated with the jackpots G10, H10, K10, L10 won in the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, as the time saving giving number. In other words, when the jackpots G10, H10, K10, L10 are won, it is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 to F10, H10 to J10 because the number of time-saving grants that continues until the next jackpot cannot be set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot J10 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (normal state, latent probability state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set is defined as 0 times as the number of times of time reduction regardless of whether the probability variable limit number of times is reached or not. Therefore, since the jackpot J10 has a small number of rounds and is not provided with a time-saving state, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player when winning in the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot J10 won in the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, if the probability variable jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability limit limit, the time saving state that continues until the next big win is given, and when the probability limit number is reached by the big hit, the time saving number of times is set to 100 times.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the number of times of shortening time given after the end of the big win is changed according to the kind of the big win, the game state at the time of winning the big win, and whether or not the variable probability limit number of times has been reached. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state after the end of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga will be described. This variation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table that is referred to for selecting the correspondence (variation pattern scenario) between the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 228, the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in the tenth embodiment defines a variation pattern scenario that is set after the end of the jackpot in association with the jackpot type, the game state when the jackpot is won, and whether or not the limit has been reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228, a variation pattern scenario in which the time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to is defined in association with the situation where the jackpot types are jackpots A10 and D10 and the probability variation limit number has not been reached, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, after the end of the big wins A10 and D10, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined each time the special symbol lottery is executed until the next big win. This is because, when winning one of the jackpots A10 and D10, the probability variable state is set to continue until the next jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 228, when the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won before reaching the variable probability limit number in the normal state or the latent probability state, a fluctuation pattern scenario is set in which the time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until the lottery is executed eight times after the jackpot ends, and the normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the lottery after the ninth time. This is because, in the state where the normal state of the normal pattern is set, when any one of the jackpots B10, E10 and I10 is won within the probability variable limit number of times, the probability variable state with the number of times of shortening time is set eight times. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the probability variable state, when the jackpot B10, E10, I10 is won before reaching the probability variable limit number of times, a variation pattern scenario is set by referring to the time saving table 202gd2 to determine the variation pattern regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the big win. This is because when one of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won in the state where the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot is set is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228, when one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the normal state before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until the lottery is executed 8 times after the jackpot is completed, and the normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the 9th lottery or later. This is because, in the normal state, when one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the probability variable limit number of times, the probability variable state with the number of time reduction times of 8 times is set. In addition, when any one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before reaching the variable probability limit number of times in the latent probability state, a fluctuation pattern scenario is set by referring to a normal table 202dg1 to determine the fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot. This is because, in the latent definite state, if any one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the probability variable limit number of times, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the latent definite state. On the other hand, when one of the jackpots C10, F10 and J10 is won before reaching the probability variable limit number in the time saving state or the probability variable state, a variation pattern scenario is set by referring to a table 202gd2 for time reduction and determining the variation pattern regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the big win. This is because when one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the state where the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot is set is set.

As shown in FIG. 228, when one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won in the normal state or the latent state, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until the 8th lottery is executed after the jackpot is finished, and the normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the 9th lottery or later. This is because if any one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10 and L10 is won while the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the time saving state of eight times is set. On the other hand, when a jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10 is won before reaching the variable probability limit number in the time saving state or the variable probability state, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a table 202dg2 for time saving is referred to until the lottery for 100 times of special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, and a normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the 101st and subsequent lotteries. This is because if any one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10 and L10 is won in the state in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, the time saving state of 100 times is set.

On the other hand, when one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the latent probability state and the number of probability variable limit times is reached in the jackpot, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a normal table 202dg1 is referred to regardless of the number of lotteries after the jackpot ends. This is because if any one of the jackpots C10, F10 and J10 is won while the latent definite state is set, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. In addition, when one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the variable probability state, and the number of probability variable limit times is reached in the jackpot, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to until the lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends, and a normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the lottery after the 101st time. This is because if any one of the jackpots C10, F10, J10 is won while the variable probability state is set, the time saving state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, when a probability variable jackpot other than jackpots C10, F10, J10 is won in a latent probability state and the probability variable limit number of times is reached in the jackpot, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until eight times of lotteries are executed after the jackpot ends, and a normal table 202dg1 is referred to after the 9th lottery. This is because the time-saving state of 8 times the number of times of time-saving is set when winning a probability variable jackpot other than jackpots C10, F10, and J10 while the latent certainty state is set. In addition, when a variable probability big win other than the big wins C10, F10, J10 is won in the variable probability state and the number of probability variable limit times is reached in the big win, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to until the lottery is executed 100 times after the big win is finished, and a normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the lottery after the 101st time. This is because if a variable probability jackpot other than jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probability variable state is set, the time saving state is set to 100 times.

Thus, in the tenth embodiment, when a variable probability big win is won in a variable probability state and the number of times of probability variable limit is reached in the big win, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the table 202dg3 for reaching the limit in the time saving state set after the end of the big win. In other words, it is configured to refer to a table that tends to be executed with an overemphasis on the lottery of the first special symbol when hitting to the right. In other words, when a jackpot is won within the number of times of time saving, the ratio of winning an advantageous jackpot type (a jackpot with a large number of rounds) is configured to be high. By constructing in this way, even if the variable probability limit number of times is reached and the probability variable jackpot is won, even if a disadvantageous (lower advantage) time saving state is set compared to the probability variable state, the player is prevented from being discouraged and is strongly expected to win the jackpot within the number of times of the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 229, a state transition method in the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, there are provided four game states, namely, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the advantageous player, and the time-saving state and variable probability state that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, two kinds of probability variable states are provided, that is, a probability variable state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and a probability variable state that continues until the next jackpot election. In addition, as the time saving state, two types of time saving state, ie, a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 8 times and a time saving state in which the number of times of time saving is 100 times are provided. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the normal state and latent probability state that are disadvantageous to the player are referred to as normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively, the time saving state with a small number of times of time saving (8 times) and the probability variable state are respectively referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, the time saving state with a large number of times of time saving (100 times) is referred to as a return mode, and the probability variable state that continues until the next big win (substantially confirmed state) is referred to as the continuous mode. First, with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in normal mode A will be described.

As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 229, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either the jackpot A10 or D10 determined at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win and one of the big wins B10, C10, E10 and F10 determined at a rate of 83% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either the jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A.例文帳に追加In this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time saving state of the normal pattern is given at least eight times without fail, so that a shift to the continuous mode can be expected by making the jackpot win again within the number of times of the time saving. Also, when a big win is achieved in the normal mode A, the player wins one of the big wins B10, C10, E10, F10 mainly (at a high rate of 83%), and shifts to the chance mode B. In other words, in most cases, it is possible to receive the lottery eight times in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to strongly expect the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

Next, a mode transition method in normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 229, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big win is won. Specifically, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern, when either of the big wins A10 or D10 determined at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the continuous mode advantageous to the player. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁In addition, when the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, either of the big wins B10 or E10 determined at a rate of 43% is won, the mode after the big win is finished is set to the chance mode B.例文帳に追加In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached by the big win, the mode after the big win is set to the chance mode A. - 特許庁Further, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either the jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode A.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and either of the jackpots C10 or F10 determined at a rate of 40% is won, the mode after the jackpot ends is set again to the normal mode B.例文帳に追加That is, a disadvantageous state is set in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not provided. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached due to the big win, the normal mode A is set as the mode after the big win. In other words, even if the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the time saving state is not given. In this way, when a big win is won in the normal mode B, the time-saving state of normal patterns is given only at a rate of 60%, so the normal mode B is more disadvantageous than the normal mode A in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. However, in the normal mode B, since the probability of a big win is tripled or more, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the probability of a big win.

Next, with reference to the center left side of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state not only when a jackpot is won but also when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the center left of FIG. 229, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in the chance mode A (eight consecutive draws of special symbols are lost), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time-saving times.

Next, with reference to the center right side of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in chance mode B will be described. As shown on the center left side of FIG. 229, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a big hit is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the center right of FIG. 229, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackets A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. It should be noted that when the probability variation limit number of times is reached in the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the end of the big win is set to a pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time saving passes in chance mode B (lottery for special symbols is lost eight times in a row), the game shifts to normal mode B, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B as well as in the chance mode A, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a jackpot during the eight time reduction times.

Next, with reference to the lower left part of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 229, in the pullback mode, similarly to the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a big win is won or when the number of times of time saving ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 229, when winning a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the consecutive mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the time saving number of times has passed in the pullback mode (the lottery of special symbols is lost 100 times in a row), the game shifts to the normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win and a normal big win (big wins G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the big win is set to the pullback mode again (the pullback mode is looped).

Next, with reference to the lower right part of FIG. 229, the mode transition method in the consecutive villa mode will be described. As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 229, in the continuous mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big win is won. Concretely, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 229, when winning a normal jackpot (jackpots G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special patterns, the mode after the jackpot ends is set to the withdrawal mode. On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big win, when winning a probability variable big win (big wins A10 to F10, I10, J10) determined at a rate of 90%, the mode after the big win is again set to the continuous mode most advantageous to the player (the continuous mode is looped). In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won and the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, in order to shift to the continuous mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, it is necessary to shift to the chance modes A and B in which the number of times of time saving is set to 8 times, and then win a jackpot within the range of the number of times of time saving of 8 times, which is relatively small. However, once the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, a very advantageous state is formed in which the continuous mode and the big win are repeated at a high rate of 90%, so that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when shifting to the continuous mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 222(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 222(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 222 in the tenth embodiment has a variable probability flag 203ga, a limit counter 203gb, a variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc, a special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd, a special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf, and a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203g, in contrast to the structure of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 183(b)). g, Toku-zu 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh, and the limit reach flag 203gi is different in that it is added. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit type storage area 203e, the small hit start flag 203f, the small hit middle flag 203g, the V passage big hit type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, and the V passage flag 203j are deleted.

Probability variation flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If this variable probability flag 203ga is ON, it indicates that it is set to a special symbol high probability state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is set to a special symbol low probability state. That is, when the variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON, either the variable probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or the latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state) is set as the game state. The variable probability flag 203ga is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to OFF when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244). On the other hand, this variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON at the end of the variable probability jackpot when the probability variable jackpot is won and the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached (see S1676 in FIG. 246). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38). That is, in the tenth embodiment, once the variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON, the variable probability flag 203ga is not set to OFF until the next big win is won, so when the variable probability flag is won, the high probability state of the special symbol set after the end of the big win always continues until the next big win is won unless the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on). is configured to

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next big win is won, but it is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state), when the special symbol fluctuation frequency (special symbol fluctuation frequency) after the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the special symbol high probability state may be terminated. In this case, instead of the variable probability flag 203ga, a variable probability counter for counting the number of remaining lotteries until transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol may be provided.

Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high probability end conditions are prepared, for example, a special figure 1 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high probability state, a special figure 2 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and various special figure high probability end conditions such as lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, lottery result of winning a small hit). The special symbol high probability state may be terminated when the condition is met.

The limit counter 203gb is a counter for counting the probability variation limit number of times. If the value of the limit counter 203gb is less than 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol high probability state. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203gb is 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, so the state after the jackpot end is set to the special symbol low probability state. The limit counter 203gb has an initial value set to 0, and each time the probability variable jackpot is won, the value is updated by adding 1 at the end of the probability variable jackpot (see S1674 in FIG. 246). In addition, this limit counter 203gb is reset to 0 when it is determined that the variable probability limit has been reached (the counter value is updated to 11) at the end of the variable probability jackpot, and at the end of the normal jackpot (see S1672 in FIG. 246).

The fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc is a storage area for storing data indicating a fluctuation pattern scenario. At the start of the variation of the special symbol, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation time) is read according to the variation pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc and the number of variations after the end of the big win. Data corresponding to the variation pattern scenario determined by referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202ga is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc at the end of the jackpot (see S1683 in FIG. 246).

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is a flag that is set to ON when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the first entrance 64 or the right first entrance 64r) (see S1816 in FIG. 235). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1877 in FIG. 239). When this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on and the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the design is executed (see S1875 in FIG. 239). As a result, it is possible to prevent the trouble that the big win is started redundantly when the big win is won in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

The special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is in the middle of a big hit change. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to ON when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 6450) (see S1926 in FIG. 241). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S1977 in FIG. 244). When the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is over, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol by removing the first special symbol is executed (see S1974 in FIG. 244). As a result, it is possible to prevent the trouble that the big win is started redundantly when the big win is won in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, and when the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Depending on the counter values of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg, it is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the jackpot and when the jackpot is started. While this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided (see S1902: Yes in FIG. 240). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by the off symbol (see S1873 in FIG. 239), and is set to OFF when avoiding the process for executing the variation display of the second special symbol (see S1902 in FIG. 240).

The limit reaching flag 203gi is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. If this limit reaching flag 203gi is on, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached (the probability variable jackpot has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it means that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached. The limit reaching flag 203gi is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203gb is updated to 11, which is the probability variable limit number, at the end of the jackpot (see S1677 in FIG. 246). Also, this limit reaching flag 203gi is set to OFF at the start of the big win (when setting the stop display of the first symbol indicating the big win) (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244).

Next, referring to FIG. 230(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230(a), the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(a)) in that the final state display selection table 222c is deleted and the back mode lottery table 222ga is added. The back mode lottery table 222ga is a data table defining data for lottery of the back mode (performance mode) indicating the degree of expectation in which the variable probability state (continuous mode) is set in the continuous mode and the pullback mode. Details of the back mode lottery table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back mode lottery table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 231, in the back mode lottery table 222ga, the value of the performance lottery counter determined to change the back mode is defined for each combination of the current game state and the type of the currently set back mode. Specifically, when the game state is the variable probability state and the currently set back mode is the wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of the variable probability state), the forest mode is defined in association with the range of the production counter 223e from "0 to 9". Therefore, when the probability variation state and the wilderness area are set, it is determined to shift to the forest area with high probability variation expectation with a probability of 1/10 (10/100) every time the lottery for the special pattern is executed. Note that the back mode of the sky area is not associated with the value of the effect counter 223e, so there is no possibility of jumping from the wilderness area to the sky area.

In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state and the currently set rear mode is the forest area (the rear mode in which the degree of expectation of the probability variable state is relatively high), the wilderness mode is defined in association with the range of the production counter 223e from 0 to 2, and the sky mode is defined in association with 5. Therefore, when the variable probability state and the forest area are set, every time the lottery for the special pattern is executed, it is determined with a probability of 3/100 to shift to the wilderness area with low probability variable expectation, and it is determined to shift to the sky area where the probability variable state is determined with a probability of 1/100. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 231, in the state where the sky area is set in the variable probability state, the lottery for transition to another back mode is not performed. Therefore, since the sky area, which is the most pleasing background mode, can be continued for a longer period of time, the interest of the player can be enhanced. In addition, if the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first back mode is always set to the wilderness area. In other words, in order to shift the back mode to the sky area, first, it is necessary to break through the lottery for transition to the forest area with a probability of 1/10 in the wilderness area, and then break through the lottery for transition to the sky area with a probability of 1/100 before falling to the wilderness area in the forest area. That is, since it is relatively difficult to move to the sky area even in the variable probability state, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction when moving to the sky area.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time-saving state set based on winning the normal jackpot, when the wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of variable probability state) is set as the back mode, if the value of the production counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 4", it is shifted to the forest area. That is, the area is shifted to a forest area with a high probability variation expectation with a probability of 1/20 (5/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 14", it shifts (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, compared to the case where the variable state is set, the probability of shifting from the wilderness area to the forest area is low, and the probability of shifting (falling) from the forest area to the wilderness area is increased. In other words, since the ratio of setting the wilderness area (residence ratio) is high, it is possible to realize the playability of guessing the current game state from the backside mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time saving state set based on reaching the probability variable limit number of times, when the wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of the probability variable state) is set as the back mode, If the value of the production counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is shifted to the forest area. That is, it is shifted to a forest area with a high probability variation expectation with a probability of 1/5 (20/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0", it shifts (falls) to the wilderness area. That is, in the time-saving state set to reach the probability variable limit number of times, it is configured to be most likely to be set in the forest area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player guess that it is a chance rather than a time-saving state based on a normal jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230 (B), the configuration of RAM223 in the 10th embodiment is the provisional hitting judgment flag 223H, the provisional short information update area 223i, the time -saving lower limit flag 223J, the temporary short information update, for the configuration of the RAM223 in the 7th embodiment (and first embodiment). Including the order of order is different in that the flag is 223k, the fluctuation flag 223m before the end of the time, and the state production counter 223N are deleted.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the tenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 232 to 246. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 232, timer interrupt processing 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described. This timer interrupt process 10 is a process executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds like the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the timer interrupt process 10 in the tenth embodiment, the processes of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111 are the same as the processes of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Further, in the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 232) in the tenth embodiment, after executing the process of S102, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S141), and then the special design change process 10 is executed instead of the special design change process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment (S142), and S105. After executing the processes of S107, S110 and S111, the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the details of the special symbol variation process 10 (S142) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for performing various settings related to the variable display of special symbols. FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 10 (S142). When the special symbol variation processing 10 (S142) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big win is currently in progress (S281), and when it is determined that a big win is in progress (S281: Yes), there is no possibility of setting the variation display, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S281, when it is determined that the present is not in the jackpot (S281: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating) (S282). 3) is executed, and then the process of S287 for executing the variation process regarding the special figure 2 is performed. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S282, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf is greater than 0 (the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner) (S282: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process (S284) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284) executes the process during special figure 1 variation. When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284) is completed, next, it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf is 0) (S285), and when it is determined that the timing is the end of the variation time (S285: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing (S286) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S287. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S286) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S285, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S285: No), the process of S286 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S287.

In each process of S287-S291, the same process as each process of S282-S286 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S287 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is varying) (S287), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S287: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S288) is executed, and then this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S288) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S287, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (S287: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S289) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, but this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289) executes the process during special figure 2 variation.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is 0) (S290), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation time (S290: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (S291) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation stop process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S292, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S290: No), the process of S291 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 234, the first special symbol variation start process (S283), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S142 in FIG. 233) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S283).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S283), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S1801), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S1802). In the process of S1802, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S1802: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (S1803), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after subtraction is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1803). 1804).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM223. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

When the processing of S1804 is finished, next, the data of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S1805). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S1805 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is executed (S1806). This first special symbol big hit determination process (S1806) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 235, but it is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and based on the set game state.

When the processing of S1806 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed (see FIG. 236). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol suitability determination result and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (S1808). This game state update process (S1808), which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 237, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the variable probability flag 203ga and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of S1808 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S1802: No), this processing is finished as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 235, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S1811). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1812). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the variable probability flag 203ga is on (that is, the variable probability state of the special symbol) (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether or not the random value that becomes the big hit defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 223 (a)) matches the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S1813). . On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ga is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S1812: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 223 (a)) is determined to match the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S 1814).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S1813 or S1814 is a big win (S1815), and if the lottery result is a big win (S1815: Yes), the special figure 1 big win flag 203gd is set to ON (S1816), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big win (S1817). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the big win pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S1818), the data corresponding to the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203ec (S1819), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S1815, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost (S1815: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1820), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234), will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S1806 in FIG. 235), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, whether or not the first special symbol big hit is set (S1821). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is ON. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON in the process of S1816 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON) (S1821: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S1811 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235), the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 224 (a)) from the jackpot type is determined (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, in the process of S1821, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is off) (S1821: No), the process of S1822 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1823.

In the process of S1823, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S1823). Next, the variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 228) corresponding to the data stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203203gc is identified, and the variation pattern table associated with the current number of variations (the number of lotteries) in the identified variation pattern scenario is read (S1824). When the process of S1824 is completed, then select the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the read variation pattern table (S1825), then based on the selected variation pattern, set the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S1826).

When the processing of S1826 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S1827), then the first special symbol variation start is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1828), the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1825 is set to the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf (S1829), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the game state update process (S1808), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 234) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S1808). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the state of the probability variation flag 203ga which is the condition for setting the game state and the value of the counter 203k during the time saving, only the value of the counter 203k during the time saving is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Configure.

Then, the variable probability flag 203ga which is set to ON, which will be described in detail later, is configured to be set to OFF when the big win variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed (when the big win game is executed).

That is, of the two conditional elements (the state of the variable probability flag 203ga and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k) referred to when setting the game state, one conditional element is updated when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and the other conditional elements can be updated when the special symbols stop fluctuating, thereby facilitating diversification of the game state set by combining the two conditional elements.

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 237) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S1831: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S1832), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203k is set (S1833). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k after the subtraction has reached 0 (S1834), and if it is determined that it has become 0 (S1834: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835). Here, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835: No), it is a variable probability state (that is, the probability state) in which the time-saving game is not given, so a state command indicating the probability state is set (S1836), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S1835, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203ga is not set to ON (S1835: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1837), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1834, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time saving is not 0 (S1834: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to be set continuously until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit). In addition, for example, instead of the probability variation flag 203ga, a probability variation counter is provided, the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and when the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. can be configured to

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S1808) shown with reference to FIG. 237 is set as the game state update process at the start of special figure fluctuation, and separately from this, the game state update process at the time of special figure fluctuation stop for updating the value of the probability variation counter at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation display is finished By providing the game state update process, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol are executed at different timings. can be made

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S284) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284). When this first special symbol variation in-execution process (S284) is executed, first, the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf is updated by subtracting 1 (S1851), then the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1852), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 239, the first special symbol variation stop process (S286), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S142 in FIG. 233), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S286).

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S286), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON (that is, whether it is time to stop the first special symbol in the jackpot pattern) (S1871). In the processing of S1871, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON (S1871: Yes), then the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is a value of 1 or more (that is, the second special symbol variation display is being executed) is determined (S1872). In the process of S1872, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is a value of 1 or more (the second special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation) (S1872: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1873), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set (S1874). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S1875).

When the processing of S1875 is completed, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1876), and the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is updated according to the current game state (S1878). Then, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge, the variable probability flag 203ga, the time saving medium counter 203k and the limit reaching flag 203gi are all reset (S1878), the jackpot medium flag 203d is set to ON (S1879), and the process proceeds to S1880.

On the other hand, in the process of S1871, when the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S1871: Yes), and in the process of S1872, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is 0.

In the process of S1880, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S1880). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1881), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S288), the process (S1873 to S1879) of stopping the variation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S1872: No), the process (S1875) is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol during variable display with the lost symbol.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped-displayed as a missing symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in the present embodiment, the start of the big hit is set in the process of S1876 based on the game state stored in the state storage area 203ec at the time of winning in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). You may make it set the start of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S288) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 233) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S288). In this second special symbol variation start process (S288), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 239, the detailed description of the elements that are only different in the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S290), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to OFF (S1902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is a flag that is set to ON while stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is ON in the process of S1901, without executing each process of S1903 to S1910 to set the start of fluctuation, the process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S1901: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is acquired (S1903), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a value greater than 0 (S1904). In the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S1904: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (S1905), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 after subtraction is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command. (S1906).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 of the main controller 110.

When the processing of S1906 ends, next, the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted to the previous data (S1907). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S1907 is completed, then, the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S1908). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, but this second special symbol big hit determination process (S1908) is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on the set game state based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2.

When the processing of S1908 is finished, next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed (see FIG. 242). Although details will be described later, this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) ends, then the game state update process described above is executed (S1910 (S1808)). When the process of S1910 ends, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0 (S1904: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S1908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S290 in FIG. 240) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) is executed, so here mainly the differences from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) will be described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S1921). Then, the processing of S1922 to S1924 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on the acquired counter values and the state of the probability variation flag 203ga. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and otherwise the same control as the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 235) is executed.

When the processing of S1923 or S1924 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big hit (S1925), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (S1925: Yes), the processing of S1926 to S1929 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to a big hit is executed, and this processing ends. In each process of these S1926-S1929, the same process as each process of S1816-S1819 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1925, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1925: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1820), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S288 in FIG. 240) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909 in FIG. 242), in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 236) and the process related to the variation of the first special symbol, the target of variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S289), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289). In this second special symbol variation in-execution process (S289), a process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S289) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg is updated by subtracting 1 (S1951), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1952), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S291) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (S291). This second special symbol variation stop processing (S291) executes the processing when stopping the variation of the special figure 2.

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S291), the variation target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in contrast to the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 239), so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, details of the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 10 (S1531) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. Among the jackpot control processing 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, in each processing of S1601 to S1612, the same processing as each processing of S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control processing 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending period (ending effect) (S1612), a jackpot end process for setting the end of the current jackpot game is executed (S1631), and then this process is finished. Details of this jackpot ending process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S1631). This jackpot end process (S1631) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end processing (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S1671), and if it is determined that the jackpot this time is a variable probability jackpot (S1671: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203gb (S1674). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203gb after addition by the processing of S1674 is 11 (S1675), and if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after addition is 11 (S1675: Yes), the limit reach flag 203gi is set to ON (S1677), and the process proceeds to S1672.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1675, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after addition is not 11 (a value of 10 or less) (S1675: No), the variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON (S1676), and the process proceeds to S1678.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of 1671 that the current jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot (normal jackpot) (S1671: No), the processing of S1674 to S1677 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1672. In the process of S1672, the value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0 (S1672), the variable probability flag 203ga is set to OFF (S1673), and the process proceeds to S1678.

In the process of S1678, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit reaching flag 203gi is read from the time reduction grant table 202e (see FIG. 225) (S1678), and the read number of time reductions is set as the counter value of the time reduction medium counter 203k (S1679). Next, a time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S1680), and a state command corresponding to the game state after the big hit is set (S1681).

Next, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit reaching flag 203gi is specified (S1682), and the data indicating the specified variation pattern scenario is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203gc (S1683). Next, the end of the big win is set (S1684), the flag 203d during the big win is set to OFF (S1685), and this process is finished.

By executing this jackpot end processing, it is possible to appropriately set the game state according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and whether or not the probability variable limit number of times has been reached.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 247, the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 10 (S2141) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

The variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment differs from the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in that the effect setting process 10 (S2831) is executed instead of the effect setting process (S8004).

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the effect setting process 10 (S2831) executed in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process 10 (S2831). This effect setting process 10 (S2831) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 247, S2141) executed in the tenth embodiment.

In the effect setting process 10 (S2831), first, it is determined whether or not the currently executed variation display is a variation pattern of a big hit (S2921). In the processing of S2921, when it is determined that the currently executed variation display is the variation pattern for the big win (S2921: Yes), the variation display mode for the big win is selected as the variation display mode (S2922), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is not a big hit variation pattern (S2921: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state (S2923). In the process of S2923, when it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state or the time saving state (S2923: No), the process proceeds to S2928. On the other hand, in the processing of S2923, if the current game state is determined to be in a probable or time -saving state (S2923: YES), read the back mode lottery table 222Ga (see Figure 231) (S2924), and the current game state and whether the limit arrival is reached. (S2925), then determines whether or not the back mode is changed (S2926). If the back mode is not to be changed (S2926: No), the process proceeds to S2928.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the back surface mode is to be changed (S2926: Yes), a display back image change command corresponding to the rear surface mode after change is set (S2927), and the process proceeds to S2928.

In the process of S2928, as the variable display mode, the variable display mode for losing is selected (S2928), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the normal modes A and B (normal state, latent probability state) that are disadvantageous to the player, the chance modes A and B that are more likely to shift to the advantageous continuous mode (time reduction state with 8 times of time reduction, variable probability state), the continuous mode that is most advantageous to the player (variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot), and the pullback mode that is relatively advantageous to the player (time reduction state with the number of time reduction of 100 times). ), and when a big win is won in normal modes A and B, most cases shift to either chance mode A or B (possibility of direct shift to consecutive mode is reduced). In other words, unless a big win is won in either of the chance modes A and B (that is, unless a big win is won in a lottery of special patterns within eight times after shifting to the chance modes A and B), it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode which is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment just by shifting to the consecutive villa mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the 10th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the continuous mode, the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot ends at a high rate (when the probability variable jackpot of winning at a rate of 90%) is set, and even when a normal jackpot at a low rate (10% rate) is won or when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the game is always shifted to the pullback mode without directly falling into a disadvantageous state. Then, when a big win is won in the pull-back mode, it is configured to shift (return) only to the consecutive mode or the pull-back mode as in the case of winning a big win in the consecutive mode. In other words, as long as a big win is won within the number of times of time reduction in the pullback mode, there is no possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous game state, so the degree of advantage can be increased when shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game when shifting to the consecutive villa mode.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the mode shifts to the continuous mode (variable probability state that continues until the next big win), and the continuous mode and the jackpot are repeated by continuing to win the variable probability jackpot that wins at a rate of 90%, and when the upper limit number of times (probability variable limit number of times) of the probability variable state of the special symbol is reached, regardless of whether the variable probability jackpot is won or the normal jackpot is won, instead of setting the pullback mode, the jackpot is won within the time-saving number of times (100 times). When (so-called pullback occurs), the ratio of winning an advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) is more likely to be higher than when winning a jackpot during the variable probability state. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special pattern is configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage (selection ratio of the small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special pattern, and the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is remarkably lowered in the pullback mode set by reaching the probability variable limit number of times. That is, the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly set to 600 seconds regardless of the result of the lottery), and the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once. In other words, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to increase the chance of winning a big hit. As a result, when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the big win will be brought back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the tenth embodiment, only when the variable probability limit number of times is reached and the time-saving state (pull-back mode) is set, during the pull-back mode, the lottery of the first special symbol, which is relatively advantageous, is overemphasized to be executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be constructed so that lottery of the first special pattern is easily executed (the variation pattern is determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202dg3) even when the pullback mode is set after the end of the big win by winning the normal big win in the continuous mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more strongly anticipate that the pullback will occur in each pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, when shifting to the multi-street mode, the multi-street mode is always continued until the next big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time the special pattern lottery condition is satisfied in the continuous mode, a lottery (falling lottery) to determine whether to transition (fall) to a low probability state (retraction mode or normal mode A) of the special pattern (falling lottery) may be adopted. In this case, when it is determined that the player will fall to the low probability state of the special pattern within 100 times after the end of the big win, the pullback mode may be set until the lottery of a total of 100 times is completed, while the normal mode A may be set when it is determined that the player will fall after the 100th time. Furthermore, in this case, when falling to the pullback mode by the drop lottery, the lottery of the first special symbol that is advantageous may be overemphasized during the set pullback mode. With this configuration, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game will be pulled back after falling into the pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment described above, when the jackpot and the consecutive game mode are repeated in the consecutive game mode to reach the probability variable limit number of times and the pullback mode is set, only the lottery of the first special symbols that are advantageous (i.e., the advantageous jackpot type is easily determined when the jackpot is won) is easily executed, so that the player can be strongly conscious of wanting to win the jackpot during the pullback mode.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the pull-back mode set based on the reaching of the probability variable limit number of times, when the jackpot cannot be won within the time-saving number of times and shifts (falls) to the normal mode A (normal state), winning the jackpot in the normal mode A creates a special state in which the rate of shifting to the consecutive mode is higher than usual. As a result, even after shifting from the withdrawal mode to the normal mode A, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modification differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 220) in the tenth embodiment described above in that a distribution winning device 750 is provided in place of the first ball inlet 64, a right second ball inlet 6400r is provided as a start winning outlet that triggers the second special symbol lottery instead of the right first ball inlet 64r, and The difference is that the second entrance 6450 is omitted. The sorting prize winning device 750 is configured to be able to sort game balls flowing into the inside of the sorting prize winning device 750 through an upper opening 750a to either a central first ball entry 64c which is a kind of starting prize winning opening which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, or a central second ball entry 6400c which is a kind of starting prize winning opening which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the game balls flowing into the distribution winning device 750 through the opening 750a are received by a distribution member 750b provided directly under the opening 750a, and flow down toward either the central first ball entrance 64c or the central second ball entrance 6400c. In addition, the distribution member 750b is configured to be variable between a state of being tilted to the right in front view (see FIG. 249) and a state of being tilted to the left in front view. The game ball that was being held is dropped toward the central first ball entrance 64c arranged on the lower left side in front view. On the other hand, when the disadvantage w3 opening member 750b is tilted to the left in the front view, the game ball flowing in from the opening 750a is received by the right part of the distribution member 750b, and the weight of the received game ball rotates clockwise to switch to the right side in the front view. That is, every time a game ball enters the opening 750a, the distribution member 750b catches the game ball and alternately flows down to the central first ball inlet 64c and the central second ball inlet 6400c. As a result, the lottery for special symbols can be executed more efficiently.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 250, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided within the main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, in this modification, with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 222 (a)) in the tenth embodiment described above, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the time reduction giving table 202e, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga are only partially changed. Therefore, illustration of the configuration of the ROM 202 is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 250, the details of the normal table 202dg1 forming the variation pattern table 202d in this modified example will be described. This normal table 202dg1, like the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above, is a data table defining data for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (fluctuation time) according to the lottery result of the lottery when a special symbol lottery is executed in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. FIG. 250(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202dg1.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), the normal table 202dg1 in this modified example is the same as the distribution of the first special symbol in the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)) in the tenth embodiment regardless of the symbol type, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. That is, in this modification, in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of normal symbols is set, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected (super long variation of 600 seconds cannot be selected) similarly to the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 249, in the present modification, a sorting device 750 (structure for alternately winning game balls into the central first ball entrance 64c and the central second ball entrance 6400c) is provided at the position where the first ball entrance 64 (the starting prize winning opening that triggers the lottery for the first special symbol) in the tenth embodiment was provided, and by performing the normal game method (left-handed) in the normal state of the normal symbols. , the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are arranged in parallel (simultaneously) to facilitate execution. That is, since the lottery of the second special symbol is executed without performing an irregular game method (a game method of hitting right in the normal state of normal symbols), the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that of the tenth embodiment for the purpose of improving the game efficiency.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250(b), the details of the limit reached time table 202dg3 in this modified example will be described. This limit reaching time table 202dg3, like the limit reaching time table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment, is a data table that may be referred to for determining (selecting) a special symbol variation pattern (fluctuation time) when forcibly set to a special symbol low probability state after the end of the big win despite reaching the probability variable limit number of times and winning the probability variable jackpot.

FIG. 250(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202dg3 for reaching the limit. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modified example differs from the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment in that the corresponding relationship between the value range of the variation type counter CS1 for each lottery result and the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected (determined) is opposite between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. are doing. That is, the correspondence relationship in the first special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modified example. Further, the correspondence relationship in the second special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modified example. Therefore, in this modification, when the variation pattern is determined with reference to the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)), the extremely long variation time of 600 seconds is always set as the variation time of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result, while the relatively short variation time (3 seconds to 30 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, during the period when the table 202dg3 for the time of reaching the limit is referred to (the variable probability limit number of times is reached and the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win is 101 or later), when the game ball is shot aiming at the distribution winning device 750 by hitting left, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed only every 600 seconds, while the lottery for the second special symbol can be relatively frequently performed. In other words, since the lottery of the second special pattern, which is advantageous when winning a big win (a big win type in which a probability variable state that continues until the next big win is given) can be easily determined, a special normal state (special state) having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state shifted under other conditions (when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or when a normal big win is won) can be formed. Therefore, since the player can be made to want to continue the game during the special state, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 251, the details of time reduction grant table 202e in this modification are explained. This time saving grant table 202e, like the time saving grant table 202e in the tenth embodiment, is a data table that is referred to when setting the number of times of working hours (setting the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203k) according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction provision table 202e in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 251, the time reduction grant table 202e (see FIG. 251) in this modification differs from the defined contents of the time reduction grant table 202e (see FIG. 227) in the tenth embodiment described above in that the number of time reduction grants of some of the second special symbol jackpots (jackpots I10, J10) is changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state, the number of time reductions that continue until the next jackpot is defined in association with the jackpot that has not reached the probability variation limit number of times (for example, 65536 times), and the jackpot after reaching the probability variation limit number of times is defined in association with the number of times of time reduction of 8 times. In addition, for the jackpot I10 won in the latent probability state, even if the winning is before reaching the probability variable limit or even if the probability variable limit number of times is reached, 8 times are defined as the number of time saving times in association. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot I10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set is associated with the same time reduction giving times as other probability variable jackpots. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times.

Moreover, regarding the number of times of time saving of the jackpot J10, the same number of times of time saving as the jackpot C10 and the jackpot F10 are defined in association with each other. That is, 8 times are defined in association with the jackpot J10 (three-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state as the number of times of time saving. In addition, 0 times is defined as the number of times of shortening time even if the hit is before reaching the variable probability limit or the number of times of the variable probability limit is reached for the jackpot J10 won in the latent probability state. In other words, when the jackpot J10 is won in the latent probability state, the time-saving state of normal symbols is not provided even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot J10 (three-round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variable state) in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set is associated with the same time reduction giving times as other probability variable jackpots. In other words, the number of times of time saving that continues until the next big win is defined in association with the win before reaching the variable probability limit number of times, and the number of times of time saving of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the win after reaching the probability variable limit number of times.

As described above, in this modification, the degree of advantage in the case of winning the probability variable jackpot (jackpots I10, J10) in the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal state is made higher than in the tenth embodiment. That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in a normal state, the number of times of shortening the working hours to be continued until the next jackpot is substantially set at a rate of 27% (when the jackpot I10 is won), and the number of times of time saving is set 8 times at a rate of 73% (when the jackpots J10 to L10 are won) (that is, it shifts to either of the chance modes A and B). In other words, in the normal state, when the lottery of the first special pattern is a big win, the ratio of shifting to the continuous mode after the end of the big win (7%, which is the ratio of winning either of the big wins A10 and D10) is set to be nearly four times higher than the ratio of getting a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern and shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be played with a strong expectation of winning a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols. In addition, when the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250) is referred to and the transition is made to the special state in which the variation pattern is selected, the possibility of direct transition to the continuous mode is increased, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved in the transition to the special state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modified example will be described. The variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modified example is, like the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment, the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot and the type of variation pattern table to be referenced. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga.

As shown in FIG. 252, in this modification, the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment differs only in that the variation pattern scenario set when the probability variation limit number of times is reached is partially changed. More specifically, when a variable probability big win is won in a variable probability state and the number of probability variable limit times is reached by the big win, a variation pattern scenario is set in which a time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until the 100th lottery is executed after the big win is completed, and a limit reaching time table 202dg3 is referred to after the 101st lottery. In other words, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached by repeating the continuous state and the big win, and the pull-back mode is set, and the big win cannot be won during the pull-back mode (time-saving number of times is 100 times), in the subsequent normal state, the limit reaching time table 202dg3 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed. Therefore, the lottery of the second special pattern, which is comparatively advantageous (the ratio of direct transition to the consecutive game mode is high when winning the jackpot) can be overemphasized and executed, so that the player can be made to want to continue the game even after the pullback mode is finished. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment is configured to set a special state in which the ratio of shifting to the consecutive game mode by winning the jackpot increases when the probability variable limit number of times is reached by repeating the consecutive game mode and the big win, the pullback mode is set, and the game shifts to the normal mode A disadvantageous to the player because the jackpot cannot be won during the pullback mode. In other words, a state is formed in which the lottery of the first special pattern which is disadvantageous (it is difficult to set the continuous mode even if the jackpot is won in the normal state) is hardly executed, and the lottery of the advantageous second special pattern (the ratio of setting the continuous mode is high when the jackpot is won in the normal state) is overemphasized and the lottery can be executed. As a result, the player's motivation for playing the game can be improved when the state shifts to the special state.

Here, it is generally known that a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a variable probability state or a time-saving state. Among such conventional type game machines, once shifting to an advantageous game state, there is a machine in which an advantageous game state and a big win are repeated at a relatively high rate, and the interest of a player is improved when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state. However, in such a conventional game machine, when an advantageous game state ends and a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal state) is set, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the player want to continue the game in the disadvantageous game state.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when a special state (a state in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to and a variation pattern is determined) is set after the end of the withdrawal mode, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game in the disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in this modification, only when the pullback mode is set by reaching the probability variable limit number of times, the special state is set after the pullback mode is finished, but it is not limited to this. For example, even when the return mode is set after the end of the big win by winning the normal jackpot in the continuous mode, the normal mode A (normal state) after the end of the return mode may be set to the special state. By constructing in this way, the special state can be always set when the pullback mode is finished, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the decrease in the player's motivation for the game when the pullback mode is finished.

In this modified example, in the normal mode A after the pullback mode based on reaching the probability variable limit number of times is completed, the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to until the jackpot is won to determine the variation pattern, but it is not limited to this. For example, the change pattern may be determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202dg3 only until the lottery for a specific number of times (100 times) is completed after the end of the pullback. By constructing in this way, when a so-called addiction occurs after the pullback mode ends, the player can be prevented from losing sight of the dead time and can be made to decide whether or not to quit the game once the lottery of a specific number of times is completed.

In this modified example, only when the pullback mode ends and shifts to the normal mode A, an advantageous state is formed in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be biased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the case where the lottery of special symbols is continuously lost over a specific number of times (for example, 200 times) or more in the normal mode A or the normal mode B, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes extremely long (600 seconds). By configuring in this way, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the motivation for the game can be hardly lowered.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 272. FIG. In the seventh embodiment described above, in order to make it easier for the player to win a jackpot in a disadvantageous normal state than to win a jackpot in an advantageous time-saving state, it is easier for the player to set a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a game state after the end of the big win. It is configured so that the small win in the normal state is higher than the small win.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous period in which the second special pattern reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) can be acquired during the time saving state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous period in which acquisition is more difficult than the advantageous period, and the disadvantageous period is set before the advantageous period. The game is constructed so that the game executed after the big winning game is more advantageous to the player when the big winning game is executed during the advantageous period of the time saving state than when the big winning game is executed during the unfavorable period of the time saving state. That is, it is configured so that executing a big win game after a specific condition is established (after an advantageous period is set) is more advantageous to the player (the second special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 reserved ball is easier to execute after the big win game is completed) than executing the big win game during the period from setting of a time saving state that is advantageous to the player to establishment of the specific condition (until the advantageous period is set).

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the time saving state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game. It is configured to be advantageous to the player.

By configuring in this way, a first game method (a game method for winning a V prize in a small winning game executed during a disadvantageous period) of quickly executing a jackpot game (executing a jackpot game in a state where no special figure 2 reserved balls are secured or only a small amount of special figure 2 reserved balls are secured), and knowing the risk of requiring time and holding balls until ending the time saving state, end the time saving state while keeping many reserved balls of the second special pattern, A player can be made to select a second game method of generating a V prize with a small win after the time saving state is finished.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are provided for ending the time-saving state, and further, according to the game method executed by the player (left-handed game, right-handed game). Then, it is determined whether it is in a state immediately before each time saving end condition is satisfied (the condition before time saving end is satisfied), and when it is determined that the condition before time saving end is satisfied for one time saving end condition, a performance (game method guidance performance) for playing a game by a game method in which another time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the one time saving end condition in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game during the time saving state (to lengthen the game period during the time saving state), among the plurality of time saving end conditions, only the element for establishing one time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) is updated, and the element for establishing the other time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol) is not updated at all. It was configured as

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbols can be reserved and stored, and by ending the time-saving state with the lottery rights for the second special symbols being retained and stored, the lottery for the second special symbols, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbols, can be executed in the normal state set after the end of the time-saving state. In other words, it is constructed so as to maximize the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed during the time saving state and execute the performance capable of terminating the time saving state while holding and storing more lottery rights for the second special symbols.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which makes it easier to acquire the lottery right than when the game state other than the time-saving state (for example, the normal state) is set, is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol. The time saving state is terminated when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (10 times). Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol to be executed during the time saving state based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of retained memories of the lottery right of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the remaining lottery number of special symbols until the time saving state ends (until the number of times of special symbol lottery in the time saving state reaches 10 times). , and the acquisition expectation degree of the number of special 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving is made different according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol selected during the time saving state. That is, based on the timing of increasing/decreasing the number of special 2 reserved balls during the time saving state, the number of the special 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state can be easily increased or decreased.

More specifically, as the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) executed in the last half period of the time saving state (for example, the 9th time and the 10th time of the time saving), an extremely short variation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) that makes it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the special figure 2 variation, and a long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) that can easily acquire the number of special figure 2 reserved balls are configured to be selected according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state is more likely to increase when the player temporarily interrupts the right hitting game than when the player continues the right hitting game. Specifically, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is set to the upper limit (4) during the special figure 2 fluctuation of a specific time saving number (for example, the 8th time saving), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the remaining number of time saving It is configured to be an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds).

By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the time-saving state can be made to play the game while considering whether or not to execute the right-handed game instead of simply continuing the right-handed game. In other words, it is possible to provide novel playability in which it is advantageous not to play the game.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, during the time-saving state, a guidance effect capable of guiding the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be made to play a game that requires the skill of the player to play the game according to the performance contents of the guide performance being executed, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game in the time saving state from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

The eleventh embodiment differs from the above-described seventh and eighth embodiments in that a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, the game board 13 of the eleventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the position of the V winning device 6500 is changed from the left side of the board to the right side of the board, the position of the through gate 67 is changed from the position below the V winning device 6500, and the position of the first variable winning device 65 is changed from the lower center of the board to the left side of the board. They are different and otherwise identical. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the first variable winning device 65 are disposed at positions where game balls flowing down the left side game area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 are more likely to win than game balls flowing down the right side game area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the V winning device is located at a position where game balls flowing down the right side area are easier to win than game balls flowing down the left side area. 6500, a through gate 67, and a second entrance 6400 accompanied by an electric accessory 6400a.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the normal state is set and when the big win game is being executed, the left-hand hitting game in which the game ball flows down mainly to the left area is a game method advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the right area of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is arranged above the right side area, and almost all the game balls fired by the right-handed game are caused to flow down from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 253) on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6400f1 of the V winning device 6500 by the nail planted in the game board 13, and to the left end portion of the V winning device 6500. directed towards.

Further, as described in the above seventh embodiment, the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is configured such that when it is closed, a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass is formed on its upper surface (see FIG. 179). Therefore, by performing the right-handed game while the small winning game is being executed, the game ball can be surely won to the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game.

In the state where the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is closed (a state in which a small winning game is not executed), game balls flowing down the right side area pass through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the closed state, pass through the through gate 67 and reach the electric accessory 640a in the same manner as in the above-described seventh embodiment, and are distributed to the flow path flowing down toward the out port 66 without passing through the through gate 67. It is configured so that

In the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 6400a associated with the second ball entrance 6400 is easily opened, so that a right-handed game is performed.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the ball is configured to reach the V winning device 6500 first in the right-handed game executed during the time saving state. Therefore, when the small winning game is executed during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the ball from passing through the through gate 67 and entering the second ball entrance 6400 during the small winning game period. As a result, it is possible to manage the increase in the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol during the time saving state by varying the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 6400 are arranged below the V winning device 6500 to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 6400 during the small winning game. It may be configured such that even if the game ball is won in the pattern lottery, the game ball cannot reach the second ball entrance 6400 associated with the electric accessory 6400a to be opened. In this case, since the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 during the small winning game period, it is possible to suppress the situation where the reserved memory of the normal symbols is exhausted during the small winning game and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly executed.

Alternatively, only the through gate 67 may be arranged below the V winning device 6500, and the second ball entrance 6400 accompanied by the electric accessory 6400a may be arranged above the V winning device 6500. In this case, since the second ball entrance 6400 can be arranged on the upstream side of the right region, the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second ball entrance 6400 during the time saving state, and the game can be smoothly executed during the time saving state.

Here, the game contents in the state in which the time-saving state is set will be briefly described as to the differences from the seventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is configured to be different based on the number of special symbol lotteries in the time saving state (remaining time short number of times) and the number of pending memories of the second special symbol. option).

Then, a variation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state makes it possible to create a state in which it is possible to secure the reserve storage of many second special symbols and a state in which it is difficult to secure when the time saving state ends. Further, the number of reserved and stored second special patterns at the end of the time-saving state can be easily increased by interrupting the right-handed game at a specific timing rather than continuously executing the right-handed game during the time-saving state. With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily select a game method during the time saving state, so that the degree of advantage of the game to be executed after the time saving state ends (the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery held and stored) can be varied, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, the period until the special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is executed six times during the time saving state) is configured to be a disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol than the period after the predetermined period (the period during which the 7th to 10th special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is performed during the time saving state). In other words, the period after the lapse of the predetermined period is configured to be an advantageous period in which the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be easily secured rather than the predetermined period after the time saving state is set.

By constructing in this way, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the number of reserve balls of the second special symbol can be changed according to the number of time saving times at the time of winning. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to play a game for generating a V prize during the small winning game according to the number of retained balls of the second special pattern secured at the time of winning the small winning.

That is, when the normal state is set after the end of the big winning game (V big winning) executed on the basis of the winning of the game ball during the time saving state and the winning of the game ball during the small winning game, it is not possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special patterns which are advantageous to the player, so that the lottery of the second special patterns is executed for the number of reserved memories of the second special patterns secured during the time saving state. Therefore, it is an advantageous game for the player to win a V prize while securing a larger number of reserved memories of the second special symbol during the time saving state.

However, in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period after the time saving state is set is a disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and the second half period is an advantageous period in which it is easy to secure the second special symbol reservation memory (easier than the disadvantageous period). A player can select whether to execute a game in which a game ball is not allowed to win a V prize until an advantageous period (second half period) is reached in order to secure the reserved memory of the second special pattern while taking the risk of not being able to win a V prize. Therefore, later game results can be greatly varied depending on the game method selected by the player.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, in the second half period (advantageous period) of the time saving state described above, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation to be selected is configured to be different according to the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol. Then, it is configured to vary the degree of expectation for acquisition of the reserved number of the second special symbols at the end of the time saving state depending on the selected variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. More specifically, when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4) at the timing when the second special symbol variation of the ninth rotation after the time saving state is set is the upper limit (4), the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state is reduced, and when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is the specific number (3) at the time when the second special symbol variation of the ninth rotation is performed after the time saving state is set, the second special symbol is reserved at the time of the end of the time saving state. It is configured so that the number of memories can be easily increased.

In other words, by temporarily suspending the right-handed game and adjusting the number of reserved memories of the second special symbols to a specific number that is not the upper limit number, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbols at the end of the time-shortening state can be increased more easily than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time-shortening state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when the time saving state ends, that is, when the time saving state ends without executing a big win game, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed after the time saving state ends can be varied according to the game method executed by the player during the time saving state, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game during the time saving state.

In addition, although detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the game ball winning V during the time saving state, the time saving end condition (special figure 1 time saving end condition) established when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once is set as the end condition for ending the time saving state (re-time saving state). Then, as shown in FIG. 253, the game ball is configured to enter the first ball entrance 64 that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol by the game method (left-handed game) executed during the jackpot game.

By constructing in this way, when a game ball wins a V prize in a state in which the reserved memory of the second special pattern cannot be ensured during the time saving state, even if the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery for the first special pattern is executed before the lottery for the second special pattern is executed, and the special pattern 1 time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the time saving state ends instantaneously.

On the other hand, when the game ball wins the V prize in the state of securing the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state, when the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the special figure 1 time saving end condition can be made more difficult than the case of setting the time saving state (re-time saving state) in the state of not securing the reserved memory of the first special symbol.

In addition, when the time saving state is ended with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbols secured to the upper limit without causing the V prize during the time saving state, the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery (lottery based on the reserved memory secured during the time saving state) executed during the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the big winning game (V winning) executed based on the V winning of the game ball during the small winning game, that is, when the time saving state is set after the big winning game executed during the normal state ends. When the short state is set, it is configured so that the above-described special figure 1 o'clock short end condition is not set.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, the player is disadvantaged more if the V winning is executed within a predetermined period after the time saving state is set, than if the V winning is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed, and furthermore, it is more advantageous for the player to terminate the time saving state with the reserved memory number of the second special symbols up to the upper limit, rather than the case where the V winning is executed within the predetermined period after the time saving state is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to greatly change the subsequent game result depending on the game method selected by the player during the time saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Regarding production content in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 254 to FIG. 258, the characteristic effect contents among the effect contents executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. Concretely, the production contents of the time-saving production executed when the time-saving state is set will be explained. The eleventh embodiment is different from the content of the time-saving performance performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above in that the performance mode is set based on the number of times of time saving (number of times of remaining time), the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol), and the variation time of the second special symbol variation to be executed. The same presentation modes (display modes) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, as described above, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later is greatly varied according to the content of the game to be executed during the time saving state, so that the player can be provided with the enjoyment of selecting what kind of game to play during the time saving state, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a guidance effect for guiding the player to a game method for increasing the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be executed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the game aiming to execute a game that is advantageous to the player, depending on the effect mode of the guidance effect that is executed. In addition, since the skill required to actually execute the game according to the comprehended game content is tested, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a time-saving effect is executed in which a character 801 imitating a boy collects keys. Although detailed description will be given later, in the eleventh embodiment, during the first half period of the time saving state (the period in which the first to sixth special symbol fluctuations (second special symbol fluctuation) are executed after the time saving state is set), an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 second) with an extremely short fluctuation time is selected, and it is configured to make it difficult to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. Although illustration is omitted, during this first half period, the display mode (the display mode displayed when the time saving state is set) for explaining the content of the effect during the time saving state is continuously displayed. When the first half period of the time saving state passes and the latter half period (the period in which the seventh and subsequent special symbol variations are executed), various display modes for guiding the game method to be executed during the time saving state to the player are displayed.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the display mode (contents of presentation) that can be displayed during the latter half of the time saving state. FIG. 254(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed when a middle variation (10-second variation) is executed as the seventh special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) after the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 254(a), in the eleventh embodiment, a time-saving effect (guidance effect) in which a part of the display mode is changed from the time-saving effect (see FIG. 181) executed in the above-described seventh embodiment is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 254 (a) shows a display mode that can be displayed in a state where the seventh second special symbol variation is varied by 10 seconds and one special figure 2 reserved ball is secured. Inside the display area HR6, the characters "remaining 3 times" indicating that the number of times of the remaining time saving is 3 times are displayed. Four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801 . Each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the number of held balls increases, a key image corresponding to the held ball is displayed in these four display areas. Further, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 in which characters such as "Pump right to save keys!!" is formed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by hitting the right hand.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 254 (a), as a display mode indicating that one reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol is secured, a "key" icon, which is a display mode displayed corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball, is displayed inside the display area HR4. After that, when the upper limit (four pieces) of the special figure 2 holding ball is secured during the middle fluctuation for 10 seconds, the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) is displayed. FIG. 254 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when GET (securing) is performed up to the upper limit number (four) of the special figure 2 holding balls during the seventh middle fluctuation (10 second fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 254(b), when the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol variation, even if the right-handed game is executed any more, a new special-figure 2 reserved ball cannot be secured. Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4, a "key" icon is displayed in each area to indicate that the current special figure 2 reserved ball number is the upper limit (4). Further, as the display mode of the guide display area Dm2 in which "Right shot" is displayed in FIG. 254(a), the display of "Right shot" is variably displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. By these display modes, the player can easily understand that the special figure 2 reserved balls have been secured up to the upper limit value, and can easily understand that there is no need to execute the right-handed game any more.

In the example shown in FIG. 254(b), the player is notified that there is no need to play the right-handed game by making the display of "Right-handed" in the guide display area Dm2 difficult to see. It may be configured so as to notify "Right shot". In this way, during the time-saving state in which the right-handed game is mainly executed, the right-handed guidance display (see FIG. 254(a)) that is easy for the player to understand and the display mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the right-handed guidance display are switched and displayed. Also, the display mode itself for guiding the right-handed game may be configured not to be displayed (to be hidden).

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the effect displayed while the eighth second special symbol variation is being executed will be described. Figure 255 (a) is during the 8th middle variation (10 seconds variation) during the eighth time reduction, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is a specific number (3 pieces).

Although details will be described later, in the eleventh embodiment, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time when the second special symbol variation of the eighth time saving is stopped and displayed is a specific number (three pieces), it is configured so that the long time variation is easily selected as the second special symbol variation of the tenth time saving. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit during the 7th middle fluctuation of time saving, the break display (see FIG. 255 (a)) that continues the break display shown in FIG. 254 (b) is displayed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserved ball cannot be acquired up to the upper limit during the second special symbol variation of the seventh time of time saving, as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 254(a), as a display mode for suppressing acquisition of a new special figure 2 reserved ball during execution of the second special symbol variation this time, a display area HR5 is formed in which "please wait for a while" is displayed in the main display area Dm and "game resting" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the guidance display area Dm2, the characters "STOP" are displayed to guide the player to stop the game. With these display modes, the player can easily grasp that the current state is a state in which the new special figure 2 reserved ball should not be acquired.

In addition, by hiding the display area HR1 in which the ``key'' icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball can be displayed among the display areas HR1 to HR4 for indicating the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, it is possible to make the player think that the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (3 pieces) is the upper limit of the number of obtainable special figure 2 reserved balls, and to make the player visually feel that he/she does not need to play the right-handed game.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a display area HR6 for indicating that the number of remaining time reductions is "two" is formed smaller than the display area HR6 shown in FIG. 254(b). As a result, when the display content of the third symbol display device 81 shifts from the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) to the display mode shown in FIG. Note that, unlike the display example shown in FIG. 255(a), the display area HR6 may be hidden, or "remaining? times" may be displayed in the display area HR6. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions, so that it is possible to make it easy for the player to pay attention only to the content of the effect being executed. In addition, in this case, the display mode indicating the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 is changed, and the display mode of the number corresponding to the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of increase or decrease in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention only to the content of the effect being executed.

FIG. 255(b) is a display screen in a state in which a guidance effect is being executed to guide game balls to enter the second ball entrance 6400 until the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches 3, and a display region HR5 is formed in the sub display region Ds to display "Collect 3 keys by hitting right! 4 keys are not allowed!" Then, out of the display areas HR1 to HR4, in the display area HR1 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball, the character "DANGER" visually notifying that the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball should not be obtained is displayed.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the 7th time saving second special symbol variation, or when the number of special 2 reserved balls becomes 3 during the execution of the 8th time saving 2nd special symbol variation, the number of special 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state is most likely to increase. On the other hand, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4) during execution of the second special symbol variation for the eighth time of time saving, the number of special 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state tends to decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 255 (a) and (b), when the middle variation (10-second variation) is executed as the second special symbol variation of the eighth time reduction, the effect content is changed according to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at the start of the variation, so that the player can be guided to a game method that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol fluctuation of the seventh time reduction, the guidance mode for interrupting the right-handed game is displayed for the player from the second special symbol fluctuation of the seventh time reduction. can reduce the number of game balls present in the right area. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to become the upper limit (4 pieces) during execution of the second special symbol variation of the eighth time saving.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed while the long variation (20-second variation) is being executed in the 10th time of the time saving (final variation of the time saving state). In this embodiment, when the 10th time-saving second special symbol variation is executed with two special figure 2 reserved balls (when the 10th time-saving second special symbol variation is started, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 1), a long variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. During the long variation, an effect is executed to obtain the special figure 2 reserved ball up to the upper limit. Furthermore, as the display mode of the guide display area Dm2, a highlight display mode (indicated by a double frame line in the figure) is displayed to guide the right-handed game by emphasizing it more than other timings during the time saving state.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the display area HR6 displays the characters "Last" indicating the final change of the time saving state, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Collect treasures by striking right". A display area HR5 is formed. Then, the special figure 2 reserved balls acquired during this variation are confirmed to be used in the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state after the time saving state is completed, so the number of special figure 2 reserved balls As a display mode, a "treasure" icon is displayed as a display mode different from the display mode ("key" icon) shown in Fig. 254 (a). Thus, by varying the display mode for indicating the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, it is possible for the player to understand that the degree of advantage of the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserved balls is different.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. Specifically, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. As the time saving end condition when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving end condition which is difficult to be established is set. Therefore, the display mode (treasure) showing the special figure 2 reserved ball used in the normal state is more visually valuable than the display mode (key) indicating the special figure 2 reserved ball used in the time saving state. In this way, by associating the actual degree of advantage with the value indicated by the display mode, it is possible to provide the player with a visually easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the display contents displayed when the special figure 2 reserved ball number during the time saving state becomes the reserved ball number that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. FIG. 257(a) schematically shows an example of display contents displayed when the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) during the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) of the eighth time reduction. It is a schematic diagram showing. As described above with reference to FIG. 255(b), during the 8th middle variation (10-second variation), an effect of storing 3 keys is executed. Here, if the player makes a mistake in the operation of the right-handed game and accumulates 4 keys (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 becomes 4), as shown in FIG. In the sub display area Ds, there is formed a display area HR5 displaying ``entering the DANGER zone!!'' indicating that the game has entered the ``DANGER zone'', which is a performance mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp when the time saving state will end and how many balls are currently reserved for the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 257(a), when the DANGER zone is set, the remaining time reduction count and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls are not displayed on the display surface. Although details will be described later, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the 8th special symbol 2 variation of the time saving 9th time and the 10th time saving 2nd special symbol variation As the variation pattern, an ultra-short variation pattern (variation time 0.1 second) is selected, and it is configured so that a new special figure 2 reserved ball cannot be obtained (hardly) during the 10th time saving 2nd special symbol variation. In this way, once the DANGER zone is set, it becomes a disadvantageous state in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state decreases. By displaying such a display mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the executed game method is an incorrect one, so that the player can be motivated to play the next game with the proper game method.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to provide a disadvantageous state disadvantageous to the player in the second half period of the time saving state, an ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 seconds) can be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. By executing the ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the variation time of the second special symbol, it is configured to make it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the variation period of the second special symbol. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reserved ball during the variation period, but there is a problem that it becomes difficult to notify the player of the lottery result of the second special symbol only by using the ultra-short variation time.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the DANGER zone is set in the second half of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. V" character 891 is displayed. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by displaying the display mode in which the bomb is exploded from the state in which the icon 890 imitating the bomb is already displayed. Therefore, even if it is the second special symbol variation in which the variation time is set to be short, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although illustration is omitted, when the lottery result of the second special symbol variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is set is out, even if the second special symbol is stop-displayed, the icon 890 simulating a bomb is continuously displayed. As a result, since the display mode (bomb icon) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is not variably displayed in order to show the player that the lottery result of the second special pattern is lost, it is possible to suppress execution of troublesome presentation. Further, when the final variation of the time saving state is displayed in a stopped state with the DANGER zone set, as shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, when the DANGER zone is set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is finally displayed (when a small win or a big win is won, or when the time-saving state ends). Therefore, the player can be interested in which display mode (the display mode indicating the win or the display mode indicating the end of the time saving state) will be displayed when the bomb explodes, and the performance can be enjoyed until the end.

The DANGER zone is set when it becomes difficult to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time when the time saving state is terminated, and therefore, in the DANGER zone, when a small hit is won, it is easier for the player to win the game ball V prize. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), when a small win is won in the DANGER zone, as a display mode for making the player play a game (right-handed game) to aim for a V prize, "Right-handed" is highlighted in the guide display area Dm2, and a display area HR5 in which "Aim for a small win V" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds is formed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of special 2 pending balls and the number of remaining time reductions are configured not to be displayed in the DANGER zone, but without being limited to this, the display mode normally displayed during the time saving state (For example, it may be configured to display the number of special 2 pending balls and the number of remaining time reductions in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to distinguish than (see FIG. 254 (a)). In addition, even in the DANGER zone, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22), so that the display mode that can specifically notify the number of reserved balls and the number of remaining time reductions may be displayed.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 258, the display contents displayed when the small hit is won in the time saving state and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 will be described. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a small hit is won while the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 during the time saving state. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the time saving state is set, and when the V hit (jackpot game) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0, even if the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game is finished, the time saving state is immediately terminated by the execution of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, when the time saving state is set and the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 and the small winning is won, the player is made to select whether to execute the game aiming at the V prize or to execute the game aiming at the next small winning while acquiring the special figure 2 reserved balls in a short period of time without aiming at the V winning in the current small winning game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 258, when a small win is won in a time-saving state and the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is 0, a horizontally long approximately rectangular display area HR7 displaying the word "select" is formed in the lower part of the main display area Dm, and a horizontally long approximately rectangular display area displaying the characters "I want to save the key" and the word "STOP" is formed in the left half of the sub display area Ds, and the word "I want to make a big win" is formed in the right half. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area is formed in which characters and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed. In the guide display area Dm2, the guide display mode is hidden in order to indicate that it is a period for allowing the player to select a game method. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. The arrow image YG allows the player to grasp that the current state is a time-saving state. With these display contents, a novel game property can be realized in which the player can select whether to stop the game to end the small winning game without generating the V winning or to start the big winning by generating the V winning by performing the right-handed game, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, "STOP" indicating that the shooting of the game ball is to be interrupted is used as guidance of the game method for not playing the right-handed game, but other game methods may be guided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is determined at the start of the small-hit game, and when the number is 0, the display mode shown in FIG. 258 is displayed to allow the player to select the game method. It may be configured such that the display mode during the technique is variable.

In this case, for example, when the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit value during the small winning game, it is most advantageous for the player to start the big winning game by generating V winning in that state, so it is most advantageous to display a display mode for forcibly executing a right-handed game (for example, a display mode in which a large letter "Right-handed" is displayed as a most emphasized guidance display mode in the center of the main display area Dm), and to generate a V winning now in the sub-display area Ds. It may be constructed so as to display the characters "Super Chance" indicating that the game is to be played. In addition, when the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls increases in a range less than the upper limit value, whether or not it is better to win a V prize during the current small winning game is predicted based on the amount of increase and the number of times of short remaining time, and based on the prediction result, the emphasis of the display mode for guiding the right-handed game may be variably displayed (for example, the display area for guiding 'stop' is variably displayed so that the size of the display area for guiding 'right-handed' is gradually increased). By configuring in this way, since the display mode according to the change in the game situation during the small winning game is executed during the small winning game, the player can be made to pay attention to the game during the small winning game.

In this case, a plurality of types may be set for the small winning game to be executed when winning the small winning, and the length of the period during which the open/close door 6500f1 is closed during the small winning game may be varied according to the set small winning type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 during the small winning game according to the type of the small winning game to be executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 253, when the closing period of the opening and closing door 6500f1 is set long during the small winning game executed in the time saving state, the game ball flowing down the right side area due to the right hitting game can easily reach the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 6400, so it is possible to easily acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball number during the small winning game.

Furthermore, as a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type among a plurality of small winning types, an opening period of a first period (1 second) is set immediately after the small winning game is executed, and then a closing period of 10 seconds After that, a small winning game in which an opening period of a second period (0.5 seconds) is set is executed. It is preferable to configure so as to set the prize number end condition. In this case, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the small winning game, two or more game balls enter the V winning device 6500 during the first period and the small winning game ends, whereas by interrupting the right-handed game during the first period, a closing period of 10 seconds is set, and after acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball during the closing period, the game ball can be made to win the V winning device 6500 during the second period. That is, even during execution of the small winning game, the degree of advantage in the subsequent game can be varied according to the game method selected by the player.

In addition, when the above-mentioned specific small winning type is provided, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small winning game to be executed this time is the small winning game corresponding to the specific small winning type, for example, it is preferable to provide a small winning type in which the opening period of the first period (1 second) is set, and then the small winning game ends after the closing period of 0.2 seconds. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the small winning game to be executed this time is a small winning game in which it is better to interrupt the right-handed game according to the contents of the opening operation of the small winning game (contents of opening operation until a predetermined period elapses after the execution of the small winning game).

In addition, in this case, a suggestion performance capable of suggesting the type of the small winning game to be executed (small winning type) to the player, or a guidance performance for guiding the game method (right hitting continuation, right hitting interruption) during the small winning game may be executed during the small winning game.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 259 to 261. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 259(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 259(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 259(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 184(b)) in that the range of the first hit random number counter C1 defined as the small hit determination value is different, and the rest is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259(a), the range of "10 to 259" is defined as a determination value for winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is ``0 to 999'', so in this eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to win a small winning with a probability of about 1/4.

FIG.259(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table 202hb. This time reduction grant table 202hb is different from the above-mentioned time reduction grant table 202e (see FIG. 186(a)) in that the number of times of time reduction grant (time reduction end condition) set when the game state at the time of winning is the time reduction state is changed, and that the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot D11 is won during the time reduction state, and the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game is completed. . The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For the convenience of explanation, some of the names of the jackpot types have been changed, but since they are substantially the same, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 259 (b), when "jackpot A11" and "jackpot B11" are won, "jackpot A7" and "jackpot B7" of the seventh embodiment described above are won.

Next, when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state, ``10 times'' is associated with the ``jackpot C11'' as the number of times of shortening the time provided, and when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state, ``10 times'' or ``one variation of the special figure 1 (first special pattern)'' is associated with the number of times of the time reduction given. That is, when the "jackpot C11" is determined, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state. When a ``jackpot C11'' is won during the time saving state, when the special pattern variation is executed 10 times during the time saving state, or when the first special pattern variation is performed once, the time saving end condition is established and the time saving state is ended.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is 0 in a state where ``big win C11'' is set with V winning during the time saving state, the lottery of the 1st special pattern is executed without priority over the lottery of the 2nd special pattern after the jackpot game is finished in order to obtain the reserved ball of the 1st special pattern (special 1 reserved ball) with a high probability during the big win game in which the left-handed game is executed. Therefore, the time-saving end condition specified as "one time variation of special figure 1 (first special symbol)" is established, and the time-saving state ends immediately.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described seventh embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied at the time when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), but since it is configured so that the ultra-short variation pattern (variation time 0.1 second) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation of the first rotation during the time saving state, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the state where V winning occurs during the time saving state and "jackpot C11" is set is 0, the game result is substantially the same as when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is 4 in the state where the V winning occurs during the time saving state and the ``jackpot C11'' is set, after the time saving state is set, the lottery of the 2nd special pattern is executed with priority over the lottery of the 1st special pattern, and while the lottery of the 2nd special pattern is performed 4 times, by acquiring a new special 2 reserved ball, the number of special 2 reserved balls is reduced to ``10 per fluctuation of the special 1 (first special pattern)''. It is possible to make it easier to establish the time-saving end condition of "times".

In this way, by varying the easy-to-establish time-saving end condition according to the number of reserved and stored second special symbols (the number of special-2 reserved balls) at the time when the time-saving state is set, even if the game state at the time of winning is the same as the big win type to be set, the game state to be set after the big win game is finished can be substantially different, and the game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

For the "jackpot D11" and "jackpot E11", the same number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) as the above-described "jackpot C11" is set, so detailed description is omitted. As for the ``jackpot F11'', the presence or absence of time reduction provision is changed according to the game state when the big win game is executed. Specifically, when the game state when the big win game is executed is the normal state, ``10 times'' is defined as the number of times of time reduction provision. On the other hand, when the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving provision is ``0 times'', that is, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished, and the normal state is set. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be changed over based on the result of the combination of the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot type is set, so that variations in setting the game state can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same number of time reduction grants (time reduction end condition) is set for all of the "jackpot C11", "jackpot D11", and "jackpot E11", but without being limited to this, for example, for the "jackpot D11", for example, "10 times" or "3 times of variation of special figure 1 (first special pattern)", V winning occurs during the time saving state and "jackpot D11" is set Special figure 2 is reserved. When the number of balls is 0, the time saving state may be made more difficult to end than when the "jackpot C11" is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to set a case where it is better to win a V prize and a case where it is better not to win a V prize depending on the type of the set jackpot when a small prize is won in the state of time saving and the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is 0.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to increase the importance of making the player decide which game to select when a small hit is won while the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 during the time saving state.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to execute an effect that suggests the type of jackpot set this time as a result. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced because the player will be watching the effect to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261, differences of the variation pattern table 202d of the eleventh embodiment from the variation pattern table of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 260, the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1 referred to during the normal state will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1. As shown in FIG. 260, the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 differs from the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23 (a)) in the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above in that the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the rest is the same. Specifically, in the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, regardless of the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of '0 to 179', the 'short variation' in which the variation time is 10 seconds is associated, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of '180 to 198', the 'middle variation' in which the variation time is 30 seconds.

In other words, the case where the second special symbol variation is executed in the state where the normal state is set is mainly when the normal state is set while the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured. And, in this state, like each embodiment described above, since it is constructed so as to execute a dedicated performance (pull-back performance), the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol to be selected is configured to be fixed as much as possible. As a result, the performance period of the pull-back performance using the special figure 2 reserved ball number (maximum 4) secured in the normal state is specified in advance, and the pull-back performance can be easily executed (set) as a series of performances straddling the fluctuation periods of a plurality of second special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 referred to when the time-saving state is set will be described. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern table 202dh2. This time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 differs from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186(b)) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the variation pattern selected for the first special symbol variation executed for the first time for time-saving and the variation pattern selected for the second special symbol variation are changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "1", that is, when the special figure 1 variation is executed as the first time-saving special symbol variation, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is associated with an ultra-short variation with a variation time of 0.1 seconds, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the first rotation in the time saving state, the variation ends in a very short time. Then, as the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition), when "1 time of variation of special figure 1 (first special symbol)" is set (see FIG. 259 (b)), the time saving state ends at the time when the special figure 1 variation of the ultra-short variation ends. As a result, even when the conditions for setting the time-saving state are satisfied after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to substantially set the normal state.

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of times of time saving fluctuation is "2 ~", the time saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 186 (b)) Since it is defined so that the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "1 to 6", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" regardless of the number of balls held in special figure 2 or the lottery result. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in a state where it is difficult to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the period until the number of times of time saving fluctuation reaches 6 times (the first half period of the time saving state). Therefore, when a small win is won in the first half of the time saving state, the small win game is easily executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, and the display screen shown in FIG.

Next, when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "7, 8" and the lottery result is out, regardless of the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". In other words, when the time-saving 7th variation is the special figure 2 variation, the middle variation is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultra-short variation is selected with a probability of about 1/4. In addition, when the lottery result is "big win or small win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" regardless of the number of balls held in the special figure 2, that is, the middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the entire range.

Here, when the middle variation is selected, as shown in FIG. 254(a), an effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball number is displayed. On the other hand, when the ultra-short variation is selected, the eighth time-saving variation is executed without displaying the effect mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

In addition, even when the variation of the eighth time reduction is the special figure 2 variation, the variation pattern is configured to be selected with the same probability as the seventh time reduction described above, and the probability that the lottery results are out of both the seventh time reduction and the eighth time reduction and that the ultra-short variation is selected is about 3.5%. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set, at a rate of about 3.5%, a regrettable time-saving state is set in which a chance to acquire the number of special 2 reserved balls cannot be obtained in the seventh and eighth times of time saving.

On the other hand, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is acquired to the upper limit during the 7th special 2 change of time saving, when the middle change is selected as the 8th special 2 change of time saving, the performance mode shown in FIG. In other words, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is acquired to the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving, the case where the 8th time saving is an ultra-short fluctuation is less likely to erroneously acquire a new special figure 2 reserved ball number during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving, resulting in a variation pattern advantageous to the player.

In addition, when the number of special 2 reserved balls cannot be acquired to the upper limit during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation (during the middle fluctuation), or when an ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected as the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, the production mode shown in FIG.

Finally, when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9,10" and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0, 2, 3", regardless of the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is defined in association with an ultra-short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. A long variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is associated with the range and defined. That is, only when the number of times of time-saving variation is "10", that is, the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls when selecting the variation pattern of the last variation of the time-saving state is "1", the last variation of the time-saving state becomes a long variation (variation of 20 seconds), and the time-saving state can be easily ended in a state in which the special figure 2-holding balls are acquired to the upper limit.

In addition, even when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9", that is, the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls when selecting the fluctuation pattern one time before the last fluctuation in the time-saving state (pre-last fluctuation) is "1", it is configured to be a long fluctuation (20-second fluctuation). In this case, the player can select whether to play a game in which the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired up to the upper limit in the pre-last variation and the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls becomes 3 at the end of the time saving state, or to perform a game aiming to execute the long variation again in the last variation by acquiring only one special figure 2 reserved ball in the pre-last variation.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, if the right-handed game is continuously executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls that can be secured at the time the time saving state ends is easily reduced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game during the time saving state is executed without securing the special figure 2 reserved ball. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation of the 9th time reduction is executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball, the ultra-short variation is selected, and then the ultra-short variation is easily selected even in the 10th time reduction special figure 2 variation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that does not intentionally secure the special figure 2 reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, as described above, during a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (while the second special symbol variation with the number of times of time saving fluctuation being "1 to 6" is executed), the result of the second special symbol lottery, and regardless of the number of special figures 2 reserved balls that have been acquired, the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set (selected). Only (second special symbol variation) may be configured to select a very short variation pattern (variation time of 3 seconds) longer than the above-described ultra-short variation pattern (variation time of 0.1 seconds).

By configuring in this way, for example, when the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is secured, when the time saving state (re-time saving state) is set again after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when "10 times" or "special figure 1 fluctuation 1 time" is set as the number of times of saving time (time saving end condition), the second for the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls that is executed with priority over the first special pattern fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation). The special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) ends instantly, and it is possible to suppress the fact that the time saving state ends due to the execution of the special figure 1 variation.

In this case, as the variation time of the first special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) after the time saving state is set, that is, the variation time defined as the very short variation pattern, it is preferable to define a longer variation time than the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol), and to make it easy to execute the normal symbol per game during the time saving state while the second special symbol variation is being performed. This makes it easy to acquire a new special figure reservation within the period from when the time saving state is set until the time saving state ends. Further, by setting the first special pattern variation (second special pattern variation) after the time saving state is set to be a very short variation (for example, 3-second variation), there is a possibility that a plurality of special figure 2 reserves are obtained during the first special symbol variation (during special figure 2 variation) of the number of times of time saving. Even if it is configured in this way, the second special symbol variation is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern when the number of times of time saving is ``2 to 6'', so even if a plurality of reserved memories are acquired during the first time saving time of special figure 2 variation, the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls can be reduced (0) when the number of times of time saving reaches ``7''.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 262, the RAM 223 of the eleventh embodiment has a special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b2, an acquisition effect setting flag 223ha, a second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb, a third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc, a MAX acquisition flag 223hd, and a danger flag 223he, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 26(b)). , is different in that a game waiting flag 223hf is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 has the same content as the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa in the second embodiment described above, and is a counter for updating the reserved ball number of the second special symbol according to the contents indicated by the command when receiving a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The acquisition effect set flag 223ha is a flag for indicating that the effect (first reservation acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254(a) is being executed, and is set to ON when the first reservation acquisition effect is being executed, and is set to OFF when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (4) during the first reservation acquisition effect and the first reservation acquisition effect is completed. Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the seventh variation in time reduction is middle variation (S9102 in FIG. 272: Yes) is set to ON (see S9105 in FIG. 272), and the special figure 2 winning executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) In the process (see S2396 in FIG. 266), the setting status is referenced (see S8001 in FIG. 266).

Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 after winning (see S8002 in FIG. 266), it is set to OFF. Furthermore, it is set to ON during the period when the effect (final pending acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 256 is being executed (see S9208 in FIG. 273). In addition, when the final variation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha is set to ON (when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state), it is also set to OFF (see S8204 in FIG. 270). In other words, when this acquisition performance setting completion flag 223ha is set to ON, it indicates that the increase in the number of special 2 reserved balls until the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit is a period in which it is advantageous to the player.

The second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is a flag for indicating that the effect (second reservation acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 255(b) is being executed, and is set to ON when the second reservation acquisition effect is being executed, and is set to OFF when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (4) during the second reservation acquisition effect and the second reservation acquisition effect is completed. Specifically, in the first production setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the production setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the eighth special figure fluctuation is a middle fluctuation (S9107 in FIG. 272: Yes), and when it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd described later is not set to ON (S9108 in FIG. 272: Yes), that is, the time saving 7 It is set to ON when it is not possible to acquire the number of special figures 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) during the special figure fluctuation (see S9113 in FIG. 272), and the setting status is referred to in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related processing 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) (see S8008 in FIG. 266).

Then, various production modes are set according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after winning (see S8013 to S8016 in FIG. 266), and finally the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after winning is 4 When it is determined (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S8012 in FIG. 266). In other words, when the second acquired effect setting completion flag 223hb is set to ON, it is a period in which an increase in the number of special 2 reserved balls is advantageous to the player until the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches 3, and a period in which the player is disadvantaged when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches 4. In addition, when the final variation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the second acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hb is set to ON (when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state), it is also set to OFF (see S8204 in FIG. 270).

The third acquisition performance setting completion flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the performance (third reservation acquisition performance) executed when the 9th special figure fluctuation is the long variation, is set to ON when the third reservation acquisition performance is executed, and is set to OFF when the number of special figure 2 reservation balls increases by one during the third reservation acquisition performance. Specifically, in the second effect setting process (see S2989 in FIG. 273) executed in the second effect setting process (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the special figure variation of the ninth time reduction is a long variation (S9202 in FIG. 273: Yes), it is set to ON (see S9204 in FIG. 273), and the special figure 2 in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) The setting state is referenced in the pre-end period process (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the prize process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8101 in FIG. 267). Then, when the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101 in FIG. 267: Yes), that is, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls increases by one during the third reservation acquisition effect, it is set to OFF (see S8104 in FIG. 267). In addition, when the final variation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the third acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hc is set to ON (when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state), it is also set to OFF (see S8204 in FIG. 270).

MAX acquisition flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254(b) is being executed, and is set to ON when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the first reservation acquisition effect shown in FIG. It is set to OFF after setting the effect mode corresponding to the eighth special figure fluctuation (see S9110 in FIG. 272).

By providing the MAX acquisition flag 223hd, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit during the seventh special figure variation of the time shortening and the guidance information for interrupting the right-handed game is executed, the guide information can be continuously displayed over the eighth special figure variation of the time shortening.

The danger flag 223he is a flag for indicating that the number of special 2 reserved balls is excessively increased during the time saving state, and a large number of special 2 reserved balls cannot be secured at the end of the time saving state. When it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has reached 4 while the second reservation acquisition effect (see FIG. 255 (b)) is being executed (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes), or during the game standby effect (FIG. 25) 5 (a) reference) is set to ON when it is determined that a new special figure 2 reserved ball has been acquired (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes).

While the danger flag 223he is set to ON, a danger performance (see FIG. 257(a)) is executed, and a performance mode in which it is difficult for the player to understand the remaining short time until the end of the time saving state and the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls is displayed. As described above, in the period before the time saving end of the time saving state (9th time saving time, 10th time saving time), there is a special number 2 reserved ball number other than the appropriate number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 piece). Therefore, by executing the danger performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity even if a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuations corresponding to the period before the end of time saving are digested in a short period of time.

In addition, when the danger flag 223he is set to ON, it is difficult to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls when the time saving state ends. By configuring this way, even if the number of special maps 2 holding balls is small, if it is difficult to secure a large number of special diagrams in the rest of the time, it is not a selection of selection (see FIG. 258) to select whether or not to win a prize to the player (Fig. 257 (B). You can execute) and suppress the fact that the players choose extremely disadvantageous gaming.

The game standby flag 223hf is a flag for indicating that the effect (game standby effect) shown in FIG. 255(a) is being executed, and during the first holding acquisition effect (see FIG. 254(a)) executed during the 7th special figure fluctuation, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), and the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254(b) is executed. It is set to ON when it is executed with variation (10-second variation) (see S9111 in FIG. 272). Then, referred to in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8017 in FIG. 266), the state in which the game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes), that is, the display mode when the special figure 2 winning occurs in the state where the game standby production is being executed is set (see S8018 in FIG. 266), and then set to OFF (FIG. 2 66, S8020).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to set various production modes to be executed during the time saving state, various flags are set based on the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state (the number of special symbol fluctuations), the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls), and the selected fluctuation pattern. is configured to set the display mode of Further, when the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls can be increased, a display mode is set to guide the player to the range (permissible range) of the increase amount of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls that is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the optimal game method to be executed during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the transition of the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls during the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Figure 263 is a diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time reduction number of times in the time saving state and the special figure 2 reservation number (special figure 2 reservation ball number) and the special figure 2 fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, the time saving state is divided into three periods: a time saving normal period with a remaining time saving number of 10 to 5 (time saving 1 to 6), a time saving end preparation period with a remaining time saving number of 4 or 3 (time saving 7th or 8th), and a time saving pre-end period with a remaining time saving number of 2 or 1 (time saving 9th or 10th). A time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that different variation times can be selected as (variation time in FIG. 2).

In addition, when selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation time in each period, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is referred to, and a different special figure 2 fluctuation time is selected according to the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls. Then, according to the length of the special figure 2 variation time selected for each period in the time saving state, a state in which it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 holding ball during the special figure 2 variation and a state in which it is difficult to acquire it are constituted.

In addition, when a state in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball appears (for example, during execution of the special figure 2 variation in which a long variation time is selected), it is configured to provide a case where acquisition of the special figure 2 reserved ball is finally advantageous to the player and a case where it is disadvantageous. By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the time saving state can play the game while predicting whether it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball or not, and whether it is good to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball or not, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the pull-back game (second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special figure 2 reserved balls) executed after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in Figure 263, during the time saving normal period, the special figure 2 variation is executed in the ultra-short variation pattern in which the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set. This 0.1 second is a time shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in one normal figure winning game, the normal figure winning game is completed, so during this time saving normal period, the second special symbol lottery is executed without securing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. In addition, a plurality of game balls may enter the second ball entrance 6400 in a row during one normal game, but in this case also, the second special variation is executed a plurality of times in a short time, so that the game during the time saving normal period is not executed while maintaining the state in which the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is secured.

Then, when the time-saving normal period has passed and the time-saving end preparation period has passed, the middle variation (10-second variation) is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultra-short variation (0.1 second) is selected with a probability of about 1/4. When the middle variation is selected in the special figure 2 variation with the number of remaining time reductions of 4 (the 7th time reduction), an effect (store effect) for storing the reserved ball shown in FIG. 254(a) is executed. Then, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is accumulated to the upper limit (4) during the execution of this accumulation effect (when special 2 reserved MAX), the special 2 fluctuation to be executed next (the number of times of remaining time reduction is 3 (8th time reduction) At the special figure fluctuation), a standby performance that does not acquire a new special 2 reserved ball shown in FIG. 255 (a) is executed.

According to the performance mode (guidance content) during this standby performance, when the eighth special figure variation is completed without acquiring a new special figure 2 reserved ball, the period is shifted to the period before the end of the time shortening, the variation of 0.1 second is performed at the ninth time of shortening, and the long variation of 20 seconds is performed at the tenth time of shortening. During this time-saving 10th long variation, an effect (see FIG. 258) is executed to urge the player to acquire the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit. Therefore, in the flow shown in FIG. 263(a), it becomes a flow that makes it easy to secure a large number of special figures 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state.

On the other hand, if the standby effect is executed during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation, and if the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 reserved ball, or if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot be acquired to the upper limit during the accumulation production performed during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, or if an ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected as the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, during the 8th special figure 2 fluctuation, the special shown in FIG. 255 (b) Fig. 2 A saving effect (second saving effect) for saving special figure 2 reserved balls is executed until the number of reserved balls reaches a specific number (three). Then, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is set to 3 during the second accumulation effect (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 3 at the time of the 8th time saving special figure fluctuation stop), the production of the time saving period before the end is executed in the same flow as in FIG. 263 (a) described above.

Also, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is increased to 4 during the second accumulation effect (when the number of special 2 reserved balls is 4 at the time of stopping the 8th special figure fluctuation), as shown in FIG. is low (the expected value of the special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving is about 2).

Furthermore, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes 2 during the second saving performance (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 2 at the time of stopping the special figure variation of the 8th time saving), the long variation is executed as the special figure 2 variation of the 9th time shortening. Then, when the number of special 2 reserved balls is acquired to the upper limit during the 9th long fluctuation of the time saving, as shown in FIG.

Here, if only one special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired during the 9th long variation of time saving, long variation is executed even in the 10th special figure 2 variation of the following time saving.

Also, in the time saving state, a game that does not intentionally accumulate the number of special figures 2 reserved balls, specifically, a game that fires a small number (one) of game balls at the timing of opening the electric role product 6400a (stopping) As shown in FIG. It becomes the flow of the game with the lowest acquisition expectation (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving is about 0).

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, a disadvantageous period (a period in which it is difficult to acquire special 2 reserved balls) is set in the first half of the time saving state, and an advantageous period (a period in which it is easy to acquire special 2 reserved balls) is set in the second half. Therefore, a game situation advantageous to the player can be set more easily in the case of executing the big win game based on the small win won during the second half period than in the case of executing the big win game based on the small win won during the first half period.

In addition, even during the advantage period, it is more advantageous for the player to interrupt the right-handed game for a predetermined period (execute the right-handed game with a predetermined shooting interval) than to continue the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who is playing in the time-saving state with the novel game property of interrupting the right-handed game.

Further, by obtaining a specific number of special 2 reserved balls corresponding to the number of remaining time reduction (time reduction), a pull-back game advantageous to the player can be executed as a pull-back game executed at the end of the time reduction (at the end of the jackpot game), so that the player can be interested in the timing of acquiring the special 2 reserved ball, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the number of special 2 reserved balls of a specific number corresponding to the number of times of shortening of remaining time (number of times of shortening of working hours) cannot be obtained, an opportunity to acquire the number of special 2 reserved balls of a specific number corresponding to the number of times of shortening of remaining time (number of times of shortening of hours) can be provided again, so that the player can continue to play enthusiastically until the time shortening state ends.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the main controller 110 of the eleventh embodiment, the same control processing as in the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the configuration of the data table (see FIGS. 259 to 261) referred to in various processes is changed. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the operation contents (opening operation pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1) at the time of the small winning game in this embodiment will be described. The opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the closing period during the small winning game is shorter than the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 180), so that the game balls are less likely to flow downstream than the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game. Specifically, the small winning game is executed in an opening pattern in which the closing period of 0.1 seconds and the opening period of 0.6 seconds from the start of the small winning game are repeated three times.

The 0.1 second set as the closing period is shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the closed state. Therefore, even if the game ball reaches the opening/closing door 6500f1 during the closed period of the small winning game, the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened before passing the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, and the V winning device 6500 can win.

In addition, a plurality of types of opening patterns for the small winning game may be prepared, and the opening pattern to be executed may be changed according to the small winning type set for the winning small winning and the game state at the time of winning. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game, the winning game ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big winning is started after the small winning game ends. A plurality of paths in the prize winning device 6500 and a distribution member for distributing the game ball flowing down in the V prize device 6500 to any one of the plurality of routes described above may be provided so that the game ball can pass through the V prize switch 6500e3 only when the game ball flows down a specific route.

Further, in this case, an opening pattern may be set in which the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened a plurality of times as a small winning game, and the game ball may pass through the V prize switch 6500e3 only when a specific opening is performed among the plurality of openings. By constructing in this way, when a small winning game is executed, a game of winning only the winning ball by causing the V winning device 6500 to win the game ball and a game of winning the winning ball and the big win by causing the V winning device 6500 to win the game ball can be executed only by switching the timing at which the player wins the game ball to the V winning device 6500.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning game is executed in an open pattern that suppresses the flow of game balls to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game so that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot increase during the small winning game. It may be configured to Thereby, when a specific small hit game is executed, it is possible to make it easier to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the small hit game. Therefore, even when the small winning game is executed with the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 being 0, a chance to increase the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 can be left, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 273, the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264) is replaced with the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56), the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) is replaced with the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and the winning information related process (see S2212 in FIG. 57) is replaced with the win related process (see S2212 in FIG. 57). The processing 11 (see S2296 in FIG. 264) is replaced with the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63), the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) is executed, and the stop command process 11 (see S2291 in FIG. 270) is added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 264, the contents of command determination processing 11 (S2195) will be described. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S2195). This command determination process 11 (S2195) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. When it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above, the winning information related process 11 is executed (S2295) to determine that a win-related command has been received. When it is determined (S2211: Yes), the hit-related processing 11 is executed (S2296), and when it is determined that the stop command is received (S2213: Yes), the stop command processing is executed (S2297). Further, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since the lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207), the reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2) corresponding to the special symbol type indicated by the received reserved ball number command is stored. differ. Since the rest is the same, the detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) executed in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) is a process executed instead of the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment, and when the winning information command of the second special symbol is received during the time saving state, control for varying the effect mode of various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258) is executed.

When the winning information related process 11 (S2295) is executed, first, the same processes of S2301 and S2302 as the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (during time saving) in the process of S2302 (S2302: No), the same S2312 process as the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the first embodiment and the process of S2311 are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (during time saving) in the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), next, it is determined whether the winning information command of the second special symbol is included in the winning information command received this time (S2395), and if it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is included (S2395: Yes), the special figure 2 winning process is executed (S2396), S2311 , and terminate this process. In the process of S2395, when it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is not included (only the winning information of the first special symbol is included) (S2395: No), the process of S2396 is skipped, the process of S2311 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) will be described. Figure 266 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in Figure 266). This special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is a process executed when the winning information of the second special symbol is received during the time saving state, and the various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258) are executed.

When the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, it is determined whether the acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha is set to ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8001: Yes), it is determined whether the number of special figures 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol) has become 4 (upper limit number) by receiving the reserved ball number command corresponding to the winning information command received this time. (S8002). In the processing of S8002, if it is determined that the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (the upper limit number) (S8002: Yes), the display mode indicating the reserved MAX is set (S8003), the display mode indicating the game standby is set (S8004), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON, the acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha is set to OFF (S8006), and S8022 described later. , and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8002, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: No), the display mode indicating the increase in the reserved number is set (S8007), and the process proceeds to S8022.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha is not set to ON (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the second acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hb is set to ON (S8008). It is determined whether or not the number of pending memories of the second special symbol has become 4 (upper limit number) (S8009).

When it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol) is 4 (the upper limit number) (S8009: Yes), the display mode indicating the excessive increase in the number of reserved is set (S8010), the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8011), the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8022. If it is determined in the process of S8009 that the number of special 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol) is not 4 (upper limit number), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol) is 3 (specific number) (S8013). is set (S8015), and the process proceeds to S8022.

Also, in the processing of S8013, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number (the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol) is not 3 (specific number), a display mode indicating an increase in the reserved number is set (S8016), and the process of S8022 is performed. In the process of S8008, if it is determined that the second acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hb is not set to ON (S8008: No), it is determined whether the game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8017: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the pending number is set (S8018), and the danger flag 223he is set to ON. (S8019), the game standby flag 223hf is set to OFF (S8020), and the process proceeds to S8022.

In the processing of S8017, if it is determined that the game standby flag 223hf is not set to ON (S8017: No), next, the pre-end period setting processing is executed (S8021), and then the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S8022), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267). When the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101). 3hc is set to off, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, when it is determined that the third acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hc is not set to ON (S8101: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the jackpot end process 11 (S2498) will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 11 (S2498). This jackpot end time process 11 (S2498) is a control process executed in the win-related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and the process for setting the effect mode at the end timing of the jackpot game is executed.

First, when jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) is executed. Information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S2501), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is the time saving state (S2502). And when it discriminate|determines that it is not a time saving state (S2502:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.

In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the time saving state (S2502: Yes), then, based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 reservation (holding storage of the second special symbol), that is, whether the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591; Yes) , sets a display command for indicating that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (S2592), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2591, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured (S2591: Yes), the next variation special figure 1 information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (winning information stored in the reservation area 1 of the first special symbol) is read (S2593), and it is determined whether the read special figure 1 information includes hit information (information indicating that the jackpot is won) (S2594). Then, if it is determined that the win information is not included (S2954: No), a display command for extending the display period of the big win end screen by 0.1 seconds is set (S2595), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S2594, when it is determined that there is winning information, that is, when it is determined that the big winning is won in the first special symbol variation executed immediately after (S2594: Yes), a display command for showing the big winning consecutive image is set (S2596), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the small winning start command process 11 (S2491) will be described. FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning start command process 11 (S2491). This small winning start command process 11 (S2491) is a control process executed in the winning related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and the process for setting the effect mode at the start timing of the small winning game is executed.

First, when the small hit start command process 11 (S2491) is executed. The information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S3901), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state (S3902). Then, when it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (S3902: No), the start of the small hit effect is set (S3977), and the process is terminated.

In the process of S3902, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S3991), and if it is set to ON (S3991: Yes), the display mode for making the game ball win V during the current small winning game (to aim for the small winning V) is set (S3994), S399 7 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3991, if the danger flag 223he is not set to ON (S3991: No), then the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved balls) stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is read out (S3992), and it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number) (S3993). When it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number) in the process of S3993, that is, when a big win game is generated in this small win game, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery can be executed 4 times (upper limit number of times) after the end of the big win game (S3993: Yes), a display mode for aiming for a small win V is set (S3994), and the process of S3997 is executed. and terminate this process.

Also, in the processing of S3993, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not 4 (S3993: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 (S3995), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S3995: Yes), the display mode (see FIG. 258) for allowing the player to select the game during the small hit is set (S3996), and the processing of S3997 is executed. , the process ends. In the process of S3995, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number is 1 to 3 (S3995: No), the process of S3997 is executed and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, the contents of stop command processing 11 (S2291) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop command processing 11 (S2291). This stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed when a stop command for indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed is received from the main control device 110, and processing for setting various performance modes set based on the stop timing of the special symbol variation is performed.

When the stop command process 11 (S2291) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S8201), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state (S8202). And when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S8202: No), the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S8211), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the time saving state in the process of S8202 (S8202: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation stop is the final change in the time saving state (S8203). Determination of S8203 is based on the update information (the number of times of time saving, the number of times of remaining time saving) stored in the time saving information update area 223g, it is determined whether the current fluctuation stop is the final change of the time saving state.

Here, if it is determined that it is the time saving final fluctuation (S8203: Yes), since it is the timing at which the time saving state ends, various flags (acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha, second acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hb, third acquisition effect setting completion flag 223hc, MAX acquisition flag 223hd, danger flag 223he, game standby flag 223hf) set to execute various effects during time saving state are all turned off. (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8205. On the other hand, in the process of S8203, if it is determined that it is not the final variation of time saving (S8203), then it is determined whether this variation is a big hit or a small hit variation (S8206). In the processing of S8206, if it is determined that the current variation is a big hit or a small hit variation (S8206: Yes), the process proceeds to S8205.

In the process of S8205, the number of reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is read (S8205), and it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number) (S8207). When it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number) in the process of S8207, that is, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery can be executed four times (upper limit number of times) after the end of the time saving state (S8207: Yes), a display mode for showing that an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed as a game (pullback game) after the end of the time saving state is set (S8208), S8211. , and terminate this process.

Also, in the processing of S8207, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not 4 (S8207: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 (S8209), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S8209: Yes), a display mode for indicating that a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player is executed (retracted game is not executed) as a game (pullback game) after the end of the time saving state The setting is made (S8210), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process ends. In the process of S8209, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number is 1 to 3 (S8209: No), the process of S8211 is executed and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the content of the effect setting process 11 (S2891) will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the content of effect setting process 11 (S2891). This effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed in place of the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above, and is executed according to the number of special figure fluctuations (number of times of time saving) in the time saving state.

When the performance setting process 11 (S2891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state (S2981), and when it is determined that it is not the time saving state (S2981: No), the variable display mode for the normal state corresponding to the lottery result is selected as the variable display mode (S2982), and this process is finished. In the processing of S2981, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S2981: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation executed this time is the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) (S2983), and if it is determined that it is not the special figure 2 variation (the first special symbol variation) (S2983: No), as the variation display aspect, the variation display aspect for the special figure 1 time saving condition corresponding to the lottery result. is selected (S2984), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2983, if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 fluctuation (S2983: yes), then this special symbol variation is the 1st to 6th time reduction (special figure 2 variation executed in the first half of the time reduction state) (S2985), and if it is determined that it is the 1st to 6th time reduction (S2985: Yes), as a variation display mode, the variation display for the special figure 2 time reduction state corresponding to the lottery result A mode is selected (S2986), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S2983, if it is determined that it is not the special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving 1 to 6 times (S2983: No), then the special figure 2 fluctuation of this time is the 7th time saving, or the 8th time (S2987), It is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation is the 7th time saving or the 8th time (among the latter half of the time saving state, the preparation for the saving time end). If it is determined that it is (S2987: Yes), the first effect setting process is executed (S2988), the process of S2986 is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S2987, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation of this time is the 7th or 8th time reduction (special figure 2 variation performed in the preparation period for the end of the time saving in the latter half of the time saving state), that is, the special figure 2 variation of this time is the 9th time in the time saving or the 10th time (out of the latter half of the time saving state, the special figure 2 variation performed in the period before the end of the time saving) (S2987: No), the second effect setting process is executed. (S2989), the process of S2986 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988). This first production setting process (S2988) is to set the production mode for the special figure 2 variation executed in the seventh time or eighth time (of the second half period of the time saving state, the time saving end preparation period).

When the first effect setting process (S2988) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation of this time is the special figure variation of the seventh rotation of the time reduction (S9101). Then, if it is determined that it is not middle fluctuation (it is an ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9102: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a middle fluctuation in the processing of S9102 (S9102: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of special 2 pending balls is 4 (upper limit number) (S9103), and if it is determined that it is not 4 (upper limit number) (S9103: No), the effect mode that prompts the acquisition of special 2 pending is set (S9104), and the acquisition effect setting completion flag 223ha is set to ON (S9105) , the process ends. Also, in the process of S9103, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not 4 (the upper limit number) (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

In the processing of S9101, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation of this time is not the special figure variation of the 7th rotation of the time reduction (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation of this time is the special figure variation of the 8th rotation of the time reduction (S9106), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation of this time is the special figure variation of the 8th rotation of the time reduction (S9106: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is the middle variation (S91) 07). Then, if it is determined that it is not middle fluctuation (it is an ultra-short fluctuation pattern) (S9107: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of 9107, if it is determined that the selected variation pattern is the middle variation (S9107: Yes), then it is determined whether the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON (S9108), and if the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is not set to ON (S9108: No), a production mode prompting to set the number of reserved balls to 3 is set (S9112), The second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is set to ON (S9113), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S9108, when it is classified that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON (S9108: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the game standby is set (S9109), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to OFF (S9110), the game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S9111), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989). This second production setting process (S2989) is to set the production mode for the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the 9th time or the 10th time (the period before the end of the time saving in the latter half of the time saving state).

When the second effect setting process (S2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation of this time is the special figure variation of the 9th rotation of the time reduction (S9201), and when it is determined that it is the special figure variation of the 9th rotation of the time reduction (S9201: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is the long variation (S9202). If it is determined that the pattern is not a long variation (it is an ultra-short variation pattern) (S9202: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a long variation in the processing of S9202 (S9202: Yes), then set the effect mode prompting to increase only one special figure 2 reservation (S9203), set the second acquisition effect set flag 223hc to ON (S9204), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S9201, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation of this time is not the special figure variation of the 9th rotation of the time saving (S9201: No), then the special figure 2 variation of this time is the special figure variation of the 10th rotation of the time saving (last variation) (S9205). It is determined whether it is a long fluctuation (S9206). Then, if it is determined that it is not a long variation (it is an ultra-short variation pattern) (S9206: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S9206, when it is determined that it is a long variation (S9206: Yes), the effect mode that prompts acquisition of special figure 2 reservation is set (S9207), the acquired effect setting completion flag 223ha is set to ON (S9208), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, as the period in which the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, at least the unfavorable period in which the specific condition (acquisition of special figure 2 reservation) is difficult to be established is set prior to the advantageous period in which the specific condition is likely to be established. It is configured as follows.

In addition, during the small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the lottery of the second special pattern which is mainly (prioritically) executed during the time saving state, the big winning game can be executed by causing the game ball to win the V prize. In other words, it is configured so that the player can select at what timing the big winning game is to be executed during the time saving state and whether or not the game ball is to win the V prize during the small winning game.

By constructing in this way, when a small winning game is executed during the unfavorable period of the time saving state, in order to surely execute the big winning game during the time saving state, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of selecting whether to play a game for making the game ball win V even if the small winning game is executed during the unfavorable period or not to make the game ball win a V prize in order to execute the big winning game after the advantageous period is set.

In the present embodiment, when a time saving state is set, a predetermined disadvantageous period and an advantageous period are always set. However, without being limited to this, for example, a time saving state in which only a disadvantageous period is set or a time saving state in which only an advantageous period is set can be set according to the type of jackpot type set for a jackpot game that triggers setting of a time saving state or the game state at the time of winning.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is formed by one unfavorable period (1st to 6th special figure fluctuation period of time saving) and one advantageous period (7th to 10th special figure fluctuation period of time saving). Furthermore, when a time saving state is set without being triggered by a jackpot winning, for example, as a game state, both a normal symbol probability state and a special symbol probability state are configured to be variable, and four types of game states are normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), A pachinko machine 10 configured to be capable of setting a latent probability state (a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols), and when variable probability states are set, the setting contents of a disadvantageous period and an advantageous period may be varied depending on whether a time saving state is set based on the establishment of a falling condition for shifting (falling) the high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state or when the time saving state is set with the opportunity of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a first state in which it is easy to acquire the number of Toku-2 reserved balls and a second state in which it is more difficult to acquire the number of Toku-2 reserved balls than in the first state can be set during the advantageous period of the time-saving state. It consists of

As a result, the easiness of acquiring the number of special 2 reserved balls during the time saving state (the number of special 2 reserved balls at the end of time saving) can be varied based on the game result of how many special 2 reserved balls are obtained at which timing during the time saving state (during the advantageous period), so that the player can be provided with a novel game including a new element of the acquisition timing of the special 2 reserved balls.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the above-described first state and second state are configured to be set by a predetermined specific setting method, but without being limited to this, for example, the setting method (setting condition) between the first state and the second state may be changed according to the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time saving state and the game state at the time of winning. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing and based on which game method the game should be executed, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Also, in this embodiment, the first state and the second state are set based on the result of one special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) and the variation pattern of one selected special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation). It may be configured to determine and set the first state and the second state. Furthermore, an operation means that can be operated by the player may be provided, and the first state and the second state may be set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a guide performance that is a reference for the player in the time saving state when selecting a game method can be executed, and execution of a time saving game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the guidance effect when the timing for the player to select the game method has arrived. It may be configured so as to be notified as soon as possible. Further, when the game is played by the game method selected by the player, a suggestive effect may be executed to suggest whether or not the game method selected this time is the correct game method.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to vary the performance mode of various guidance performances described above with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol or the timing of receiving the winning command of the second special symbol. That is, when the game is executed by the game method corresponding to the performance mode of the guidance performance after visually recognizing the guidance performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the performance mode of the guidance performance may be changed at any timing as long as the game can be executed by the proper game method.

Furthermore, a plurality of appropriate game methods set for various game patterns (patterns combining the number of times of time saving and the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) that can occur during the time saving state can be displayed, and after the player discriminates the current game pattern, the appropriate game method may be selected and executed. In this case, it is possible to display a first notification mode (e.g., a mode in which the number of times of saving time and the number of reserved balls of Toku-2 reserved balls are displayed numerically) in which the game pattern currently being executed can be easily notified to the player, and a second notification mode (e.g., a mode of displaying only one of the number of times of saving time and the number of reserved balls of Toku-2 reserved by numbers, or a mode of displaying a mark corresponding to the number of times of saving time and the number of reserved balls of Toku-2). Then, it is preferable to determine the notification mode to be displayed based on the established display condition (for example, the condition established according to the player's operation result on the frame button 22 or the condition established based on the lottery result of the special symbol). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a new pleasure of predicting the current game pattern.

According to the 11th embodiment described above, the time -saving state is set, and during the period when a special map 2 can be easily acquired (advantage period), the first period is to be advantageous to the players if the special diagram 2 pending ball is obtained to the upper limit, and the special diagram 2 is a specific number (for example, 3), which has a specific number (for example, 3). The second period, which is easy to be profitable, and the third period, which is more likely to be advantageous to the players if only one special map 2 is acquired. As a result, even during the period when the advantageous period is set, the player can play a game for increasing the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 to an arbitrary number without increasing the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 unnecessarily, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, since there is one data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the setting rules for the first period, the second period, and the third period are fixed. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of data tables that are referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time saving state may be provided, and a plurality of setting rules for the above-described first, second, and third periods may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described first period, second period, and third period are configured to be set for each execution period of the second special symbol variation to be performed, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to set the above-described first period, second period, and third period over a plurality of special symbol variations, or to set the above-described first period, second period, and third period based on the elapsed time after the time saving state is set.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the time reduction state is set, the number of remaining time reductions is notified on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but the number of remaining time reductions may be configured not to be displayed, or may be displayed abstractly. By constructing in this way, even if an ultra-short variation pattern is set as a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation in the time shortening state, the display of the number of remaining time shortening times does not decrease rapidly, so that the player can be prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity.

Further, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, it is configured to set the effect mode of the guidance effect based on the selected variation pattern, but not limited to this. For example, based on the information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, the selected variation pattern and the lottery result may be determined in advance, and the effect mode based on the preliminary determination result may be set. Thus, for example, when a special symbol lottery in which an ultra-short variation pattern is selected is winning, the variation period of the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) executed before the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is used in addition to the ultra-short variation (0.1 second) period to set the performance mode for showing the winning to the player, so that the player can perform the performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In the eleventh embodiment, as a withdrawal game (second special symbol lottery during the normal state) executed after the termination of the time saving state, various guidance effects for guiding the player to the game method during the time saving state for executing an advantageous withdrawal game advantageous to the player are always executed during the time saving state. may be configured. In this case, for example, when the special figure variation is executed during the time saving end preparation period corresponding to the 7th or 8th time of the time saving, the player may execute an initial effect that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is better to newly acquire the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls. If the length of the period until a new acquisition is longer than a predetermined period, it is preferable to perform the guidance effect.

By configuring in this way, the easiness of execution of the guidance performance can be varied according to the game method (shooting interval of the game balls in the right-handed game) during the time-saving state, so that the enjoyment of allowing the player to select the game method during the time-saving state can be increased.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the game method during the time saving state (whether or not there is a right-handed game) is configured to be set for each special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state. You can set the technique.

<Regarding the modified example of production in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the effect executed during the time saving state of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described based on the flow shown in FIG. 263 described above. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, as an effect to be executed during the time saving state, based on the number of time reduction fluctuations and the number of special 2 reserved balls, a save effect (see, for example, FIG. 254 (a)) is executed to newly acquire a specific number of special 2 reserved balls. If a specific number of new special 2 reserved balls is acquired during the accumulation effect, a standby effect that prevents further acquisition of special 2 reserved balls for a predetermined period (see, for example, FIG. 254 (b)). ) was configured to run.

More specifically, the above-described accumulation production is configured to be executed when the special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed this time is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more, and it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls than the number of currently acquired special figure 2 reserved balls. It is determined whether or not the number of special 2 reserved balls is the number of special 2 reserved balls which is advantageous to the player, and when it is decided that the number of 2 reserved balls is advantageous to the player, a standby performance is executed to prevent acquisition of new special 2 reserved balls until the final variation of the time saving state is executed. Further, when a new special figure 2 reserved ball is obtained while the standby presentation is being executed, it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball is excessively obtained, and a DANGER presentation is executed indicating that the current time saving state is disadvantageous to the player.

Then, the standby performance or the DANGER performance described above is configured to be continuously executed until the end timing of the time saving state, and based on the number of special 2 reserved balls acquired at the end of the time saving state, the pullback performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery executed during the normal state is executed.

On the other hand, in this modified example of performance, winning information included in the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball is pre-read (preliminarily discriminated), and the performance is executed based on the preliminary discrimination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the production corresponding to the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the standby production.

Next, the contents of the effect of this modified example of effect will be described. First, the content of the presentation executed corresponding to the flow of FIG. 263(a) will be described. As shown in FIG. 263(a), when the middle variation (10-second variation) is set (selected) as the special figure 2 variation of the seventh time of shortening (remaining time shortening number of times 4 times), the same guide effect (accumulate effect) for saving the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to the upper limit (4) as in the eleventh embodiment described above is executed.

Then, the guide performance (accumulate performance) is executed until the special figure 2 fluctuation of the 7th time saving is stopped and displayed, or until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit. Here, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit, a standby effect for a predetermined period is executed. In this modified example of effect, an effect in which the player actively releases the operating handle 51 is executed as the standby effect. More specifically, as an effect (touch effect) for simultaneously touching a plurality of decorative members provided in the pachinko machine 10, more specifically, a plurality of decorative members provided at positions spaced apart larger than the size of a human palm (touch effect), a touch effect is executed in which characters "Keep touching the decorative member" and an icon imitating the decorative member to be touched by the player are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

The decorative member is provided with detection means (touch sensor) capable of detecting that the player is touching it, and during the period during which the above-described touch performance is executed, an operation performance for varying the performance mode is executed according to the detection result of the detection means. Specifically, as the performance mode of the operation performance, the initial display mode is displayed first, and then the performance mode of the operation performance is changed based on the length of the period during which the detection means detects the player's operation and the result of the prefetching of the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball.

In this case, when it is determined that there is a specific look-ahead result (jackpot) as a look-ahead result, and when it is determined that the player touches a plurality of decorative members for a predetermined period or longer, the player is notified before the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the look-ahead result is executed. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to positively touch the decoration member for a predetermined period or more in order to quickly grasp the result of the game to be executed later (the game result corresponding to the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation handle 51 during the period in which the standby performance is executed, so that the occurrence of a situation in which the special figure 2 reserved balls are excessively obtained during the standby performance can be suppressed.

In addition, in this production modification, when the special figure 2 holding ball is acquired during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the 7th time saving, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation (the 8th special figure 2 variation of the time saving) to be executed next is an ultra-short variation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) or the middle variation (variation time 10 seconds). A waiting performance for one period (for example, 5 seconds) is executed, and when the special figure 2 variation for the eighth time of shortening the working hours is 10 seconds, the standby performance for a second period (for example, 15 seconds) is executed after the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit. In addition, the period set as the execution period of the standby performance may be a length that overlaps with the final variation period of the time-saving state when the special-figure 2 reserved ball reaches the upper limit number in the shortest period during the seventh special figure 2 fluctuation of the time saving.

In this way, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed later is read in advance, and the performance period of the standby performance to be executed is set based on the result of the look-ahead, thereby eliminating the need to set the standby performance each time the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) to be executed within the target period of the standby performance is executed, thereby reducing the processing load related to the performance setting.

In addition, by executing the standby performance of a predetermined period, for example, if the special figure 2 holding ball reaches the upper limit early during the 7th special figure 2 fluctuation, the end timing of the standby presentation can be made earlier than the case where the special figure 2 holding ball cannot reach the upper limit early. Therefore, the execution timing of the saving performance (see Fig. 256) executed during the final variation of the time saving state can be advanced, and the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit number during the final variation of the time saving state can be executed with a margin.

Further, for example, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are obtained up to the upper limit number during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the seventh time reduction, when it is preliminarily determined that winning information corresponding to the lastly obtained special figure 2 reserved ball contains winning information (small win, big win), a special standby performance different from the normal standby performance is executed. Specifically, as a result of the above-described touch effects and operation effects, an effect is executed to notify in advance that the game most advantageous to the player will be executed after the time-saving state ends.

That is, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired up to the upper limit number during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the seventh time of the time saving, the lastly acquired special figure 2 reserved ball becomes the special figure 2 reserved ball used in the second special pattern lottery to be executed next when the time saving state is finished, that is, the second special pattern lottery to be executed first after the time saving state shifts to the normal state. In other words, when the special standby performance is executed, the player can grasp in advance that the most advantageous game for the player to win the second special symbol lottery during the normal state will be executed. Therefore, since the player eagerly executes the touch performance while expecting the special standby performance to be executed, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and by participating in the touch performance, the player can be easily released from the operation handle 51, so that the situation of acquiring a new special figure 2 reserved ball during the period when the standby performance is executed can be suppressed.

In addition, for example, special figure 2 variation during execution of standby performance, specifically, in the game flow shown in FIG. In this special selection performance, a performance is executed as shown in FIG. 258 to make the player select whether to perform a game aiming at V winning during the small winning game or to perform a game not aiming at V winning during the small winning game. The production mode of this special selection production is configured so that a different production mode is set based on the pre-discrimination result for the special 2 reserve ball other than the special 2 reserve ball corresponding to the 9th special 2 reserve ball corresponding to the 9th time reduction 2 fluctuation. A special selection performance mode is set to indicate that it is more advantageous not to aim for a V prize during a move, and when there is no preliminary determination result indicating winning against the other special figure 2 reserved balls, a special selection performance mode is set to make the player arbitrarily select which game to execute. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an excessively disadvantageous game, so that it is possible to prevent the player from selecting a disadvantageous game and lowering the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the special figure 2 holding ball is acquired excessively, as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the time saving state ends, the DANGER production is ended, the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls is notified, and the pullback production is executed.

On the other hand, in this production modification, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired excessively, the DANGER production is executed using also the variation period of the second special symbol variation (the second special symbol variation using the special figure 2 reserved balls acquired during the time saving state) executed after the normal state is set. That is, the end timing of the DANGER effect is made different from that of the above-described eleventh embodiment. As a result, when the DANGER effect ends, a game for executing the first special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. By constructing in this way, when the DANGER performance is executed, it is difficult to give an opportunity to obtain a large number of special 2 reserved balls in the time saving state, and the pullback performance is not executed, so that the player can be notified of the disadvantageous game situation. In addition, since the DANGER production can be executed also using the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed after the normal state is set, when the period from the execution of the DANGER production to the arrival of the end timing of the time saving state is extremely short, for example, in the game flow shown in FIG. It is possible to suppress execution of an effect that is difficult for a player to understand.

In addition, the above-described effect period of the DANGER effect does not need to use the remaining period from the execution of the DANGER effect to the end of the time saving state and the entire period of the execution period of the second special symbol variation executed after the normal state is set. The GER effect may be terminated, a display mode indicating that the pullback effect will be executed as a result of the DANGER effect, and then the pullback effect may be executed.

In addition, as in this modified example of performance, a configuration for executing a series of performances using the remaining period in the time saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol variation executed after the normal state is set may be used for the standby performance. In this case, the performance mode of the standby performance (at least a part of the performance mode included in the standby performance) may be varied according to the length of the period during which the standby performance is executed, and the longer the execution period of the standby performance, the more advantageous the game result for the player.

<Regarding Modified Example of the Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment described above, specifically, an example in which the technical idea of the eleventh embodiment is applied to the technology described in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are provided for ending the time-saving state, and further, according to the game method executed by the player (left-handed game, right-handed game). Then, it is determined whether it is in a state immediately before each time saving end condition is satisfied (the condition before time saving end is satisfied), and when it is determined that the condition before time saving end is satisfied for one time saving end condition, a performance (game method guidance performance) for playing a game by a game method in which another time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the one time saving end condition in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game during the time saving state (to lengthen the game period during the time saving state), among the plurality of time saving end conditions, only the element for establishing one time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) is updated, and the element for establishing the other time saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol) is not updated at all. It was configured as

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment described above, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbols can be reserved and stored, and by ending the time-saving state with the lottery rights for the second special symbols being retained and stored, the lottery for the second special symbols, which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbols, can be executed in the normal state set after the end of the time-saving state. In other words, it is constructed so as to maximize the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed during the time saving state and execute the performance capable of terminating the time saving state while holding and storing more lottery rights for the second special symbols.

On the other hand, in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the time saving end condition (special figure 2 end condition) is set only for the second special symbol that is easier to acquire the lottery right than when the game state other than the time saving condition (for example, the normal state) is set. and that the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery. The specific control contents for executing the second special symbol lottery with priority over the first special symbol lottery are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this modification, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state can be changed and selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of retained and stored second special symbol lottery rights reserved and stored at the time the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the number of remaining special symbol lotteries (remaining time reduction number of times) until the special symbol 2 end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, from the time the time saving state is set until the number of remaining time reductions reaches 5 times, a short time variation pattern (short variation pattern A) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol based on the same variation pattern table as the eighth embodiment described above. , 10 to 20 seconds)) is selected, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, the above-described short variation pattern A is selected, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the short variation pattern A (ultra-short variation pattern (for example, 0.1 seconds)) is selected.

Then, when the number of times of remaining short time is 2 times or 1 time (final fluctuation of time saving state) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, 2, or 3, the above-mentioned ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) is selected, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the above-described medium fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation pattern (for example, 30 seconds)) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of reserved and stored second special symbols at the end of the time saving state depending on the game method executed during the time saving state.

Here, the game content during the time saving state in this modified example will be described. In this modification, as in the eighth embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, the game method of performing the right-handed game and executing the lottery of the second special symbol is the most advantageous method for the player.

The variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time reduction state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol), the execution period of the normal symbol per game, the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and the arrangement intervals of various devices arranged on the game board 13 are set so that the interval at which the lottery right for the second special symbol is acquired becomes shorter than the interval at which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the time reduction state. Thus, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the game is executed toward the final variation of the time saving state while maintaining the upper limit value (four) of the reserved memory number of the second special symbols.

Hereinafter, when explaining the flow of the game during the time saving state, the period from when the time saving state is set until the number of times of remaining time saving reaches 5 times is called the time saving normal period, the period when the number of remaining time saving times is 5 to 3 times is called the time saving end preparation period, and the period when the number of remaining time saving times is 2 or 1 (final fluctuation of the time saving state) is called the time saving end pre-term.

As described above, when the game in the time saving state is executed while the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is maintained at the upper limit value (4 pieces), the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) is selected in the period before the time saving end. Therefore, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state ends (when the special figure final variation in the time saving state is stopped and displayed) tends to decrease. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit value (4 pieces), the second special symbol variation with the number of remaining time shortening times of "2" (99th rotation of the time saving state) is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern, and in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to three, the second special symbol variation with the number of remaining time shortening times of "1" (100th rotation of the time shortening state) is performed with an ultra-short variation pattern. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving is two.

In this way, when the period before the end of time saving is entered in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is a predetermined number (four), an ultra-short variation pattern is set for the second special patterns executed twice during the period before the end of time saving, so that it becomes difficult to newly acquire the reserved balls of the second special pattern.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game in the time saving state is temporarily interrupted and the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern when entering the period before the end of the time saving is set to other than 4, the fluctuation time is set for the second special pattern fluctuation during the period before the end of the time saving so that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time of the end of the time saving is likely to increase as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 4.

For example, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time shortening is three, the second special symbol variation with the number of remaining time shortening times of "2" (99th rotation of the time shortening state) is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern, and in a state where the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is reduced to two, the second special symbol variation with the number of remaining time shortening times of "1" (100th rotation of the time shortening state) is performed with a long variation pattern. Therefore, since the final variation of the time saving state can be executed for a long time, it is possible to newly acquire the second special symbol reserved ball during the final variation. In addition, in this modification, the variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the long variation pattern, and by executing the right-handed game for 30 seconds during the time-saving state, three or more new second special symbol reserved balls can be obtained. Therefore, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time-saving pattern can be easily set to the upper limit value (4) simply by continuing the right-handed game during the time-saving final variation in which the long variation pattern is selected.

Next, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time saving is 2, when the second special symbol variation with the number of times of remaining time shortening of ``2'' (99th rotation of the time shortening state) is executed in a long variation pattern, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol can be once set to the upper limit value (4) by continuing the right-handed game during the second special symbol variation. Then, with the number of balls held in the second special pattern set to the upper limit value (4 pieces), the second special pattern variation with the number of times of remaining time shortening being ``1'' (100th rotation in the time shortening state) is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving can be set to three. That is, it is possible to make it easier to increase the number of held balls of the second special symbol at the end of time saving compared to the case where the right hitting game is continuously executed during the time saving state.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 1 when entering the period before the end of time saving, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is 0, a new reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, and the second special pattern variation with the number of remaining time shortening times of ``2'' (the 99th rotation of the time shortening state) is executed, an ultra-short variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Similarly, when the second special symbol variation with the number of retained balls of the second special symbol being one and the number of times of remaining time shortening being ``1'' (100th rotation of the time shortening state) is executed, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation is an ultra-short variation pattern. In other words, when the period before the end of time saving is entered in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is less than a predetermined number (2 pieces), the time saving state is ended without giving an opportunity to newly acquire the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern.

As described above, in this modification, the expected acquisition value of the second special symbol reserved balls at the end of the time saving can be varied according to the number of the second special symbol reserved balls when entering the period before the time saving ends in the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the game method during the time saving.

In addition, in this modification, it is possible to make it easier to provide a game advantageous to the player during the period after the time-reduction state ends by temporarily interrupting the right-handed game or by executing a game other than the normal right-handed game (left-handed game) rather than continuously executing the right-handed game during the time-reduction state.

Furthermore, in this modification, when the right-handed game executed during the time-saving state is interrupted more than necessary, the benefit provided to the player during the period after the time-saving state is terminated (execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state) is configured to be smaller than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, the player who is playing in the time-saving state can not only change the game method but also play the game while considering the length of the period for changing the game method. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, it is a period during the time saving state, and the time saving end preparation period (the number of remaining time saving times is 5 to 3 times) before the time saving end pre-period (the remaining time saving number of times is 2 times or 1 time (final fluctuation of the time saving state)) is also configured to select a variation pattern different from the normal working time period (the period until the remaining time saving number of times reaches 5 times), and according to the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving end preparation period. , It is constructed so that the player can arbitrarily change the number of held balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time saving by selecting the game method.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is ``3 or 4'' during the time saving end preparation period, a medium variation pattern with a longer variation time than the short variation pattern selected during the time saving normal period is easily selected, and when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the number of the second special symbol holding balls when entering the time saving end pre-period tends to become the upper limit (4). In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is ``1 or 2'' in the time saving end preparation period, a variation pattern is selected within a range that can be selected during the time saving normal period, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is '0' when entering the time saving end preparatory period, an ultra-short variation pattern shorter than the short variation pattern is selected.

In other words, when the right-handed game is continuously executed by selecting the above-mentioned medium variation pattern, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol held and stored at the time of entering the period before the end of the time saving is easily set to the upper limit value (4 pieces). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the period before the end of the time saving without newly acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is continuously played. Therefore, it is possible to easily give a privilege according to the content of the game method to be executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the time saving end preparation period is 0, the ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Therefore, in order to prevent the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from entering the period before the end of the time saving in the state of the upper limit value (4 pieces), when the game in the time saving state is executed while interrupting the right hitting game more than necessary, that is, in order not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the right hitting game is not performed while the second special symbol variation is being performed, and the right hitting game is performed after the second special symbol variation stops (so-called, so-called). It is possible to suppress the execution of a stopping game).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this modified example, as the time-reduction performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the time-reduction state, the first time-reduction performance mode executed during the time-reduction normal period, the second time-reduction performance mode executed during the time-reduction end preparation period, and the third time-reduction performance mode executed during the time-reduction pre-termination period can be set. Here, an effect mode unique to this modified example will be described.

As described above, in this modification, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation to be selected is changed based on the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state. By configuring the expected value of the number of retained balls of the second special symbol acquired at the end of the time saving state to be different, the degree of advantage of the game executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state is configured to be different. That is, it is configured such that the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be changed according to the game method selected by the player during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the time saving state.

Also, as described above, in this modification, when a period (a period in which the second special symbol variation in which the long variation pattern is set is executed) is set in which the number of retained balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased, cases where it is better to increase the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and cases where it is better not to increase it are configured to occur according to the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state. Therefore, when a period (easy period) in which the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern can be easily increased arrives, the player can be provided with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern.

In this modification, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a specific number (100 times) is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, the time saving end condition may be configured to be different according to the jackpot type set in the jackpot election that triggered the setting of the time saving state. A jackpot type in which a time-saving end condition is set when reaching 75 times, and a jackpot type in which a time-saving end condition is set when reaching 1 time may be provided.

In this case, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the continuation period of the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the easy period based on the number of times of remaining time saving.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, only the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as the time-saving end condition, but without being limited to this, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery A time-saving end condition (lottery result end condition) that is established when a specific lottery result (for example, a specific hit or a specific loss) is provided, and the time-saving state may be forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining time-saving times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the time saving state will end, so that the player can be made to execute the game in the time saving state while considering a game method for securing a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this modification, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation to be selected is different based on the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state, thereby making the expected value of the number of retention balls of the second special symbol acquired at the end of the time reduction state different. Alternatively, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the number of times of remaining time reduction in the time saving state, and the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this way, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation is selected, the lottery result of the second special symbol is referred to, for example, during the period before the time shortening end, which is the period immediately before the time shortening state ends, the ultra-short variation pattern is selected except when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), and only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win). can be configured to

By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols) of the second advantageous period (the second special symbol holding digestion period executed during the normal state) coming after the first advantageous period (the period in which the time shortening state is set) advantageous to the player can be varied based on the result of the second special symbol lottery in the specific period (period before the end of the time shortening state) during the time shortening state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period.

In addition, in this modification, as the period during the time saving state, the time saving normal period (time saving 1 to 95 times), the time saving end preparation period (time saving 96 to 98 times), and the time saving end pre-period (time saving 99, 100 times) are set, and the variation patterns to be selected are configured to be different according to the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state) so that a different variation pattern is selected according to each set period. However, it is not limited to this. , For example, the length (range) of each period described above may be varied according to the jackpot type set when winning the jackpot in which the time saving state is set.

Further, when the time saving state is set, the entire period of the time saving state is set as a time saving normal period, and when the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state wins a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), as a variation pattern selected corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed after the small win game is finished, a special variation pattern table is used for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 rotations of the special figure variation), and the special variation pattern table is used. When a variation pattern is selected by using the above-described ultra-short variation pattern or long variation pattern, the configuration may be such that the variation pattern can be selected. By constructing in this way, the degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols) coming after the first advantageous period (the period in which the time saving state is set) advantageous to the player (the second special symbol retention digestion period performed during the normal state) can be varied according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and the timing of the specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state can affect the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period.

<Regarding Effect Contents in Modified Example of the Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, among the plurality of effects executed in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the content of the characteristic effects will be described. As described above, in this modification, when the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed during a predetermined period (second period) after the time saving state (first period) ends can be varied according to the game method to be executed during the time saving state. During the time-saving state (during the first period), an effect is executed to guide (suggest) a game method for allowing the player to more advantageously execute the game during the second period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to guide the game during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set, it has a measuring means for measuring the number of remaining time reductions until the time saving end condition is satisfied, a period determining means for determining whether the current time saving situation is the normal time saving period, the preparation period for ending the working hours, or the period before the end of the working hours based on the measurement result of the measuring means, and the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode corresponding to the determination result of the period determining means. By displaying on the display surface of , it is configured so that the player can grasp the situation during the time saving state.

Furthermore, a prediction means is provided for predicting in advance a variation pattern that can be selected until a time saving end condition is satisfied, based on the measurement result of the measurement means and the storage contents of the storage means for storing the reserved number of the second special symbols.

Then, when the predicting means predicts that only the ultra-short variation pattern will be selected until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, for example, when the final variation of the time-saving end preparation period (the second special symbol variation executed when the number of remaining time-savings is 3 times) is executed, if there are four reserved balls of the second special symbol, the remaining time-saving variation (the second special symbol for two times that is executed during the time-saving state) is obtained regardless of whether or not the second special symbol is newly acquired during the final variation. Since it is decided that the variation) will be executed in an ultra-short variation pattern, a composite performance mode is set based on the lottery result (prefetching result) of the second special symbol variation for three times including the final variation of this time. Then, the period until the condition for ending the time saving is established, that is, the period from the start of the final variation of the preparatory period for the end of the time saving to the stop display of the final change of the period before the end of the time saving (final change of the time saving state) is used to execute the compound performance used in the compound performance mode.

By executing the composite performance in this way, in the case where an ultra-short variation pattern can be set in order to make it difficult to newly acquire the number of balls of the second special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is selected can be notified to the player by using a plurality of variation periods of the second special symbol variation, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, when the variation pattern discriminating means for discriminating the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation to be executed this time determines that the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation to be executed this time is a long variation pattern, there is provided a situation determination means for determining whether or not it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of retained balls of the second special symbol based on the number of retained balls of the second special symbol stored in the storage means and the measurement result (remaining time short count) of the measuring means. It is configured to set an effect mode based on the determination result and execute a guidance effect for guiding the player about the current situation.

In this guidance performance, the performance is executed in a display mode including at least a first guidance mode for guiding the player that the second special symbol variation set for a long time is being executed (during an easy period), and a second guidance mode for guiding the player to either a continuation game for continuing the right-handed game or a switching game for interrupting the right-handed game (executing the left-handed game).

Instead of this guidance performance, a special guidance performance capable of displaying the above-described first guidance mode and a special guidance mode in which the player performs either the continuation game or the switching game may be executed, and after the easy period has elapsed, a result mode indicating the game result may be displayed based on the game content of the player during the easy period and the content of the above-described second guidance mode. In this case, the player is notified that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern can be easily increased during the easy period, and a performance is executed to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the playability of allowing the player to select a game method while grasping the content of the presentation.

In addition, as a technical configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment and the modification of the eleventh embodiment, for example, a first special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery can be executed in duplicate, and when a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery and the special symbol indicating the small prize is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol variation being executed is forcibly missed and stopped and displayed. In a pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time saving state when the number of variations of the second special pattern reaches a predetermined number when the game state (time saving state) is set, the reserved ball of the first special pattern is obtained when the time saving state is set, and when the reserved ball of the second special pattern is not obtained, the reserved ball of the second special pattern is obtained until the reserved ball of the first special pattern becomes 0 (until the first special pattern variation is not executed). You may comprise so that guidance production|presentation which makes it not perform the game (time saving game) may be performed. By constructing in this way, the number of the second special symbol variations that are forcibly missed and stop-displayed based on the lottery results of the first special symbols can be suppressed, so that the number of times of variation of the second special symbols can be suppressed from being wastefully updated during the time-saving state. In other words, when an advantageous state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to provide a game more advantageous to the player by interrupting the game for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the above-described eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, an example of using a time saving state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has been described. In addition, in a game machine having a game property in which a privilege can be acquired through a plurality of stages, a state in which a specific stage is reached among the plurality of stages, that is, a state in which the privilege is more easily acquired than in the initial state, should be set in an advantageous state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set, and when the time-saving end conditions are satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol among the plurality of time-saving end conditions reaches a specific number of times of fluctuation, that is, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small prize is won by special symbol lottery, i.e., when the winning number of times end condition is satisfied, the time-saving state can be shifted to the normal state at different timings.

Using this configuration, it is preferable to provide a game machine which is controlled to shift the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol when, for example, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, and to shift the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game when the condition for the end of the winning number is satisfied.

As a result, even when the time saving state ends based on the variation of the same special pattern, the timing of finishing the time saving state can be made different within a range obtained by summing the variation time of the special pattern and the time of executing the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, even during the small winning game in which a small amount of privilege is awarded to the player, the small winning game can be brought into a more advantageous game state for the player by activating the electric accessory 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance depending on the established time saving end condition.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a plurality of small winning types with different periods during which the small winning game is executed, and to differentiate the privilege given to the player according to the small winning type for which the winning number of times ending condition is satisfied even when the winning number of times ending condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the conditions for ending the winning times are met, it is preferable to configure so that the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started and the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above -mentioned embodiment, it uses a composition that determines whether or not the time -saving conditions have been established based on the number of fluctuations of the special patterns have been established, and to determine whether or not the time -saving conditions have been established based on the winnings have been elected, but are not limited to this. A configuration that centrally manages the time -saving information updated according to (fluctuation) and sets the timing of terminating the time -saving state based on the established time and saving conditions.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases) in the main controller 110, the command for the number of reserved balls is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of areas divided into four.

Further, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling patterns as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving and displaying patterns in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but includes, for example, a performance display in which one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern, by variously displaying actions or changing displays. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the normal game state. Good. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as the operation means that the player can operate by pressing the frame buttons 22 and 23. However, other configurations may be used, such as lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the operation means has been operated by the player tilting it left or right or forward or backward, touch sensor-type operation means that can determine whether the player has touched or been operated in close proximity, or determination of operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave. A possible wireless operating means or the like may be used. Further, part or all of the operation control of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 performs the processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is configured to be executed by the main controller 110 different from the audio lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the processing for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as an effect are executed by the same control device. It can be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In the sixth, eighth, and ninth embodiments described above, the first operation port 704 for opening the first right ball entrance 64a2 and the second operation port 707 for opening the second right ball entrance 64b are provided inside the sorting device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution device 700 may have a configuration in which the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided directly inside. In other words, the right first ball inlet 64a2 may be provided in place of the first operating hole 704, and the right second ball inlet 64b may be provided in place of the second operating hole 707. By configuring in this way, the first operating opening 704, the second operating opening 707, the first operating role 645a, and the second operating role 645b can be deleted, so the board configuration can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate can be reduced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a 2-time right product or a 3-time right product) in which the expected value of a big win is increased until a big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the big win once. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to these, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule of a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed independently of each other are described. However, each of the game characteristics described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a variable-probability state) can be set to any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 6 steps). Instead of or in addition to the combinations of the jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is achieved according to settings may be implemented. That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big win may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that shifts (or easily shifts) to an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the big win is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) a disadvantageous game state (such as a normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In the setting 6, when a big win is achieved, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of setting 6, which is the most advantageous, is extremely high, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In place of or in addition to these, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from that of other jackpot games during the execution of the jackpot game, so that the jackpot type can be easily determined (decided rate increases) with specific settings. In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probabilities of big wins in accordance with the setting, in the low-probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the variable probability state, the probability of big wins is increased as the setting is disadvantageous to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of game machine in which the number of winning balls tends to increase as the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of awarded balls tends to increase more than the number of fired game balls) in the variable probability state. More specifically, for example, the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, and by applying it to a game machine of a type where the variable probability state gives a small win with a high probability, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the slot machine is a well-known machine in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a valid pattern line, and the pattern is changed by operating an operation lever, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is to provide a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitely displays the identification information, and the variability display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a starting operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and the variability display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, there is provided a display device for confirming and displaying a pattern after variably displaying a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns, and not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. In this case, after putting the specified ball based on the prescribed operation (button operation), the pattern fluctuates due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, the design is stopped due to a predetermined time. A special game is generated as a requirement of a hidden pattern, which gives a prescribed gaming value to the player, and a large amount of balls are paid to the lower plate for the players. If such a game machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as game values in the game hall, so that problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game values seen in the current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist can be solved.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Time saving ends with small winning)
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determination means; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is statically displayed on the display means; a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game; a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means ends; The game machine A1 is characterized in that at least a first end condition that can be established based on the display being executed a predetermined number of times, a second end condition that can be established based on the determination result of the determining means being the first determination result, and a third end condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the determining means being the second determination result can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) determined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the period in which the time-saving game is executed, and it is difficult to make the player perform the game while paying attention to whether the time-saving game will continue, and the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine A1, since a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state advantageous to the player can be set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period in which the second game state is continuously set, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine A1, the third end condition is established when the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during a period in which the second game state is continuously set.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated according to the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second game state, the player can be made to pay attention to the determination result of the determination means during the second game state.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the small privilege game from being excessively executed during the second game state.

In the gaming machine A2, the determination means also determines a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, and the small privilege game execution means executes the small privilege game even when the determination result of the determination means is the third determination result.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to execute a small privilege game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period in which the second game state is continuously set only by grasping the number of times of the small privilege game executed during the second game state, so that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the discrimination means discriminates at least a specific second discrimination result that causes the small privilege game execution means to execute a first small privilege game and a special second discrimination result that is different from the specific second discrimination result that causes the small privilege game execution means to execute a second small privilege game different from the first small privilege game as the second discrimination result. 2, the game machine A4 is characterized in that the third termination condition is satisfied when the number of times of determination as the determination result is a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the ending condition of different times can be set according to the type of the small privilege game, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period in which the second game state is continuously set only by grasping the number of times of the small privilege game executed during the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A4, when the small privilege game is executed, it has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means can pass. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area is different between when the second small privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the possibility of ending the second game state and the possibility of executing the privilege game can be differentiated according to the type of the small privilege game executed by the game machine A, the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Different time-saving end conditions for special 1 game and special 2 game)
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means for executing a predetermined first determination when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined second determination when a game ball enters the second ball entering means and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied, and determination by the determining means. display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; The game machine B1 comprises a setting means and an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the end condition setting means sets, as the plurality of end conditions, at least a first end condition which is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is executed than the first determination, and a second end condition which is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is performed than the second determination is performed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Furthermore, the gaming machine described above executes a special symbol lottery as a game lottery, and is capable of executing various game lotteries by providing two types of special symbols. However, since the game machine described above terminates the time saving state when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving game reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving state ends under the same conditions regardless of the type of special symbols for which the lottery is performed during the time saving state. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time-saving state tends to become monotonous. In addition, the content of the lottery executed during the time saving state is made different according to the type of the special pattern drawn during the time saving state, but the game result as to whether the time saving state ends or not is the same regardless of the type of the special pattern drawn during the time saving state. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to make the end conditions for ending the second game state different between when the first determination is performed and when the second determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine B1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, the end condition setting means sets a discrimination result end condition that can be satisfied at least when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and a dynamic display end condition that can be met based on the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the discrimination means executes the first discrimination. A game machine B2 characterized in that it is easier to distinguish the result of the second judgment when the second judgment is performed than when the second judgment is performed.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since one of the end conditions for ending the second game state is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is executed than when the first determination is performed, the player is concerned about which determination is executed during the second game state and what the determination result was. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine B2, the end condition setting means sets the discrimination result end condition as the first end condition, and sets the dynamic display end condition as the second end condition.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination result end condition is more likely to be established when the first determination is performed than when the second determination is performed. In other words, although the second determination is more likely to result in the second determination result, the determination result end condition is less likely to be satisfied. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether the result of the second determination is the first determination or the second determination, it is possible to provide a game that is not boring.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the game machine B4 is characterized by comprising a second discrimination result type determining means for determining one second discrimination result type from a plurality of second discrimination result types as a type of the second discrimination result when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and wherein the termination condition setting means sets a different termination condition for each of the second discrimination result types determined by the second discrimination result type determining means as the discrimination result termination condition.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the enjoyment of predicting the future game can be enhanced, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the second discrimination result type determining means can determine different second discrimination result types depending on whether the discrimination result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result or the discrimination result of the second discrimination is the second discrimination result.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, different second discrimination result types can be determined between the first discrimination and the second discrimination, so that the first discrimination and the second discrimination can easily differ in the ease with which the discrimination result termination condition is satisfied.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means sets, as the dynamic display end conditions, a first dynamic display end condition that can be established when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed, and a second dynamic display end condition that can be established when the dynamic display based on the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to vary the end conditions for ending the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which determination is executed during the second game state, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display end condition is satisfied when the number of dynamic displays executed by the dynamic display reaches a predetermined number of times, and the end condition setting means sets the number of dynamic display times to satisfy the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic display times to satisfy the second dynamic display end condition so as to differ from each other.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the number of times of dynamic display that satisfies the first dynamic display end condition and the number of times of dynamic display that satisfies the second dynamic display end condition can be made different, when the second game state is set, the easiness of ending the second game state can be made different between the game in which the first determination is performed and the game in which the second determination is performed, so that various games can be provided.

In the game machine B7, the end condition setting means sets an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is established when the total number of dynamic displays obtained by adding the first dynamic display count executed based on the first determination and the second dynamic display count executed based on the second determination reaches the upper limit count.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state is terminated even when the total number of dynamic display times obtained by summing the number of times of the first dynamic display and the number of times of the second dynamic display reaches the upper limit, so that the excessive execution of the first discrimination and the second discrimination during the second game state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine B9 is characterized by comprising an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determining means is likely to become the first determination result for a specific period when a predetermined transition condition is established in the game machine B8, and wherein the predetermined transition condition can be established when the second game state is set by the game state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantageous state can be set in accordance with the timing when the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A game machine B10 characterized by having a special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to a player when the first game state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set in the game machine B9.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, the special state is set. This makes it possible to set different game states according to the timing at which the second game state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second game state within a predetermined period of a specific period, the novel game of positively ending the second game state advantageous to the player can be played, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the specific period, the period from the timing when the second game state is set until the predetermined end condition is established may be set, or the period from when the specific establishment condition is satisfied until the predetermined end condition is established in the state where the second game state is set may be set.

<Characteristic group C> (Remaining time short-term production)
A determination means for executing a predetermined determination when a determination condition is established, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, a privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is displayed on the display means, a first game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a settable game state setting means; an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means; an end condition determination means for determining an end condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means; The game machine C1 is characterized in that the suggested effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the suggested effect based on the end condition determined by the end condition determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) determined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the period in which the time-saving game is executed, and it is difficult to make the player perform the game while paying attention to whether the time-saving game will continue, and the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, the present applicant has developed a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is set to continue by setting a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this game machine, since there are a plurality of end conditions for ending the time-saving game, there is a problem that it is difficult to inform the player of the remaining period of the time-saving game, and the game is provided incomprehensible to the player. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine C1, even when a plurality of end conditions for ending the second game state are set, the suggestive performance can be set based on the end condition which is likely to be established among them, so that the player can easily grasp the period during which the second game state is continuously set.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the end condition determination means determines the end condition that is likely to be satisfied based on the execution contents of the determination means during the second game state.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the termination condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the actual execution contents of the determination means, there is an effect that the determination accuracy can be improved.

The gaming machine C2 has update means for updating predetermined game information based on the execution contents of the determination means executed during the period in which the second game state is continuously set, and the end condition setting means sets, as the plurality of end conditions, at least a first end condition that can be satisfied when the first game information is updated by the update means, and a second end condition that can be satisfied when the second game information different from the first game information is updated by the update means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since end conditions are set for a plurality of pieces of game information that can be established by execution of the determining means, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the second game state is terminated based on the execution contents of the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestive effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine C3, the first termination condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the first game information reaches a first number, and the second termination condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the second game information reaches a second number, and based on the game information updated by the updating means, a remaining update count determination for determining a first remaining update count until the first termination condition is met and a second remaining update count until the second end condition is met. means, wherein the termination condition determination means determines the termination condition that is likely to be satisfied according to the determination result of the remaining update number determination means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied are determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the precision of the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be enhanced.

The game machine C4 is characterized by having a pre-end condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determination means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition, and wherein the suggestive effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the suggested effect based on the determination result of the pre-end condition determiner.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the performance mode of the suggestive performance can be set according to whether or not the pre-end condition is satisfied by the pre-end condition discriminating means, there is an effect that the performance mode of the suggestive performance can make the player predict the remaining number of times until the end condition is satisfied.

In the game machine C5, the suggestive effect mode setting means sets a specific suggestive effect mode when the pre-end condition determining means determines that a plurality of the pre-end conditions are established.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set a specific suggestive effect mode when the pre-end condition is established, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining period of the time-saving state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of prediction.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the game machine C7 has a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and the suggestive performance mode setting means sets a special suggestive performance mode when the end condition is established in a state where the first period is set by the first period setting means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the end condition is satisfied within a prescribed period after the second game state advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion performance mode is set, so that the performance mode corresponding to the timing when the end condition is satisfied can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player aware of the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In the game machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period from when the second game state is set until the number of times of the determination performed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations executed by the determination means reaches a predetermined number, the player can easily grasp the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the first period setting means sets the first period until the elapsed time from the setting of the second gaming state reaches a predetermined time.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time after the setting of the second game state is within the predetermined period, there is an effect that the player can play the game enthusiastically in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period.

<Characteristic D group> (1 type and 2 types are usually shortened)
A first discriminating means for discriminating when a first discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the first discriminating means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and a specific game setting a specific game state in which a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is likely to be established after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is finished. a state setting means; a second determination means for performing determination when the second determination condition is satisfied; a variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball is easy to enter when identification information indicating a second determination result as a result of determination by the second determination means is displayed on the display means; The game machine D1 executes the privilege game, and the specific game state setting means can set at least a first specific game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established and a second specific game state in which the second determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first specific game state.

Here, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is made to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win or when the game lottery is not a win, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed, a game machine that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Furthermore, there is a game machine that allows setting of a game state in which the above-described privilege game is likely to be executed as the game state of the game machine. The above-described game machine sets two game states, a game state advantageous to the player and another game state, and has a problem that the game tends to become monotonous because a plurality of game states that are advantageous to the player cannot be set stepwise. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing monotony of a game and improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine D1, it is possible to set a game state in which the easiness of establishment of the second discrimination condition is varied during the specific game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine D1, display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means and second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means for a predetermined first period, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means for a predetermined second period, and a first dynamic display period for the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means are set. It has a first dynamic display period setting means and a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means, the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the specific game state is set in response to the first identification information being stopped and displayed on the display means in a first display mode for indicating the first determination result. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second state in response to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result, and the specific game state setting means sets the first specific game state and the second specific game state by differentiating the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means or the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by making the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period different in the specific game state, the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set, so that there is an effect that the game state in which the easiness of establishment of the second discrimination condition is different can be easily set in the specific game state.

In the game machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a second dynamic display period that is shorter when the first specific game state is set than when the second specific game state is set.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of determination by the second determination means, so there is an effect that the game state can be easily set.

In the game machine D2 or D3, the second determination means is configured to be able to determine the first determination result, and the second dynamic display period setting means sets a second dynamic display period shorter than when the determination result of the second determination means during the second specific game state is the first determination result, compared to when the determination result is other than the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means is the first determination result, a dynamic display period shorter than other determination results is set, so there is an effect that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set the first dynamic display period when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the short first dynamic display period is more likely to be set when the second specified game state is set than when the first specified game state is set, there is an effect that the game state can be easily set.

In the game machine D5, the first dynamic display period setting means sets a shorter first dynamic display period when the determination result of the first determination means during the first specific state is the first determination result than when the determination result is other than the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the case of the first determination result in the first specific state, a shorter first dynamic display period is set than in the case of the determination result other than the first determination result. As a result, the player can be immediately notified that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

In any one of gaming machines D2 to D6, a first acquisition means for acquiring first ball entry information when a predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied, a first storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the first ball entry information acquired by the first acquisition means up to a first predetermined number until the first determination condition is satisfied, a second acquisition means for acquiring second ball entry information when a predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the second ball entry acquired by the second acquisition means. and a second storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for indicating the determination result of the first first determination means executed in the state in which the first specified game state is set is set when the first determination result of the second determination means executed in the state in which the first specified game state is set is the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination result of the second discrimination means executed first in the state where the first specified game state is set is the second discrimination result, a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means which is first executed in the state where the first specified game state is set is set. Thus, even if the first specific game state is set while both the first storage means and the second storage means store the ball entry information, the player can be notified immediately of the second discrimination result of the second discrimination means which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

<Feature E group> (Electric sapo control when winning a small hit during time saving)
display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of determination by the determination means; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; The game machine E1 is characterized by having a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means differentiates the timing of setting the first game state according to the end condition satisfied among the plurality of end conditions.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, since the timing of finishing the time-saving game is the same, the player immediately grasps whether or not the time-saving game is finished. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the timing of setting the first game state can be varied based on the type of the established end condition, so that the player can be interested in the type of the established end condition as well. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

The gaming machine E1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, wherein the end condition setting means sets at least a first end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display is executed and a second end condition that can be met when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and the game state setting means is: The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that when it is determined that the first end condition is met, the corresponding dynamic display is terminated and the first game state is set based on the stopped display of the identification information, and when it is determined that the second end condition is met, the first game state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small privilege game.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the satisfied end condition, there is an effect that a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

The game machine E3 is characterized in that the game machine E2 has an end condition determining means for determining whether one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, and the end condition determining means prioritizes the first end condition over the second end condition.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied by one determination performed by the determination means, the first termination condition is preferentially determined. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the situation in which the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition to occur, and it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling.

When the configuration of the gaming machine E3 is used, the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition, which is more advantageous to the player than the case where the first game state is set based on the establishment of the first end condition. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the end condition is met but also to the end condition to be met, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E3, the end condition determination means determines whether the first end condition is satisfied when the determination means executes determination 1, and determines whether the second end condition is satisfied when it is determined that the first end condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the timing of determining whether or not each termination condition is satisfied is made different, there is an effect that whether or not the first termination condition is satisfied can be determined with higher priority than whether or not the second termination condition is satisfied.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines E2 to E4, it has game type determination means for determining a type of the small privilege game to be executed when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and the game type determination means determines one type among a plurality of types with different execution periods of the small privilege game.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to execute small privilege games with different execution periods. Therefore, the timing at which the second game state ends can be made significantly different across the game period during the small privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized by comprising a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball, and a variable control means for variably controlling the state of the variable ball entry means, wherein the small privilege game execution means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is in the first state as the small privilege game.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly different between when the first end condition is met and the first game state is set and when the second end condition is met and the first game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the type of the end condition established and the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E6, the type of the small privilege game is characterized in that the length of the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the second state during the small privilege game is different.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the amount of privilege given to the player as the small privilege game is also changed according to the type of the set small privilege game, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the small privilege game to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E7, the type of the small privilege game has a plurality of types in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during the small privilege game is the same.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, there is an effect that the length of the period in which the second game state is set can be varied by differentiating the execution period of the small privilege game for a plurality of small privilege games in which the same privilege amount that can be given to the player as the small privilege game is set.

<Feature F group> (Player selects multiple time-saving games)
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means for executing a first determination based on acquisition of first acquired information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and a second determination based on acquiring second acquired information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and a determination result of the determining means. display means for displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; A gaming machine F1 is characterized by comprising selection means for allowing a player to select a first advantageous game for executing the first determination when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, and a second advantageous game for executing the second determination, unlike the first game.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period of time so that a lottery can be easily performed after the execution of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Such a gaming machine is configured to allow a player to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward a game area different from the usual one when executing the above-described time-saving game. The above-described game machine can provide a special feeling by executing a game method different from the usual game method during the time-saving game, which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the timing of setting the first game state can be varied based on the type of the established end condition, so that the player can be interested in the type of the established end condition as well. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the player can select a game method in an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the privilege game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game executed by the second advantageous game.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the second advantageous game is easier to continue the advantageous game state than the first advantageous game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the game ball has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a shooting means capable of varying the shooting intensity and allowing the game ball to reach the game area, having a first game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a second game area different from the first game area in which the game ball shot at a predetermined shooting intensity different from the first shooting intensity can flow down, wherein the first ball entering means is provided in the first game area, The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second ball-entering means is provided in the second game area, and the selecting means varies the firing intensity of the shooting means.

The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F4, it has a variable ball entry means for allowing the game ball fired by the shooting means to enter when the privilege game is executed, and the variable ball entry means is configured to allow both the game ball flowing down the first game area and the game ball flowing down the second game area to enter.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that it has a third ball entering means that allows a ball to enter more easily than the first ball entering means when the advantageous state is set, the first discrimination is executed even when the game ball enters the third ball entering means and the first discrimination condition is satisfied, and the first advantageous game is a game in which the game ball enters the third ball entering means.

In the gaming machine F6, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the first ball-entering means is provided in a third game area different from the first game area and the second game area among the game areas.

In any one of the gaming machines F5 to F7, a first detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the first game area, a second detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the second game area, an execution game determination means for determining the type of advantageous game currently selected based on the detection result of the first detection means and the detection result of the second detection means, and information for indicating the determination result of the execution game determination means. and an informing means for informing the player.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in the game machine F8, the notification means performs notification while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic G group> (Time-saving fall conditions that differ depending on the Gifu type)
variable control means for changing the variable ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state based on the establishment of an open condition; a game ball entered by the variable ball-entering means into a first channel and a second channel different from the first channel; a distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path; first ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the first flow path based on the game ball entering the first flow path; second ball entry means for allowing the game ball to enter the game ball based on the game ball entering the second flow path; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the game ball entering the ball means; a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; and a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the variable ball entry means is easily changed to the open state by the variable control means, and a second game state in which the variable control means is more difficult to change to the open state than the first game state, wherein the game state setting means is , execution of the first determination by the first determination means, or execution of the second determination by the second determination means, and when the first game state is set, execution of the first determination makes it easier to set the second game state than execution of the second determination.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probability variable gaming state in which the lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). By the way, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the variable probability gaming state is only set with a certain probability, and the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, it is possible to make the setting of the second game state more difficult by executing the first determination than by executing the second determination, so that when the first game state is set, the game can be played while expecting the execution of the first determination, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine G1 has privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game when the first discrimination means has a specific first discrimination result, and a second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second discrimination means has a specific second discrimination result, and the first distribution state and the second distribution by the distribution state setting means according to the game state when the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result is obtained. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that it has a rate variable means for varying the set rate set to the minute state.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the ratio set to either the first distribution state or the second distribution state is varied according to the game state when the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result is obtained, so that there is an effect that the game can be diversified not only by the discrimination result but also by the game state.

In the game machine G2, a plurality of game states are set as the game states, and the game machine G3 is characterized by having selection setting means for selecting and setting one game state from the plurality of game states based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, one game state is selected and set by the selection setting means on the basis of the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result, so that there is an effect that not only the discrimination result but also the game state to be set can be made interesting and interest can be improved.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the game machine G4 is characterized by having a second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, a specific region in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific region.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G3, there is an effect that a game can be played in which players can expect whether or not the ball will enter a specific area, thereby diversifying the game.

In the gaming machine G4, the privilege given by the privilege giving means sets the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result to be high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result can be changed, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In either the game machine G1 or G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the game machine G6 is characterized by having a special state setting means for setting the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result higher than usual until a termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, it is possible to make the player worry about whether or not the termination condition will be satisfied, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H Group> (Playability where it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is established than to win before the specific condition is established after shifting to an advantageous state)
A gaming machine comprising discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, wherein the game machine comprises a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a prescribed setting condition, wherein the game is played. The game machine H1 is characterized in that, during the period from when the first state is set until the determination using all of the determination information acquired during the first state is completed, the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the privilege game is executed before a predetermined specific condition is established and when the privilege game is executed after the specific condition is established.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, the degree of advantage of the player remains constant while the same state is set, so the game becomes monotonous while the same game state is set, and there is a possibility that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when a privilege game is executed, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not it is executed before the establishment of a specific condition, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a second state setting means for setting a second state more disadvantageous than the first state when the privilege game is not executed during the period from when the first state is set until the discrimination by the discrimination means is completed a predetermined number of times, and wherein the specific condition is established when the privilege game is not executed during the period after the discrimination by the discrimination means is completed a second number of times equal to or less than the first number after the first state is set. Game machine H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the degree of advantage of the privilege game is varied according to the number of determinations executed in the first state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H2, the game machine H2 includes a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. The game machine H3 is characterized in that it is established when there is not.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, the degree of advantage when the privilege game is executed is changed by the determination performed until the first state is completed and the determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when the second state is set.

The gaming machine H3 comprises a first ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a variable means that can be varied between a first position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a predetermined acquisition condition is based on the game ball entering at least one of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means. The game machine H4 is characterized in that the second state is configured such that the variable means is more difficult to change from the second position to the first position than in the first state.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, game balls are easily entered into different ball entry means depending on whether the game machine is in the first state or the second state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a third ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, a third position that allows a game ball to enter the third ball entering means, and a fourth position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third position, and a variable game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period on the basis of the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result. A game machine H5 comprising variable game execution means and a specific area provided at a position where a game ball entered into the third ball entry means can be entered, wherein the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on the entry of a game ball into the specific area.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the variable game, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine H5 includes a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction according to an operation of the player, and the predetermined acquisition condition is configured to be more likely to be established when the game ball is shot in the second direction than when the game ball is shot in the first direction, at least in the first state. The game machine H6 is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is easier to enter than a game ball launched in the second direction.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, when the variable game is executed while the game ball is being shot in the first direction in the first state, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has been shot in the first direction from entering the specific area of the third ball entering means. By continuing, the player can choose whether to end the variable game without entering the game ball into the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the first state setting means sets the first state at a first ratio as a state after the privilege game is completed when the privilege game is executed before the specific condition is established during the period from when the first state is set until the determination using all of the discrimination information acquired during the first state is completed, and when the privilege game is executed after the specific condition is established, the privilege game is terminated. A game machine H7 characterized in that the first state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a state after the first state.

According to the game machine H7, when the privilege game is executed after the establishment of the specific condition in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the ratio of setting the advantageous first state is higher, so that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the privilege game will be executed after the establishment of the specific condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H7, the first state setting means sets the first state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a state after the privilege game is finished when the privilege game is executed based on the specific determination result in the two states.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the disadvantageous second state is more likely to be set to the advantageous first state than the first state before the establishment of the specific condition, so that the second state can be prevented from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

<Characteristic group I> (Let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations during the time saving)
In a gaming machine comprising: determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player, wherein the first game state is such that the privilege game is difficult to be executed by playing the game in the first game method and the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and by playing the game in the second game method different from the first game method, the privilege game is easier to be executed than in the case of playing the game in the first game method, and the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine I1 is characterized by being configured to facilitate establishment.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the same game state is set and the same game method is not used, it may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the game may become monotonous, and it may become difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the game characteristics can be changed depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first game method is constituted by a game method in which discrimination by the first discrimination means is easier to execute than discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the second game method is constituted by a game method in which discrimination by the second discrimination means is easier to be carried out than discrimination by the first discrimination means.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game characteristics in the first game state can be changed according to the type of the discrimination means for executing the discrimination, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the specific condition is established when the determination by the first determination means is performed a predetermined first number of times without the privilege game being executed after the first game state is set, and when the determination by the second determination means is performed a second number of times less than the first number of times without the privilege game being performed after the second game state is set.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations of the first determination means and the number of determinations of the second determination means.

In the game machine I2 or I3, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a predetermined specific direction by the shooting means can enter, a second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and different from the first ball entering means, acquisition of discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2 or I3, in the first game state, by shooting game balls in a specific direction, both the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed, so there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine I4, a first storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of first pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the first discrimination means, and a second storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined second number of information until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, wherein the second discrimination means has one or more storage means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that the execution of the discrimination is suppressed when the discrimination information of is stored.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the discrimination of the first discrimination means in which the specific condition is difficult to be established even if the discrimination is executed in the first game state can be preferentially executed, so that the first game state can be easily continued for a long time. Therefore, since the player can be entertained in the first game state for a longer period of time, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine I5, the second gaming method is a gaming method in which, when one or more pieces of discrimination information are stored in the second storage means, the game is played so that the shooting of game balls is suppressed until the discrimination information stored in the second storage means is used for discrimination.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects of the game machine I5, by performing the second game method, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the determination by the first determination means, so that the privilege game can be easily performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a higher sense of expectation for each determination.

In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a first variable means is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means, a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than the first position, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the third position. second variable means; passing means provided at a position through which a game ball launched in a specific direction can pass; third ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter; fourth ball-entering means that is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter and is different from the third ball-entering means; a fifth position at which a game ball launched in a specific direction can pass through the passing means; and a sixth position at which a game ball is more difficult to pass through the passing means than the fifth position; The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that it is configured to be variable from the second position to the first position, and the second variable means is configured to be variable from the fourth position to the third position based on the entry of a game ball into the fourth ball entering means.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines I4 to I6, the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of the ball entry means in which the game balls passing through the passing means are distributed by the distribution means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine I7, the game machine I8 is characterized in that the variable condition is constructed so that the first game state is more likely to be established than the second game state.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7, game balls can easily pass through the passage means in the first game state, so there is an effect that the game can be played more efficiently.

A gaming machine I9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine I7 or I8, the first game state is configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passing means is more easily distributed to the third ball entering means than to the fourth ball entering means.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I7 or I8, when a game ball passes through the passing means, the possibility that the first ball entering means can enter the ball is higher than the second ball entering means, so there is an effect that the discrimination of the first discrimination means can be executed more easily.

A gaming machine I10 characterized by comprising a second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game on the basis of establishment of a predetermined execution condition that can be established based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a second determination result different from the specific determination result in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, wherein the second determination means is configured such that the probability that the determination result becomes the second determination result is higher than the probability of the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines I2 to I9, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the player can play the game expecting not only the specific discrimination result but also the second discrimination result, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine I10 comprising a variable ball entry means configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and provided with a specific area in which a game ball can enter; The gaming machine I11 is characterized in that the execution condition is established when a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means has entered the specific area.

According to the game machine I11, in addition to the effects of the game machine I10, when the variable game is executed, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature J Group> (Playability in which the expectation of a big hit is higher after the end of the advantageous state than during the advantageous state)
In a gaming machine having a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition and a second determination means for executing a second determination having a higher degree of advantage for a player than the first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, a first game state in which the first determination condition is likely to be satisfied and a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. The game machine J1 is characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least two game states, wherein the game machine is configured to form a first state in which the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by satisfying the setting condition in the first game state.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered when the game state changes from an advantageous game state to a disadvantageous game state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, even if a disadvantageous second game state is set, the advantageous second discrimination condition is likely to be established while the first state is formed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first state is formed.

In the game machine J1, the game machine J2 is characterized in that, when the setting condition is satisfied in the first game state and the second game state is set, if a predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, a second state is formed in which the second discrimination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is established at the time when the second game state is set, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine J1 or J2 comprises privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on which one of the discrimination result of the first discrimination means and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result, the first discrimination means is configured to achieve the specific discrimination result with a predetermined first probability, and the second discrimination means has a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine J3 characterized in that it is configured to produce a specific determination result.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, even after the end of the advantageous first game state, there is a high probability that the specific determination result will be obtained until the specific condition is established, so that the player can play the game while having expectations for the privilege game at least until the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine J3, the game machine J4 is configured to form a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state, without changing the game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition in the first state.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage can be formed as the second game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information for use in discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and second discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. a second determination information acquisition means for acquiring; a first storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit of the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means until the first discrimination information is used for discrimination by the first discrimination means; The first determination is performed using the first determination information stored in the second determination means, the second determination means performs the second determination using the second determination information stored in the second storage means, the first determination is configured to be executed with priority over the second determination, and the first game state is configured so that a game ball can enter both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means. A game machine J5 characterized in that the second game state is constructed so that at least game balls are more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than in the first game state.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J1 to J4, since the judgment of the first judgment means is executed with priority, there is an effect that more second judgment information can be stored in the second storage means at the end of the first game state.

The gaming machine J5 is provided with variable means that can be varied between a first position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than the first position, and the first game state is configured such that the variable means is more easily changed from the second position to the first position than the second game state, and the first state is set to the second game state. and at least one piece of the second determination information is stored in the second storage means.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, more second discrimination information can be stored in the second storage means while the discrimination by the second discrimination means is preferentially executed, so that when the second game state is set, the first state can be formed more reliably.

In the gaming machine J6, a third ball entering means capable of entering a game ball is provided, and the first discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered at least one of the first ball entering means and the third ball entering means, and the second gaming state is such that the game ball enters the third ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the third ball entering means rather than the second ball entering means. A game machine J7 characterized in that it is constructed so that a game ball can easily enter.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6, it is possible to change the ball-entering means that makes it easier to enter the ball according to the game state.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7, a fourth ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a third position in which a game ball can enter the fourth ball entering means, and a fourth position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position, and a variable game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period on the basis of the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result is executed. A game machine J8 comprising a variable game execution means and a specific area provided at a position where a game ball entered into the fourth ball entry means can enter, wherein the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J1 to J7, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the specific area when the variable game is executed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics K group> (Suppresses the increase in hold immediately after the end of the advantageous state)
A variable means capable of changing between a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the entering means, and a second position for making it more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means, a discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, a discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a first set condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the variable means is more difficult to change from the second position to the first position than the first game state based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state; A gaming machine K1 comprising control means capable of controlling so that a game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means when the state is changed to the first position straddling before and after the establishment of the second setting condition.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a privilege game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a predetermined result. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows setting of a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and makes it easier to execute a lottery when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, depending on the timing of switching from an advantageous game state to a disadvantageous game state, a situation occurs in which a lottery can be executed in the same way as in an advantageous game state even though the disadvantageous game state is set, and there is a problem that the degree of expectation of the privilege game in the disadvantageous game state cannot be uniformed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the establishment of the second set condition, so there is an effect that the degree of expectation of the privilege game in the first game state of 1 can be uniformed.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine K1 is provided with a second ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the control means performs control so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than the ball entering means when at least the variable means is in a state of being varied to the first position straddling before and after the establishment of the second setting condition.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second set condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine K2, the discrimination information acquiring means acquires the discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into at least one of the entering means and the second entering means, and the discrimination means is more suitable for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means rather than executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the second entering means. is configured to increase the probability of obtaining the specific determination result.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of many advantageous determinations that tend to result in specific determination results even after the second game state is set.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, a specific flow path is provided at a position where a game ball can flow in when the variable means is placed at the first position, but difficult to flow in when the variable means is placed at the second position; The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the distribution means is controlled so that game balls are easily distributed to the second ball entering means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2 or K3, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably suppress the game balls from being distributed to the ball entry means after the second game state is set.

In the gaming machine K4, the control means controls the distribution means such that a first distribution state in which game balls arriving at the distribution means are distributed to the ball entering means and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second ball entry means are switched according to a predetermined specific switching pattern. The game machine K5 is characterized in that the ratio of the period set to the first distribution state is higher than the predetermined period in at least a part of the period from when the first game state is set until when the second set condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, in the first game state, the easiness of ball entry to the ball entering means can be changed according to the distribution state of the distribution means, so there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the state of the distribution means.

In the game machine K5, the game machine K6 is characterized in that the control means controls the distribution means with the specific switching pattern based on the setting of the first game state.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effects of the game machine K5, when the first state is set, a simple control of setting a specific switching pattern is executed every time, so there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

<Characteristic group L> (It is more advantageous to hit during a short pull-back time than to hit during a variable probability state)
In a game machine provided with a determining means for performing determination based on establishment of a determination condition and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state are established based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. and a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least , wherein the game machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element relating to the degree of advantage tends to become higher during a period in which a predetermined first condition is established in the second game state than in the third game state.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for playing the game may be lowered when the game state changes from an advantageous game state to a disadvantageous game state. In addition, some conventional gaming machines do not directly shift from an advantageous first game state (e.g., variable probability state) to the most disadvantageous second game state (e.g., normal state), but instead shift to a third game state (e.g., time-saving state) with an intermediate degree of advantage between the first and second game states, and shift to the first game state only when there is no win in the third game state.

However, even in a gaming machine with such specifications, since the degree of advantage decreases when the game state is shifted to the second game state, it has been difficult to fundamentally suppress the decrease in motivation for gaming. Therefore, there is a risk that it will be difficult to increase the interest in the game of the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, while the first condition is established, the advantage of the predetermined element is higher in the second game state with the lower advantage, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine L2 is characterized in that the game machine is configured to be more advantageous when the specific determination result is obtained while the first condition is satisfied in the second game state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the third game state.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the third game state, and the game machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element tends to increase when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state set based on the establishment of the specific condition, rather than when the specific determination result is obtained in the third game state. Technique L3.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1 or L2, in the third game state, the game can be played while expecting that the specific condition will not be established, and when the specific condition is established and the second game state is set, the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine L3, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set the second game state when the specific condition is satisfied in the third game state and when a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the first game state. A gaming machine L4 characterized by being configured such that the degree of advantage of a predetermined element is likely to increase.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage can be varied even in the same second game state.

In the game machine L3 or L4, the specific conditions are composed of at least a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the game machine is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher in the second game state set based on the establishment of the first specific condition than in the third game state.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L3 or L4, the satisfaction of the first specific condition can be strongly expected in the third game state rather than the establishment of the second specific condition, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L5, as the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means, there is provided a type determination means for determining one type of privilege game from among a plurality of at least including a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the game state setting means determines that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means as the specific determination result in the third game state as the establishment of the second specific condition. The game machine L6 is characterized in that the game state after the end of the first privilege game is set to the second game state.

According to the game machine L5, when the first privilege game is decided in the third game state, the disadvantageous second game state is set and the advantage degree of the predetermined element is lowered, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the first privilege game will not be decided when the specific determination result is obtained in the third game state.

In the gaming machine L6, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set the game state after the end of the second privilege game to the third game state when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means as the specific determination result in the third game state, and the gaming machine is configured to set the game state after the end of the second privilege game to the third game state when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means as the specific determination result in the third game state. The game machine L7 is characterized in that it comprises control means for controlling such that the second game state is set by the game state setting means if a set condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means sets the second game state when the first specific condition is established when the second game state is set by the control means.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effect of the game machine L6, when the second privilege game is determined in the third game state, either the advantageous third game state is set or the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is increased even if the second game state is set. Therefore, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second privilege game will be determined.

In the gaming machine L7, the specific setting condition is established based on the fact that the second privilege game is continuously determined over a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the second privilege game will be determined over a specific number of times.

A game machine L9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine L5 or L6, it further comprises a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition in the third game state, and the game state setting means sets the second game state when the second specific condition is established when the determination result of the second determination means becomes a predetermined first determination result.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effect of the game machine L5 or L6, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be alleviated when the second game state with a low degree of advantage is set as the first determination result in the third game state.

In the gaming machine L9, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the first determination result before the end of determination of a predetermined number of times after the setting of the third game state, and the first game based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the first determination result after the determination of the predetermined number of times after the third game state is set. The game machine L10 is characterized by setting a state.

According to the game machine L10, in addition to the effect of the game machine L9, there is an effect that it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the first determination result is obtained with a small number of determinations in the third game state.

<Features M group> (Chance zone after the short withdrawal time ends)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; and type determination means for determining one privilege game type from among a plurality of at least including a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage than the first privilege game as the privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the second privilege game is determined at a first rate by the type determination means and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; A game machine M1 characterized by comprising a state control means for controlling such a special state that a game is likely to be determined at a rate higher than the first rate.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that when an advantageous game state shifts to a disadvantageous game state, the player is satisfied by playing the game in the advantageous game state, and it becomes difficult to make the player want to continue the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines do not directly shift from an advantageous first game state (e.g., variable probability state) to the most disadvantageous second game state (e.g., normal state), but instead shift to a third game state (e.g., time-saving state) with an intermediate degree of advantage between the first and second game states, and shift to the first game state only when there is no win in the third game state.

However, even in a gaming machine with such specifications, there is a possibility that the player will be satisfied with the game when the second game state ends, so there is a problem that it becomes difficult to maintain the player's motivation after the transition from the second game state to the first game state. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine after shifting to the first gaming state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, the special state is set when the advantageous second game state is shifted to another game state, so that the player can be encouraged to continue the game during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine M1, the state control means controls the special state until the specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the setting condition is satisfied in the second state and the first game state is set.

According to the game machine M2, when the advantageous second game state shifts to the first game state with a low degree of advantage, a special state is entered, so that the player can be prevented from quitting the game when the second game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that it is configured to facilitate determination of a game, and the state control means performs control so that, as the special state, the determination by the first determination means is less likely to be performed than the determination by the second determination means.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the discrimination of the second discrimination means is easily executed during the special state, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation of a specific discrimination result during the special state.

In the gaming machine M3, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction by the shooting means can enter, a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and different from the first ball-entering means, a game ball launched in the first direction becomes difficult to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction enters. a third ball entering means provided at a position where a ball can be entered; a first position where a game ball can enter the third ball entering means; and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information based on the entry of the game ball, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means; the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means; A game machine M4 characterized by being configured to be easily variable.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, even in the second game state in which no special state is set, the determination by the second determination means can be executed, so there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation of a specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means.

In the game machine M3 or M4, dynamic display means comprising at least display means capable of displaying identification information, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the state control means determines the first dynamic display as the special state. The game machine M5 is characterized in that the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information by the display means is controlled to be longer than the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, a long dynamic display period is likely to be set in the special state when the discrimination by the first discrimination means is executed, so discrimination by the second discrimination means can be executed a plurality of times during the long dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination by the second determination means will result in a specific determination result.

In the game machine M5, the dynamic display means is configured so that the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means and the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means can be performed redundantly.

According to the game machine M6, there is an effect that the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the discrimination by the second discriminating means can be executed more efficiently.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state, and the second game state is set by the game state setting means on the basis that a specific set condition is satisfied in the third game state. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M6, when the advantageous third game state is terminated and set to the second game state, and furthermore the second game state is terminated and shifted to the disadvantageous first game state, a special state is formed to alleviate the disappointment of the player.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the gaming machine M8 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets another gaming state when the setting condition is satisfied that the privilege game is not executed after the second gaming state is set and the judgment by the judging means is completed a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M7, there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be alleviated when a privilege game is not executed in an advantageous second game state and the game is shifted to another game state.

<Characteristics N Group> (Playability that tends to be more advantageous to shoot game balls at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval rather than shooting a game ball at the first shooting interval during an advantageous state)
A gaming machine comprising an operating means operable by a player and a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, the gaming machine comprising a game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state disadvantageous to the player and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, wherein the game machine comprises the first game state. The game machine N1 is characterized in that, in a 2-game state, operating the operation means with a second operation content in which game balls are likely to be shot at a shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval is more advantageous than operating the operating means in a first operation content in which game balls are easily shot at a shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval while at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

According to the game machine N1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the longer the shooting interval is advantageous, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine N1 comprises: ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the entering means; discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means; The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that, while the specific condition is satisfied, the number of determinations by the determination means is likely to increase when the operation means is operated with the second operation content before the determination using all of the determination information acquired in the second game state is completed, rather than when the operation means is operated with the first operation content.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, novel game characteristics can be realized in which the longer the shooting interval is, the number of times of discrimination of the discriminating means increases, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

The gaming machine N2 comprises second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, second discrimination information acquiring means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, wherein the discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. and a second determination means for executing determination using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, wherein the determination by the first determination means is more likely to result in a determination result that is more advantageous than the determination by the second determination means, and the gaming machine is configured such that, while the specific condition is satisfied, operating the operation means with the second operation content is more effective than operating the operation means with the first operation content. The game machine N3 is characterized in that the number of determinations by the first determination means is likely to increase until determination using all the determination information acquired in the game state is completed.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the number of discriminations of the first discriminating means having a high degree of advantage can be varied according to the contents of the operation while the specific condition is established, so that novel game characteristics can be realized, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

In the game machine N3, the determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the determination by the first determination means.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N3, since the discrimination by the second discriminating means having a low degree of advantage is preferentially executed, there is an effect that the player can strongly desire to increase the number of discriminating times of the second discriminating means.

In the gaming machine N3 or N4, the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the fact that the determination by the first determining means has been completed a predetermined first number of times without the privilege game being executed in the second game state, and the game state setting means is adapted to set the first game based on the fact that the determination by the second determining means has been completed a second number of times greater than the first number of times without the privilege game being executed in the second game state. The game machine N5 is characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3 or N4, the condition for setting the first game state can be made different between the number of determinations by the first determination means and the number of determinations by the second determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine N6 is characterized in that the gaming machine N6 comprises any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and wherein the second operation content is an operation content that facilitates the shooting of a game ball so that the game ball enters the ball entering means in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines N2 to N5, the period during which the dynamic display is not executed is likely to occur by performing the second operation content, so that the period set in the advantageous second game state can be easily lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In any one of the game machines N1 to N6, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot the game ball at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a predetermined specific shooting interval according to the operation content of the operating means, and the operation of the first operation content is configured to make it easier for the shooting device to shoot the game ball at the specific shooting interval.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines N1 to N6, the operation of the first operation content is composed of a relatively simple operation of shooting game balls at the shortest shooting interval, so it can be easily performed regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

<Characteristic group O> (Playability that is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is established than to win before the specific condition is established after shifting to an advantageous state)
In a game machine provided with a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, one game state is set from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state based on the establishment of a prescribed set condition. The game machine O1 is characterized by comprising a game state setting means, wherein the game machine is configured such that the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the specific determination result is obtained before a predetermined specific condition is established and when the specific determination result is obtained after the specific condition is established during the period from when the first game state is set until the determination using all of the determination information acquired during the first game state is completed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, the degree of advantage of the player remains constant while the same state is set, so the game becomes monotonous while the same game state is set, and there is a possibility that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine O1, when a specific determination result is obtained, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is established, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine O1, during the period from when the first game state is set until the determination using all the determination information acquired during the first game state is completed, the game machine O2 is configured to be more advantageous to the player when the specific determination result is obtained after the specific condition is satisfied than when the specific determination result is obtained before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, when shifting to the first game state, the game can be played in anticipation of a specific determination result after the specific condition is established, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means after the first game state is set.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, in the first game state, a specific determination result can be expected before the specific number of times of determination is completed, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine O3, the specific condition is satisfied on the basis that the second determination result is obtained continuously over a second number of times of determination by the determination means which is equal to or less than the specific number of times after the first game state is set.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of the game machine O3, the degree of advantage of the privilege game is varied according to the number of determinations executed in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the game machine O4 comprises storage means capable of storing, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, of the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means until it is used for determination by the determination means, and in the second game state, acquisition of the determination information by the determination information acquisition means is more difficult than in the first game state. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is established based on the determination result of 2.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4, the degree of advantage when the privilege game is executed is changed by the discrimination executed until the end of the first game state and the discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the storage means when the second game state is set.

<Characteristics P group> (Let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations during the time saving)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a different degree of advantage from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state, wherein the first game state is a second game state that is different from the first game method because the specific condition is less likely to be established by playing the game in the first game method. A game machine P1 characterized in that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied by playing a game by the game method than by playing a game by the first game method.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the same game state is set and the same game method is not used, it may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the game may become monotonous, and it may become difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, since the game performance can be changed depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine P1 is provided with determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result, and the first game state is such that the privilege game is difficult to be executed by playing the game in the first gaming method and the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the game is played in the second gaming method. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is constructed such that the privilege game is more likely to be executed and the specific condition is more likely to be established than by playing a game with the first game method.

According to the game machine P2, the game performance can be differentiated depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine P2, the determination means comprises at least a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the first determination means is configured to make it more difficult to execute the privilege game and to make the specific condition less likely to be satisfied than when the determination is performed by the second determination means. The gaming machine P3 is characterized in that the first game method is constituted by a game method in which the discrimination by the first discrimination means is easier to execute than the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the second game method is constituted by a game method in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means is easier to be executed than the discrimination by the first discrimination means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2, the game characteristics in the first game state can be changed depending on the type of the discrimination means for executing the discrimination, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine P3, the specific condition is established when the determination by the first determination means is performed a predetermined first number of times without the privilege game being executed after the first game state is set, and when the determination by the second determination means is performed a second number of times less than the first number of times without the privilege game being performed after the second game state is set.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations of the first determination means and the number of determinations of the second determination means.

In a gaming machine P3 or P4, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a predetermined specific direction by the shooting means can enter, a second ball-entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and different from the first ball-entering means, acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball-entering means. and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P3 or P4, in the first game state, by shooting game balls in a specific direction, both the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed, so there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then for confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated under the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information. A gaming machine equipped with a special game state generating means". In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is shot to a predetermined game area, and on the condition that the ball wins (or passes through) an operation opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to win prizes, and a valuable value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) corresponding to the number of prizes awarded is given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the integrated game machine, a special game advantageous to the player is provided with a variable display means that confirms and displays the identification information after dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information, the identification information starts to change due to the operation of the starting operation means (e.g., operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (e.g., stop button), or after a predetermined period of time has passed. The game machine is equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a state, uses balls as game media, requires a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display of the identification information, and is constructed so that a large number of balls are put out at the time of the generation of the special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery based on winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a winning. Among such gaming machines, there is one that allows the player to set a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and attempts to improve the player's interest in the game by performing a game aiming at a winning game in various states (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 comprises first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition, and second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a different degree of advantage from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state, and the first game state is achieved by playing a game in a first game method to achieve the specific condition. By playing a game in a second game method different from the first game method, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the case of playing a game in the first game method.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising: determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; and privilege game execution means for performing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result. By playing the game with the game method (1), the privilege game is more likely to be executed and the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the game is played with the first game method.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the determining means comprises at least a first determining means for performing determination based on satisfaction of a first determining condition and a second determining means for performing determination based on satisfaction of a second determining condition different from the first determining condition, wherein the first determining means makes it more difficult to execute the privilege game than the determination by the second determining means, and the specific condition. The first game method is a game method in which the determination by the first determination means is easier to perform than the determination by the second determination means, and the second game method is a game method in which the determination by the second determination means is easier to perform than the determination by the first determination means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the specific condition is established on the basis that the determination by the first determination means is performed a predetermined number of times without the privilege game being executed after the first game state is set, and is established on the basis that the determination by the second determination means is performed a second number of times less than the first number of times without the privilege game being performed after the second game state is set. There is.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3 or 4, wherein a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched by the shooting means in a predetermined specific direction can enter, a second ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entering means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the game machine includes first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a different degree of advantage from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state. By playing a game in a second game method different from the first game method, the specific condition is more likely to be established than in the case of playing a game in the first game method.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, it is provided with a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a specific determination result. By playing the game by the second game method, the privilege game is more likely to be executed than by playing the game by the first game method, and the specific condition is easily established.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the determining means comprises at least a first determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition and a second determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determining condition different from the first determining condition, and the first determining means is more difficult to execute the privilege game than the determination by the second determining means when the determination is performed. The first game method is a game method in which the determination by the first determination means is easier to execute than the determination by the second determination means, and the second game method is a game method in which the determination by the second determination means is easier to perform than the determination by the first determination means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the specific condition is established based on the fact that the determination by the first determining means is performed a predetermined number of times without the privilege game being executed after the first gaming state is set, and is established based on the determination by the second determining means being performed a second number of times less than the first number of times without the privilege game being performed after the second gaming state is set. It is configured as follows.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 3 or 4, there is a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball shot in a predetermined specific direction by the shooting means can enter, a second ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a game ball; and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the second discrimination means, wherein the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. It is something to do.
As a result, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 first entrance (first entrance means)
203a Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203a2 Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
6400 Second entrance (second entrance means)
6400a electric accessories (variable means)
6500 V winning device (third ball entry means)
6500f1 opening and closing door (second variable means)
S215 Part of privilege game execution means in seventh embodiment S221 Variable game execution means S303, S307 Discrimination means in seventh embodiment S237 Second state setting means in seventh embodiment S706, S758 Discrimination information acquisition means in seventh embodiment S1622 First state setting means in seventh embodiment S1717 Part of privilege game execution means in seventh embodiment

Claims (1)

discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a determination means for performing determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means;
A game machine comprising privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result,
Determination means for determining one of a plurality of privilege games including at least a specific privilege game as the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means;
a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player as a state after at least the state of the game relating to the specific privilege game is finished;
a second state setting means for setting a second state having a lower degree of advantage than the first state based on a determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined first number of determinations by the determination means after the first state is set;
a first effect executing means capable of executing an effect including at least a predetermined effect mode as a predetermined effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means based on the number of determinations by the determining means after the first state that can be continued until the first number of times of determination is set is greater than a second number of times less than the first number of times and is equal to or less than the first number of times;
a second effect executing means capable of executing an effect that does not include the predetermined effect mode as the predetermined effect , based on the fact that the number of times of determination by the determining means after the setting of the first state that can be continued until the first number of times of determination is performed is within the range of the number of times equal to or less than the second number of times,
The number of determinations of the determination means after the first state that can be continued until the determination of the first number is set is the second number or less, and the number of times is greater than the second number and is equal to or less than the first number.
The game machine is
Based on the execution of the determination by the determination means in the first state, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect including at least a specific effect mode that allows the player to grasp the degree of expectation that the privilege game will be executed and the first state will be set,
The game machine is characterized in that the probability of the privilege game being executed based on the discrimination of 1 by the discrimination means is the same in the range of the number of discriminations of the discrimination means after the first state which can be continued until the discrimination of the first number is set is equal to or less than the second number of times and in the range of the number of times greater than the second number of times and equal to or less than the first number of times.

Images